Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
065063-V2 - Construction-Related - Contract - CLW Water Group, LLC
CSC No. 65063-V2 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING OFFICIAL RECORD CITY SECRETARY FT. WORTH, TX SECTION 22 14 29.16 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 22 14 29.16 - 1 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS Pagel of 3 A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install submersible sump pumps. Provide a sump pump capable of fitting in the size sump shown. Any structural modifications required at the structure shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. The pump and motor shall have a standard manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place showing the serial number, model number, manufacturer, ratings, and other pertinent nameplate data. B. The pump supplier shall furnish discharge elbows, pump impellers, guiderails, brackets, anchor bolts and anchor bolt layouts and bases, lifting chains and grip eye systems, power cables, and trash basket hoists and stands as indicated on the plans. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Item No. 1 in Paragraph 3.3 is considered subsidiary to the construction of the flow meter vault on FM-1. 2. Item No. 2 in Paragraph 3.3 is considered subsidiary to the construction of the flow meter vault on FM-2. 3. Item No. 3 in Paragraph 3.3 is considered subsidiary to the construction of the Lift Station Wet Well and Valve Vault. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The intent of these specifications is to purchase a quality product of the manufacturer's latest design, meeting the minimum standards set forth. Proposed equipment shall have not less than 5 years of satisfactory service. 1. Acceptable manufacturers shall be one of the following: a. Goulds. b. Little Giant. c. Myers. d. Gorman Rupp. e. Approved equal. B. Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing: The services of the manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for pre -startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as required in Section 0175 00 "Starting and Adjusting." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Document Management" and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Performance curves. b. Materials of Construction. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 22 14 29.16 - 2 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS Page 2 of 3 3. If requested, the equipment manufacturer shall submit a list of 10 similar installations which have been in satisfactory operation for at least 3 years. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store equipment with protection from the weather, excessive humidity and temperature, dirt, dust and other contaminants and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Spare parts shall be packed and shipped in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and pieces of equipment for which it is intended. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Sump pump manufacturer shall warrant the equipment furnished under this Section for a minimum period of 1 year against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure. B. In the event of a defect in material or workmanship or equipment design of any part or parts of the equipment during the first 1 year of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the manufacturer shall furnish, deliver and install a replacement for the defective part or parts at its own expense. C. The first 1 year of service shall be interpreted as the 12-month period following the installation, adjusting, and acceptance tests. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP A. The sump pumps shall have cast iron motor housing and volute, bronze impellers, and a stainless steel shaft. Each pump shall be equipped with a heavy-duty external non -mercury piggyback float switch. The sump pump manufacturer shall verify that the pump being provided shall fit into the size sump shown and that the sump pump shall not cycle excessively. Each pump shall have a capacity of not less than 100 gpm at a total dynamic head of 16 feet. Each pump shall have a shutoff head not less than 18 feet. 2.2 MOTOR A. The motor shall be totally -encased, sealed, non -ventilating and shall have automatic self - resetting integral thermal overload protection. The motor shall be 115-volt, single phase, 1750-rpm and suitable for continuous duty. B. Motor power cord shall be factory installed to pump/motor and shall be suitable for continuous submersion. Cord length shall be a minimum 20 feet. Power cord shall have a factory installed NEMA 1-15P plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install submersible sump pumps in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The float should be set such that the pump turns on when liquid reaches the top of the sump. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 22 14 29.16 - 3 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS Page 3 of 3 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. Units shall be checked for excessive noise, vibration, general operation, etc. The units must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. 3.3 SCHEDULES Item No. Location No. of Pumps 1 Flow Meter Vault (FM-1) 1 2 Flow Meter Vault (FM-2) 1 3 Lift Station Valve Vault 1 END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 00 00 - 1 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 1 of 11 SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions are common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages. 12. HVAC coil protective coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B.Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C.Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D.Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-2 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 2 of 11 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G.The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Welding Certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS 131.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel. B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Standards of Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C.Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing; connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified; and all is provided at no additional cost. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A.Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C.Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-3 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 3 of 11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A.Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B.Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A.Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B.Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, non-metallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C.Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D.Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgI, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G.Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS 1310.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H.Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-4 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 4 of 11 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B.Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C.Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 F (82 Q. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries, International, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. £ Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D.Diclectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric -Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full- face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 207- kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and non -corrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 F (107 Q. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-5 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 5 of 11 G.Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non -corrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 F (107 Q. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A.Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.6 SLEEVES A.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C.Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D.Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A.Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B.One-Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-6 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 6 of 11 C.One-Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. E. One -Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome -plated finish. F. Split -Plate, Stamped -Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. G.One-Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H.Split-Casting, Floor -Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.8 GROUT A.Description: ASTM C1107, Grade B, non -shrink and non-metallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, non -staining, non -corrosive, non- gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.9 HVAC COIL PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Coating Type: Aluminum impregnated polyurethane coating. B. Application: Provide coating on HVAC copper tube coils. C. The coating manufacturer shall be able to document the successful completion of accelerated product testing of a minimum 3000 hours in both salt spray (ASTM B 117) and acidic salt spray tests (ASTM G85); and shall provide a 3-year warranty for the coating applied on aluminum - finned, copper tube coils. D.The product application process shall include the application of a chromate -free conversion layer applied to the coil that achieves total coverage and penetration. E. An aluminum -impregnated polyurethane topcoat shall be applied that ensures total penetration and coverage without bridging or significantly affecting the heat transfer ability of the coil. F. The total dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be 20 to 25 microns. (0.020 to 0.025 mm) The coating shall provide protection against ultraviolet radiation and be temperature resistant up to 194 F (90 Q. G.Product: "PoluAl" by Blygold America, "Bronz-Glow" or approved equal. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-7 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 7 of 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B.Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C.Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D.Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G.Install piping at indicated slopes. H.Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping, pipe hangers and supports to allow application of insulation. K.Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Wrap or enclose with rated materials PVC piping installed in rated spaces, including return air plenums. M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep -pattern type. b. Chrome -Plated Piping: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips and chrome plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split -casting, cast - brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast -brass type with chrome -plated finish. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor -plate type. N.Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-8 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 8 of 11 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 min) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 for materials and installation. O.Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 min) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Q.Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 for materials. R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-9 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 9 of 11 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B.Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C.Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D.Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead- free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G.Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H.Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D2235 and ASTM D2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D2846/D2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D2855. 5. PVC Non -pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855. 6. PVC to ABS Non -pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D3139. K.Plastic Non -pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D3212. L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-10 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 10 of 11 M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A.Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping Materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A.Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are indicated. B.Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C.Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D.Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.5 PAINTING A.Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09. B.Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A.Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and not less than top level at 4 inches (100 mm) above grade or finished floor. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230000-11 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 11 of 11 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03. 3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.Refer to Division 05 Sections for miscellaneous metal fabrications and structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C.Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C.Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.9 GROUTING A.Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C.Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D.Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G.Place grout around anchors. H.Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230513-1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 3 SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on alternating -current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. A.Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A.Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level. B.Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A.Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B.Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D.Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230513-2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 3 G.Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H.Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K.Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS A.Motors Used with Reduced -Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B.Motors Used with Variable -Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses pro-duced by pulse -width -modulated inverters. 2. Premium -Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A.Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and re-quirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B.Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. C.Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D.Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230513-3 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page I of 5 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Warning tape. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Warning tags. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the pro -posed content for each label. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. 1.4 COORDINATION A.Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C.Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A.Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, with predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. 3. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2- 1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 5 4. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances of up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. 5. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 6. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B.Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. 3. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures of up to 160 deg F (71 deg Q. 4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2- 1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances of up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. 6. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self -tapping screws. 7. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C.Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B.Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. C.Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures of up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). D.Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances of up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self -taping screws. G.Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. H.Arc-Flash Warning Signs: Provide arc -flash warning signs in locations and with content in accordance with requirements of OSHA and NFPA70E. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 5 2.3 WARNING TAPE A.Material: Vinyl. B.Minimum Thickness: 0.005 inches (0.12 mm). C. Letter, Pattern, and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. D.Waterproof Adhesive Backing: Suitable for indoor or outdoor use. E. Maximum Temperature: 160 deg F (70 deg C). F. Minimum Width: 4 inches (100 mm). 2.4 DUCT LABELS A.Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B.Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. C. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). D.Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). E. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances of up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three -fourths the size of principal lettering. F. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets or self -tapping screws. G.Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. H.Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on the Drawings. Also include the following: 1. Duct size. 2. Flow -Direction Arrows: Include flow -direction arrows on [main] distribution ducts. Arrows may be either integral with label or may be applied separately. 3. Lettering Size: Size letters in accordance with ASME A13.1. 2.5 STENCILS A. Stencils for Ducts: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for viewing distances of up to 15 feet (4-1/2 m) and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 5. Letter and Background Color: Color as indicated for specific application under Part 3. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230553-4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 5 B. Stencils for Access Panels and Door Labels, Equipment Labels, and Similar Operational Instructions: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1 /2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances of up to 72 inches (1830 mm) and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. 2.6 WARNING TAGS A.Description: Preprinted accident -prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 inches by 5-1/4 inches (75 mm by 133 mm) minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption, such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Letter and Background Color: As indicated for specific application under Part 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. D.Locate identifying devices so that they are readily visible from the point of normal approach. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT LABELS, WARNING SIGNS, AND LABELS A.Permanently fasten labels on each item of mechanical equipment. B. Sign and Label Colors: 1. White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety -blue background. C. C. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. D.D. Arc -Flash Warning Signs: Provide arc -flash warning signs on electrical disconnects and other equipment where arc -flash hazard exists, as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with requirements of OSHA and NFPA 70E. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230553-5 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 5 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WARNING TAPE A.Warning Tape Color and Pattern: Yellow background with black diagonal stripes. B.Install warning tape on pipes and ducts, with cross -designated walkways providing less than 6 feet (2 m) of clearance. C.Locate tape to be readily visible from the point of normal approach. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LABELS A.Install plastic -laminated duct labels showing service and flow direction with permanent adhesive on air ducts. 1. Provide labels in the following color codes: a. For air supply ducts: White letters on blue background. b. For air return ducts: White letters on blue background. c. For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed -air ducts: White letters on blue background. d. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B.B. Stenciled Duct -Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of plastic -laminated duct labels, at Installer's option. 1. For all air ducts: Black letters on white background. C.Locate label near each point where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6 m) where exposed or are concealed by removable ceiling system. D. Stenciled Access Panels and Door Labels, Equipment Labels, and Similar Operational Instructions: 1. Black letters on White background. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF WARNING TAGS A.Warning Tag Color: Black letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety -yellow background. B.Attach warning tags, with proper message, to equipment and other items where scheduled. 3.7 ADJUSTING A.Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work. 3.8 CLEANING A.Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 1 of 9 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant -volume air systems. 2. HVAC equipment quantitative -performance settings. 3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A.Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit four copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. C. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C.TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," as applicable. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 2 of 9 1.5 COORDINATION A.Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B.Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.6 WARRANTY A.National Project Performance Guarantee: If AABC, provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. B. Special Guarantee: If NEBB, provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow - control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B.Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C.Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01. D.Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 3 of 9 unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems --Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G.Examine system and equipment test reports. H.Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K.Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. M. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. N.Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable -air -volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. O.Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 4 of 9 B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Automatic temperature -control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A.Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," as applicable, and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C.Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper -control positions, valve position indicators, fan -speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A.Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B.Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" duct layouts. C.Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. D.Check airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G.Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H.Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components. K.Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A.Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 5 of 9 a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air -handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air -handling and -treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Owners Representative for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan -speed changes at no additional cost. 6. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B.Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C.Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D.Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 6 of 9 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A.Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating. B.Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A.Verify proper rotation of fans. B.Measure entering- and leaving -air temperatures. C.Record compressor data. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT -TRANSFER COILS A.Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving -air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit -breaker rating for overload protection. B.Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 7 of 9 A.During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature -control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C.Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.10 TEMPERATURE -CONTROL VERIFICATION A.Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B.Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C.Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D.Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high and low -temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G.Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H.Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply -air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K.Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Minus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3.12 FINAL REPORT A.General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B.Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 8 of 9 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D.General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect/Engineer's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable -air -volume systems. g. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single -line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230593-9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 9 of 9 4. Balancing stations. 5. Position of balancing devices. 3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS A.Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near -peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-1 DUCT INSULATION Page 1 of 15 SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water -vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field -applied if any). 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B.Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. C.Field quality -control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or craft training program, certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Packaging: Insulation material containers are to be marked with the manufacturer's name, appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A.Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field -applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-2 DUCT INSULATION Page 2 of 15 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation, jacket materials, adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. All Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2. All Insulation Installed Indoors; Outdoors -Installed Insulation in Contact with Airstream: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 3. All Insulation Installed Indoors and Outdoors: Flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A.Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General, "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials are to be applied. B.Products do not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C.Products that come in contact with stainless steel have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D.Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel are qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials do not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Glass -Fiber Blanket: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use temperature up to 450 deg F (232 deg C) in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with ASTM C553, Type H, and ASTM C1290, Type I, unfaced Type lI with factory -applied vinyl jacket Type III with factory -applied FSK jacket Type III with factory -applied FSP jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. G.Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin; suitable for maximum use temperature between 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) for jacketed and between 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) and 450 deg F (232 deg C) for unfaced in accordance with ASTM C411. Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation unfaced with factory -applied ASJ with factory -applied FSK jacket. Factory -applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory -Applied Jackets" Article. 2.3 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A.Fire-Rated Board: Structural -grade, press -molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F (927 deg C). Comply with ASTM C656, Type II, Grade 6. Tested and certified to provide a 1 2-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-3 DUCT INSULATION Page 3 of 15 B.Fire-Rated Blanket: High -temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 12-hour fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 ADHESIVES A.Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B.Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. C.Glass-Fiber and Mineral Wool Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. D.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 2.5 MASTICS AND COATINGS A.Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor -Retarder Mastic, Water Based, Interior Use: Suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 2. Service Temperature Range: -20 to 180 deg F (-29 to 82 deg C). 3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type 11, for permeance requirements, with supplier listing on DOD QPD - Qualified Products Database. 4. Color: White. C. Vapor -Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Interior Use: Suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (-18 to 82 deg C). 3. Color: White. D.Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Exterior Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 2. Service Temperature Range: -50 to 220 deg F (46 to 104 deg C). 3. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm (0.66 metric perm) at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: -20 to 180 deg F (-29 to 82 deg C). FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-4 DUCT INSULATION Page 4 of 15 3. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A.FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 250 deg F (40 to 121 deg Q. 4. Color: Aluminum. B.ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 250 deg F (40 to 121 deg Q. 4. Color: White. 2.7 FACTORY -APPLIED JACKETS A.Insulation system schedules indicate factory -applied jackets on various applications. When factory -applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure -sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type 1. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type H. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perm) when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 6. ASJ+: All -service jacket composed of aluminum foil reinforced with glass scrim bonded to a kraft paper interleaving with an outer film leaving no paper exposed; complying with ASTM C1136, Types I, II, III, IV, and VII. 7. PSK Jacket: Aluminum foil, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.8 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS A.Field-applied jackets comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B.FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil -face, fiberglass -reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C.PVC Jacket: High -impact -resistant, UV -resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-5 DUCT INSULATION Page 5 of 15 1. Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White Color -code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect. D.Metal Jacket: 1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field -applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper 3-mil- (0.075-min-) thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick polysurlyn. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick polysurlyn. E. Self -Adhesive Outdoor Jacket (Asphaltic): 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white stucco -embossed aluminum -foil facing. F. Self -Adhesive Indoor/Outdoor Jacket (Non -Asphaltic): Vapor barrier and waterproofing jacket for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors or indoors. Specialized jacket has 5 layers of laminated aluminum and polyester film with low -temperature acrylic pressure -sensitive adhesive. Outer aluminum surface is coated with UV -resistant coating for protection from environmental contaminants. 1. Permeance: 0.00 perm as tested in accordance with ASTM F1249. 2. Flamespread/Smoke Developed: 25/50 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Aluminum Finish: Embossed Smooth. 2.9 FIELD -APPLIED FABRIC -REINFORCING MESH A.Woven Glass -Fiber Mesh: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. (203 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. in. (2 strands by 2 strands/sq. mm) for covering ducts. B. Woven Polyester Mesh: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a Leno weave, for ducts. 2.10 FIELD -APPLIED CLOTHS A.Woven Glass -Fiber Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-6 DUCT INSULATION Page 6 of 15 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B.Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C.Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, compress, or otherwise damage insulation or jacket. D.Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet during storage or in the installation process before being properly covered and sealed in accordance with Contract Documents, unless otherwise approved by the engineer -of -record. G.Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H.Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor -barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants to all the joints and seams per manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K.Install insulation with factory -applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth, but not to the extent of creating wrinkles or areas of compression in the insulation. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-7 DUCT INSULATION Page 7 of 15 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor -barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor -barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N.Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 nun) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A.Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. B.Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C.Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." D.Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GLASS -FIBER AND MINERAL -WOOL INSULATION A.Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. B. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-8 DUCT INSULATION Page 8 of 15 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18- foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. C.Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 230713-9 DUCT INSULATION Page 9 of 15 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor -discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor - discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward -clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field -applied jacket, adhesive, vapor -barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18- foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops consist of vapor -barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory -applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-10 DUCT INSULATION Page 10 of 15 B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor -retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor -barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D.Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. 3.7 FIRE -RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Where fire -rated 'insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. C.Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. 3.8 FINISHES A.Insulation with ASJ, Glass -Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 99 00 "Painting". Flat Acrylic Finish: Two fmish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex -emulsion size. B.Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C.Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D.Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing Agency: Owner will engage Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B.Perform tests and inspections. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-11 DUCT INSULATION Page 11 of 15 C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field -applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection is limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D.All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. B.Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous -glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory -insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration -control devices. 7. Factory -insulated access panels and doors. 3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A.Concealed, round and flat -oval, exhaust -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. B.Exposed, round and flat -oval, supply -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.51b/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-12 DUCT INSULATION Page 12 of 15 C.Exposed, round and flat -oval, return -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm.) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. D.Exposed, round and flat -oval, outdoor -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.51b/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Pipe and Tank: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. E. Exposed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4-lb/cu. ft. (64-kg/cu. m) nominal density. F. Exposed, rectangular, return -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. G.Exposed, rectangular, outdoor -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. H.Exposed, supply -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-13 DUCT INSULATION Page 13 of 15 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. in) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. I. Exposed, return -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 41b/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. J. Exposed, outdoor -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. K.Exposed, exhaust -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3.12 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A.Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B.Exposed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 41b/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. in) nominal density. C.Exposed, rectangular, return -air duct insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-14 DUCT INSULATION Page 14 of 15 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. D.Exposed, supply -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 41b/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. E. Exposed, return -air plenum insulation is one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) and 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Glass -Fiber Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 21b/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3. Mineral Wool Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 4. Mineral Wool Board: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m) nominal density. 3.13 INDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B.If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C.Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. 2. PVC PVC, Color -Coded by System: 20 mils (0.5 mm) 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum, Smooth Corrugated Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth Corrugated Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. 5. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or Type 316, Smooth 213 Finish Corrugated] [Stucco Embossed: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick. D.Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: 1. None. 2. PVC PVC, Color -Coded by System: 20 mils (0.5 mm) 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2307 13-15 DUCT INSULATION Page 15 of 15 3. Aluminum, Smooth Corrugated Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 4. Painted Aluminum, Smooth Corrugated Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. 5. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or Type 316, Smooth 213 Finish Corrugated Stucco Embossed: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick. 3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD -APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory -applied jacket, install the field - applied jacket over the factory -applied jacket. B.If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C.Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick. D.Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches (1800 mm): 1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick. E. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm): 1. Aluminum, Smooth with 1-1/4-Inch- (32-mm-) Deep Corrugations: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 23 3113 METAL DUCTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 233113-1 METAL DUCTS Page 1 of 10 A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air -distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg (minus 500- to plus 2500-Pa). Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. B.NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: CAD -generated and drawn Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50) 1/8 inch equals 1 foot (1:100) scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire -rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, stability, and seismic restraints. a. Exterior support designs shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer responsible for their design. B. Welding certificates. C.Field Quality -Control Test Reports. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-2 METAL DUCTS Page 2 of 10 D.Delegated Design Submittals: 1. Sheet metal thickness. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, for selecting hangers and supports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code --Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B.NFPA Compliance: NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." C.Exterior duct supports shall be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports are to withstand the effects of gravity and wind loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-3 METAL DUCTS Page 3 of 10 B.Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; complying with ASTM A653/A653M and having G60 (Z180) coating designation (for interior ductwork) and having G90 (Z275) coating designation (for exterior ductwork); ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C.PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: Acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction for use in fabricating ducts with UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock -forming -quality, galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M and having G60 (Z180) coating designation (for interior ductwork) and having G90 (Z275) coating designation (for exterior ductwork). Factory -applied PVC coatings shall be 4 mils (0.10 mm) thick on sheet metal surfaces of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions and 2 mils (0.05 mm) thick on opposite surfaces. D.Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A366/A366M, cold -rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480/A480M, Type 316 304, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts and for exposed ducts. F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, one -side bright finish for exposed ducts. G.Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. H.Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS A.Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open -weave fabric strips and mastics. B.Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass -fiber -reinforced fabric. C. Tape Sealing System: Woven -fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. D.Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. E. Solvent -Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One -part, acid -curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. G.Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, adhesive (chemical) anchors, powder -actuated fasteners, or structural -steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which supports are being attached. Use powder -actuated concrete fasteners for standard -weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. a. Exception: Do not use powder -actuated fasteners for direct tension applications. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-4 METAL DUCTS Page 4 of 10 2. Anchor through veneer to the structural substrate at walls. Use crush sleeves to prevent damage to the veneer. B.Materials: Galvanized steel. 1. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 2. Galvanized -steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc -chromate primer. C.Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. D.Trapeze, Riser, and Other Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A36/A36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized -Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless -Steel Ducts: Stainless -steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically separated from ducts. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A.Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B.Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide -on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. C.Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-5 METAL DUCTS Page 5 of 10 D.Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. 2.7 ROUND AND FLAT -OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A.Diameter as applied to flat -oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat -oval duct. B.Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock - Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." 1. Manufacturers: a. McGill AirFlow Corporation. b. SEMCO Incorporated. C.Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches (500 mm) in Diameter: Interior, center -beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws. 2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches (535 to 1830 mm) in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket. 3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches (1830 mm) in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2. 4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double -lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances. a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) Lindab Inc. 5. Flat -Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one synthetic rubber gasket. a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) McGill AirFlow Corporation. 3) SEMCO Incorporated. D.90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal -seam straight ducts. E. Diverging -Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. F. Fabricate elbows using die -formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die - formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-6 METAL DUCTS Page 6 of 10 1. Mitered -Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500- to plus 500-Pa): a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches (75 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mm). 3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500- to 2500-Pa): a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mm). 4. Flat -Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal - seam flat -oval duct. 5. 90-Degree, Two -Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material - handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single -thickness turning vanes. 6. Round Elbows 8 Inches (200 mm) and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die -formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm) in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend -angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter and All Flat -Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. 9. Die -Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded construction. 10. Round Gored -Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non -elbow fittings specified above. 11. Flat -Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal -seam flat -oval duct specified above. 12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch wg (2500-Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm). G.PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows: Round Elbows 4 to 8 Inches (100 to 200 mm) in Diameter: Two-piece, die -stamped, with longitudinal seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with PVC aerosol spray. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-7 METAL DUCTS Page 7 of 10 2. Round Elbows 9 to 26 Inches (225 to 660 mm) in Diameter: Standing -seam construction. 3. Round Elbows 28 to 60 Inches (710 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: Standard gored construction, riveted and bonded. 4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints. 5. Couplings: Slip joint construction with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) insertion length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static -Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg (250-Pa). 2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg (250-Pa). 3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg (500-Pa). 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. B.Install round and flat -oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m) unless interrupted by fittings. C.Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D.Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. E.Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a minimum of three screws in each coupling. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. G.Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H.Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. K.Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. M. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-8 METAL DUCTS Page 8 of 10 N.Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section. O.Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches (600 mm) upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized - steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.3 PVC -COATED DUCT, SPECIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.Repair damage to PVC coating with manufacturer's recommended materials. 3.4 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A.Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -- Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A.Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports: 1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 days' advance notice for testing. 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat -oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500- to 2500-Pa). 4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233113-9 METAL DUCTS Page 9 of 10 3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A.Mark position of dampers and air -directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. B.Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D.Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air -handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. Return -air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply -air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. F. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and reinspect ducts. G.Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 2331 13 - 10 METAL DUCTS Page 10 of 10 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous -glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous -glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures. 7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present. Apply biocidal agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. H.Cleanliness Verification: 1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings. 2. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 3. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and reinspect ducts. I. Gravimetric Analysis: At discretion and expense of Owner, sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis. 1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification. 2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness verification will have failed and metal duct system shall be re -cleaned and re -verified. J. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning must restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 233300-1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 6 A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual -volume dampers. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct -mounted access doors and panels. 5. Flexible ducts. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual -volume dampers. 3. Duct -mounted access doors and panels. 4. Flexible ducts. B.Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self -noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static -pressure loss, dimensions, and weights. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: 1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 9013, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air -Conditioning Systems." 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 33 00 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 6 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A.Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B.Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A366/A366M, cold -rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish. C.Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one -side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts. D.Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm) length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A.Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. B.Frame: 0.052-inch (1.3-mm) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting Range. C.Frame: 0.090-inch (2.3-mm) thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange. D.Blades: 0.050-inch (1.2-mm) thick extended aluminum sheet. E. Blade Seals: Vinyl. F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous (for aluminum dampers). G.Blade Axles: Galvanized steel (for steel dampers). H.Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum (for aluminum dampers). I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel (for steel dampers). J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. 2.3 MANUAL -VOLUME DAMPERS A.General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single -blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classifications of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. B.Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, parallel- or opposed -blade design as indicated, low -leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 33 00 - 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 6 2. Low -leakage rating and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Steel Frames: Hat -shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 min) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Aluminum Frames: Hat -shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts 5. Roll -Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) thick, galvanized, sheet steel. 6. Roll -Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch (2.5-mm) thick aluminum sheet. 7. Blade Seals: Vinyl. 8. Blade Axles: Nonferrous (for aluminum dampers). 9. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel (for steel dampers). 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum (for aluminum dampers). 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel (for steel dampers). C.Jackshaft: 1-inch (25-mm) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe -bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple -damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple -damper assembly. D.Damper Hardware: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) thick zinc -plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.4 TURNING VANES A.Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." B.Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch (19 min) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 min) o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts. C.Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil -shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous -glass fill. 2.5 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS A.Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. B. Tubing: Aluminum. C. Cable: Stainless steel. D.Wall-Box Mounting: Surface. E. Wall -Box Cover -Plate Material: Stainless steel. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 33 00 - 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 6 2.6 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A.Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct. B. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. C.Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. D.Door: Double -wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-l-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. F. Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) thick, fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.General: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. B. Standard Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch (70-mm) wide, 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. C.Extra-Wide Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch (70-mm) wide, 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. D.Transverse Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 4-3/8-inch (I I 1-mm) wide, 0.028-inch (0.7-mm) thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Conventional, Indoor System (minus 10 to plus 250 F) Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 4801bf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. F. Conventional, Outdoor System (minus 10 to plus 250 F) Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a synthetic -rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone environment. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp, and 4401bf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling. G.High-Temperature System (minus 25 to plus 500 F) Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and having a minimum weight of 16 oz./sq. yd. (542 g/sq. m) and tensile strength of 285 lbf/inch (50 N/mm) in the warp, and 185 lbf/inch (32 N/mm) in the filling. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 33 00 - 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 5 of 6 H.High-Corrosive-Environment System (minus 20 to plus 500 F) Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical -resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. (474 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp, and 340 Minch (60 N/mm) in the filling. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A.General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. B.Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral -wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing. C.Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum. D.Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) thick, glass -fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. 1. Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. 2. Outer Jacket: Glass -reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous -glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. 3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. E.Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125-Pa) negative. 2.9 ACCESSORY HARDWARE A.Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc -plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc -plated operating rod; and a duct -mounted, ball joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square -head set screw. C.Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless -steel band with cadmium -plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm -gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size. D.Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 33 00 - 6 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 6 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NA vIA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous -glass ducts. B.Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized -steel and fibrous -glass ducts, stainless -steel accessories in stainless -steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C.Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. D.Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated. E. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. 1. Install fusible links in fire dampers. F. Install duct security bars. Construct duct security bars from 0.164-inch (4.18-mm) steel sleeve, continuously welded at all joints and 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel bars, 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. in each direction in center of sleeve. Weld each bar to steel sleeve and each crossing bar. Weld 2-1/2-by-2-1/2-by-1/4-inch (63-by-63-by-6-mm) steel angle to 4 sides and both ends of sleeve. Connect duct security bars to ducts with flexible connections. Provide 12-by- 1 2-inch (300-by-300-mm) hinged access panel with cam lock in duct in each side of sleeve. G.Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. 2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available. H.Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Tests and Inspections: 1. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. 2. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 3. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 4. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat -response device is installed. 5. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 6. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. B.Final positioning of manual -volume dampers. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 23 34 23 - 1 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 1 of 5 A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: B.Adjust list below to suit Project. 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B.Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound -power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B.AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C.NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. D.UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 34 23 - 2 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 2 of 5 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver fans as factory -assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. B.Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C.Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural -steel support members. B.Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Sections. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 08 Sections. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A.Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B.Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semi -proprietary Specification. Refer to Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements." C.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators: a. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company. b. Breidert Air Products, Inc. c. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Carnes Company HVAC. e. Cook, Loren Company. f. Greenheck Fan Corp. g. Hartzell Fan, Inc. h. ILG Industries, Inc./American Coolair Corp. i. JennFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products, Inc. j. PennBarry. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 34 23 - 3 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 3 of 5 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A.Description: Belt -driven or direct -driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. B.Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. C.Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D.Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 8 inches (200 mm). 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound -absorbing insulation matrix. 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 6. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized steel hinged arrangement permitting service and maintenance. 7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. 8. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides. 2.3 MOTORS A.Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors. B.Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. C.Enclosure Type: Guarded dripproof. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 34 23 - 4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 4 of 5 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B.Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Secure roof -mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium -plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Sections. C.Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. D.Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A.Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B.Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. D.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Equipment Startup Checks: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 23 34 23 - 5 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 5 of 5 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 7. Disable automatic temperature -control operators. B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C.Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. D.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature -control operators. F. Refer to Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. G.Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. H.Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.4 ADJUSTING A.Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B.Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. 3.5 CLEANING A.On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. B.After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Pagel of2 SECTION 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes duct -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air. B.Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor. C.Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 01. B.NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air -Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A.Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on the Drawings. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES Page 2 of 2 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B.Duct-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. C.Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A.After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.4 CLEANING A.After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 23 74 09 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 233713-1 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Pagel of 8 A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners: 1. Cooling and heating units 7-1/2 to 20 tons (26 to 70 kW). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.DDC: Direct -digital controls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C.Field Quality -Control Test Reports. D.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of rooftop air conditioners and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements." B.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C.Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." D.Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings" and International Energy Conservation Code, whichever is greater." FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 2 of 8 E. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings" and International Energy Conservation Code, whichever is greater." F. Comply with NFPA 54 for gas -fired furnace section. G.ARI Certification: Units shall be ARI certified and listed. H.ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 BTUH (39.6 kW) and More: Rate rooftop air -conditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360, "Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air - Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment." 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment." 1.6 COORDINATION A.Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories." 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Variable -Speed Fan Motors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 6. Warranty Period for Electronic Thermostats: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One sets for each belt -drive fan. 2. Filters: One sets of filters for each unit. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-3 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 3 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS 7-1/2 TO 20 TONS (26 TO 70 KW) A.Manufacturers: 1. AAON, Inc. 2. Carrier Corp. 3. Lennox Industries Inc. 4. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group. 5. YORK International Corporation. B.Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. C. Casing: Galvanized -steel construction with enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 1/2-inch (13- mm) thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs. D.Indoor Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable motor sheaves, grease - lubricated ball bearings, and motor. E. Outside Coil Fan: Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor. F. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum -plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing - type vertical distributor. Provide phenolic epoxy corrosion -protection coating to both coils. G.Compressor(s): Two hermetic reciprocating compressors with integral vibration isolators, internal overcurrent and overtemperature protection, internal pressure relief . H.Refrigeration System: 1. Compressor(s). 2. Outside coil and fan. 3. Indoor coil and fan. 4. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements. 5. Refrigerant dryers. 6. High-pressure switches. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-4 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 4 of 8 7. Low-pressure switches. 8. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low -ambient temperature operation or loss of air. 9. Charge of refrigerant. 10. Valve(s). L Electric Heat: Helix -wound, nickel -chrome, electric -resistance elements, factory wired for single -point wiring connection; with time delay for element staging, and overcurrent and overheat protective devices. J. Outside -Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outside air, with fully modulating, spring -return damper motor and hood. K.Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit -mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control -circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. L. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the following features: 1. Indoor fan on/off delay. 2. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption. 3. Service relay output. 4. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage. 5. Field -adjustable control parameters. 6. Electric heat staging. 7. Gas valve delay between first- and second -stage firing. 8. Indoor -air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor. 9. Low -ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 F (minus 18 C). 10. Minimum run time. 11. Night setback mode. 12. Return -air temperature limit. 13. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in return air. 14. Low -refrigerant pressure control. 15. Digital display of outside temperature, supply -air temperature, return -air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor -air quality, and control parameters. M. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit controls and DDC temperature -control system. N.Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day programming; and the following: 1. Touch sensitive keyboard. 2. Automatic switching. 3. Degrees F readout. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-5 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 5 of 8 4. LED indicators. 5. Hour/day programming. 6. Manual override capability. 7. Time and operational mode readout. 8. Status indicator. 9. Battery backup. 10. Subbase with manual system switch (on -heat -auto -cool) and fan switch (auto -on). 11. Fan -proving switch to lock out unit if fan fails. 12. Dirty -filter switch. O.Optional Accessories: 1. Cold -Weather Kit: Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner compartment. 2. Service Outlets: Two, 115-V, ground -fault, circuit -interrupter type. 3. PVC condensate drain trap. 4. Dirty -filter switch. 5. Hail guards of steel, painted to match casing. 2.3 MOTORS A.General requirements for motors are specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC." B.Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. C.Controllers, electrical devices, and wiring are specified in Division 26 Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install according to ARI Guideline B. A.Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B.Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C.Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination in roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-6 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 6 of 8 3. Terminate return -air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of unit with 2-inch (50-mm) thick, acoustic duct liner. 4. Install normal -weight, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), compressive strength (28-day) concrete mix inside roof curb, 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 03. D.Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls. E. Ground equipment according to Division 26. F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections , and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B.Perform the following field quality -control tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie -down straps. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C.Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A.Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, and fans. 4. Inspect internal insulation. 5. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 7. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 8. Verify that filters are installed. 9. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-7 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 7 of 8 10. Adjust vibration isolators. 11. Inspect operation of barometric dampers. 12. Lubricate bearings on fan. 13. Inspect fan -wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 14. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 15. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system in summer only. b. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 16. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 17. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 18. Calibrate thermostats. 19. Adjust and inspect high -temperature limits. 20. Inspect outside -air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return -air dampers. 21. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following: a. Coil leaving -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering -air, dry- and wet -bulb temperatures. c. Outside -air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outside -air -coil, discharge -air, dry-bulb temperature. 22. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 23. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume. b. Return -air volume. c. Relief -air volume. d. Outside -air intake volume. 24. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot -gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside -air intake. 25. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot -light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. High -limit heat exchanger. b. Warm-up for morning cycle. c. Freezestat operation. d. Economizer to limited outside -air changeover. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 233713-8 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS Page 8 of 8 e. Alarms. 26. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and outside coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents. 3.5 ADJUSTING A.Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated. C.Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A.Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air conditioners. Refer to Section 0177 19 "Closeout Requirements." END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 260000-1 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 1 of 12 SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install, test and provide an operational, electrical system as specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. C. All electrical work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 26. D. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed in each Section of Division 26. E. The work shall include furnishing and installing the following: 1. Electrical service from the Oncor Electric. 2. Provide a complete raceway system, wire and field connections for all motors, motor controllers, control devices, control panels and electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions. Coordinate construction schedule and electrical interface with the supplier of electrical equipment specified under other Divisions as required by the Contract Documents. 3. Provide a complete raceway system, wiring and terminations for all field -mounted instruments furnished and mounted under other Divisions, including process instrumentation primary elements, transmitters, local indicators and control panels. Lightning and surge protection equipment wiring at process instrumentation transmitters. Install vendor furnished cables specified under other Divisions as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Provide a complete raceway system for the Data Cables and specialty cable systems, including those furnished under other Divisions. Install the Data Cables and other specialty cable systems, in accordance with the system manufacturers' installation instructions. Review the raceway layout, prior to installation, with the Process Control System supplier and the cable manufacturer to ensure raceway compatibility with the systems and materials being furnished. Where redundant cables are furnished, install the cables in separate raceways as required by the Contract Documents. 5. Furnish and install precast electrical and instrumentation manholes, hand holes and light pole foundations as required by the Contract Documents. Pole foundations shall be designed and installed in accordance with the structural Divisions of these Specifications. F. Provide all tools, equipment, supplies, and shall perform all labor required to install the equipment specified in the Contract Documents to install, test, and place into satisfactory operation in the time specified for completion in the Contract Documents. Failure of any of the participants in executing the requirements of this Contract to perform the work as specified shall not constitute an acceptable reason for the Owner to grant any change in the Contract Price or additions to the Contract Time. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260000-2 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 2 of 12 1.2 ELECTRICAL WORK REQUIRED IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents, which is defined to include both the Drawings and the Specifications, shall be taken with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references, and include such information or work as may be specified. Examine all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and determine the power and wiring requirements and provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, provide the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, and include in the Contract Price and Schedule. B. Process Divisions Examine all Process Equipment Specifications and Drawings, determining power and wiring requirements. Provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning Process Control System. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. C. Mechanical Divisions 1. Examine all Mechanical Equipment Specifications and Drawings, determining power and wiring requirements. Provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide fully functioning Mechanical Equipment Control Systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. D. Electric Valve Operator Divisions Examine all Electric Valve Operator Equipment Specifications and Drawings, determining power and wiring requirements. Provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning Electric Valve Operator Control System. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring due to different equipment being supplied, furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 1 requirements, for equipment, materials and all other items furnished under each Section of Division 26, except where specifically stated otherwise. An individually packaged submittal shall be made for each Section and shall contain all the information required by the Section. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned without review. B. Submittals will not be accepted for Section 26 00 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260000-3 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 3 of 12 C. Each Section submittal shall be complete, contain all the items listed in the Specification Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. The Submittal shall list any exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings, and the reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned without review. D. Check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal to the Owner/Engineer. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not provide relief from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. Only one Specification Section may be made per transmittal. E. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material shall be ordered, or shop work started if the related shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT", "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", "REJECTED", or "NOT APPROVED". F. All approved shop drawings shall be maintained on site for the Owner's Inspector and for the Owner's Engineer to verify at the time of delivery of equipment to the job site. G. Up-to-date Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is complete. Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and approved. H. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format and in electronic format using PDF files including a Table of Contents which is indexed on DVDs. Electronic submittals are mandatory and those which are received not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Amount or Contract Time will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ILEA) 7. International Society of Automation (ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. Factory Mutual (FM) 10. City of Fort Worth, Electrical Code B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. C. All material and equipment, for which a UL standard exists, shall bear a UL label. No such material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 260000-4 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 4 of 12 D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding, unless otherwise directed by the Owner/Engineer. E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, full compliance with all Laws and Regulations at all times. 1.5 SERVICE AND METERING A. The power company serving this project is Oncor Electric. Service shall be obtained at 480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz from a pad mounted transformer provided by Oncor Electric. The Owner has an existing FEA with Oncor for this project. B. The power company will. be responsible for the following work: 1. Furnishing and installing the primary overhead conductors and pole line. 2. Furnishing and installing the riser pole, primary cutouts, lightning arresters and grounding. 3. Furnishing and installing primary cables. 4. Furnishing and installing transformer. 5. Termination of underground primary cables at riser pole. 6. Termination of underground primary cables at the transformer. 7. Furnishing metering current transformers (CT's), meter and meter wiring. 8. Termination of secondary cables to the service transformer. 9. Furnishing meter base and enclosure. C. Include the following work in the Contract Price and Schedule: 1. Furnish and install the primary conduits. 2. Furnish and install the service transformer pad. 3. Furnish and install secondary conduits in a steel reinforced concrete -encased duct bank and cables. 4. Coordinate the electrical service installation with the Power Company. D. Submit shop drawings for the following items to the power company for approval: 1. Transformer pad. E. No power outages are allowed without notifying the Owner at least 14 calendar days in advance using the Owner -provided shutdown forms. Total outages of more than 15 minutes at any facility are prohibited unless approved by the Owner. Standby generation shall be provided for all outages longer than 15 minutes. Liquidated Damages will be applied as specified for outages longer than 15 minutes when caused by the Contractor's construction activities. 1.6 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Equipment, materials and installation in areas designated as hazardous on the Drawings shall comply with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502 and 503. NFPA 820 shall define hazardous area classification for all areas whether indicated on Drawings or not. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 260000-5 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 5 of 12 B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate hazardous area classification. 1.7 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections. C. Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining electrical service, include all power company charges and all labor and material required for the electrical service in the Contract Price and Schedule. 1.8 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure. B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings, hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". The Record Drawings and Specifications shall be kept up to date throughout the project. B. The Record Drawings shall be reviewed in a meeting with the Owner/Engineer monthly. C. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. One -line Diagram(s). 2. Raceways and pull boxes. 3. Conductor sizes and conduit fills. 4. Panel Schedule(s). 5. Control Wiring Diagram(s). 6. Lighting Fixture Schedule(s). 7. Lighting fixture, receptacle and switch outlet locations. 8. Underground raceway and duct bank routing. The drawings shall include the measured width and height of the ductbank and shall survey the elevation of the top of the duct bank or record its depth of burial below grade at intervals not to exceed 50 feet along the entire length. Changes in direction between termination points shall be surveyed and recorded on the record drawings. 9. Planview, measured dimensions and locations of switchgear, distribution transformers, substations, motor control centers and panelboards. D. Submit a typical example of a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers, including the following information: 1. Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers. 2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 260000-6 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 6 of 12 E. As an alternate, submit a typical example of point-to-point connection diagrams showing the same information, may be submitted in place of the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers. F. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers (or the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner/Engineer. G. Retainage will not be paid until the point-to-point connection diagrams have been furnished to the Owner/Engineer. 1.10 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings. B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically identified on the Drawings to be re -used. B. Material or equipment from a manufacturer, not submitted and approved for this project shall not be brought on site. Use of any such material or equipment, will be rejected, and shall be removed and replaced, with the approved material and equipment, with no change allowed in the Contract Price or Schedule. C. Material and equipment shall be UL listed, where such listing exists. D. All material, products, equipment and workmanship being furnished for the the project shall be replaced if it does not meet the requirements of Contract Documents even if installed, with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. 1.12 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, successfully complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. B. Equipment and materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as specified in the individual Specification Sections. INIJK`"N.117 T.10 I I.Oki A. Manufacturer's warranties shall be provided as specified in each of the Specification Sections. 1.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc.) furnished under Division 26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes, transfer switches, etc., shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 260000-7 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 7 of 12 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. The Drawings do not show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment. B. Install each three-phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner/Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. Submit a Request for Information for any conduit route which is not clearly identified as concealed or exposed in the Contract Documents prior to its installation. D. Circuits are shown as "home -runs" shall be field routed. The raceway system provided shall include all necessary fittings, supports and boxes for a complete code -compliant raceway installation. Field routed raceway shall avoid blocking access to equipment either existing or spaces planned for future equipment and shall avoid blocking personnel egress through doors or access hatches. E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation. F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Determine exact locations and obtain approval from the Owner/Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Owner/Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting and other electrical systems shown. H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the use of a pre - approved alternate item shall include the arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than that which is specified or shown herein. All additional work and materials required shall be provided with no change in the contract price or schedule. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval. I. Raceways and conductors for lighting, switches, receptacles and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems as specified are not shown on the Drawings. Raceways and conductors shall be provided as required for a complete and operating system. Refer to riser diagrams for signal system wiring. Homeruns, as shown on the Drawings, identify raceways to be run exposed and raceways to be run concealed. Raceways installed exposed shall be near the ceiling or along walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes hoists, monorails, equipment hatches, doors, windows, etc. Raceways installed concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, above suspended ceilings, or in partitions as required. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 260000-8 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 8 of 12 J. Provide all conduit and conductors or data highway cables to RTU and/or PLC termination cabinets, where designated on the Drawings or otherwise required by the Specifications, the manufacture of the equipment, or submitted and approved systems. The conduit and conductors or data highway cables as shown on the interface drawings may not necessarily be shown on the floor plan. K. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals (typically twisted shielded pair cables) in raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120-Volt control conductors. Do not combine conductors carrying low voltage signals in wireways without barriers or NEC code -compliant separation for their entire length in the wire way, and/or provide separate wireways to provide separation of the conductors. Low voltage signal conductors routed through manholes or hand holes shall be bundled and separated from other conductors. L. Raceways and conductors for thermostats controlling HVAC unit heaters, exhaust fans and similar equipment are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors between the thermostats, the HVAC equipment and the motor starters for a complete and operating system. All raceways and power conductors shall be in accordance with Division 26. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished space and may be installed concealed or exposed in process spaces. Refer to the HVAC drawings for the locations of the thermostats and controls. M. Raceways and conductors for the fire alarm, sound and page party systems are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways and conductors as required by the system manufacturer for a complete and operating system. All raceways and power conductors shall be in accordance with Division 26. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished spaces and may be installed exposed or concealed in process spaces. 3.2 EQUIPMENT PADS AND SUPPORTS A. Electrical equipment pads and supports, of concrete or steel including structural reinforcing and lighting pole foundations, are shown on the Structural Drawings. B. Electrical equipment or raceways shall not be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls. C. Electrical equipment pads shall be provided for all free-standing equipment. Dimensions shall be 3-inches high. With 3-inch extension from front of equipment for equipment mounted against the wall and 3-inch extension on front and rear sections when equipment is rear accessible. 3.3 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. B. Unless measurements are shown on the drawings, the locations for stubbing up and terminating concealed conduits which are shown on the drawings are approximate. Exact locations are required for stubbing -up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours, the Owner/Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for this deviation must be submitted in writing. No change in Contract Price or Schedule for such change will be allowed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 260000-9 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 9 of 12 D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots as specified in Section26 05 33. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordinate with Divisions 2 and 3 for cutting and patching. B. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required. Obtain written permission from the Owner/Engineer before core drilling any holes larger than two inches. C. Schedule the installation of work to provide the minimum amount of cutting and patching. D. Cutting or drilling holes for the installation of raceway through joists, beams, girders, columns or any other structural members is strictly prohibited. If a structural member is cut or drilled, restore the structural member to its previous condition in complete accordance with the instructions of the Structural Engineer, with no change in contract price or schedule regardless of the extent of the repairs required to restore the member to its previous condition. E. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit. F. Patching shall be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed. G. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better. H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed. I. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises. J. Existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of suitable patching material approved by the Structural Engineer. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Section shall be subject to change as directed by the Owner/Engineer. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for making these changes. B. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. C. Electrical equipment shall always be protected against mechanical or water damage. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters as required by each Specification Section. Do not install electrical equipment in its permanent location until structures are weather -tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the Owner/Engineer or shall be replaced with no change in Contract Price or Schedule, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion. D. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion. E. Repaint any damage to the factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged, the entire panel or section shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 260000-10 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 10 of 12 F. NEMA 3R, 4 or 4X enclosures shall not have raceways entering from the top if the enclosure is installed in a damp or wet area. Should raceways be installed entering the top, the enclosure shall be replaced, and raceways re-routed to enter the side or bottom. Conductors, if installed, shall be removed and replaced. Correction of raceways entering the top and conductor replacement shall be provided with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. G. Conduits exiting tray in airconditioned indoor electrical rooms will enter the top of electrical enclosures. The location of these conduits shall be coordinated with the HVAC duct vents such that cold air will not blow on the conduits causing condensation which will enter the electrical enclosures. After installation, inspect the conduits while the HVAC system is running to ensure no condensation is forming and entering any electrical enclosure. Re -direct the air flow if possible or re-route the conduits to avoid condensation. Conductors in re-routed conduits shall be replaced, re -terminated. retested and the operation of the equipment retested with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. 3.6 PHASE BALANCING A. The Drawings do not attempt to balance the electrical loads across the phases. Circuits on motor control centers and panelboards shall be field connected to result in evenly balanced loads across all phases. B. Field balancing of circuits shall not alter the conductor color coding requirements as specified in Section 26 05 19. tArm05 EMU WIT40 It ti 0 3=3 3 AIVA 0101 A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up of the equipment as listed in each individual Specification Section. All settings, including those settings and arc flash labels required by the Power System Study, shall be made to the equipment and approved by the Owner/Engineer prior to energizing of the equipment. B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be used for manufacturer's warranty repairs. 3.8 TESTS AND SETTINGS A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division26 and repair or replace all defective work. Make adjustments to the systems as specified and/or required. B. All tests required by the individual specification Sections shall be completed prior to energizing electrical equipment. Submit a sample test form or procedure. and submit the required test reports and data to the Owner/Engineer for approval at least two weeks prior to the startup of the tested equipment. Include names of all test personnel and initial each test. C. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper lubrication. D. Check wire and cable terminations for tightness. E. Check rotation of motors prior to energization. Disconnect driven equipment if damage could occur due to wrong rotation. If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the rotation shall be immediately corrected, or tagged and locked out until rotation is corrected. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 260000-11 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 11 of 12 F. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, capacitor connections, panels, and enclosures by producing a 12 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to "A", "B" and "C" phases. G. Provide mechanical inspection, testing and setting of circuit breakers, disconnect switches, motor starters, control equipment, etc. for proper operation. H. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematic and wiring diagrams. I. Check the ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the Owner/Engineer of same, including MCC cubicle location and load designation, motor service factor, horsepower, full load current and starting code letter. If inconsistencies are found, new thermal elements shall be supplied and installed. J. Verify motor power factor capacitor ratings. K. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment. L. Refer to the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements. M. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. 3.9 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's training as specified in each individual section of the Specifications. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 260000-12 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 12 of 12 CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 260519-1 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish, install and test all wire, cable and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Submit catalog data of all wire and cable, connectors and accessories, specified under this Section with all selections, options and exceptions clearly indicated. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be a cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision. B. Certified Tests 1. Submit a test report of all installed wire insulation tests. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NEMA WC-5 — Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 3. ANSFTIA/EIA 606A — Standard for telecommunications Infrastructure 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The general construction of the wire, cables and the insulation material used shall be similar to that used for cable of the same size and rating in continuous production for at least 15 years and successfully operating in the field in substantial quantities. B. Wire and cable with a manufacture date of greater than 12 months previous will not be acceptable. C. Wire and cable shall be in new condition, with the manufacturer's packaging intact, stored indoors since manufacture, and shall not have been subjected to the weather. Date of manufacture shall be clearly visible on each reel. D. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260519-2 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 2 of 10 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Check for reels not completely restrained, reels with interlocking flanges or broken flanges, damaged reel covering or any other indication of damage. Do not drop reels from any height. C. Unload reels using a sling and spreader bar. Roll reels in the direction of the arrows shown on the reel and on surfaces free of obstructions that could damage the wire and cable. D. Store cable on a solid, well drained location. Cover cable reels with plastic sheeting or tarpaulin. Do not lay reels flat. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. Imo\ � �►�l� � Z�71iZ�Jl fy 2.1 GENERAL A. Wires and cables shall be annealed, 98% conductivity, soft drawn tinned copper. B. All conductors shall be Class B stranded. C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than #12 AWG shall not be used. 2.2 POWER & BUILDING WIRE A. All building wire shall be tinned stranded copper conductors, Type XHHW-2 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be tinned stranded copper conductor, Type XHHW-2 with green insulation. 2.4 BONDING JUMPER A. Bonding Jumper shall be bare tinned stranded copper conductor. 2.5 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE A. Control wire shall be NEC Type XHHW-2. B. Multi -conductor control cable, shall be stranded tinned copper conductor, #14 AWG 600-volt, XHHW-2, insulated, PVC outer jacket overall, Type TC, UL rated for underground wet location. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260519-3 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 3 of 10 A. Cables for 4-20 ma, RTD, potentiometer and similar signals shall be PLTC rated and shall be: 1. Single pair cable: a. Conductors: Two #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on two-inch lay b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating c. Shield: 100% Mylar tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer's identification e. UL 1685 listed for underground wet location use 2. Three conductor (triad) cable: a. Conductors: Three #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on two-inch lay b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating c. Shield: 100% Mylar tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer's identification e. UL1685 listed for underground wet location use 3. Multiple pair cables (where shown on the Drawings): a. Conductor: Multiple pairs, #16 AWG stranded, tinned and twisted on a two- inch lay b. Insulation: PVC with 600-volt, 90°C rating c. Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100% Mylar tape and drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with manufacturer's identification e. UL 1685 listed for underground wet location use 2.7 COMMUNICATION CABLES A. Cables for Ethernet and RS485 shall be rated and shall be: Category 5e above Grade shielded Cable a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #24 AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polyolefin c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with 600-volt rated and manufacturer's identification e. UL21047 and UL1666 listed for indoor and dry locations use Category 5e above Grade un-shielded Cable a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #24 AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polyolefin c. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer's identification d. NEC CMR e. UL 1666 listed for indoor and dry locations use Category 6 above Grade shielded Cable a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #23 AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polypropylene c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with 600-volt rated and manufacturer's identification e. Transmission Standards: Category 6 - TIA 568.C.2 f. NEC CMR g. Flame Test Method: UL1666 Vertical Riser listed for indoor and dry locations use 4. Category 6 above Grade un-shielded Cable a. Conductors: Four bonded pair #23 AWG Bare Copper CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 260519-4 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 4 of 10 b. Insulation: Polyolefin c. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer's identification d. Transmission Standards: Category 6 - TIA 568.C.2 e. Nominal Velocity of Propagation: 72% £ Flame Test Method: UL1666 Vertical Riser listed for indoor and dry locations use 5. Category 5e below Grade shielded Cable a. Conductors: Four pair #24 AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polyolefin c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire d. Jacket: LLPE (Linear Low -Density Polyethylene) with 300-volt rated and manufacturer's identification e. Misc.: NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use f. Water Blocking compound and listed for direct bury applications. 6. Category 5e below Grade unshielded Cable a. Conductors: Four pair #24 AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polyolefrt c. Jacket: LLPE (Linear Low -Density Polyethylene) with 300-volt rated and manufacturer's identification d. Misc.: NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use. e. TIA-568-C.2 Category 5e compliance f. Water Blocking compound and listed for direct bury applications. 7. Category 6 below Grade Cable a. Conductors: 4 pair 23AWG Bare Copper b. Insulation: Polyolefin c. Shield: 100 percent aluminum foil polyester tape with drain wire d. Jacket: Polyethylene with 300 volts rated and manufacturer's identification e. Misc.: Gel filled and NEMA WC-63.1, listed for outdoor and wet locations use 485 Communications Cable a. Conductors: One pair #24 AWG Tinned Copper b. Insulation: Polyethylene c. Shield: 100% aluminum foil polyester tape with tinned copper drain wire d. Jacket: PVC with 300-volt rated and manufacturer's identification e. Misc.: UL2919 listed for indoor and dry locations use 2.8 TERMINATION MATERIALS A. Power Conductors: Termination materials, of conductors at equipment, shall be as specified in the relevant equipment Section. B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low- and high-level signals): Termination connectors shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type, with end barriers, dual side terminal block numbers and terminal group identifiers. Terminals to be UL Listed for stranded conductor terminations. Rated for a maximum of 2 #14 stranded conductors. Color of terminals to comply with NFPA 79. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 260519-5 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 5 of 10 C. Motor Conductors: Motor connections with conductors #12 AWG up to #6 AWG shall be ring type compression terminations on the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and spring washer. Connections shall be -30°C rubber insulated, half lap, and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 or equal vinyl tape. Motor terminations for conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be in accordance with paragraph "Lugs and Connectors" below. Motors provided on this project per specification 26 05 50 and / or 26 05 51 shall have motor terminals enclosures with bus and NEMA one -hole or two -hole pads to accommodate the conductor terminals specified herein. D. Lugs and Connectors All lugs and connectors shall be tin plated copper and shall be crimped type, installed with standard industry tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where used and shall be clearly identified and color coded on the connector. All connections shall be made for stranded wire and shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements for 75°C. Lugs for #12 AWG up to #6 AWG shall be ring terminals. Conductors #4 AWG and larger shall be two -hole long barrel lugs with NEMA spacing. All lugs shall be the closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor. MM.UK[4lD2►l El139Elcl A. Power Conductors: Circuits shall be pulled from terminal to terminal, without splicing, except where splicing is shown on the Drawings. No other splicing will be permitted. For wires sizes #8 AWG and smaller, provide color coded wire nuts, with metal inserts, 3M or Ideal, rubber insulated with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape. For wires greater than #8 AWG, provide a heat shrink insulated, color -coded, die - crimped splice lug, T&B 54XXX, or equal, rubber insulated, with half lap and two layers minimum of Scotch 33 tape. B. Control and Instrumentation Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low- and high-level signals): No splicing of control and instrumentation conductors will be permitted. 2.10 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME -SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Corp. or equal. 2.11 WIRE AND CABLE TAGS A. Wire tags for wire sizes, #2 AWG and smaller, shall be heat shrink type Raychem TMS-SCE, or approved equal with the tag numbers typed with an indelible marking process. Character size shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch in height. Hand written tags shall not be acceptable. Where ends are not available, attach cable tags with nylon tie cord. B. Tags for wires larger than #2 AWG and all cables shall be thermally printed polyethylene type, Brady TLS 2200 or approved equal, nylon zip tied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Tags relying on adhesives or taped -on markers are not acceptable. D. Tagging shall be done in accordance with the execution portion of these Specifications. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 260519-6 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 6 of 10 A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes #8 or greater, where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, manholes and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination. B. The following coding shall be used: System Wire Color 1-Phase, 3 Wire Phase A Black Phase B Blue Neutral White 208Y/120, Volts Phase A Black 3-Phase, 4 Wire Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White 480/277, Volts Phase A Brown 3-Phase, 4 Wire Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Gray/White with one or more colored stripes 2.13 CABLE TAG COLOR CODE A. All cable tags shall be white in color with black printing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Do not install conductors until the raceway system is in place. No conductor shall be installed between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until raceway sections have been completed, and raceway covers are installed for protection of conductors from damage or exposure to the elements. Any conductor installed in an incomplete raceway system shall be removed from the raceway system and from project site. A complete inspection of such raceway sections shall be completed, before new conductors are installed. B. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. D. Pull all conductors into a raceway at one time, using wire pulling lubricant as needed to protect the wire. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 260519-7 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 7 of 10 E. Except for hand -pulled conductors into raceways, all wire and cable installation shall be installed with tension -monitoring equipment. Conductors which are found to have been installed without tension —monitoring shall be immediately removed from the raceways, permanently identified as rejected material, and removed from the jobsite. New conductors and cables shall be reinstalled, tagged and raceways resealed, with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. F. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Where pulling compound is used, use only UL listed compound compatible with the cable outer jacket and with the raceway involved. G. Tighten all screws and terminal bolts using torque type wrenches and/or drivers to tighten to the inch -pound requirements of the NEC and UL. H. Single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means such as arc and fireproofing tapes, shall be bundled throughout their exposed length with nylon, self- locking, releasable, cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding four inches on centers. I. All wire and cable installed in cable trays shall be UL Listed as Type TC, for cable tray use. 3.2 CONDUCTORS 1000 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Provide conductor sizes indicated on Drawings, as a minimum. B. Use crimp connectors on all stranded conductors. C. Soldered mechanical joints insulated with tape will not be acceptable. D. Arrange wiring in cabinets and panels neatly cut to proper length Surplus wire shall be removed unless noted otherwise. Conductors shall be bridled or bundled and secured in an acceptable manner. Identify all circuits entering motor control centers and all other control enclosures in accordance with the conductor identification system specified herein. E. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. F. Attach compression lugs, larger than #6 AWG, with a tool specifically designed for that purpose which provides a complete, controlled crimp where the tool will not release until the crimp is complete. Use of plier type crimpers is not acceptable. G. Cap spare conductors and conductors not terminated with the UL listed end caps. H. Remove all burrs, chamfer all edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors passing through holes or over edges in sheet metal enclosures. I. Provide at least 6 feet spare conductors in freestanding panels and at least two feet spare in other assemblies for all conductors which are to be terminated by others. Provide additional conductor length in any assembly where it is obvious that more conductor will be needed to reach the termination point. J. Do not combine power conductors in the same raceway unless shown on Drawings. Do not run signal conductors carrying voltages less than 120 volts AC in the same raceway as conductors carrying higher voltages regardless of the insulation rating of the conductors. Do not share neutrals on branch circuits. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 260519-8 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 8 of 10 m1weialieW101W1[e1 A. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with NEC requirements and specification 26 05 26. Ground wires exposed to mechanical damage shall be installed in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Connections to ground rods shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 3.4 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES A. No splices of wire and cable will be permitted, except where specifically permitted by the Owner/Engineer in writing, or as shown on the Drawings. B. Power conductors: Terminations shall be made with connectors as specified. Splices, where specifically allowed as stated above, shall be made in a Termination Cabinet (TC). C. Control Conductors: Splices of control conductors will not be permitted between terminal points. Terminations shall be made with approved terminals as specified. D. Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level signals): Splices of Instrumentation conductors will not be permitted between terminal points. Terminations shall be made with connectors as specified. The shield of pair shielded and triad shielded shall be terminated on terminal strips. Provide dedicated terminal block to every conductor including shields. Double lugging terminations is not acceptable. 3.5 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES A. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in raceways as specified. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings, all instrumentation circuits shall be installed as single shielded twisted pair cables or single shielded twisted triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required. B. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction boxes, and all circuits shall be identified at such junctions. C. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial cable, data highway cable, discrete I/O, multiple conductor cable, and fiber optic cables shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. D. Shields shall be grounded at the PLC/RTU. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter -connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Individual circuit shielding shall be provided with its own block. E. Shield wire shall be wrapped and taped at the transmitter end of the signal run. Before termination, peel back the outer sheath, leaving the shield intact. Wrap the drain wire around the conductors, leaving approximately two inches exposed. Wrap the drain wire with two layers of Scotch 33 tape. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 2605 19 - 9 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 9 of 10 �c kV R Ilfi 1, lied[!' A. All wiring shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the electrical raceways. A termination point is defined as any point or junction where a wire or cable is physically connected. This includes terminal blocks and device terminals. A major access point to a raceway is defined as any enclosure; box or space designed for wire or cable pulling or inspection and includes pull boxes, manholes, and junction boxes. B. Wire tags shall show both origination and destination information to allow for a wire or cable to be traced from point in the field. Information regarding its origination shall be shown in parenthesis. C. For multiconductor cables, both the individual conductors and the overall cable shall be tagged. Conductors that are part of a multiconductor cable shall reference the cable identification number that they are a part of, as well as a unique conductor number within the cable. 3.7 CABLE TAGGING A. All cables shall be tagged at all termination points and at all major access points in the electrical raceways as defined in the wire tag section of this Specification. B. The cable tag shall be installed where the cable enters and leaves each access point (e.g., junction box, manhole, etc.). In cases of limited access space, a single tag may be used that shows both equipment tag origination and destination. In the case where the jacket is stripped for terminations, the tag shall be installed at the end of the jacket. 3.8 RACEWAY SEALING A. Raceways entering junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. B. This requirement shall apply to for all raceways in the conduit system. 3.9 FIELD TESTS A. Conductors under 600 volts 1. Perform insulation resistance testing of all power circuits below 1000 volts with a 1000-volt megger, in accordance with the recommendations of the wire manufacturer. 2. Prepare a written test report of the results and submit to the Owner/Engineer prior to final inspection. 3. Minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 100 megohms. Lower values shall be acceptable only by the Owner/Engineer's specific written approval. 4. Disconnect equipment that might be damaged by this test. Perform tests with all other equipment connected to the circuit. B. Tests: After instrumentation cable installation and conductor termination by the instrumentation and control supplier, perform tests to ensure that instrumentation cable shields are isolated from ground, except at the grounding point in the instrumentation control panel. Remove all improper grounds. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 2605 19-10 LOW -VOLTAGE WIRES AND CABLES Page 10 of 10 CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 05 26Seetion 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - I GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install a complete Grounding and Bonding System, in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. The system shall include ground wires, ground rods, exothermic connections, mechanical connectors, structural steel connections, all as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein, to provide a bonding to earth ground of all metallic materials likely to become energized. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 19OW11 J:3U is 01I\ M A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1 and Section 26 00 00, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding conduit hubs. 3. Waterpipe ground clamps. 4. Buried grounding connections. 5. Compression lugs. 6. Exothermic bonding system. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format and in electronic format using PDF files [on a CD and/or a flash drive] [on a flash drive] and shall include an indexed Table of Contents. Electronic submittals are mandatory, and any submittal received not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. UL 467-2007 --Grounding and Bonding Equipment CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 05 26Section 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 2 of 6 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for [two] years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner IZIA mpg t-1) Dior Jl 0 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 26 05 33. B. All raceways, conduits and ducts shall contain equipment grounding conductors sized in accordance with the NEC. Minimum sizes shall be #12 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be as specified under Section 26 05 19. B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be tinned insulated XHHW-2 conductors. Conductors shall be green where available from the wire manufacturers or marked with green tape as specified under 26 05 19. C. Grounding electrode conductors shall be bare tinned copper where direct buried, or encased in concrete. Bare grounding electrode conductors or lightning protection conductors where exposed to damage shall be installed in conduit. Grounding electrode conductors or lightning protection down lead conductors shown, specified or required to be installed in conduit per the NEC with no other conductors shall be bare tinned copper. Bare conductors installed in metallic conduits shall be bonded to the metallic conduit at both ends. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 05 26Section 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 3 of 6 D. Grounding electrode conductors routed between concealed grounding electrodes or interconnecting grounding electrode counterpoise loop conductors to exposed (IE "Pigtails") shall be bare tinned copper. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground rods shall be 3/4-inch by 10-foot copper -bonded steel and constructed in accordance with UL 467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 10 mils. B. Manufacturers for ground rods 1. ERICO 2. Copperweld 3. Approved equal. 2.4 CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS A. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze 1. Manufacturers a. Thomas & Betts Co. Cat. JPT b. Burndy c. O.Z. Gedney Co. d. Cooper Power Systems e. Erico f. Harger g. Approved equal h. Provide the correct size for the pipe. B. Other grounding system clamps, where specified or shown shall be cast bronze 1. Manufacturers a. Thomas & Betts Co. b. Burndy c. O.Z. Gedney Co. d. Cooper Power Systems e. Erico f. Harger g. Approved equal. C. All concealed grounding system or lightning protection system connections shall be by an exothermic weld process 1. Manufacturers a. T&B Furseweld SCR1 b. Burndy Thermoweld c. Cadweld d. Approved equal. 2. Exothermic welded connections shall be used in exposed locations as specified herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 05 26Section 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 4 of 6 D. Provide a Burndy Hyground Irreversible Compression System or equal in areas where the Owner's operations prevent the use of an exothermic welded connection. The use of a compression system ground connection is otherwise prohibited without written approval on a case -by -case basis from the Owner or Engineer. Permission shall be submitted through the RFI process. Compression connectors installed without permission shall be removed and replaced with exothermic weld connections with no change in the Contract Price or change in the Contract Schedule allowed. E. All grounding connections which would require exothermic welding in a Class 1 Division 1 Area as determined by NFPA 820, or the Engineer, or the NEC Authority Having Jurisdiction shall use a Burndy Hyground Irreversible Compression System, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Route exposed grounding electrode conductors in rigid aluminum conduits to protect the conductors from damage. The rigid conduits shall be aluminum or PVC -coated aluminum conduits as specified in 26 05 33. Bond the protecting conduits to the grounding electrode conductors at both ends. Water pipe grounding connections shall not be painted. Painted connections shall be disassembled, replaced and reconnected. B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all raceways for the power, control and instrumentation systems. Grounding conductors shall be independent conductors and shall be separate from all shield drain wires. C. Conduits and other raceways shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets and other equipment shall be properly bonded in accordance with NEC requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid metallic conduit. D. In NEC classified areas, connection of grounding electrode connections to structural steel columns shall be made with long barrel type one -hole heavy duty copper compression lugs, bolted through 1/2-inch maximum diameter holes drilled in the column web, with stainless steel hex head cap screws and nuts. E. In new construction, bond each building column to the grounding electrode counterpoise system whether nor not specifically shown on the Drawings using grounding electrode conductors. Grounding electrode conductors rising from the counterpoise to bond to a column shall be made using an insulated conductor the same size as the conductors used to form the counterpoise. Exposed grounding electrode conductors shall be routed in rigid conduit. Bond metallic conduits as specified. Grounding electrode conductor connections to structural steel columns shall be made with as permitted by the Structural Engineer with Exothermic welds are acceptable in non -classified areas if approved by the Structural Engineer. F. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with NEC Table 250.122, except that a minimum #12 AWG shall be used. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 26 05 26Section 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 5 of 6 G. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2-inch and larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. H. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized as shown with a minimum size in accordance with NEC Article 250.66. I. Provide power system grounding electrodes (ground rods) no closer than twice the length of the ground rod. Where a lightning protection is specified to be provided, the Contractor shall provide a dedicated lightning protection system grounding electrode (ground rod) at the end of every down lead if no counterpoise is present or shall connect directly to the power system counterpoise without driving a separate ground rod. Refer to Section 26 4100 for lightning protection system specifications. Provide a #1/0 AWG bare tinned grounding conductor the full length of each cable tray system, bond each section and tray fitting to the tray grounding conductor. Route the tray grounding conductor along the outside of the cable tray. Install no grounding clamps on the inside of the tray to avoid damage to tray conductors. Bond the tray grounding conductor to the power system counterpoise grounding electrode system at the end of the tray, or for tray systems installed in a loop configuration, bond in at least two locations at opposite sides of the tray loop. Bond every enclosure to which tray conductors are routed to the tray grounding conductor. Bond every conduit or raceway routing tray conductors away from or to the tray system to the cable tray and to the cable tray grounding conductor. K. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduits systems, cable tray, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. L. Seal exposed connections between different metals with no -oxide paint, Grade A or equal. M. Lay all underground grounding conductors' slack and, where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe, or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. Make connections as specified herein. N. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, between the conduit system and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, bonding jumper conductors shall be provided. O. Ground all grounding type receptacles to the outlet boxes with a minimum, #12 AWG XHHW-2 stranded green conductor, connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and bonded to the outlet box by means of a grounding screw. 3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent test instrument to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall -of -potential method. C. All test equipment shall be provided under this Section and approved by the Owner/Engineer. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 05 26Section 16110 - Raceways, Boxes, Fittings and Supports - 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM Page 6 of 6 D. Resistance to ground testing shall be preceded by no precipitation for a minimum of five days. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the electrical distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than five ohms. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 05 29 - 1 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 05 29 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install electrical support hardware, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Hardware shall include anchor systems, adhesive anchor systems, metal framing systems, and other electrical support systems, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. The submittal information, for anchor systems, shall contain manufacturer's specifications and technical data including; 1. Acceptable base material conditions (i.e. cracked, un-cracked concrete) 2. Acceptable drilling methods 3. Acceptable bore hole conditions (dry, water saturated, water filled, under water) 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive injection. 5. Cure and gel timetables 6. Temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service). C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format and in electronic format using PDF filesand shall include an indexed Table of Contents. Electronic submittals are mandatory, and any submittal received not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260529-2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 2 of 6 A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. ASTM E 488-96 (2003); Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements, ASTM International. 4. ASTM E 1512-93, Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive -Bonded Anchors, ASTM International 5. AC308; Acceptance Criteria for Post -Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements, Latest revision. 6. SAE 316 Stainless Steel Grades B. All equipment components and completed assemblies having a UL standard specified in this Section of the Specifications, shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, a list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, all submittal requirements must be complete, and an approved copy of all such submittals shall be available to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment. Delivery of equipment not completely constructed, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Adhesive Anchor Systems. 1. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number. 2. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing storage time at jobsite. 3. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with Manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions. 4. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. 5. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 6. Storage restrictions (temperature range) and expiration date must be supplied with product D. Metal Framing Systems 1. Material shall be new and unused, with no signs of damage from handling. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260529-3 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 3 of 6 A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS "tow,M-3-1934M f.1 A. Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI Kwik Bolt 3 b. Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Torque controlled expansion anchor consisting of anchor body, expansion element (wedges), washer and nut. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes less than 3/8 inch. 2. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316. 3. UL 203 Rated. 2.2 ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI HIT-RTZ with HIT-HY 200 MAX. b. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Anchor body with helical cone shaped thread on the embedded end and standard threads on the exposed end, with washer and nut, inserted into Injection adhesive. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes 3/8 inch and larger. 2. All parts shall be 316 stainless steel materials conforming to SAE 316 standards. 2.3 STRUT SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 260529-4 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 4 of 6 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Tyco Unistrut b. B-Line c. Super -Strut d. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Metal framing system for use in the mounting or support of electrical systems, panels and enclosures, and including lighting fixture supports, trapeze hangers and conduit supports. 2. Components shall consist of telescoping channels, slotted back-to-back channels, end clamps all threads and conduit clamps. 3. Minimum sizes shall be 13/16-inch through 3-1/4 inch. 4. Components shall be assembled by means of flat plate fittings, 90-degree angle fittings, braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing -fittings, Post Bases, channel nuts, washers, etc. 5. Field welding of components will not be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all parts shall be 316 stainless steel material conforming to SAE 316. 7. Framing systems for chlorine and ammonia rooms shall be manufactured of structural fiberglass. 2.4 STAINLESS TIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. PANDUIT b. PHONIX CONTACT c. Gardner Bender d. Approved Equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Cable Ties for securing and supporting of flexible raceway and conductors. 2. Self-locking mechanism. 3. Material shall be 304 Stainless Steel unless otherwise directed as shown on the drawings. C. Locations for Use 1. Cable Ties of stainless steel to be used in wet environments, where exposed to process, or when exposed to sunlight CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 260529-5 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 5 of 6 2. Self-locking mechanism. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all equipment strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Contract Drawings. B. The locations of devices are shown as general on the Drawings and may be varied within reasonable limits as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without change in the Contract Price or Schedule, subject to the approval of the Owner and Engineer. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance. C. No electrical equipment or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, slieet metal walls. D. Install required safety labels. E. Electrical support channel shall be used to construct support assemblies as shown on the drawings. Horizontal braces attached to concrete or CMU walls or structural building steel are permitted if the space between the back of the support structures and the attachment points are too small to permit a walk space. No attachments to sheet metal are permitted as specified above. Incorporate additional channel materials and/or provide assemblies of double channel with enough vertical and horizontal members to from a rigid structure whether or not such additional materials or the use of double channel materials are shown or specified. Support structures shall be rigid without the use of channels to from angle supports between the back or front of the assembly and the ground. Angle supports are strictly prohibited because they provide tripping hazards. Outdoor supports structures shall be able to support the equipment with the structural strength to withstand wind gusts up to 90 mph without damage. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 POST INSTALLED ANCHOR SYSTEMS A. Prior to installation of the anchor systems, the hole shall be clean and dry in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 260529-6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 6 of 6 II_Y_ � fy �Il1J� 119191111 I�II��ILILC���\��� ��1�� CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 1 of 14 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. A raceway system shall consist of materials designed expressly for containing wires and cables, including but not limited to, conduit, device bodies, conduit bodies, raceway boxes, enclosures containing electrical devices, controls and related materials. B. Raceways and conductors that are listed on the raceway and conductor schedules are generally not shown on the Drawings, except where they are required to pass through a restricted or designated space. Raceways indicated to be run "exposed" on the schedules shall be run near the ceilings or along the walls of the areas through which they pass and shall be routed to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, cranes and hoists, lighting fixtures, doors and hatches, etc. Raceways indicated to be run concealed shall be run in the center of concrete floor slabs, in partitions, or above hung ceilings, as required. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers of all materials specified. 1. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 2. Each cut sheet shall be clearly marked to indicate the item submitted and/or mark out items which are not being submitted for approval. Submittals not clearly marked will be returned with the indication REVISE AND RESUBMIT as a minimum or other indication per the specifications as warranted. B. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, certification that the electricians installing the PVC coated conduit have a five-year minimum experience, in the installation of the product. C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format and in electronic format using PDF files] and shall include an indexed Table of Contents. Electronic submittals are mandatory, and any submittal received not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. D. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260533-2 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 2 of 14 A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E — Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. UL 6A — Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit 4. ANSI C80.5 — Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit 5. UL 514B — Outlet Bodies B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. C. The installer of materials specified herein, shall have a minimum of five years' experience in the installation of each type of material. Proof of experience shall be submitted, upon request of the Owner/Engineer, prior to installation. D. Used materials are unacceptable, will be rejected and shall be removed from the job site. Used materials, if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new materials. If new materials are installed with used materials, and the removal of the used materials renders the new materials in an unacceptable condition, such as new conductors installed in used raceway components, (determined by the Engineer/Owner alone) then the new materials shall be removed along with the used materials and replaced. No increase in the Contract Price nor in Contract Schedule will be allowed. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely covered. D. Materials showing signs of previous use, jobsite storage at another location, or exposure to the elements or other damage will be rejected. 1.7 WARRANTY CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260533-3 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 3 of 14 A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Raceways and fittings shall be as shown on the Drawings, with a minimum 3/4-inch trade size. B. Device entries less than 3/4 inch shall be provided with an adaptor to connect 3/4-inch or larger conduit. The following adaptors are acceptable: 1. REAI2SA, Cooper Crouse Hinds or equal, for aluminum 2. ADAPT ADU302930, REDAPT or equal, for 316 stainless. 3. Approved equal 2.2 CONDUIT RACEWAY A. PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit (CRMC) 1. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall have a minimum 0.040-inch thick, polyvinyl chloride coating permanently bonded to rigid aluminum conduit and an internal chemically cured urethane or enamel coating. 2. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1 and shall conform to FED Spec WW-C-540C, ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 3. The ends of all couplings, fittings, etc. shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC overlap. 4. Elbows and couplings shall be PVC coated by the same manufacturer supplying the conduit PVC coating system. Elbows and couplings used with PVC coated conduit shall be furnished with a PVC coating bonded to the aluminum, the same thickness as used on the coated aluminum conduit. B. Liquid tight Aluminum Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) 1. Liquid tight aluminum flexible metal conduit shall have an interlocked aluminum core, PVC jacket rated for 60 degrees C,. and meeting NEC Article 351. 2. Fittings used with liquid tight flexible aluminum conduit shall be copper -free aluminum and shall conform to FEDSPEC AA50552, and UL-51413. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RMC) 1. Rigid Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from AA 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1 and shall conform to FED Spec WW-C-540C, ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. D. Rigid PVC Schedule 40 Conduit (RNC) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 05 33 - 4 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 4 of 14 1. Schedule 40 PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC) shall be designed for use underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight. The conduits and fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC 1094A and UL 651 specifications. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3, Federal Specification WC 1094A and UL 514B. Conduit shall have a UL Label. 2. Manufacturers 2.3 WIREWAYS A. All wireways shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel, with gasketed hinged covers and stainless steel quick -release type latches. Wireway shall have two Breather/Drains for each ten feet of wireway. Breather/Drain shall be in the bottom, near the ends of the wireway. Wireways shall have integral welded mounting lugs. Bolted -on mounting lugs are unacceptable B. Manufacturers 1. Industrial Enclosure Corporation 2. Cooper B Line a. Approved equal C. Breather/Drains 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds 316 stainless steel a. Approved equal 2.4 RACEWAY BOXES AND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. The term box and enclosure are synonymous for this specification. Boxes and enclosures specified herein, include terminal boxes, junction boxes pull boxes, and boxes for switch, receptacles and lighting. Enclosures used for electrical and instrumentation equipment, other than terminal boxes, shall be provided as described in this section with references to this specification in other specification sections. All raceway boxes and equipment enclosures shall be provided with a common ground point and shall be UL rated. B. NEMA Type 4X boxes shall be 316 stainless steel or aluminum only as otherwise specified or shown with mounting lugs or brackets welded on the box, suitable for wall mounting, or have mounting feet where self -standing. Boxes for wall -mounting shall have integral welded -on mounting lugs. Enclosures with mounting feet shall have the mounting feet brackets for the attachment of mounting feet welded on. Boxes manufactured with holes intended for mounting using bolted -on mounting lugs or feet are not acceptable. Drilling through the back of the box to mount is strictly prohibited. Drilled boxes shall be removed and replaced. All boxes shall have continuously welded seams ground smooth, and shall have continuous hinged, gasketed doors. Box bodies shall not be less than 16 gauge. Boxes larger than 24 inches X 20 inches shall have a three-point type latch with handle. Boxes 24 inches X 20 inches or smaller shall have 316 stainless steel luggage type quick release latches, or three-point latch system with all components 316 stainless steel. Latch systems requiring tools to open or close are unacceptable. C. NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel enclosures 1. Use for all locations unless otherwise shown or specified 2. Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3. Stainless steel continuous hinge CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 260533-5 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 5 of 14 4. Foam in -place gasket 5. Single point quarter turn latches (20-inch X 24-inch and smaller). All others shall have three-point 6. Manufacturers a. Enclosures housing electrical equipment may be constructed by the manufacturer of that equipment but shall meet the all the physical requirements specified herein. b. Eaton Crouse Hinds c. Hoffman d. Appleton Electric e. EMF Company f. NEMA Enclosures Company g. Cooper B Line h. Rittal i. Approved equal D. Classified Areas, NEMA 7/4X boxes (Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, or as defined in NFPA 70) shall be constructed as follows: 1. Copper free cast aluminum body and cover 2. Stainless steel hinges 3. Watertight neoprene gasket 4. Stainless steel quarter turn cover bolts with metallic handles 5. Manufacturers a. Enclosures housing electrical equipment may be constructed by the manufacturer of that equipment but shall meet the all the physical requirements specified herein. b. Eaton Crouse -Hinds c. Appleton Electric d. Approved equal E. NEMA 12 boxes where shown on the Drawings shall be constructed as follows: 1. Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2. Stainless steel continuous hinge 3. Foam in -place gasket 4. Single point quarter turn latches (20-inch X 24-inch and below). All others three- point latch 5. Manufacturers a. Enclosures housing electrical equipment may be constructed by the manufacturer of that equipment but shall meet the all the physical requirements specified herein. b. Hoffman c. EMF Company d. NEMA Enclosures Company e. Cooper f. Approved equal F. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. G. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. 2.5 DEVICE BOXES CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 260533-6 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 6 of 14 A. Device boxes installed in aluminum raceway systems for switches and receptacle, etc., shall be copper free cast aluminum, and shall have tapered, threaded, hubs, with integral bushings. Boxes shall have internal grounding screw, and a minimum of two mounting feet. Boxes shall be type FD. B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds 2. Appleton 3. Approved equal 2.6 CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES A. Conduit outlet bodies and covers shall be Form 7, copper -free aluminum, with captive screw -clamp cover, neoprene gasket and stainless -steel screws and clamps for conduits up to and including 2-1/2 inches. B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds Form 7 with Mark 7 wedge -nut cover 2. Appleton 3. Approved equal C. Provide junction boxes for conduits larger than 2-1/2 inches. D. All outlet boxes and covers for Class 1 Division 2 areas shall be rated NEMA 4X. 1. Manufacturers a. Eaton Crouse -Hinds EA Series b. Approved equal 2.7 CONDUIT HUBS A. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw B. Manufacturers 1. T&B H150GRA Series 2. Approved equal 2.8 GROUNDING BUSHINGS A. Grounding bushings shall be insulated lay -in lug grounding bushings with tin-plated copper grounding path. Bushings shall have integrally molded noncombustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150°C. Each bushing shall be furnished with a plastic insert cap. The size of the lug shall be sufficient to accommodate the maximum ground wire size required by the NEC for the application. B. Manufacturers 1. O-Z/Gedney Type ABLG 2. Approved equal 2.9 RACEWAY SEALANT A. Raceway sealant for use in the sealing of raceway hubs, entering or terminating in boxes or enclosures where such sealing is shown or specified, shall be 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 260533-7 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 7 of 14 A. Conduit wall and floor seals 1. O.Z./Gedney Co. Series CSM a. Type CSML-XXXP shall be used for all applications that do not require a recessed sealing bushing. b. Type CSMI-XXXP shall be used for all applications that require a recessed sealing bushing. 2. Approved equal 2.11 EXPANSION -DEFLECTION COUPLING A. Combination expansion -deflection fittings with 3/4-inch axial expansion and contraction movement, 3/4-inch parallel misalignment movement, and up to 30 degrees of angular movement in any direction. It shall be copper -free aluminum, with exterior tinned copper braid bonding jumper and 316 stainless grounding straps B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds Model XD 2. Approved equal 2.12 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Expansion fittings shall provide eight -inch movement, shall be made of copper -free aluminum, with exterior tinned copper braid bonding jumper and 316 stainless grounding straps. Provide internal grounding. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable. B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds Co. Type XJGSA 2. Approved equal 2.13 EXPLOSION -PROOF SEALS, BREATHERS AND DRAINS A. Explosion proof fittings shall be designed for Class 1 Division 1, Group D, hazardous locations. Fittings shall be copper -free aluminum, with seals, breathers and drains. Provide type ED, or as required for the application. B. Manufacturers 1. Eaton Crouse -Hinds Co. 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3. O.Z./Gedney Co. 4. Approved equal 2.14 KELLEMS GRIPS A. Kellems grips cables supports shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.15 CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT A. Pull and junction box supports, spacers, conduit support rods, clamps, hangers, channel, nut, bolts, washers, etc. and shall be 316 stainless steel. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable. 2.16 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION TAGGING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 260533-8 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 8 of 14 A. Use the tagging formats for conduits as shown on the Drawings. B. Conduit identification plates shall be embossed stainless steel with stainless steel band, permanently secured to the conduit without screws. Nylon tie wraps are not acceptable. C. Identification plates shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Corp. or equal. WE itne],I 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Unless exact locations are shown on the Drawings, coordinate the placement of raceway systems and related components with other trades and existing installations. B. Raceway Systems for the installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall not contain conduit bodies, device boxes, or raceway boxes containing less than twelve inches of bend radius. C. Unless shown on the Drawings or specified otherwise, the raceway type installed with respect to the location shall be as follows, including all materials: Raceway System Location 2. PVC Coated Aluminum (CRMC) Type All embedded raceway bends, underground duct bank bends of more than 20 degrees, and all raceway stub -ups to a minimum of six inches above finished floor or grade and in Chlorine and Caustic rooms. 3. Liquidtight Flexible Aluminum (LFMC) Type Raceway connection to vibrating equipment, and as shown on the Drawings in all areas. 4. Rigid Non-metallic, Schedule 40 PVC (RNC) Underground encased in red dyed reinforced Type concrete. D. All conduit of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. Mm 11}.14F.117T11T0lr 1I t17►P A. All raceway junction pull and terminal boxes and electrical equipment enclosures shall have NEMA ratings for the location in which they are installed, and as specified herein. B. The distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box shall not be less than eight times the metric designator (trade size) of the largest raceway in a row. This distance shall be increased for additional entries by the amount of the sum of the diameters of all other raceway entries in the same row on the same wall of the box. Each row shall be calculated individually, and the single row that provides the maximum distance shall be used. C. Provide cast aluminum conduit fittings for exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 260533-9 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 9 of 14 D. All raceway boxes and wall — mounted electrical equipment enclosures shall be provided with factory mounting integral welded mounting lugs. Bolt -on gasketed mounting lugs attached through factory -drilled holes are not acceptable for any raceway box or electrical equipment enclosure. Drilling through the back of any box or enclosure is prohibited, and if so installed, shall be removed and replaced, with no increase in the Contract Price or Construction Schedule. E. No penetrations shall be made in the top of boxes or electrical equipment enclosures in wet locations. 3.3 DEVICE BOX APPLICATIONS A. Device boxes shall be used for mounting wiring devices such as receptacles, switches, thermostats, lighting and other permanently mounted devices. All device boxes shall be installed with a minimum of 1/4-inch air space between the back of the box and the wall or back panel on which it is installed. The space may be created with enough 316 stainless steel washers to provide the required air space or may be mounted using 316 stainless steel slotted channel. 3.4 CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES APPLICATIONS A. Conduit outlet bodies may be used on conduits up to and including 2-1/2 inches, except where junction boxes are shown or otherwise specified. For conduits larger than 2-1/2 inches, junction boxes shall be provided. 3.5 CONDUIT HUB APPLICATIONS A. Unless specifically stated herein or described on the Drawings, all raceways shall terminate at an outlet with a conduit hub. Locknut or double locknut terminations will not be permitted. B. When conduits contain equipment grounding conductors the wire shall be grounded to the hub(s) associated with that grounding conductor. 3.6 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHING APPLICATIONS A. Insulated grounding bushings shall be provided and used to terminate raceways where the raceways enter pad -mounted electrical equipment or switchgear from the bottom where there is no wall or floor pan on which to anchor or terminate the raceway. B. All other raceways shall terminate on enclosures with a conduit hub, except for NEMA 7/4X areas. C. Grounding bushing caps shall remain on the bushing until the wire is ready to be pulled. 3.7 CONDUIT FITTINGS APPLICATIONS A. Combination expansion -deflection fittings shall be installed where conduits cross structure expansion joints, and where installed in exposed conduit runs such that the distance between expansion -deflection fittings does not exceed 150 feet of conduit run. Expansion -deflection fittings are acceptable in indoor locations out of exposure to direct sunlight or other outdoor locations which are shaded. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 05 33 - 10 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 10 of 14 B. Expansion -deflection fittings are not acceptable for use outdoors unless approved in writing on a case -by -case basis from the Engineer/Owner. Where combination expansion -deflection fittings with exposed non-metallic sections, are approved by the Engineer/Owner for use where exposed to sunlight or other outdoor locations which are shaded, an aluminum wrap shall be installed loosely over the non-metallic portion, extending at least two inches beyond the ends. The wrap shall be loosely secured, to permit movement, with at least two 316 SS fasteners. Nylon tie -wraps are not acceptable. C. Provide an expansion fitting with a minimum of six inches available movement shall be installed on the exposed side of under to above grade conduit transitions. Expansion - deflection fittings shall not be provided unless approved and protected as specified above. 3.8 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS APPLICATIONS A. Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls or at other locations shown on the Drawings. B. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 3.9 EXPLOSION -PROOF SEALS, BREATHERS AND DRAINS APPLICATIONS A. Fittings consisting of sealing fittings, breathers, drains, with sealing compound and fiber, as specified herein, shall be used as required to meet all the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 3.10 CONDUIT TAG APPLICATIONS A. All conduits shall be tagged within one foot of the entry of equipment, and wall and floor penetrations. B. Tag all underground conduits and ducts at all locations, exiting and entering from underground, including manholes and handholes. 3.11 RACEWAY SEALING A. All raceways entering junction boxes, terminal junction boxes, electrical equipment enclosures or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment shall be connected to the box, enclosure or panel using conduit hubs and shall be sealed with Raceway Sealant, as specified herein. 3.12 PVC RACEWAY TO PVC COATED ALUMINUM RACEWAY TRANSITIONS IN CONCRETE ENCASEMENT A. Transitions from PVC raceway to PVC coated aluminum raceway in concrete encasements shall be made as follows: 1. Terminate the PVC conduit in a threaded PVC female adapter. 2. Terminate the PVC coated aluminum conduit in a threaded male adaptor. 3. Thread the male PVC -coated aluminum conduit adaptor into the female threaded PVC adapter. B. Tighten the joint securely, then double layer wrap the joint with two-inch vinyl electrical tape for a distance of two inches each side of the threaded joint to prevent any contact between any exposed aluminum threads and concrete. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 05 33 - 11 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 11 of 14 A. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. No wire shall be installed between outlet points, junction points or splicing points, until all raceway sections are complete, and all raceway covers are installed for protection of conductors from damage or exposure to the elements. Conductors installed into incomplete raceway systems are considered improperly installed and are in violation of the NEC. The occurrence of wire installed in an incomplete installation, shall require the removal of such conductors from the project site, and replacement of the conductors at with no increase in Contract Price or Schedule. The raceway system shall be completed and inspected by the Engineer/Owner, before new conductors are installed. B. No conduit smaller than 3/4-inch electrical trade size, shall be used, nor shall any have more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as necessary. Conduit reducers which are the same type of the raceway shall be installed where manufacturer -provided enclosures are not available with conduit hubs larger than 1/2-inch at the enclosure to terminate 3/4-inch conduit. The raceway fill shall be adjusted to accommodate the smaller opening in the manufacturer -provided enclosure. Notify the Engineer/Owner prior to the installation of the raceway into enclosures with openings smaller than the specified minimum. Raceways installed without notice are considered unacceptable and may be required to be removed at the Engineer's/Owner's discretion with no increase in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. C. All raceways, installed underground, shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 43 Underground System, and be a minimum size of two-inch trade size unless otherwise shown in the plans. D. Raceways entering or leaving the raceway system, which could be subjected to the entry of moisture, rain or liquid of any type, shall be tightly sealed, using 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal at any possible moisture entry point both before and after the installation of cables to prevent the entry of water or moisture to the Raceway System at any time. Any damage to new or existing equipment, due to the entrance of moisture from unsealed raceways, shall be corrected by complete replacement of such equipment. No increase in the Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed. Cleaning or drying of such damaged equipment will not be acceptable. E. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of eight feet or less, as required by the NEC and as required to obtain rigid construction. Conduits shall be supported near the entry into any enclosure in accordance with the NEC. Conduits shall not be used to support other conduits, nor shall conduits be supported from cable tray. F. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one -hole pipe clamps in combination with one -screw back plates, to raise conduits from the surface. G. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on trapeze type hangers with horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter. Multiple conduits mounted on walls shall be supported using strut and 316 stainless steel conduit clamps, screws, nuts and washers. H. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc. shall be supported as specified herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 05 33 - 12 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 12 of 14 I. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps. Where attached to concrete surfaces, anchors shall be as specified in Section 26 05 29 Electrical Support Hardware. J. No electrical equipment enclosures, boxes, terminal junction boxes or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls. K. All conduits on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. Offsets in conduit runs shall all be done at the same point and shall all be the same angle, so the entire installation appears to be parallel or concentric at every point. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true. L. Conduits terminated into enclosures shall be perpendicular to the walls where flexible liquid tight or rigid conduits are required. The use of short seal tight elbow fittings for such terminations will not be permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters, where multiple penetrations are required. M. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in boxes shall have insulated throat grounding bushings. The grounding conductor shall be grounded to the box. N. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings. Running threads will not be permitted. O. Provide glued type conduit fittings on PVC conduit. P. Conduits installed which are not in compliance with these requirements shall be removed and reinstalled at the Engineer's/Owner's discretion. If conductors are installed when the improper installation is discovered, the conductors shall be removed from the raceway, discarded and removed them from the job site, replaced, re - terminated, retagged, and retested in accordance with the specifications. The function of the system shall be retested in its entirety. No increase in Contract Time or Schedule will be allowed. Q. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be used for the primary and secondary of transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. Use in other locations is not permitted, except for connections to instrumentation transmitters, where multiple penetrations are required. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall have a maximum length not greater than that of a factory manufactured elbow of the conduit size being used. The maximum bending radius shall not be less than that shown in the NEC Chapter 9, Table 2, "Other Bends". BX or AC type prefabricated cables will not be permitted. R. Seal the remaining openings or spaces of conduits passing through openings in walls or floor slabs to prevent the passage of flame or smoke where additional openings or space around the conduits are present. S. Conduit ends exposed to the weather or corrosive gases shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 26 05 33 - 13 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 13 of 14 T. Raceways terminating in Control Panels or enclosures outdoors or any wet or damp location or any location where plant process equipment is located, or any location not otherwise specifically designated as a dry electrical room, control room or office space, which contain electrical equipment or terminal blocks, shall not enter from the top of the enclosure. The raceways shall be sealed with a watertight sealant as specified herein. Enclosures entered from the top where top entry is prohibited, will be rejected and shall be removed and replaced regardless of the Division which contains the specification for the enclosure. The use of UL Listed conduit closures to restore the NEMA rating of the enclosure will not be accepted. Conduit entering the top of the enclosures shall be removed and re-routed to enter the enclosure from the side or bottom. Conductors installed in top entering conduits shall be pulled back to the nearest conduit body or junction box and re-routed with the conduit, provided the conductors are long enough to be re -terminated. Conductors found to be insufficient in length to be re -terminated shall be completely removed and replaced, re -tested, re - tagged, re -tested and the control function of the panel shall be re -tested. If the enclosure is provided by an OEM, the enclosure and its contents shall be returned to the OEM for a new enclosure. No increase in Contract Price nor increase in Contract Time will be allowed the Contractor for making these corrections. U. All conduits from external sources entering or leaving a multiple compartment enclosure shall be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wire way or other manufacturer designated area, directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated. Conduits entering from cable tray shall be stubbed into the upper section. V. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 4X or 7 and all wet locations. W. A conduit identification plate shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc. Conduit plates shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact identification plate location shall be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at the time of installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading. Conduit numbers shall be exactly as shown on the Drawings. X. Mandrels shall be pulled through all existing conduits that will be reused and through all new conduits two inches in diameter and larger prior to installing conductors. Y. 3/16-inch polypropylene pull lines shall be installed in all new conduits noted as spares or designated for future equipment. Z. All conduit that may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation, liquid chemicals, etc. shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits at the point of attachment to the equipment. AA. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access hatches or vent duct openings. They shall be routed to avoid such present or future openings in floor or ceiling construction. BB.The use of running threads is prohibited. Where such threads are necessary, a three-piece union shall be used. CC. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air plenums, etc. shall be sealed with Watertight Sealant as specified herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 26 05 33 - 14 RACEWAYS, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND FITTINGS Page 14 of 14 DD. Conduits shall be located a minimum of three inches from steam or hot water piping. Where crossings are unavoidable, the conduit shall be kept at least one inch from the covering of the pipe crossed. EE. Conduits terminating at a cable tray shall be supported independently from the cable tray. Provide a conduit support within one foot of the cable tray. The weight of the conduit shall not bear on the cable tray. FF. Conduits entering the top of electrical equipment enclosures from cable tray or otherwise routed from above the equipment in airconditioned dry indoor spaces shall coordinate their placement with the HVAC duct vents such that cold air from the HVAC system will not blow directly on the vertical conduits causing condensation. Conduits which cannot be located away from direct exposure to cold air from the HVAC system shall be insulated to prevent condensation from forming inside the conduits or shall be re-routed. In all cases, condensation caused by cold air from the HVAC system shall be prevented from entering electrical enclosures. Equipment damaged by water from condensation shall be removed, replaced, conductors re - terminated, and its operation retested with no change in the contract price or schedule. GG. All changes of direction on PVC coated conduit greater than 20 degrees shall be accomplished using long radius bends. Any field bends shall be made using equipment designed to prevent damage to the PVC coating. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 3QSECTION 26 05 36 CABLE TRAY PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 260536-1 CABLE TRAY Page I of 4 A. Furnish and install complete cable tray systems, with all accessories, fittings, supports, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Cable tray runs outline the general routing of raceways. Select actual routing in the field to follow Drawings as closely as possible and to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural members, or other equipment. Deviations in routing from that shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Engineer, with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule allowed. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, a complete tray layout and routing in a computer -aided format, fittings and hangers, with tray type, sizes, dimensions and support points. a. Submittal shall show tray routing, with elevations. b. Drawings shall show locations of tray hangers and/or concrete inserts where concrete inserts are to be used c. The use of the Engineer's Drawings as a base plan for the layout is not allowed. Calculations shall be provided for loading and deflections. Calculations shall be submitted in a format (Excel spread sheet and PDF on CD and or flash drive or acceptable equal) which will permit hand calculation verification by the Owner/Engineer. B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing installation and maintenance instructions for the cable tray and its components. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, Article 392 Cable Trays. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA VE-1— 2002 Metal Cable Tray Systems CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260536-2 CABLE TRAY Page 2 of 4 2. NEMA VE-2 — 2001 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely covered. D. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. T.J. Cope Allied. 2. Cooper B-Line 3. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 LADDER -TYPE CABLE TRAY A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C (minimum 100 pounds per foot load rating) ladder type tray. B. Material: Aluminum C. Finish: N/A. D. Inside Width: As indicated on the Drawings. E. Inside Depth: Minimum five inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260536-3 CABLE TRAY Page 3 of 4 F. Straight section Rung Spacing: nine inches on center. G. Each rung shall be capable of supporting a 200 pound concentrated load at the center of the cable tray span and width, over and above the specified cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5. H. Inside Radius of Fittings: Minimum 24 inches, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. I. Provide clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, nuts, bolts, washers, lock washers, all thread and grounding straps, all of 316 stainless steel. J. Dividers: Dividers shall be supplied to isolate cables of different voltage ratings that occupy the same cable tray. 2.3 WARNING SIGNS A. Permanent warning label shall appear on all straight sections and fittings and shall have the following wording: WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS A WALKWAY, LADDER OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS A MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR X111.1 M] I�\1419M *,i Bra n 11410 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines, and as specified herein. C. Conduits, containing wire or cables entering or leaving the cable tray shall be securely clamped to the cable tray, but the tray shall not act as the primary means of conduit support. Conduits or any other raceway containing conductors routed from or to the cable tray system shall be provided with their own independent supports. D. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 12 feet maximum. E. Use expansion connectors where required. Install bonding jumpers at each at each expansion splice plate. Bonding jumpers shall be rated for the cable tray ampacity. All tray systems shall have a continuous green insulated copper grounding conductor as specified herein. The bonding jumpers shall be provided in addition to the grounding conductor. F. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of NEC Article 392. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. Install a bare #1/0 AWG bare tinned copper cable through entire length of each tray (both medium voltage power and low voltage power and control) and bond to each cable tray section and bond the tray ground to the electrical system grounding electrode grid at all ends. If tray system is configured in a loop, then bond the tray grounding conductor to the power system grounding electrode grid at two points minimum. The tray ground shall be routed along the outside of the tray to avoid damage to tray conductors from the ground clamps. Bond the tray grounding conductor to every enclosure to which any tray conductor is routed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 260536-4 CABLE TRAY Page 4 of 4 Bond any metallic raceway which routes conductors to or from cable tray to the cable tray itself and to the cable tray grounding conductor. Route a bonding conductor from the tray grounding conductor through the raceway routing conductors to or from the tray system to the enclosure which the tray conductors are routed. Bond the grounding conductor to the enclosure ground bus. G. Use anti -oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 SECTION 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 26 05 43 - 1 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 1 of 8 A. Furnish and install a complete underground system of raceways, manholes and handholes as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Raceways for use in structural concrete is specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Division 1 and Section 26 00 00, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Manholes, handholes and associated hardware. 2. Plastic duct spacers B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 260543-2 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 2 of 8 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. ASTM A615/A615M-06a — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for concrete Reinforcement 4. ASTM A48 — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 5. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 6. AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 — Drainage Structure Castings, Section 7.0 Proof Load Testing 7. ASTM C-850- Specifications for underground precast concrete utility structures B. All excavation, trenching, and related sheeting, bracing, etc., as shown on the Drawings and listed in these Specifications, shall comply with the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) a. Excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926.650 Subpart P) - Excavation. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698a — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600kN-m/m3)). C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The precast manholes shall be manufactured in a NPCA (National Precast Concrete Association) Certified Plant. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Materials shall not be stored exposed to sunlight. Such materials shall be completely covered. D. Materials showing signs of previous or jobsite exposure will be rejected. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment, or materials shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 260543-3 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 3 of 8 II WIA1 , er"_1 2.1 MATERIALS A. Raceway System 1. Raceway system shall be Schedule 40PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC), designed for use aboveground and underground as described in the NEC, resistant to sunlight. The conduits and fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-2, Federal Specification WC 1094A and UL 651 specifications. Minimum raceway size shall be 2 inch. Fittings shall be manufactured to NEMA TC-3, Federal Specification WC 1094A and UL 514B. Conduit shall have a UL Label. Conduit shall be Carlon, Kraloy, or approved equal. 2. PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit shall have a minimum 0.040-inch thick, polyvinyl chloride coating permanently bonded to rigid aluminum conduit and an internal chemically cured urethane or enamel coating. The ends of all couplings, fittings, etc. shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC overlap. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Perma-Cote, Robroy Industries, Calbond or Ocal. Any field bends shall be made using equipment designed to prevent damage to the PVC coating. 3. All underground raceways of the underground system, terminating in manholes or handholes shall use terminators of the same size and type as the raceway 4. Blank Duct Plugs shall be sized for the duct installed on, and shall be TYCO Type JM-BLA-XXDXXXCR, with rubber gasket, or approved equal. 5. Duct spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon or equal. 6. Where raceways terminate into existing and new manholes, handholes or structures, the duct bank steel shall be anchored into the manhole, handhole or structure with a Hilti HIT 150 MAX epoxy anchoring system. The termination of the duct bank steel shall utilize a minimum 24-inch length of reinforcing bar anchored not less than four inches into the manhole, handhole or structure wall, and lapped into each reinforcing bar in the duct bank. 7. Concrete encasement for raceways and duct banks shall be normal weight concrete weighing not more than 145 pounds per cubic foot with compressive strength, a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch, or greater if required by other Divisions of the Specifications, at 28 days, Concrete shall have crushed aggregate with a maximum size of 3/4-inch, a slump of four to six inches and flow freely without the use of vibrators. Install red dye of 40 pounds per 10 cubic yards. of concrete, installed in the truck at the concrete plant. 8. Reinforcing steel shall comply with ASTM A615 Grade 60 and of a size and installation as shown on the Drawings. B. Manholes and Handholes 1. General a. Manholes and handholes shall be of the precast concrete type, designed for a Class H2O load with sizes as shown on the Drawings, and as manufactured by Oldcastle Precast, Mansfield, TX, or approved equal. 2. Construction CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 260543-4 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 4 of 8 a. Concrete for manholes and handholes shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 5000 PSI. Cement shall be Type 1 or III. Reinforcing steel shall be Grade 60 with minimum yield strength of 60,000 PSI. Design loadings shall be H-20-44 w/impact. b. The top of all manholes shall be field removable and have stainless steel lifting eyes. c. Duct bank entries into the manhole or handhole shall be centered on the entering wall and shall contain the appropriate number and size of duct terminators to match the corresponding duct bank. d. Each manhole and handhole shall have a minimum size of 1 inches by 12 inches by 2 inches deep concrete sump in the middle of the floor of the manhole or handhole, or as shown on the Drawings. 3. Manhole Covers a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, manhole and handhole covers shall be heavy duty 36-inch machined gray iron, and AASHTO M306-04/ ASTM A48 CL35B Minimum, 40,000-pound proof load value (Class H2O X 2.5) "True Traffic" load covers, complete with frame, and "Electric" or "Communication" raised lettering recessed flush, as required, on the cover. Covers shall be V-1600-5, with drop handles as manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, Ardmore, OK b. All castings shall be made in the USA, cast with the foundry's name, part number, "Made in USA", and production date (example: mm/dd/yyyy). Castings without proper markings will be rejected. Manufacturer shall certify that all castings conform to the ASTM and AASHTO Designations as specified herein. All casting shall be true to pattern in form and dimension, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes and other defects in positions affecting strength and value for the service intended. Angles shall be filleted and arises shall be sharp and true. 4. Access Hatch a. Where access hatches are shown on the Drawings, hatches shall be heavy duty aluminum, for H-20 load rating, sized as shown on the Drawings. Hatches shall be CHS Series as manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, Ardmore, OK. b. Material shall be 6061-T6 aluminum for bars, angle and extrusions. 1/4-inch diamond plate shall be 5066 aluminum. c. Unit shall have a heavy-duty pneumatic spring, for ease of operation when opening cover. Cover shall be counter -balanced so that one person can easily open the hatch door. d. Frame shall be of extruded aluminum with a continuous 1-1/4 inch anchor Range. A dovetail groove shall be extruded into the seat of the frame with a 1/8" silicone gasket. e. Hinges shall be of heavy-duty design, the material shall be grade 316 stainless steel, with a 3/8-inch grade 316 stainless steel pin. Hinge shall be bolted to the channel frame and diamond plate with grade 316 stainless steel bolts and nylon lock nuts. Aluminum shall be supplied with mill finish. Exterior of frame which comes in contact with concrete shall have one coat black primer. f. Each hatch shall be supplied with a stainless -steel slam lock, with the keyway protected by a threaded aluminum plug. The plug shall be flush with the top of the 1/4-inch diamond plate. The slam lock shall be fastened with grade 316 stainless steel bolts and washers. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 260543-5 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 5 of 8 g. Each hatch shall be equipped with a stainless -steel lift handle. Lift handles shall be flush with top of 1/4-inch diamond plate. h. Each hatch shall be supplied with a 1-1/2-inch threaded drain coupler on underside of channel frame for pipe connection. Hardware a. Cable racks shall be of the heavy-duty non-metallic type with arm lengths of 8 inches, 14 inches, and 20 inches, each supporting a load of not less than 250 pounds at the outer end. Racks shall be molded in one piece of U.L. listed glass reinforced nylon, Catalog CR36N with RA08N, RA14N and RA20N arms as manufactured by Underground Devices Inc. Northbrook, IL. Cable racks shall be secured to the manhole and walls by drilled, Hilti HIT-HY 150 MAX epoxy anchoring system, with Hilti 316 stainless steel bolts. Arms for racks shall be vertically spaced not greater than 24 inches on centers. b. Pulling irons shall be of copolymer polypropylene coated 1/2-inch diameter cable, with a rated pulling strength of 7500 pounds and a polyethylene pulling iron pocket, all recessed in the manhole wall opposite each duct entry. Pulling irons for handholes shall have the pulling iron located in the floor of the handhole near the center of the handhole opposite the duct entry. Pulling irons shall be as manufactured by M.A. Industries, Inc. Peachtree, GA. or Bowco Industries, Portland OR. c. Manhole and handhole ladders shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic, safety yellow, 18-inch rung width with 12-inch rung spacing, Safrail as manufactured by Strongwell Corp., Bristol, VA. Fumish a total of two ladders, each of a length four feet greater than the deepest manhole in the underground system. C. Polyethylene Warning Tape 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Brady Detectable Identoline b. Approved Equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 3. Warning tape shall be metal detectable polyester with subsurface graphics, black letters on red tape. The tape shall meet the OSHA 1926.956(c)(1), two-inch minimum width, for location tracing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall field verify the routing of all underground duct banks before placement. He shall modify the routing as necessary to avoid underground utilities or above ground objects. Modification or rerouting for the convenience of the Contractor, or to reduce the length of duct run as designed, will not be permitted. The Contractor shall provide any alternate routing of the duct banks to the Owner/Engineer and, after approval, shall proceed with the installation. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 260543-6 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 6 of 8 B. All changes of direction, less than 20 degrees, shall be made using a hotbox, strictly in conformance with the conduit manufacturer's instructions. Changes of direction greater than 20 degrees shall be accomplished using long radius bends of PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit. C. The Contractor shall saw cut and repair existing pavements above new and modified existing duct banks. The Contractor shall provide the alternate routing of the duct banks to the Owner/Engineer and after approval shall proceed with the installation. D. Install raceways to drain away from buildings. Raceways between manholes or handholes shall drain toward the manholes or handholes. Raceway slopes shall not be less than 3 inches per 100 feet. E. Reinforce raceway banks as shown on the Drawings. F. A #4/0 stranded bare tinned copper ground conductor shall be installed along the top of the rebar cage, as shown on the Drawings, for the full length of each duct run between manholes and handholes and bonded to a ground rod in the vicinity of each manhole and handhole. G. Lay raceway lines in trenches on compacted earth as specified herein. H. Use plastic spacers located not more than four feet apart to hold raceways in place. Spacers shall provide not less than two-inch clearance between raceways. I. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 24 inches unless otherwise permitted by the Owner/Engineer. J. Raceway terminations at all manholes, existing and new, shall be with terminator for PVC conduit. K. Blank duct plugs shall be used to seal the ends of all unused ducts in the duct system. Plugs shall be installed at all locations where the ducts enter and leave the manholes or handholes, and all entrances and exits to the underground system. L. Where raceways enter or exit the Underground System, and the raceways rise to a higher elevation upon entering or leaving the System, such raceways shall be tightly sealed at the higher elevation, both before and after the installation of cables, such that there shall be no entry of water or moisture to the Underground System at any time. Raceways shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal. M. No wire shall be pulled until the duct system has been completed in every detail. N. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable. O. Train cables in manholes and handholes and support and restrain them on cable racks. All cables passing manhole duct entrances in the manhole or handhole shall pass above all duct entrances. No cable shall pass in front of or below duct bank entrances. P. Polyethylene Warning Tape shall be installed in the trench above each raceway or duct bank and located at the elevations shown on the Drawings. Q. The Contractor shall tag all underground conduits at all locations, exiting and entering from underground, including manholes and handholes. R. The minimum raceway size shall be 2-inch unless otherwise shown on the plans. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 260543-7 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 7 of 8 A. The excavation shall extend to the width and depth as shown on the Drawings, or as specified, and shall provide suitable room for installing manholes, hndholes, ducts and appurtenances. B. Furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports. C. Excavation shall include material of every description and of whatever substance encountered, regardless of the methods or equipment required to remove the material. Pavement shall be cut with a saw, wheel or pneumatic chisel along straight lines before excavating. D. The Contractor shall strip and stockpile topsoil from grassed areas crossed by trenches. At the Contractor's option, topsoil may be otherwise disposed of and replaced, when required, with approved topsoil of equal quality. E. While excavating and backfilling is in progress, traffic shall be maintained, and all utilities and other property protected, as provided for in the Contract Documents. F. Materials shall be excavated to the depth indicated on the Drawings and in widths sufficient for installing manholes and laying the ducts. Coordinate the trench width the Details shown on the Drawings. The bottom of the excavations shall be firm and dry in all respects acceptable to the Owner/Engineer. Trench width shall be a practical minimum, but not less than 6 inches greater on each side, than the total duct section arrangement, including reinforcing steel. G. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of sub grade soils. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below, the designated sub grade, provided that material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no more than slightly disturbed. Sub grade soils which become soft, lose or otherwise unsatisfactory as a result of inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods, shall be removed and replaced by gravel fill, of aggregate as specified herein, as required by the Owner/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. 3.3 EXCAVATION BELOW GRADE AND REFILL A. Regardless of the nature of unstable material encountered, or the groundwater conditions, trench and excavation drainage shall be complete and effective. B. If deemed necessary by the Owner/Engineer, or as shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be required to deposit pea gravel for duct bedding or gravel refill for excavation below grade, directly on the bottom of the trench immediately after excavation has reached the proper depth and before the bottom of the trench has become softened or disturbed by any cause whatsoever. All excavation shall be made in open trenches. Gravel used for this purpose, shall be aggregate, as specified that is no larger than one-half the minimum clear spacing between electrical ducts, and a maximum coarse aggregate size of 3/4-inch. 3.4 BACKFILLING A. Remove from the excavation all materials which the Owner/Engineer may deem unsuitable for backfilling. B. Backfilling shall not commence until, not less than 48 hours after placing of any concrete embedment, have lapsed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 260543-8 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM Page 8 of 8 C. Where the duct banks are laid in the yard, the remainder of the trench, after concrete encasement, shall be filled with common fill material, void of rock or other non -porous material, in layers not to exceed eight inches in loose measure and compacted to 90% standard Proctor density at optimum moisture content of +/- 4%. The backfill shall be mounded six inches above the existing grade or as directed by the Owner/Engineer. Where a grass, loam or gravel surface exists prior to excavations in the yard, it shall be removed, conserved and replaced to the full original depth as part of the work under the duct items. In some areas, it may be necessary to remove excess material during the cleanup process, so that the ground may be restored to its original level and condition. D. Where the duct banks are laid in paved areas or designated future paved areas, existing or designated future structures, or other existing or future utilities, the remainder of the trench above the encasement, shall be backflled with select common fill or select fill material in layers not to exceed eight inches loose measure and compacted at optimum moisture content (+/- 3%) to 95% standard Proctor density. E. Compaction shall be by use of hand or pneumatic tamping with tools weighing at least 20 pounds. The material being spread and compacted shall be placed in layers not over eight inches loose thick. If necessary, sprinkling shall be employed in conjunction with rolling or ramming. F. Bituminous paving shall not be placed in backfill. G. Water jetting will not be accepted as a means of consolidating or compacting backfill. H. All road surfaces shall be broom finished and hose -cleaned immediately after backfilling. Dust control measures shall be employed at all times. 3.5 RESTORING TRENCH AND ADJACENT SURFACES A. In paved areas, the edge of the existing pavement to be removed shall be cut along straight lines, and the pavement replaced with the same type and quality of the existing paving. B. In sections where the duct bank passes through grassed areas, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove and replace the sod, or shall loam and reseed the surface to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the underground system. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of manholes, handholes and structures, using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 1 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 1 of 12 SECTION 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDY PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide a Power System Study for the electrical power system, including a Short Circuit Study, Coordination Study, Arc Flash Hazard Study, and additional studies as listed below. B. The electrical power system shall include the following: 1. Utility Company's Primary Fault current, upstream protective device, and transformer(s). 2. The Owner's entire power distribution system. 3. All existing and new system components, including any on -site standby generation. 4. Include the following a. An evaluation of the electrical power systems b. The model numbers and settings of the following: 1) Protective relays or devices 2) Metering devices 3) Motor monitoring devices 4) All settings required for power distribution and motor protective relays and electric system monitoring devices. a) Power study engineer shall provide updated settings for any existing equipment affected by the new installation either upstream or downstream of the new equipment. For any existing systems being modeled as required by the scope of work, but not affected by the new system, shall be modeled with their existing settings. C. Contractor shall Obtain and provide to the power study engineer, all pertinent data necessary for the successful completion of the Power System Studies, including but not limited to the following: 1. Information on all existing or new equipment and wiring pertinent to the Study. 2. This includes as a minimum the following: a. All cable and raceway data b. Data for existing and new motors c. Data from all existing and new switchgear, motor control centers, panel boards, and separately mounted fuses, starters, and circuit breakers. d. Obtain all existing and new protective device information to include at a minimum the following: 1) All present settings. 2) Obtain any needed data or information from Contract Documents, various suppliers, the Electric Utility and from conducting his own field investigations. 3) If during field investigations conflicts between the Contract Documents and the field conditions are encountered, immediately notify the Owner/Engineer for a resolution to the conflict. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 2 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 2 of 12 e. Copies of the data obtained, shall be organized, and submitted to the Owner/Engineer at the same time of transmittal to the Study Engineer, to show that all the requested data gathering work has been completed. D. Model all electrical equipment down to and including 480-Volt utilization equipment. 1. Model all motors and constant loads individually, including disconnect switches, if present. Power Study Engineer shall model a generic non -fused disconnect switch where shown on the one -line diagram for legibility. 2. The line -side of the 208V lighting panel shall be modeled. 3. Motors and constant loads 208V and below may be combined as a lump load. E. The Power System Study shall be performed using SKM Power*Tools. 1. Failure to model the power system study in the correct software will result in automatic rejection of the shop drawing and is to be redone in the correct software at no expense or additional time to the owner. 2. For new models, the studies shall be performed using the latest version of the computer software used for the power system study. 3. For work in existing models furnished by the owner, perform the studies using the same version of the computer software used by the Owner. a. Upgrade of the existing model version shall not be permitted without consent of the Owner and Engineer. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. B. Provide all the information required, to the Study Engineer in a timely manner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, and Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein. B. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. All submittals must be sent through the contractor. Submittals presented to the Engineer/Owner directly from the study engineer will be rejected and returned without review. D. Provide study revision log and date. Power study engineer shall provide responses to engineers comments for each shop drawing response. E. The following submittals shall be submitted in the order shown. Submittal No. 1: Preliminary Short Circuit Study and Qualifications: a. The first submittal shall consist only of the Short Circuit Study and engineer qualifications. 1) Submit qualifications for engineering firms submitted as an approved equivalent. If the qualifications do not meet the requirements of this specification, the shop drawing will be automatically rejected. The contractor will be responsible to hire the services of a qualified engineering services and to redo the short circuit study at no additional time or expense to the owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 3 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 3 of 12 b. This submittal shall be used by the Study Engineer to ascertain the short circuit current rating of the related equipment. c. At a minimum, power study engineer shall provide an interim review seal on the cover of the power study report. d. This submittal shall be made and approved prior to any shop drawing submittal being reviewed for electrical equipment for which the results of this preliminary study are required. e. The submittal and approval of the Preliminary Study is a critical milestone in the Construction Schedule. Failure to submit an acceptable study in a timely manner may delay the Project Schedule. f. No exceptions will be made for the specified sequence of the submittal of the Study prior to the submittal of shop drawings, and any delays caused by a late submittal of the Study will not be a cause for the Engineer / Owner to allow any extension of the Contract Time or change in the Contract Price. g. The use of infinite bus approach for the Preliminary Short Circuit Study is acceptable. However, actual utility data will be required for the Comprehensive Power System Study. h. Any other studies submitted along with the preliminary short circuit study, such as the protective device coordination study and arc flash study will be ignored and unreviewed by the owner/engineer, and will be evaluated under Submittal No. 3. Submittal No. 2: Comprehensive Power System Study: a. The second submittal shall be the Comprehensive Power System Study and shall include all items listed under "Scope of Work" in this Section: 1) Short circuit study 2) Protective device coordination study 3) Arc flash study b. Any additional Studies defined in Section 1.01. This Study shall include the Power Company's short circuit data, power company upstream protective device data, and transformer size and impedance data. c. The comprehensive power system study shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval, not less than 60 days prior to equipment startup for equipment containing protective devices requiring selections and settings for certification by the manufacturer. 1) At a minimum, power study engineer shall provide an interim review seal on the cover of the power study report. d. The submittal shall not contain unresolved questions, conflicts, or selective device coordination conflicts. A submittal containing such questions or conflicts will be returned unreviewed and shall not be resubmitted until such questions or conflicts have been resolved. e. The Study shall include an actual size sample of an Arc Flash and Shock Hazard label with typical information shown. f. No electrical equipment for which the results of the final study are required is permitted to be energized until the following has been certified as complete: 1) Comprehensive study results have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer / Owner 2) Relay and breaker settings are applied to electrical equipment requiring adjustable settings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 05 73 Section 16105 - Power System Study - 4 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 4 of 12 3) Settings are required to be certified as complete by the manufacturer's field representative. g. Delays in the Construction Schedule due to the submittal of unacceptable Power System Studies will not be a cause for the Engineer / Owner to approve any changes in the Contract Time or Contract Price. F. Operations and Maintenance Manual: The following shall be submitted as part of the operation and maintenance manual 1. Submit for Approval the Final Power Study Report. The Final Power Study and shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer once startup and commissioning of the electrical system has been successfully completed and contain the following: a. All changes to the protective devices settings, if any, as a result of changes made in the field to the proposed settings during startup and commissioning. b. All changes to the electrical distribution as a result of changes made in the field during construction. c. Final Report shall contain a signed copy of the Power Study Engineer's letter of certification that all protective device settings and arc flash labels have been implemented per their recommendations. d. Final copies shall be in electronic form (Adobe PDF formatted files). e. The final power study shall be signed and sealed by the study engineer. 2. Power Study Model Submission: a. Power Study Model data files, including any custom forms, labels, formats, and libraries, shall be transmitted at the same time in electronic format per the software recommendations b. Relay files shall be provided to the owner in two flash drives. 3. Training Agenda: Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Owner/ Engineer reserves the right to request a copy of the computer model of the study during construction for review. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The specified studies shall be in accordance with the latest versions of the following codes and standards. 1. IEEE Standard 1584 —IEEE Guide for Performing Arc -Flash Hazard Calculations, Including Amendment 1584a. 2. NFPA-70E - Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. 3. ANSI/NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code 4. Occupational Safety Hazard Administration (OSHA) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The studies shall be performed by an Electrical Engineering Services firm, who is regularly engaged in power system studies. 1. The studies shall be performed by a Licensed Professional Electrical Engineer (PE) in the regular employment of the firm with proficiency in electrical power systems engineering and shall seal and sign the final completed power system studies. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 5 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 5 of 12 2. The Study Engineer shall be licensed to practice Electrical Engineering in the State of Texas. 3. The qualification submittal shall include the Study Engineer's registration number, and verification that the Study Engineer has an acceptable level of experience using the specified software. Include a list of the projects were the specified software was used to complete power system studies as specified herein. B. The PE shall comply with the State PE Law in the submittal of the Preliminary and Final Studies. 1. The Preliminary Study shall bear the name and registration number of the PE who will be sealing the work along with the statement acceptable to the State PE Board which indicates the work is "Preliminary, Not for Construction" and is "Issued for Review". 2. The final report shall bear the Engineer's Seal, Registration Number, Original Signature and Date in accordance with the State PE Laws. 1.6 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. The selection of the Study Engineer shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval in a timely manner, in accordance with the time specified. The Study shall be completed and submitted in the phases as specified above. B. The completed studies, with all known issues resolved, shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval, as specified above. PART 2 - STUDIES 2.1 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES FIRMS A. The work experience resume of the Study Engineers who will be doing the work and the Professional Engineer who will be sealing the Final Study shall be submitted along with his / her PE registration number in the State where the equipment is to be installed. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following services firms are acceptable: 1. Strategic Engineering; Attn: Jeffery Wilbanks PE 2. Coordinated Power Systems, Inc.; Attn: Robert Stockinger, PE 3. Dugan Engineering Services, Attn: Adam Dugan, PE 4. K&A Engineering; Attn: Khaled Elgamal, PE 5. Eaton Engineering Services 6. ABB Industrial Engineering Services 7. Schneider Electric Engineering Services 8. No Equal 2.2 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. Provide a complete short circuit study. 1. Short Circuit Study shall provide fault calculations in full compliance with ANSI C37 standards. The use of Ohm's law calculations is not allowed unless written request is provided to the engineer for review. 2. Include three phase, phase -to -ground calculations, and X/R ratios. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 6 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 6 of 12 3. Provide equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation based on the actual equipment and model numbers provided on this project including any existing equipment modified in any way under this project. 4. Field verify the name plate data of all existing transformers, protective device equipment and the size and length of any existing conductors in series with the new or modified equipment in the Contract. 5. Estimate the conductor lengths in concealed conduit from field observations and any available existing conformed to construction record drawings. 6. Assuming generic devices or values are not acceptable. 7. Include the following electrical system operating configurations: a. Normal electrical system operating configuration b. Alternate electrical system operation Electrical system operations that could result in maximum fault conditions, shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. a. Provide single phase to ground and three phase to ground fault information. b. The study shall assume all motors are operating at rated voltage with the exception that motors, clearly identified as "standby," shall not be included. Electrical equipment bus impedances shall be assumed as zero. c. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated based on maximum available fault current at the switchgear busses, switchboard busses, motor control centers and panelboards. d. Provide the short circuit results using the worst -case scenario of the model. e. The study shall be performed using actual available short circuit currents as obtained from the Electric Utility. An assumption of infinite bus for the purposes of the Preliminary or Final study is not acceptable. B. Provide an equipment evaluation study to determine the adequacy of the fault bracing of all bus from the panel board level up to the main switchgear or protective device. 1. Include circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busway, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. 2. Provide a comprehensive table of all protective devices throughout the model that show the pass/fail status of the devices. Provide a brief summary of the equipment that is at risk of failure. C. As a minimum, each short circuit study shall include the following: 1. One -Line Diagram: The presentation of the One Line Diagram shall be on one or more 11 x 17-inch drawings with match lines if on multiple sheets, using font sizes which are easily readable. Include the following information and activities listed below: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct -acting trips, fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. c. Power and voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections (Delta, Wye, Grounded Wye, Zigzag, etc.) of all transformers. 1) Use the ratings of the actual transformers being provided where available. 2) The Final Study shall use the name plate information on the transformers provided. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 7 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 7 of 12 3) Use the actual name plate information on all existing transformers. Generic transformer data on new or existing transformers are not acceptable. d. The type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay shall be included. Field verify this information on all existing protective devices which are in series with the new equipment provided under this Contract. e. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generators with their sub transient reactance. 1) Field verify the name plate information of all existing generator providing power to the new equipment 2) Field verify the name plate motor information on all motors connected to the bus of existing equipment which is in series with the new equipment. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors. 1) Provide short circuit studies using each source of power separately. 2) The study shall determine if there is sufficient short circuit current to adequately cause interruption of a protective device using the weaker power source (typically local generation) and shall determine if the equipment can safely interrupt the fault if the greater power source is connected. 3) Additional short circuit calculations shall include emergency as well as normal switching conditions as well as normal and emergency power sources described here in. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, disconnect switches etc. shall be included. h. Arrange for the shutdown of the equipment requiring field verification with the Owner, Investigations shall be done at a time, including after hours, if necessary, which do not significantly interrupt the Owner's process operations. Impedance Diagram: The presentation of the Impedance Diagram shall be on one or more 11 x 17-inch drawings with match lines if on multiple sheets, using font sizes which are easily readable. Include the following: a. Available fault current or impedance from the utility company. b. Available fault current at each bus c. Local generated capacity impedance. d. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. e. Cable impedances. f. System voltages. g. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no grounding). Calculations: Include the following: a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume bolted faults and calculate the three-phase and line -to -ground short circuits of each case. b. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents. 2.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Provide a protective device coordination study. 1. Include all electrical equipment provided under this Contract, including Control Panels containing power and protection equipment, power panels and lighting panels. 2. Include any upstream or downstream equipment that has an impact on the Coordination Study. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 8 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 8 of 12 3. Show transformer damage curves, cable short circuit -withstand curves and motor starting curves. 4. Include the phase overcurrent and ground fault protection, as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. 5. Include all motor monitoring relays and protective or monitoring devices that are a part of a supplier's equipment, such as soft starters or adjustable frequency drives. 6. Include the last protective device in the Electric Utilities' system feeding each facility being considered. Include all medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage motor control centers, 480V distribution switchgear and switchboards, 480V motor control centers and 480 Volt panelboard main circuit breakers. Include the phase overcurrent and ground -fault protection, as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. B. Selective device coordination: 1. Coordination is required between protective devices in equipment specified in each Section of the Electrical Specifications, and between each piece of electrical equipment supplied for this project. 2. Include settings for the protective devices in existing equipment feeding any piece of new equipment and provide recommended settings for the existing protective device. 3. If the Study Engineer, during his work, determines that selective coordination cannot be obtained in or between pieces of existing and new equipment as specified, the Owner/Engineer shall immediately be notified, Provide the supporting information to the Owner/Engineer for resolution of the problem. C. Provide Time -Current Curves (TCC) on 8-1/2 x 11-inch log -log paper. 1. The Time Current Curves shall be presented in series only. Parallel branches shall not appear on the same TCC presentation. 2. Do not put more than one branch of protective devices on any one coordination curve. 3. Show a maximum of seven devices in series on one TCC. 4. Include a one -line diagram and the names of each protective device in the branch on the coordination curve drawing. Use the same color for the same protective device appearing on different TCC presentations. 5. Provide separate drawings for ground fault coordination curves. 6. Use the names designated in the Contract Documents. 7. Include motor starting curves and transformer inrush and damage curves, generator decrement curves, and cable short circuit withstand curves. 8. Provide TCCs for any energy -reducing systems being utilized such as BELT switches or Zone -Interlocking systems. 9. Provide a brief description of each time current curve describing the coordination and identifying issues, concerns, miscoordinations, etc. 2.4 ARC FLASH HAZARD STUDY A. The Power System Study shall include an Arc Flash Hazard Study that shall present the level of arc flash hazard for each item of electrical equipment, and the appropriate level of protection required per OSHA standards. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 9 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 9 of 12 B. The analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer software intended for the purpose, to calculate Arc -Flash Incident Energy (AFIE) levels and flash protection boundary distances. C. The analysis shall be performed under each possible condition and shall identify the worst -case Arc -Flash condition. The preliminary report shall describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst -case bolted fault conditions. D. The calculations shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 1584 and safe approach requirements determined in accordance with NFPA-70E. (Latest versions) E. All Arc Flash incident energy values shall be reported in the line side and load side bus of the protective device. The use of the protective device line side and load -side calculations is not approved. F. The Power System study shall include the following: 1. One -Line Diagram: The presentation of the One Line Diagram shall be on one or more 11 x 17-inch drawings with match lines if on multiple sheets, using font sizes which are easily readable. Include the following information and activities listed below: a. Arc Flash Worst -case Incident Energy (Between all scenarios) b. Arc Flash Worst Case Arc Flash Boundary c. Arc Flash Working Distance d. Arc Flash Worst Case Scenario 2. Submit the results of the Analysis in tabular form, which shall include, Bus name, Protective device name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, Electrode configuration, personal -protective equipment and Arc Flash Incident Energy levels. The analysis shall be presented on paper and included with the specified electronic format files. G. After approval of the Study, provide the Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels. 1. The Study Engineer shall oversee the installation of the required labels for each item of electrical equipment furnished on the project and for each item of existing equipment for which the arc flash hazard has changed. Z. A typical warning label shall be submitted with the Study for approval, and shall include the information listed below, at minimum. a. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. b. Limited Approach Boundary. c. Restricted Boundary. d. Incident Energy Level. e. Required Personal Protective Equipment Rating. f. Type of Fire Rated Clothing. g. Glove Class h. Fault Current at the bus i. Date that the study was performed H. Power Study Engineer shall produce the arc flash labels to provide to the contractor for the following locations: 1. Switchgear and MV MCC's a. One line -side label for the main breaker b. One line -side label for the tie breaker(s) c. One label on each vertical section, indicating the load side data for the switchgear bus CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 10 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 10 of 12 2. 480V MCCs a_ One line -side label for the main breaker b. One line -side label for the tie breaker c. One line -side label for the section adjacent to the main breaker d. One label on each vertical section, indicating the load -side data for the MCC bus 3. 480V Switchboards a. Two line -side label for the main breaker b. Two line -side label for the tie breaker c. Two line -side labels for each distribution section 4. 480V Panelboards a. Single label for the line side of the main breaker of the panelboard b. Label to indicate data for line side of the main breaker 5. Panelboards (240V and below) a. Single label for the line side of the main breaker of the panelboard b. Label to indicate data for line side of the main breaker 6. Control panels, including combination starters a. Single label at each unit operated at 480 Volts or above. b. Label to indicate data for the line side of the disconnect device. 7. Disconnect switches a. Single label at each disconnect switch operated at 208 Volts or above. b. Label to indicate data for the line side of the switch. I. Size of each label shall be not less than 3 inches wide and 3 inches tall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD SERVICES A. Protective Device Settings Installation 1. For circuit breakers rated 600V and below, the Power Study Engineer shall be responsible for providing legible settings to the contractor to implement into each protective device. 2. For protective relays, The Power Study Engineer shall be responsible for producing the electronic relay file for each protective relay for the contractor to implement in the field. a. The Electronic Relay file shall include all settings required for a fully functioning protective system. Settings shall be provided for all ANSI protective devices identified in the contract drawings and Specification 26 27 13 — Power Metering and Protective Relays. b. The power study engineer shall coordinate with the switchgear manufacturer to ascertain the base relay file to implement the settings and return to the contractor. c. For protective relays associated with generators and large induction motors, the power study engineer shall coordinate with the generator manufacturer and motor manufacturer to obtain the recommended protective settings for that equipment. d. The contractor shall hire the services of a qualified field engineer services to install the settings provided by the power study engineers. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 11 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 11 of 12 e. Under no circumstances shall settings be manually installed at the relay unless adjustments are being made to settings during startup. 3. For metering relays, The contractor shall be responsible for calibration and startup of the metering relays. The contractor shall hire the services of a qualified field engineer to perform this work. 4. All adjustments to protective devices made in the field shall be coordinated with the power study engineer. 5. Contractor shall provide letter of certification confirming that all settings have been installed per the recommendations provided by the power study engineer. B. Arc Flash Label Installation 1. Under no circumstances will arc flash labels be installed until the protective device settings have been confirmed to be installed per the recommendations of the power system study. 2. The Power Study Engineer shall be responsible for producing, printing, and shipping the labels to the contractor. The labels shall be produced for the locations identified in Section 2.04 of this specification. 3. The contractor shall be responsible for properly affixing the arc flash label to the equipment, in a readily visible location, as provided by the Power Study Engineer 4. Label shall not be cut or altered to fit in the disconnect switch surface. Coordinate the final locations of the labels with the Owner/Inspector. 5. The Power Study Engineer shall make a trip to the project site to inspect the labeling performed by the contractor and reprint any labels that are mislocated or damaged. 6. Label Installation Certification a. When the label installation is complete, the Contractor, the Contractor's Study Engineer and the Owner/Engineer shall jointly inspect each location and show to the Owner/Engineer's satisfaction that labels are installed in all the specified locations, and in any additional recommended locations indicated in the Study. C. Training Provide the services of the Arc -Flash Training Engineer or Power System Study Engineer to conduct a training program for the Owner's personnel. The class shall include the following: a. The class shall be held for not less than eight -hours across two days for each shift of maintenance and operational personnel. Conduct training at a location onsite to be designated by the Owner. Include class sessions in the field at equipment locations as may be required for instruction. b. The care, application and use of protective personal equipment described by the warning signs installed on the project. c. Conduct training at a location onsite to be designated by the Owner. Include class sessions in the field at equipment locations as may be required for instruction. d. Applicable information from the Power System Study shall be provided to the attendees. e. Instruction in the safe operation of the power system for both new electrical power distribution equipment included in the study and existing power distribution equipment which is in series with the new equipment. £ The safe operation of electrical equipment Kirk Key interlocks. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 05 73Section 16105 - Power System Study - 12 POWER SYSTEM STUDY Page 12 of 12 g. Power system switching which avoids configurations that may exceed equipment short circuit ratings, or that may cause other undesirable or danger if certain circuits are paralleled. h. Provide handout materials including one -line diagrams and O&M information for each person in attendance. i. Submit a detailed class syllabus to the Engineer/Owner for review and approval prior to holding the training class. 2. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training for the Owner's use. D. The cost of Field Services shall be included in the Contract Price and the schedule for training shall be included in the Contract Schedule. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 262213-1 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 22 13 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose individually mounted dry -type transformers of the two -windings type, self -cooled as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all dry -type distribution transformers, except as indicated otherwise. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, the Contract Documents and as specified herein the following: 1. The manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for the types of materials specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 3. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. 4. Unmarked cut sheets will cause the submittal to be rejected and returned for revision. B. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted Division 1. No change in Contract Price or Schedule will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review D. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the process equipment division of these Specifications, and as specified herein. E. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned without review. F. The original equipment manufacturer, (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262213-2 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 2 of 6 G. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Shop Drawings and Product Data. H. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Outline dimensions and weights 2. Typical/Design test data 3. Transformer ratings including: a. kVA b. Primary and secondary voltage c. Taps d. Basic impulse level (BIL) for equipment over 600 volts e. Design impedance f. Insulation class and temperature rise g. Sound level. 4. Product data sheets 5. Connection diagrams 6. Installation information 7. Date of manufacture for each transformer I. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Drawings of information required by the Submittals part of this Section. e. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as - built shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The dry -type transformer(s) and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA and ANSI standards as follows; 1. DOE 2016 Energy Efficiency Standards, 10 CFR Part 431 2. ANSI C57.96 2004 Guide for Loading Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers 3. ASTM D635 —Standard Test Method for Insulation Materials 4. NEMA ST20 5. UL 1561 6. IEEE-519 7. IEEE-597 8. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262213-3 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 3 of 6 B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Transformers manufactured more than 24 months prior to the date of this Contract will not be acceptable. G. Transformers shall meet the US Department of Energy (DOE) 2016 Energy Efficiency Standards 10 CFR Part 421. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. No change in the Contract Price will be allowed for storage or transportation. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years [except for variable frequency drives which shall be for two years, from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 2622 13 - 4 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 4 of 6 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB 2. Eaton 3. Schneider Electric Company B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. The ratings of the transformer shall be as follows: 1. kVA Rating: As shown on the Drawings. 2. Winding configuration As shown on the Drawings 3. Impedance: ANSI Standard Tolerance 4. HV: As shown on the Drawings. 5. LV: As shown on the Drawings. A. Insulation Systems 1. Transformer insulation system shall be as follows: a. Up to 15 kVA, three-phase and single-phase: UL recognized 180°C rated insulation system, encapsulated with 115°C rise. b. 15 kVA, and above, three-phase and single-phase: UL recognized 200°C rated insulation system, ventilated, with 115°C rise. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40°C maximum ambient, and a 24-hour average ambient of 300C 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. 4. Windings shall have a BIL of 10 kV minimum. B. Core and Coil Assemblies 1. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, non -aging, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade copper with continuous wound construction. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 262213-5 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 5 of 6 2. Transformer coil assembly shall be impregnated with non-hydroscopic, thermosetting varnish and cured to reduce hot spots and seal out moisture; the core shall be coated with HAPs (Hazardous Air Pollutants) free water reducible electrical varnish to give good corrosion resistance. The assembly shall be installed on vibration -absorbing pads. 3. On single and three-phase units rated 15 kVA and below, the core and coil assembly shall encapsulation system shall minimize the sound level. Enclosure construction shall be encapsulated, non -ventilated steel enclosure, with lifting eyes. 4. On single and three-phase units, rated above 15 kVA, the core and coil assembly shall be ventilated, weatherproof steel enclosure. All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. The assembly shall be installed on vibration -absorbing pads. 5. Terminals shall be welded to the leads of the coils for better conductivity, less maintenance and lower risk of hot spots. Terminals shall not be spot welded or bolted to the coil leads. 6. The neutral bus shall be configured to accommodate 200% of the rated current. C. Taps 1. Three-phase transformers rated 15 through 500 kVA shall be provided with six 2- 1/2% taps, two above and four below rated primary voltage 2. All single-phase transformers, and three-phase transformers rated below 15 kVA and above 500 kVA, shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard tap configuration. D. Isolation Pad 1. Each transformer, pad -mounted, bracket -mounted, or suspended, shall utilize double deflecting neoprene mounting vibration isolators as manufactured by Mason Industries Type ND, sized according to rated capacities. E. Finish 1. Enclosures, other than stainless steel, shall be finished with ANSI Gray color, weather -resistant enamel. F. Accessories 1. On ventilated outdoor units provide suitable weather shields over ventilation openings. 2. Lug kits shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the transformer. 2.4 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest applicable ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection 3. Applied potential tests 4. Induced potential test 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection PART 3 - EXECUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262213-6 DISTRIBUTION DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS Page 6 of 6 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. B. Securely connect all neutrals and transformer enclosures to ground. 3.2 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust taps to deliver appropriate secondary voltage. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262413-1 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 1 of 21 SECTION 26 2413 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS PART1- GENERAL A. Furnish and install assemblies of low voltage switchboard, together with appurtenances and associated equipment as specified herein, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned unreviewed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262413-2 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 2 of 21 D. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, shipping splits and metering layouts. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from the Specifications. 2. Conduit entrance drawings, including floor penetrations. 3. Bus arrangement drawings. 4. Unit summary tables showing detailed equipment description and nameplate data for each compartment. 5. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 6. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing internal wiring and interlocking between units and to remotely mounted devices. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 7. Master drawing index 8. Front view elevation 9. Floor plan 10. Top view 11. Single line 12. Schematic diagram 13. Nameplate schedule 14. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 15. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 16. Conduit entry/exit locations 17. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 18. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262413-3 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 3 of 21 b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 19. Descriptive bulletins 20. Product data sheets. 21. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 22. Switchboard floor mat 23. Busway connection and amperage rating. F. Factory Tests. Submit records of factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports. Submit records of field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Field Test Reports 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The low voltage distribution switchboard assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. ANSI/NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NEMA Standard PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards 3. UL 891 - Standard for Dead Front Switchboards 4. UL 489 — Standard for Molded -Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers 5. UL 1066 — Standard for Safety for Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 6. NEMA Standard SG-3 — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 7. ANSI — C37.13,16,17,50 — Switchgear Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. D. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. E. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 24 13 - 4 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 4 of 21 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 262413-5 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 5 of 21 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the switchboard. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the switchboard to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB — Industrial Solutions 2. Eaton / Cutler -Hammer 3. Square D B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. Switchboard 1. The switchboards described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage systems as shown on the Drawings. 2. The switchboards and protective devices shall be fully rated for a short circuit current of 42,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) or greater if shown on the Drawings. Systems employing series connected ratings shall not be used. 3. The manufacturer shall design the switchboard, including devices, for continuous operation at its rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. 4. Switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General The switchboards described in this specification shall contain factory assembled and operational tested circuit breakers and accessories and be self-supporting in a manner to be installed on a level concrete pad. 2. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 3. Units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262413-6 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 6 of 21 4. Where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or a uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). 5. Nameplates a. External 1) Furnish nameplates for each device as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. There shall be a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. b. Internal 1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. c. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. 6. Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, reinforced plastic, NEMA 4/4X/13. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, lens color shall be Red for ON or OPEN, Green for OFF or CLOSED, Amber for FAIL or ALARM. And White for POWER ON. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push -to -test feature. c. Mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE, etc) shall be as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons shall be Red for START or OPEN, Green for STOP or CLOSE, mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP (Pull to Reset), and Black for RESET. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262413-7 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 7 of 21 e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. B. Enclosures 1. Enclosures shall be indoor NEMA 1, freestanding, metal enclosed assemblies, consisting of dead front, completely metal enclosed vertical sections, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Where the main breaker section(s) are shown on the Drawings as remote from the feeder sections, and outdoors, the enclosures for the remote sections shall be NEMA 3R, non -walk in, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt -on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. 4. All sections of the switchboard shall be aligned with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices and load connections shall be front removable. 5. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. 6. Isolated compartments shall be provided for each main or tie circuit device and associated metering equipment. 7. Feeder devices shall be arranged in group mounted construction. Feeder section shall be isolated from main section. 8. The switchboard shall be arranged so that the uppermost operating handle shall not exceed 6-ft-6-in from the floor when the switchboard is mounted on a 4-in high equipment pad. 9. Where a cable pull section for utility and/or generator requirements, they shall be as shown on the Drawings. 10. Where switchboards are shown outdoors, enclosure shall be non -walk-in or walk- in, as shown, and meet applicable NEMA 3R requirements of UL. a. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking. b. Each cubicle bay shall be supported on a heavy gauge, welded steel channel base extending around all four sides, constructed to exclude rodents, vermin, and dust. Apply a non-flammable undercoating to the base and to the underside of the cubicle floor plates. c. Roof structure shall be watertight with a continuous drip edge channel on the front. Roof shall slope to the rear for water drainage. Apply a non-flammable, non -disintegrating, insulating compound to the underside of the roof to prevent moisture condensation. Holes for lifting eyes shall be blind tapped. d. Provide tamper resistant, padlock provisioned, weathertight, gasketed cubicle doors and switch handle covers, with stainless steel hinge pins. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262413-8 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 8 of 21 e. Raintight, corrosion resistant ventilation louvers shall provide air circulation within the structure, while excluding insects, vermin, dust and sand. f. Each cubicle shall have heavy duty, 240 VAC, space heaters, thermostat controlled, of sufficient capacity to prevent condensation with the equipment de -energized, while operating at half their rated voltage. Heaters shall be provided with perforated metal guards and a circuit breaker disconnect. Provision shall be made for a externally powered 120 Volt circuit. g. Ventilating openings shall be provided, complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters. h. Furnish and install a weather -resistant non -conducting rubber floor mat, minimum 3/4 inches thick by 4 feet wide, and extending the full length of the equipment lineup. C. Busses 1. All busses, including neutral and ground busses, shall be tin plated copper, sized as shown on the Drawings. Neutral bus shall be fully rated. 2. Busses shall be braced for the specified equipment short circuit current rating. 3. All joint connections shall be joined with bolts and conical spring -type washers. 4. Feeder sections shall have full height vertical bus. 5. Provide a tin-plated copper ground bus extending throughout the entire length of the switchboard, equipped with sufficient provisions for lugs for external ground connections, cable grounding conductors and conduit grounding, and sized for cables shown on the Drawings. 6. Unused spaces, or spaces indicated for future devices shall include doors, bus, device supports or mounting plates and connections. D. Wiring and Terminations 1. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 2. Mechanical -type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations, except for main incoming conductors, suitable for copper cable rated for 75°C of the size as indicated on the drawings. Main incoming conductors shall have compression type lugs. 3. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of external ground connections, cable grounding conductors and conduit grounding, and sized for cables shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 262413-9 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 9 of 21 4. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first, be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit terminal blocks, before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. Wire tags shall be heat shrink type "Brady" or approved equal with the tag numbers typed with an indelible marking process. Character size shall be a minimum of 1/8" in height. Handwritten tags shall not be acceptable. Tags relying on adhesives or taped -on markers are not acceptable. E. Main Section 1. Where the main incoming conductors are shown to terminate in the main breaker section, sufficient vertical space shall be provided to route the cables from the conduit entry to the main compression type lugs without exceeding the cable manufacturer's minimum bending radius of any of the incoming cables. Entry of incoming cables shall be as shown or noted on the Drawings. 2. Where an auxiliary cable pull section is shown on the Drawings, provide bus extensions and compression lugs for the number and size of incoming cables. Sufficient vertical space shall be provided to route the cables from the conduit entry to the main compression type lugs without exceeding the cable manufacturer's minimum bending radius of any of the incoming cables. Incoming cables shall be top entry or bottom entry as shown or noted on the Drawings. 3. Where the switchboard is served by an incoming busway, the switchboard manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination, proper phasing and internal bussing to the incoming busway. F. Surge Protective Devices 1. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, or specified herein, a manufacturer provided and installed, Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPD) (Type 2), as specified in Section 26 43 13 of these Specifications. Connection to the switchboard shall be with a surge rated disconnect, mounted integral to the switchboard. 2. Where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or a uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). G. Main Circuit Protective Devices CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 262413-10 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 10 of 21 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, single main or main -tie -main circuit breakers, 1200 amperes and larger, shall be individually mounted, insulated case (ICCB), three pole, 600 Volt, drawout type, electrically operated. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time it switch; high range instantaneous (fixed at the breaker's short -time withstand rating), adjustable ground fault pickup and delay; ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping, and overload, short circuit., and ground fault indicator lights. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, single main or main -tie -main circuit breakers, less than 1200 amperes, shall be molded case (MCCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, manually operated, Where Main or Main -Tie -Main breakers are automatically operated, the circuit breakers shall be individually mounted, insulated case (ICCB), 3 Pole, 600 Volt, draw out type, electrically operated. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; adjustable ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay. 3. Molded and insulated case breakers shall have a UL 489 listing. 4. Power Circuit Breakers shall have a UL 1066 listing. 5. Main devices shall be equipped with contacts for remote status trip indication and "inhibit" function as shown on the Drawings. Device rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. 6. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings H. Automatic Transfer Scheme (ATSC) 1. Where automatic transfer schemes for switching of normal / standby electrically operated circuit breaker arrangements are shown on the Drawings, as an integral part of the Switchboard, they shall be of the voltage and rating shown. ATSC's shall be 3 pole for 3 phase 3 wire systems and 4-pole for 3 phase 4 wire separately derived systems. 2. ATSC shall be the programmable logic controller (PLC) based type with a 1-hour uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD) (Type 3), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection. 3. The scheme shall initiate transfer of the load to the emergency source when any phase of the normal source drops below 80 percent of normal voltage. 4. The transfer scheme shall be adequately constructed to carry full rated current on a continuous 24-hour basis in all approved enclosures and shall not show excessive heating or be subject to derating. The transfer scheme shall be capable of withstanding all available system fault currents without parting of or damage to contacts during the fault clearing time of the system over current device. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 262413-11 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 11 of 21 5. The transfer scheme shall be double throw construction and shall have three positions operation: closed to normal source, open, closed to emergency source. Time delay between opening of the closed contacts and closing of the open contacts shall be a minimum of 30 seconds to allow for load stabilization before transfer is complete. 6. The following accessories shall be furnished: a. Close differential adjustable phase sensing relay set to drop out at 80% of rated voltage and pick up at 90% of rated voltage. b. Adjustable 0.5 to 6.0 second time delay to override normal source power outages (set at 2 seconds). c. Two auxiliary contacts to close on normal source failure for remote alarm. and engine start. d. Neutral (off) position adjustable time delay 0.1 to 60 seconds. e. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal (Ito 300 seconds). with 0 to 25- minute adjustable unloaded engine running time after retransfer. 7. Withstand ratings shall be the same rating as for the switchboard but shall not be less than 65,000 amps AIC. 8. A maintained contact test auto switch and normal/emergency pilot lights shall be mounted on the door. I. Interlocks 1. Electrical, mechanical and Kirk -Key interlocks shall be provided on breakers where shown on the Drawings. 2. Where Kirk -Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel or approved equal. J. Control and Instrument Power Transformers 1. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity. 2. Control power transformers shall be 120-Volt grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 3. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, feeder circuit breakers, 250 ampere frame and larger, shall be molded case, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, manually operated. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, adjustable instantaneous, adjustable ground fault pickup and delay; ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping; and overload, short circuit and ground fault indicator lights. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, feeder circuit breakers, less than 250 ampere frame and smaller, shall be molded case, 3 Pole, 600 Volt, fixed type, manually operated with over -center toggle mechanism. Breakers shall be electrically operated where shown as (EO) on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 262413-12 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 12 of 21 5. All circuit breakers above 250 ampere frame and larger, shall have trip units of the modular type for easy changing of trip range. K. Power Circuit Breakers 1. Where switchboards are shown on the Drawings to have Power Circuit Breakers for Main or Main -Tie -Main, the protective devices shall be drawout low -voltage power circuit breakers (PCB). 2. Power circuit breakers shall have ANSI C37.16 and UL 1066 certifications. 3. Circuit breakers shall be individually mounted, drawout, low voltage power circuit breakers, electrically operated. 4. The breakers shall have voltage and current interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings and shall be rated to carry 100% of the current rating of the breaker continuously. 5. Circuit breakers shall be metal frame construction. The interrupting mechanism shall contain arc chutes constructed to suppress arc and cool vented gases. "Flash shields" shall not be required in the breaker cubicle. Interphase barriers of insulating material shall be provided to isolate each pole of the breaker. 6. Each breaker element shall consist of a three -pole electrically and mechanically trip free power circuit breaker with self -aligning primary and secondary disconnecting contacts, integral solid state over -current trip programmer, arc quenchers, electrical stored -energy closing mechanism, position indicator, and equipped for mounting on the drawout mechanism in the circuit breaker compartment. Drawout breakers shall be equipped with wheels that will allow the breaker to be rolled into the cubicle once it is installed on the drawout rails. 7. Each breaker compartment with breaker shall be designed to permit remote racking of the breaker between the connected and disconnected positions. Remote racking, shall in no way, interfere with the Owner's ability to select manual racking of the breaker. The compartment design shall permit a control box to be connected to the operator with a minimum thirty-foot foot cable, permitting control from a remote location. The operator attachment method shall provide for racking of the breaker when the compartment door is fully closed. The remote racking operator shall be portable with a 120 VAC power cord. It shall not be possible to install the remote racking operator when the breaker is closed, and the breaker cannot be closed with the remote racking operator in place. 8. Circuit breakers shall have true 30 cycle withstand capability equal to its short time rating to help assure selectivity with downstream devices and minimize nuisance tripping when closing onto high inrush loads. All circuit breakers shall have a 30 cycle short time withstand rating equal to their symmetrical interrupting rating through 85,000 amperes, regardless of whether equipped with instantaneous trip protection or not. The breaker shall not use a hidden instantaneous or making current release to achieve its short time withstand ratings. The breaker close and latch rating shall be equal to its short time rating. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 262413-13 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 13 of 21 9. Breakers shall contain a true two-step stored energy mechanism providing quick - make quick -break operation capable of charging after close operation. Closing speed shall be independent of the Operator or control power voltage level. Maximum closing time shall be three cycles at nominal control voltage. 10. Breaker shall utilize a spring charging motor, manual flush -mounted charging handle, electronic closing circuit with anti -pump feature, and a shunt trip device. 11. Complete breaker operating status shall be available from the front of the breaker. Indicators in the breaker escutcheon shall provide closing spring status (charge/discharge), breaker main contact status (close/open), and breaker drawout position (connect, test, disconnect). 12. Glass polyester shutters shall be supplied to cover breaker primary line and load disconnects when a breaker is removed from its compartment. 13. Each breaker compartment shall be equipped with a metal instrument panel above each circuit breaker. The panel shall be used for mounting breaker control circuit fuses, pilot lights and breaker control test switches. Fuses for the breaker close and trip circuits shall be front mounted in dead -front, bayonet -type fuse holders. Three indicating lights shall be mounted on the front of the panel with lamps replaceable from the front. Toggle switches used for testing the close and trip circuits shall be mounted on the panels. Direct access to these control circuit devices shall be provided to facilitate routine maintenance and quick and safe replacement of fuses and lamps without opening the breaker cubicle door or panel. The auxiliary panel shall contain an engraved breaker circuit nameplate. 14. Each breaker shall have standard padlocking provisions on the front of the breaker to lock the breaker open and mechanically trip free. 15. Standard breaker interlocks shall include drawout interlock, which shall prevent the breaker from being closed unless it is in the TEST, or CONNECT position, a contact interlock which shall prevent moving the drawout breaker unless the contacts are open. A test position shall be provided to permit operating the breaker while it is disconnected from the power circuit. 16. Circuit breakers shall employ a rejection system which prevents insertion of a breaker with a lower interrupting capability (IC) into a high IC cubicle or insertion of a higher ampere rated breaker into a lower ampere rated cubicle or both. 17. Electrically operated breakers shall be complete with 120VAC motor operators. 18. Controls shall include close/open pushbuttons, control switches, red and green indicating lights to indicate breaker contact position, and other controls and indications as shown on the Drawings. The AC source shall be taken from a control power transformer internal to the switchgear assembly. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 262413-14 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 14 of 21 19. Each drawout breaker shall have provisions for a minimum of 30 dedicated secondary disconnect points. All breaker control circuits as well as inputs and outputs for the trip unit shall be wired through the secondary disconnects. Secondary disconnect points shall be self -aligning and automatically couple with mating points in the breaker cubicle when the breaker is in the "TEST" or "CONNECT" position. 20. Breaker Trip Unit a. The breaker trip unit shall be front mounted and shall allow full access to all trip unit information including trip status, pickup and delay settings, LED trip indications, and metering (where applicable) without opening the breaker cubicle door. A removable, sealable cover shall be provided over the trip unit to limit access to the trip unit. Trip settings, metering information and trip information shall be accessible with the sealable cover installed. Trip unit settings shall not be changeable until the sealable cover is removed. b. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with a protective trip unit system to open the breaker for overloads, short circuits [and ground faults] as specified in the following subparagraphs. The protective trip unit system shall consist of a solid-state, microprocessor -based trip unit, current sensors, trip actuator and interchangeable rating plugs. c. As a minimum, the trip unit shall have the following features and functions: 1) The housing shall be a metallic enclosure to protect against magnetic interference, dust and other contaminants. 2) The protective system shall have reliable programmable controls with repetitive accuracy and precise unit settings. Overcurrent characteristics (pickup and delay) shall be selected via rotary switches with detent settings. 3) All current sensing shall employ true rms technology for detecting overloads, short time overcurrent conditions and ground fault conditions where indicated on the Drawings. 4) The module shall be equipped with long -life lithium batteries, with automatic time delay shut-off feature, to provide observation of trip information. The module and batteries shall not be required for the trip unit to provide its protective functions. 5) UL listed field installable, interchangeable rating plugs. It shall not be necessary to change or remove the trip unit to change the trip rating. Rating plugs shall contain rejection features to prevent installation of a plug with an incorrect current sensor rating. Rating plugs shall also be used to provide the trip unit with ground fault protection. Rating plugs shall include ground fault pickup and delay setting switches. 6) Integral test jack for connection of a battery pack or test kit to the breaker. 7) The ground fault function shall contain a memory circuit to integrate low level arcing fault currents with time to sum intermittent ground fault current spikes. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 262413-15 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 15 of 21 8) A cover with provisions for sealing the rating plug and trip unit to make the installation tamper resistant. All trip unit settings, ratings, and trip information shall be capable of being viewed with the cover in place. 9) The trip unit shall display trip information for longtime, short time, instantaneous and ground fault trips. 10) The trip units for the main and tie breakers shall include the following protective functions: a) Adjustable long-time current settings. b) Adjustable long-time delay with four -time delay bands. c) Long time pickup warning indicator. d) Trip information for overload, short circuit and ground fault. e) Adjustable short time pickup and delay, with three delay bands, and switchable i2t ramp. f) Defeatable ground fault function with adjustable pickup and time delay, with three delay bands, and switchable Ft ramp. 11) The trip units shall be equipped with a switchable alternate adjustable instantaneous setting to mitigate arc flash hazard while doing maintenance on the switchboard. An isolated status contact shall be provided to provide remote indication that the switch is in the maintenance position. 12) The trip units for feeder breakers shall include the following protective functions: a) Adjustable long-time current settings. b) Adjustable long-time delay with four -time delay bands. c) Long time pickup warning indicator. d) Trip information for overload, short circuit and ground fault. e) Adjustable short time pickup and delay, with three delay bands, and switchable i2t ramp and adjustable instantaneous pickup. f) Adjustable ground fault pickup and time delay, with three delay bands, and switchable i2t ramp. d. Current sensors shall be mounted on the breaker frame and shall use encapsulated construction to protect against damage and moisture. For ground fault protection, a fourth, neutral current, sensor shall be mounted in the cable compartment, and shall be compatible with the phase current sensors. 21. Breakers shall be rated for 100% continuous duty. 22. Main devices shall be equipped with contacts for remote status trip indication and "inhibit" function as shown on the Drawings. Device rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2.4 METERING — MAIN BREAKERS A. Furnish where show on the Drawings, a Power Quality Meter, for each Main and Feeder Breaker, as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 26 27 13 Power Metering and Protective Relays. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 262413-16 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 16 of 21 B. A 100VA minimum UPS shall be provided, powered from the control power transformer to provide control power to the feeder management relays and power quality meters. 2.5 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as described in the Control Strategies in Section 40 96 30. B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection. D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. E. Refer to Section 40 96 15 Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters. F. Communication 1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided: a. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP protocols. b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/10013aseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP. 2. The protocol interface shall implement the following: a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register" memory area. b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm tests". 3. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria: a. The converter shall support 10/10013ase-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable. b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum. c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input. e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP or approved equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 262413-17 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 17 of 21 2.6 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard shall be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one minute between live parts and ground. B. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports as specified in Paragraph 1.03D. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Provide the following accessories: 1. Furnish and install a non -conducting switchboard floor mat, minimum 3/8-inch- thick by 3 feet wide, meeting ANSFASTM D-178-01 Type 2 Class 3, Wearwell 702 or equal, and extending the full length of the equipment lineup. 2.8 POWER QUALITY METER (PM1) A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. GE Multilin PQMII Power Quality Meter B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. All circuit boards shall have a harsh environment conformal coating to resist H2S gas and other corrosive agents, including humidity. D. Monitoring and Metering Metering Functions with accuracy of 0.2% for A & V and 0.4% for power parameters a. A, V, VA, W, VAR, KWH, KVARH, KVAH, PF, Hz b. W, VAR, A, VA Demand c. A, V Unbalance 2. Power Analysis Functions. a. Total Harmonic Distortion b. Individual harmonics c. Waveform capture d. Historical data e. Minimum and maximum metered values complete with time and date f. Record of last 40 events CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-17 262413-18 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 18 of 21 g. Two independent data logs E. User Interface and Programming 1. Integrated keypad to access actual values and set points. a. 2 - line, 40 character illuminated display for use with keypad. The display shall have: 1) Variable scrolling rates. 2) Front mounted LEDs to display alarms, communication status, relay status, simulation mode, self -test failure, and set point access status. 3) Relay reset button to clear alarm and auxiliary conditions. 2. The meter shall have one alarm output relay with Form C contacts. 3. Relay output shall be through alarm, auxiliary and pulse output functions. 4. The meter shall provide a user configurable pulse output based on KWH, KVARH or KVAH. 5. The meter shall provide a pulse input for demand synchronization. 6. The meter shall include a simulation mode capability for testing the functionality and meter response to programmed conditions without the need for external inputs. 7. The relay shall include a power systems option consisting of harmonic analysis, triggered trace memory waveform capture, event record and data logger functions. F. Control Power: 1. Range of available control power: DC: 88-300 VDC; AC: 70-265 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz. 2. LO Range: DC: 20-60 VDC; AC: 20-48 VAC, 48 to 62 Hz. G. Communication For remote monitoring, the following communication ports shall be provided: a. One Industry Standard port for meter and relay programming using a laptop computer. b. One RS-485 port. c. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The connection shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP. Where an integral port is not available, provide a media protocol converter as specified herein. d. The manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. 2. The protocol interface shall implement ModbusTCP Protocol with the following as minimum capabilities: a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register" memory area. b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "comm tests". CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-18 262413-19 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 19 of 21 c. Software tools shall function properly with slaves' only supporting Modbus functions 3, 4 and 16. Requiring support of diagnostic function 8 is not acceptable. d. Software tools shall be configurable to write a single register as either function 6 or 16. e. Software tools shall allow setting the Modbus/TCP "Unit Id" to be a value other than zero. This is required for Ethernet -to -Serial bridging. 3. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria: a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable. b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5Aminimum. c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input. 2.9 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Control fuses of type used. 2. One dozen each of cover bolts, spring nuts and door fasteners. 3. One quart of touch-up paint. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section for a period of not less than two working days, with not less than one working day per switchboard. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.2 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing low voltage switchboards with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-19 26 24 13 - 20 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 20 of 21 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the switchboard. B. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. C. Verify that the switchboard is ready to install. D. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed switchboard for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. krliwwM"\a,11R3 Yk,1#1 A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section. Megger for 1 minute for each measurement at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohm. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. Waty a W.,101 i-[e] A. Clean interiors of switchboards, panels, separate enclosures to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-20 262413-21 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 21 of 21 B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished under this Section. B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one eight -hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. Mel 1XII OM M9113121 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-21 262414-1 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 24 14 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS PART1- GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install low voltage load bank quick connect switchboards, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be factory constructed and assembled by that manufacturer. C. The Bid Price shall be in complete compliance with the Contact Documents. Any exception shall be included in the bid with a detailed explanation that clearly indicates the paragraph of this Specification and / or the item in the Drawings to which the exception applies. The Contractor shall explain in detail the reasons for the exception. The inclusion of an exception and its explanation as specified shall not constitute any obligation on the part of the Engineer / Owner to accept the Bid Price with the exception. D. This Specification shall have precedence over any conflict in the bidders submittals and / or descriptive information and the Contract Documents unless an exception is made at the time of bidding as specified herein, and the bid price is accepted with the bidder's exception by the Engineer / Owner. E. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, supplies, and shall perform all labor required to install the equipment specified in the Contract Documents in order to install, test, and place into satisfactory operation in the time specified for completion in the Contract Documents. Failure of any of the Contractors sub -contractors or suppliers to perform the work as specified shall not constitute an acceptable reason for the Owner to grant any change in the Contract Price or additions to the Contract Time. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. 1. Cut sheets for each individual item shall be submitted. 2. Each cut sheet shall be clearly marked to indicate the item submitted and/or mark out items which are not being submitted for approval. Submittals not clearly marked will be returned with the indication REVISE AND RESUBMIT as a minimum or other indications per the specifications as warranted. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262414-2 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 2 of 8 C. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. D. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 13. Descriptive bulletins 14. Product data sheets. 15. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 16. Floor mat E. Factory Tests. 1. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. F. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Field Test Reports CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262414-3 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 3 of 8 H. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. I. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted in hard copy format and in electronic format using PDF files including a Table of Contents which is indexed on DVDs. Electronic submittals are mandatory and those which are received not indexed as specified will be returned without review. Hard copy submittals may not be required if so stipulated in the Contract Documents. No change in Contract Amount or Contract Time will be allowed for delays due to unacceptable submittals. 1.2 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The low voltage load bank quick connect switchboards, and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards 2. UL 891 - Standard for Dead Front Switchboards 3. ANSI/NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.4 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two (2) copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment, and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 262414-4 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 4 of 8 C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the switchboard. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the switchboard to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. ABB. 2. Eaton 3. Square D 4. Trystar, Inc. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. The switchboards described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage systems as shown on the Drawings. B. The switchboards and protective devices shall be fully rated for a short circuit current of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes (minimum) or greater if shown on the Drawings. C. The manufacturer shall design the switchboard, including devices, for continuous operation at its rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature. D. Switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 262414-5 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 5 of 8 E. All Switchboards shall be floor mounted. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings and other required details. 2. Switchboards shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. Nameplates a. External 1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X'/z", or equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. b. Internal 1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. c. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. B. Enclosures 1. Structures shall be NEMA 4X, 316SS. 2. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt -on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. 3. All sections of the switchboard shall be front and rear aligned with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front and rear accessible. Rear access shall be provided. 4. Where switchboard is shown installed against a wall or other location where the switchboard does not have space for rear access, all sections of the switchboard shall be rear aligned with depth as shown on the Drawings. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible. 5. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. 6. Where switchboards are shown outdoors, enclosure shall be non -walk-in, as shown, and meet applicable NEMA 4X requirements of UL. a. Each section shall have front and rear access. b. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262414-6 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 6 of 8 c. The cubicle bay shall be supported on a heavy gauge, welded steel channel base extending around all four sides, constructed to exclude rodents, vermin, and dust. Apply a non-flammable undercoating to the base and to the underside of the cubicle floor plates. d. Roof structure shall be watertight with a continuous drip edge channel on the front. Roof shall slope to the rear for water drainage. e. Holes for lifting eyes shall be blind tapped. f. Provide tamper resistant, padlockable, weathertight, gasketed cubicle doors and switch handle covers, with stainless steel hinge pins. g. Raintight, corrosion resistant ventilation louvers shall provide air circulation within the structure, while excluding insects, vermin, dust and sand. h. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt -on rear covers for each section. C. Busses 1. All busses shall be tin plated copper, sized as shown on the Drawings. 2. Busses shall be braced for the specified equipment short circuit current rating. 3. All joint connections shall be joined with bolts and conical spring -type washers. 4. Provide a tin plated copper ground bus extending throughout the entire length of the switchboard, equipped with sufficient provisions for lugs for external ground connections, cable grounding conductors and conduit grounding, and sized for cables shown on the Drawings. D. Wiring and Terminations 1. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 2. Load bank cables shall terminate in Cam-Lok style receptacles, shall be provided for all load bank cables, and shall be suitable for copper cable rated for 75 degrees C. 3. The incoming cables shall be terminated on buss bars with 2 hole lugs. 2.4 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard shall be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports as specified in Paragraph 1.03D. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish and install a non -conducting floor mat, minimum 3/8 inch thick by 3 feet wide, meeting ANSI/ASTM D-178-01 Type 2 Class 3, Wearwell 702 or equal, and extending the full length of the equipment lineup. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262414-7 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 7 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this Section for a period of not less than 2 working days, with not less than one working day per switchboard. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.2 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing low voltage switchboards with minimum 5 years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the switchboard. B. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. C. Verify that the switchboard is ready to install. D. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed switchboard for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 FIELD ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance of each bus section. Megger for 1 minute for each measurement at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohm. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. 3.8 CLEANING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262414-8 LOW VOLTAGE LOAD BANK QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARDS Page 8 of 8 A. Clean interiors of switchboards, panels, separate enclosures to remove construction debris, dirt, shipping materials. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished under this Section. B. The training shall be for a period of not less than one (1) eight hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 1 PANELBOARDS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install panelboard(s) as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all panelboards, except as indicated otherwise. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering to produce coordination curves, showing coordination between breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision without review. D. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 2 PANELBOARDS Page 2 of 6 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Top view 4. Nameplate schedule 5. UL Listing of the completed assembly 6. Conduit entry/exit locations 7. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 8. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 9. Descriptive bulletins 10. Product data sheets. 11. Cable terminal sizes. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The low voltage panelboard assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. UL 67 - Panelboards 2. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes 3. NEMA PB-1 2006 - Panelboards 4. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 3 PANELBOARDS Page 3 of 6 D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. The instructions shall include detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams, rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment, bolt torqueing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections, and instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants. D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable. 1. General Electric 2. Eaton 3. Square D 4. Approved equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 4 PANELBOARDS Page 4 of 6 A. The service voltage, overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and components shall be as shown on the Drawings, except that the minimum interrupting rating shall be 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 240/120 volt single- phase or 208Y/120 volt three-phase. The minimum interrupting for 480Y/277 volt three-phase shall be 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Panelboards employing series connected ratings for main, feeder and branch devices are not acceptable and shall not be provided. B. Panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment. C. Where the panelboard is shown or specified to contain a surge protective device (SPD), the complete panelboard, including the SPD, shall be UL67 listed. D. Panelboards shall be designed for continuous operation, at rated current, in a 40°C ambient. E. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to the Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and components, and other required details. 2. A nameplate shall be provided listing manufacturer's name, panel type and rating. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than l/16-inch thick by 3/4-inch by 2-1/2-inch, Rowmark 322402, or equal. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2 inch, or equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residues has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. B. Enclosures 1. General a. Each enclosure shall be provided with a legend pocket on the inner door. b. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. 2. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel hinge pins 3) Foam in -place gasket 3. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Steel 1) Mild Steel body and door 2) Stainless steel hinge Pins 4. Not otherwise Defined a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel hinges CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 5 PANELBOARDS Page 5 of 6 4) Foam in -place gasket 5. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. C. Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) Where panelboards are shown or specified to include an SPD, the panelboard manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the Type 2 SPD, and the SPD shall be located within the panelboard, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 43 13 for specifications of the SPDs, and the required submittals to be included under this Section. Submittals not containing the required information in Section 26 43 13 will be returned un-reviewed. The SPD shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. The SPD shall be interfaced to the panelboard via a direct bus bar connection. The SPD shall not limit the use of through -feed lugs, sub -feed lugs, and sub -feed breaker options. See Section 26 43 13 for additional requirements. D. Exteriors 1. Unless otherwise noted, all panels shall be designed for surface mounting. 2. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be provided on all panels. 3. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48 inches in height shall have a vault handle and three-point latch, complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. Furnish two keys for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished on each door. E. Interiors 1. At least four studs for mounting the panelboard interior shall be furnished. 2. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be so designed that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping. 3. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wire connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti - turn solderless type and all shall be suitable for copper wire of the sizes indicated. F. Busses 1. All busses, including neutral busses and ground bars, shall be of tin-plated copper. Neutral busses shall be full size. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be tin plated copper. 2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted into them. 4. Equipment ground bars, of tin-plated copper, shall be furnished. 5. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 24 16Section 16000 Electrical - General Provisions - 6 PANELBOARDS Page 6 of 6 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as shown on the Drawings. B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt -on type. C. Each circuit breaker used in 208Y/120-volt, three phase, or 120/240-volt single phase, panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 22,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical. D. Each circuit breaker used in 480Y/277 volt and 480-volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 65,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical. E. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount boxes for surface mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2-inch air space between the box and the wall. B. Connect panelboard branch circuit loads so that the load is distributed as equally as possible between the phase busses. C. Type circuit directories giving location and nature of load served. Install circuit directories in each panelboard. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 27 26 - 1 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 27 26 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and install wiring devices as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide all interconnecting conduit and branch circuit wiring for receptacle circuits in accordance with the NEC. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 and the Contract Drawings, for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit catalog data of all switches, receptacles and other specified items under this Section, with all options, application locations and exceptions clearly indicated. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Wiring devices shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labeled. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted., B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants. D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262726-2 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 2 of 8 A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Imo\ ���► ' ' �711L�JIJf.� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers listed in each product category are acceptable. B. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. The service voltage, shall be as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the equipment. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Wall switches shall be heavy duty, industrial specification grade, toggle action, flush mounting quiet type. All switches shall conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WS 896. 1. Manufacturer a. Cooper (catalog number as listed) b. Hubbell, Inc. c. Pass & Seymour, Inc. d. Approved equal 2. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt— (Cooper 2221 V) 3. Double pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt — (Cooper. 2222V) 4. Three way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt — (Cooper 2223V) 5. Four way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt — (Cooper 2224V) 6. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt -key operated -(Cooper AH1191N) 7. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt -red pilot -lighted handle —(Cooper 2221PL) 8. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120 Volt, clear lighted handle —(Cooper 2221LTV) 9. Momentary contact, three position, 2 circuit, center off — (Cooper 1995 V) B. Fluorescent wall box dimmer switch for 120/277 Volt control of rapid start fluorescent lamps with a dimming range of 100% to 0.5% light for 120-volt and 100% to 1% light for 277-volt. 1. Manufacturers a. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. b. Lithonia Control Systems c. Valmont Electric, Inc. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262726-3 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 3 of 8 d. Approved equal. C. Explosion -proof single pole factory sealed switches shall be for 20 Amps, 120/277 volts, mounted in copper free aluminum boxes. 1. Manufacturers a. Crouse -Hinds EDS Series b. Appleton Electric Co. c. Killark d. Approved equal. D. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, corrosion resistant, specification grade of the following types and manufacturer or equal. Receptacles shall conform to Fed Spec WC596. 1. Manufacturers a. Cooper (catalog numbers as listed) b. Hubbell, Inc. c. Pass & Seymour, Inc. d. Approved equal 2. Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding, high impact, arc and moisture resistant yellow nylon construction, heavy nickel plating on metal parts; (Cooper 5362CRY 3. Single, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; (Cooper 5461GY) E. Weatherproof covers 1. Die cast aluminum. Plastic or other non-metallic in -use covers are not acceptable. 2. Weatherproof while -in -use rating 3. Manufacturers a. Eaton Catalog No. WIUMH/V b. Thomas & Betts c. Approved equal F. Special purpose 1. Manufacturers a. Cooper (catalog number as listed) b. Hubbell c. Pass & Seymour d. Approved equal 2. Clock hanger single, 15 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire, with hanging hook on device plate. (Cooper 452) 3. Single, corrosion resistant locking, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. CRL520R and plug (Cooper CRL520P) 4. Single twist -lock, 30 Amp, 125 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. CRL530R; plug. (Cooper CRL530P) 5. Single twist -lock, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. CRL620R; plug. (Cooper CRL620P) similar by Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal. 6. Single twist -lock, 30 Amp, 250 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire; Cooper, Catalog No. CRL630R; plug. (Cooper CRL630P) G. Explosion -proof receptacles and plugs CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 262726-4 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 4 of 8 1. Manufacturers a. Appleton Electric (Catalog number as listed) b. Crouse -Hinds c. Hubbell Inc. d. Approved equal. 2. Single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire. (Appleton EFSC175-2023 and plug ECP-2023) 3. Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire. (Appleton EFSC275-2023 and plug, ECP-2023) 4. Single, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire. (Appleton EFSC175-20232 and plug ECP-20232) 5. Duplex, 20 Amp, 250 Volt, 1 Phase, 3 Wire. (Appleton EFSC275-20232 and plug ECP-20232) H. Device Plates 1. Plates for indoor flush mounted devices shall be of the required number of gangs for the application involved and shall be as follows: a. Administration type buildings: Smooth, high impact nylon of the same manufacturer and color as the device. Final color to be as selected by the Architect. b. Where permitted in other areas of the plant, flush mounted devices in cement block construction shall be Type 302 high nickel (18-8) stainless steel of the same manufacturer as the devices. 2. Plates for indoor surface mounted device boxes shall be cast metal of the same material as the box, Crouse -Hinds No. DS23G and DS32G, or equal. 3. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard plates do not fully cover the wall opening. 4. Device plates for switches mounted outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall be gasketed, cast aluminum with provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off', Crouse Hinds No. DS185, or equal. 5. Multiple surface mounted devices shall be ganged in a single, common box and provided with an adapter, if necessary, to allow mounting of single gang device plates on multi -gang cast boxes. 6. Engraved device plates shall be provided where required. 7. Weatherproof, gasketed cover for GFI receptacle mounted in a FS/FD box a. Manufacturers 1) Cooper, Catalog No. 4501-FS 2) Hubbell, Inc. 3) Pass & Seymour, Inc. 4) Approved equal. I. Three Phase Power Receptacles 1. Three phase power receptacles and plugs shall be rated for the voltage and current ratings of the connected load unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Receptacles and plug housings shall be constructed of copper free aluminum listed to UL standard 498 for watertight construction. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 3. Performance a. Maximum working voltage: 600 volts RMS. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 262726-5 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 5 of 8 b. Dielectric withstand voltage: 3000 volts. c. Full load break capability at rated current. d. 5000 connect/disconnect cycles at rated voltage and current. 4. Furnish and install one mating plug with each receptacle. 5. Provide the following features: a. Color coded by voltage. b. One-piece housing/angled back box c. Shrouded pins d. Self -closing gasketed cover. e. Watertight cable entrances/stress relief grips. f. Mating keys. 6. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Hubbell (North American Rated Series II) b. General Electric c. Cooper d. Meltric J. Interlocked Three Phase Power Receptacles 1. Interlocked three phase power receptacles shall include a combination receptacle and a mechanically interlocked disconnect switch. The two units shall be interlocked to prevent removal or insertion of the plug unless the switch is in the OFF position. The receptacle shall meet the requirements of Power Receptacles specified herein. 2. Provide a matching plug for every unit furnished. 3. Switch, power receptacle and mating plug shall be constructed of copper free aluminum. 4. Assembly shall be listed to LJL Standard 498 for watertight- construction. 5. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 6. Performance: a. Maximum working voltage: 600 volts RMS. b. Dielectric withstand voltage: 3000 volts. c. Full load break capability at rated current. d. 5000 connect/disconnect cycles at rated voltage and current. Provide the following features: a. Color coded by voltage. b. One-piece housing/angled back box c. Shrouded pins d. Self -closing gasketed cover. e. Watertight cable entrances/stress relief grips. f. Mating keys. 8. The disconnect switch shall be unfused or fused, as shown on the Drawings, or otherwise specified herein or if required by the NEC, with ratings as hereinbefore specified. Provide lockout provisions on the disconnect switch handle. 9. Manufacturers a. Crouse -Hinds b. Appleton c. Killark d. Hubbell CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262726-6 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 6 of 8 K. 30 Amp, 480 volt Receptacles 1. 30 Amp, 480 Volt receptacles shall be 3 Pole, 4 Wire, grounding pin and sleeve type, with circuit breaking capability. The receptacle shall meet the requirements of Power Receptacles specified herein. 2. Manufacturers a. Crouse Hinds Arktite style 2, Catalog No. ARE 3423 b. Approved equal 3. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 4. Furnish and install one matching plug for each receptacle shown on the Drawings. L. Welding Receptacles and Disconnect Switches 1. Manufacturers: a. Crouse Hinds Arktite Receptacles with Enclosed Safety Switches", Catalog No. WSR103542. b. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 3. Welding receptacles and disconnect switches shall be rated 600 Volts, 100 Amp, 3- pole, 4-wire, 60 Hz. Receptacle shall be mechanically interlocked with its disconnect switch to prevent breaking the circuit with the receptacle and plug. Ground wire shall be bonded to the plug and receptacle housings. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 4. The receptacle shall meet the requirements of Power Receptacles specified herein. 4. Furnish and install one matching plug for the welder. M. Portable Generator Input Receptacle 1. Portable generator input receptacle shall be weatherproof, rated for 600 Volts, 100 Amp, 3 Phase, 4 Wire grounding pin and sleeve type with a 15 degree mounting adapter, spring door cover. 2. Manufacturers a. Crouse Hinds Catalog No. 1042522 with plug, Crouse Hinds Catalog No. APJ 1O487S22 3. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 4. Both receptacle and plug shall have reversed contacts. N. Poke -Through Service Fittings 1. Poke -through service fittings shall be installed in a two-inch core drilled hole, fit floor thicknesses of 2-1/2 inches to 7 inches and be fire rated. 2. Poke -through service fittings shall be provided with barriers to handle both high and low tension services and be designed for both new construction and building retrofit. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262726-7 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 7 of 8 3. Service fitting heads shall each contain a 20 Amp, 125-volt, 2-pole, 3-wire duplex receptacle on one side and provisions for up to two-25 pair telephone cables on the remaining side. 4. Manufacturers a. Raceway Components b. Walker c. Square D d. Approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Switches and receptacles shall be installed flush with the finished wall surfaces in areas with stud frame and gypsum board construction, in dry areas with cement block construction or when raceways are shown as concealed on the Drawings. B. Do not install flush mounted devices in areas designated DAMP, WET or WET/CORROSIVE on the Drawings. Provide surface mounted devices in these areas. C. Provide weatherproof devices covers in areas designated WET or WET/CORROSIVE on the Drawings. D. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, wall switches and other wall mounted controls shall be installed at 54 inches AFT. E. Convenience receptacles shall be 36 inches above the floor unless otherwise shown. F. Convenience receptacles installed outdoors and in rooms where equipment may be hosed down shall be 36 inches above floor or grade. Switches shall be ganged together under one cover plate. G. The location of all devices is shown, in general, on the Drawings and may be varied within reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the approval of the Owner. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance. H. Convenience receptacles and light switches shall be connected using stranded pig tails and spring fork insulated lugs. Feed -through wiring of receptacles is prohibited. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding. Energize the circuit to demonstrate compliance with the requirements. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262726-8 LIGHT SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 2628 16 - 1 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 2816 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish and install low voltage enclosed circuit breakers and disconnect switches, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be factory constructed and assembled by that manufacturer. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, will not be accepted prior to approval of the Power System Study specified under Section 26 05 73. Submittals made prior to such approval will be returned unreviewed. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be a cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision without review. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262816-2 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 2 of 8 D. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective trip devices on circuit breakers and switches, relaying, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. 2. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing internal wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 3. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 4. Schematic diagram 5. Nameplate schedule 6. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 7. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 8. Conduit entry/exit locations 9. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 10. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 11. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. 12. Busway connection and amperage rating. 13. Instruction and renewal parts books. F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262816-3 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 3 of 8 d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. I. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard AB 1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. IEEE 242 — Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 5. IEEE 399 — Power Systems Analysis 6. UL 489 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 7. UL 1066 — Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 2628 16 - 4 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 4 of 8 B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. The instructions shall include detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams, rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment, bolt torqueing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections, and instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. C. Equipment shall be stored indoors and protected from moisture, dust and other contaminants. D. Equipment shall not be installed until the location is finished and protected from the elements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment or components shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 2. Eaton 3. Siemens 4. Square D B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.2 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the circuit breaker or switch. Systems employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used. B. Circuit breakers, safety switches and associated devices shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. C. Furnish heavy duty Mill rated devices. D. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 262816-5 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 5 of 8 �4RIWOLIX11 I 0 R1161RILI A. General 1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 2. Furnish lugs for incoming wiring, sizes as shown on the Drawings. Allow adequate clearance for bending and terminating of cable size and type specified, Lugs for #12 AWG up to #6 AWG shall be ring terminals. Conductors #4 AWG and larger shall be two -hole long barrel lugs with NEMA spacing. All lugs shall be the closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor. See also Section 26 05 19Wires and Cables (1000 Volt Maximum) for additional requirements. 3. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings. 4. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in Drawings. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than l/16-inch thick by 3/4-inch by 2-1/2-inch, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2 inch, or equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. B. Enclosures General a. Provide 316 SS hardware for all enclosures. b. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. c. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts for conduit entry. d. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. e. All enclosures shall be provisioned with hardware for a padlock. f. All enclosures shall have integral welded mounting lugs. g. See Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes and Fittings for additional requirements. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel were not otherwise Defined a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches 3. NEMA 1 or NEMA IA boxes shall not be used. 4. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262816-6 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 6 of 8 5. Provide a flange mounted, or through the door, disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the enclosure door to open only when the circuit breaker or switch is in the OFF position. The circuit breaker or switch shall have the capability of being bypassed after the door has been opened. C. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring: Stranded tinned copper, minimum size No. 12 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90°C, flame retardant, Type SIS thermosetting 600-volt insulation, NEMA Class 11, Type B wiring. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. Wire tags shall be machine printed. Wire tags relying on adhesives of any type are unacceptable. 3. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with tie wraps and supported to wire way supports. Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. D. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. Wiring shall not be supported using adhesive supports. Adhesive wire supports are unacceptable, and if installed shall be removed and replaced with a non -adhesive support with no increase in Contract Price or Time. 2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. Wire tags shall be machine printed. Wire tags relying on adhesives of any type are unacceptable. 3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated, or from the top if shown on the Drawings and not located in a wet, damp or any process area. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. 2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty, quick make, quick break, visible blades, 600- volt, three -pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle. 2.5 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Fused disconnect switches shall be heavy duty, quick make, quick break, visible blades, 600 volt, three -pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262816-7 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 7 of 8 B. Fuses shall be rejection type, 600 volts, 200,000 A.I.C., dual element, time delay, Bussman Fusetron, Class RK 5 or equal. 2.6 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Fuses of each type used. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number 2.7 FACTORY TESTING A. The circuit breakers and disconnects shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing low voltage circuit breakers and disconnect switches with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. C. Conduit entry into the top of any NEMA 4/4X rated enclosure in any outdoor, damp, wet or process area is strictly prohibited. Any enclosure entered from the top will be removed, the conduit and conductors re-routed, or conductors replaced if too short. No increase in Contract Price or Contract Time will be allowed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262816-8 LOW VOLTAGE ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES Page 8 of 8 A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Devices shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.6 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for one minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 volts DC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. C. Test the ground fault protection system using a high current injection method. D. Test the rating plug for correct rating. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.8 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 29 23 - 1 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 1 of 20 SECTION 26 29 23 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install separately enclosed low voltage adjustable frequency drives, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The terms, VFD, ASD. AFD and Inverter are used synonymously. B. All equipment supplied under this Section of the Specifications shall be products of the same Manufacturer and shall be contained in one single submittal. Partial submittals will be returned unreviewed. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph herein. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned unreviewed. C. Equipment specified in the Process Equipment Division and supplied as an integral part of a process equipment manufacturer's package, but referred to this Section for component details, shall be submitted with the manufacturer's package submittal under the Process Equipment Sections. D. The minimum requirements for functionality, and control and alarm inputs and outputs, are specified herein. Additional requirements shall be as specified in the Process Equipment Division, Instrumentation Division Equipment, Mechanical Division Equipment and the Contract Drawings. E. Coordinate the VFD and the motor it drives and provide a certification that the VFD is suitable for the application. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Submittals for equipment and materials, furnished under this Section of the Specifications, Will not be accepted prior to approval of the Power System Study specified under Section 26 05 73. Submittals made prior to such approval Will be returned unreviewed. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related sections to which reference is made in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed. D. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262923-2 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 2 of 20 E. All equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, shall be created in the original equipment manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for all components of the drives, including motor contactors, drive components, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on the each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 2. Provide drive performance specifications. Submit a manufacturer's harmonics test on each type of drive being furnished. The test may be on a similar unit with identical components. 3. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interconnection wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" shall not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 4. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each controller or enclosure, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 5. Schematic diagram, including manufacturer's selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 6. Nameplate schedule 7. UL Listing of the completed assembly 8. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 9. Conduit entry/exit locations 10. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current d. Trip curves for each specified product 11. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 12. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal size. 13. Instruction and renewal parts books. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262923-3 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 3 of 20 H. Certification that the VFD being supplied is suitable for the application. I. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. J. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 — 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. IEEE 519 (latest revision) - Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of static Power Converters 5. UL 489 — Standard for Safety for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers 6. UL 508C — Power Conversion Equipment 7. NEMA ICS 2 — Starters, Contactors, Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 200 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 8. NEMA ICS 6 — Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures 9. NEMA ICS 7.0 — Industrial Controls & Systems for VFD 10. IEC 61200-2 — Vibration Levels 11. IEC 61800-02 and -3 — Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems a. Fulfill all EMC immunity requirements 12. EN 50082-1 and -2 — Test Standards B. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. C. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" will not be acceptable. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 262923-4 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 4 of 20 C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. Payment Will not be approved for equipment stored off site. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 262923-5 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 5 of 20 3. Schneider/Square-D 4. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley 5. Danfoss 6. Approved equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.2 RATINGS A. Service Conditions 1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the motor driven equipment. Provide the VFD, auxiliary components and equipment where shown or specified, and matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in compliance with the NEC. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. 2. The service voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the VFD and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the adjustable frequency drives. Adjustable frequency drives shall be tested, and UL labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. 3. The drive shall be UL listed and not require external fuses. The drive shall also be CE labeled and comply with standards EN 61800-3 for EMC compliance and EN 61800-2 for low voltage compliance. 4. The drive shall be capable of operating in compliance With IEEE 519-1992. 5. Input power: Selectable for 200-240 or 380-480 VAC, 3-phase power input. 6. Input frequency: 57 to 63 Hz. 7. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 50°C (Enclosed). 8. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet above mean sea level. 9. Relative humidity: Up to 90% non -condensing. B. The VFD, for both constant and variable torque applications, shall be sized for a motor one NEMA size larger than the motor being supplied. C. The VFD output shall be 100% rated current continuous, suitable for operation of the driven equipment over a 30:1 speed range without overloading or low speed cogging. Drives shall be capable of a continuous overload up to 110% rated current and a maximum 150% overload for 1 minute. Starting torque shall be matched to the load. D. Rated output voltage shall be programmable for motor ratings from 180 to 240 volts, or from 320 to 480 volts. E. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262923-6 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 6 of 20 F. The VFD output voltage shall vary with frequency to maintain a constant volts/hertz ratio up to base speed (60 hertz) output. Constant or linear voltage output shall be supplied at frequencies greater than base speed (60 hertz). G. The VFD overload current rating shall be 110% of rated current for one minute for variable torque applications and 150% of rated current for constant torque applications, in an ambient temperature of 104°F. H. The VFD shall have an efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95% for VFDs below 15 HP and 97% for drives 15 HP and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load. I. The true power factor shall be 0.95 or better at any speed, measured at drive input terminals. J. The voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1 % of rated value, no load to full load. K. Output Frequency Drift shall be not more than plus or minus 0.5% from setpoint. L. VFDs shall withstand five cycle transient voltage dips of up to 15% of rated voltage without an undervoltage trip or fault shutdown, while operating a variable torque load. M. Line notching, transients, and harmonics on the incoming line shall not affect drive performance. N. The VFDs shall meet IEC 61200-2 for vibration levels. O. The VFDs shall be able to withstand voltage variations of -15% to +10% and imbalance up to 3% without tripping or affecting drive performance. P. For additional requirements and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. Surge Protective Devices a. Furnish where shown on the Drawings, or specified herein, a manufacturer provided and installed, a Low Voltage Surge Protective Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13 of these Specifications. b. Connection to the switchgear shall be with a surge rated disconnect, mounted integral to the switchgear. c. Except for VFD components, where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), with disconnecting means, as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). 4. Where Kirk -Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel or approved equal. 5. Nameplates a. External CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262923-7 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 7 of 20 1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2", or equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. 2) Provide a master nameplate that indicates equipment ratings, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. 3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on main power disconnect. b. Internal 1) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. c. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. 6. Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are not acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push -to -test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. c. Mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE, etc.) shall be as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons, shall be as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker OPEN and mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP. 2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker CLOSE. 3) Black for RESET. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262923-8 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 8 of 20 e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. f. The manufacturer shall not remove, reuse, alter, or replace original equipment nameplates or equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers. g. Control and Instrument Power Transformers 1) Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity. Provide a load calculation showing that the sizing of the control power transformer complies with this requirement. 2) Control power transformers shall be 120 volts grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 7. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified. Silence and Reset buttons shall be furnished. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal Signal; Crouse -Hinds, or equal, NEMA 4X for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas, which shall be NEMA 7 cast aluminum. 8. Where specified or shown on the Drawings, a six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in this section. 9. Each VFD shall have an HMCP or thermal magnetic circuit breaker, as shown on the Drawings, to provide a disconnect means. VFDs above 75HP shall have a solid- state circuit breaker. Disconnecting means shall have a through the door lockable handle, mechanically interlocked with the enclosure door. The disconnect shall not be mounted on the door. The handle position shall indicate ON, OFF, and TRIPPED condition. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position with at least three (3) padlocks. Interlocks shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the VFD door with the disconnect handle in the ON position, Door handle interlocks to be capable of being defeated only by qualified maintenance personnel. 10. Each VFD shall have the application specific, Hand -Off -Remote and Auto -Manual selector switches for local and remote Auto -Manual operation, provisions to accept a remote dry contact closure to start and stop the drive with the drive control system in the AUTO mode, provisions to accept a 4-20 mA do input signal for remote speed control, and other input, output and communications interfaces as shown on the Drawings. Inputs shall be isolated at the drive and active with the drive control system in the AUTO mode. 11. Each VFD shall be microprocessor based with an LED and LCD display to monitor operating conditions. The Drive display section shall allow for local operation and setting of Drive function codes and display fault indication and reasons associated with the fault. The LED display shall offer nine different display settings and the LCD shall have the capacity to display five lines of information at a time. The keypad shall be capable of copying, uploading and downloading drive function codes. Displays and settings shall be as specified for each of the horsepower ranges of VFDs. B. Enclosures 1. General CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 262923-9 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 9 of 20 a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. b. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same construction as the enclosure. c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. h. Provide manufacturer's window kits where shown on the Drawings. i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. j. All enclosures shall have provisions for a padlock on all doors. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffman Comline 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved Equal Where not otherwise Defined a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown within the plans 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffman Concept Series 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved Equal 4. Where located within a conditioned electrical room, NEMA 1 or NEMA IA enclosures of the manufactures standard offering may be used. All other uses of a NEMA 1 or NEMA 1 A are not allowed for use. 5. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 29 23 - 10 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 10 of 20 C. Cooling Fans Fans shall be furnished for VFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. The fan shall be controlled by a thermostat and shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped. Otherwise the fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. 2. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive design. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. 3. A "loss of cooling" fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, shut down safely without electronic component failure. 4. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan failure. D. Internal Wiring 1. Wiring: Tinned stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90- degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation, NEMA Class H, Type B wiring. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Identification: Numbered sleeve type wire markers at each termination point, color coding per NEMA standards and the NEC. Foreign voltage control wiring shall be yellow. 3. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 4. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with ty-raps and supported to wire way supports. Control wiring shall be bundled separately from power wiring. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. E. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated, or from the top if shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. F. Control Relays CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 29 23 - 11 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 11 of 20 Control relays shall be 300-volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance With UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120 VAC, operating temperature -10 to +55°C. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be equipped with neon coil indicator light. Timing relays shall be 300 Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. All relays provided in the equipment shall be NEMA rated. IEC rated relays are not acceptable. 2.4 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) FOR MOTORS 60 HP AND SMALLER A. General Each VFD shall be a 6-pulse, Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation, designed for use with standard induction motors, constant or variable torque as required for the load application, with current limiting input fuses, incoming line reactors, circuit breaker disconnect, control transformer overload relays and process signal follower card. Drives shall be UL listed. Adjustable frequency drives manufactured for HVAC applications are not acceptable. Adjustable Current Source VFDs are not acceptable. The output devices shall be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs). Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTOs or SCR' are not acceptable. 2. The VFD shall have an EMI/RFI filter as standard. 3. Each VFD shall consist of the following general components: a. Full wave diode rectifier to convert supply AC to a fixed DC voltage. b. DC link capacitors c. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) power section. The power section shall use vector dispersal pulse width modulated (PWM) control and soft switching IGBTs. d. Microprocessor based control and display section. 4. Each VFD shall have the harmonic mediating equipment such that each drive can independently meet IEEE 519 at the input feed terminals of the assembly 5. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed. 6. The Drive shall maintain set frequency regardless of load fluctuations. 7. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. If power exceeds this level, six (6) different modes or active and inactive restart modes shall be available. The decrease in motor speed shall be adjustable in the event of a momentary power outage. 8. The Drive shall have a programmable start frequency, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 hertz, with a 1 hertz resolution and with a holding time adjustable from 0.1 to 10 seconds. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 29 23 - 12 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 12 of 20 9. The Drive shall have IGBT soft switching and a low noise control power supply system to reduce the noise from the drive. 10. The Drive shall have a frequency bias (starting frequency) function programmable from -120 to +120 Hz of maximum frequency, with 0.1 Hz resolution. 11. Drive frequency gain shall be programmable from 0-200%, with 0.1 % resolution. 12. The Drive shall be capable of motor slowdown or stop by selectable regenerative (to the DC link) dynamic braking while following one of the four selectable deceleration ramps, and control the braking torque by setting it's value from 0, 20 to 150%, 999 (no limit) of Drive rating. It shall also can change the rate of deceleration automatically by stopping the braking action long enough to avoid Drive over -voltage trip. 13. The Drive shall can start into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and shall smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the set point without experiencing component damage. 14. The Drive shall can stop by selectable DC injection braking. It shall be adjustable from 0 to 100% braking level and have a programmable starting frequency for DC braking (0.2-60 hertz) and programmable braking time (0.1 to 30.0 seconds). 15. The Drive shall have a start Frequency Setting that incorporates a Holding Time at the Frequency Setting, adjustable up to 10 seconds in duration. 16. The Drive shall provide at least three selectable skip frequencies with programmable band widths, adjustable 0 to 30 Hz, which shall not allow operation at or near mechanical resonance speeds. 17. The Drive shall provide selectable slip compensation, which shall sense output current and adjust output 18. The Drive shall have Droop operation, balancing drooping characteristics to speed and load variations. This function shall be adjustable from —9.9 to 0.0 Hz. 19. The Drive shall have a selectable Torque Limiting function for both motoring and braking that shall sense an overload condition and shall reduce frequency and current temporarily until the load reaches acceptable levels. If the overload condition is not settled in the proper amount of time, the Drive shall trip on overload. The Torque Limiting shall be programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (30 HP and below) and from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (40 HP and above), with 1% resolution. 20. The Drive shall have a selectable electronic inverse time thermal overload function as required by NEC and UL Standard 991 for an AC Induction Motor (Refer to applicable codes for specific installation requirements). The overload shall be programmable from 20 - 135% of Drive rated current. 21. The Drive shall have an over -voltage protection function that operates if supply voltage rises above rated value or by motor's regeneration. 22. The Drive shall treat short circuits in either the output load or the output module as an over -current. 23. If the Drive heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 100o C, the Drive shall shut down on over temperature fault. 24. The Drive shall provide output ground fault protection. B. Control and Monitor Interface CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 26 29 23 - 13 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 13 of 20 The Control shall have a graphic back -lit liquid crystal display (LCD) which can be configured to display frequency, current, function code set points, or drive status and fault codes. It shall display lines with characters of text, providing display at a minimum of: a. Monitor b. Operate c. Parameter setup d. Actual parameter values e. Active faults f. Fault history g. LCD adjustments Setups and Adjustments a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port c. Motor direction selection d. Maximum and minimum speed limits e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges f. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance g. Torque limit h. Multiple attempt restart function i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection k. Programmable analog output 1. DC brake current magnitude and time m. PID process controller System Interfaces a. Remote manual/auto b. Remote start/stop c. Remote forward/reverse d. Remote preset speeds e. Remote external trip f. Remote fault reset g. Process control speed reference interface, 4-2OmA DC h. Potentiometer and 1-IOVDC speed reference interface i. Two RS-485 programming and operation interface ports C. Outputs — A minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one programmable open collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum: 1. Programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable With the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 26 29 23 - 14 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 14 of 20 Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable With the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency c. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC -bus voltage i. All (Analog Input 1) j. AI2 (Analog Input 2) 2.5 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDS) FOR MOTORS LARGER THAN 60 HP A. General Each drive shall be a minimum 18-pulse, IGBT based sinusoidal PWM type AC Drive capable of operating a squirrel cage induction motor with a full load current equal to or less than the continuous output of the Drive. The drive panel shall incorporate a phase shift transformer and a minimum 18 pulse converter. Regulator technology shall be software configurable to either V/Hz (single or multi motor) mode or Sensorless Dynamic Torque Vector mode (single motor). Full, closed loop flux vector control shall be available for constant torque applications. In V/Hz mode at base speed (60 hertz) and below, the Drive shall operate in constant volts per hertz mode. Above base speed (60 hertz), the Drive may selectively operate in either a constant volt per hertz mode or a constant voltage extended frequency mode. The VFD shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the preset speed. 3. The Drive shall maintain set frequency regardless of load fluctuations. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 26 29 23 - 15 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 15 of 20 4. The Drive shall be able to operate after a voltage dip below 175 VAC on 230 VAC input power and 310 VAC on 460 VAC input power for 15 milliseconds at 85% full load current without any disturbances in output power delivered to the load. If power exceeds this level, six different modes or active and inactive restart modes shall be available. The decrease in motor speed shall be adjustable in the event of a momentary power outage. 5. The Drive shall have a programmable start frequency, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 hertz, with a 1 hertz resolution and with a holding time adjustable from 0.1 to 10 seconds. 6. The Drive shall have IGBT soft switching and a low noise control power supply system to reduce the noise from the drive. 7. The Drive shall have a frequency bias (starting frequency) function programmable from -120 to +120 Hz of maximum frequency, with 0.1 Hz resolution. 8. Drive frequency gain shall be programmable from 0-200%, with 0.1 % resolution. 9. The Drive shall be capable of motor slowdown or stop by selectable regenerative (to the DC link) dynamic braking while following one of the four selectable deceleration ramps and control the braking torque by setting its value from 0, 20 to 150%, 999 (no limit) of Drive rating. It shall also be capable of changing the rate of deceleration automatically by stopping the braking action long enough to avoid Drive over -voltage trip. 10. The Drive shall can start into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and shall smoothly accelerate or decelerate to the set point without experiencing component damage. 11. The Drive shall can stop by selectable DC injection braking. It shall be adjustable from 0 to 100% braking level and have a programmable starting frequency for DC braking (0.2-60 hertz) and programmable braking time (0.1 to 30.0 seconds). 12. The Drive shall have a start Frequency Setting that incorporates a Holding Time at the Frequency Setting, adjustable up to 10 seconds in duration. 13. The Drive shall provide at least three selectable skip frequencies with programmable band widths, adjustable 0 to 30 Hz, which shall not allow operation at or near mechanical resonance speeds. 14. The Drive shall provide selectable slip compensation, which shall sense output current and adjust output 15. The Drive shall have Droop operation, balancing drooping characteristics to speed and load variations. This function shall be adjustable from —9.9 to 0.0 Hz. 16. The Drive shall have a selectable Torque Limiting function for both motoring and braking that shall sense an overload condition and shall reduce frequency and current temporarily until the load reaches acceptable levels. If the overload condition is not settled in the proper amount of time, the Drive shall trip on overload. The Torque Limiting shall be programmable from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (30 HP an below) and from 20-150% of Drive rated motor torque (40 HP and above), with 1% resolution. 17. The Drive shall have a selectable electronic inverse time thermal overload function as required by NEC and UL Standard 991 for an AC Induction Motor (Refer to applicable codes for specific installation requirements). The overload shall be programmable from 20 - 135% of Drive rated current. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 26 29 23 - 16 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 16 of 20 18. The Drive shall have an over -voltage protection function that operates if supply voltage rises above rated value or by motor's regeneration. 19. The Drive shall treat short circuits in either the output load or the output module as an over -current. 20. If the Drive heat sink temperature exceeds approximately 100°C, the Drive shall shut down on over temperature fault. 21. The Drive shall provide output ground fault protection. B. Control and Monitor Interface The Control shall have a graphic back -lit liquid crystal display (LCD) which can be configured to display frequency, current, function code set points, or drive status and fault codes. It shall display lines with characters of text, providing display at a minimum of: a. Monitor b. Operate c. Parameter setup d. Actual parameter values e. Active faults £ Fault history g. LCD adjustments Setups and Adjustments a. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port b. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port c. Motor direction selection d. Maximum and minimum speed limits e. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges f. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance g. Torque limit h. Multiple attempt restart function i. Multiple preset speeds adjustment j. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection k. Programmable analog output 1. DC brake current magnitude and time m. PID process controller System Interfaces a. Remote manual/auto b. Remote start/stop c. Remote forward/reverse d. Remote preset speeds e. Remote external trip f. Remote fault reset g. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mA DC h. Potentiometer and 1-IOVDC speed reference interface i. Programming interface port. C. Outputs — A minimum of two discrete programmable digital outputs, one programmable open collector output, and one programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum: 1. Programmable relay outputs with one set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 26 29 23 - 17 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 17 of 20 a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging £ At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 2. Programmable open collector output with available 24VDC power supply and selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Fault b. Run c. Ready d. Reversed e. Jogging f. At speed g. Torque Limit Supervision h. Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded i. Over -temperature 3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: a. Motor current b. Output frequency c. Frequency reference d. Motor speed e. Motor torque f. Motor power g. Motor voltage h. DC -bus voltage i. All (Analog Input 1) j. AI2 (Analog Input 2) 2.6 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as specified in the Instrumentation Divisions. B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection. D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. E. Refer to the Instrumentation Divisions for monitored parameters. F. Communication CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-17 26 29 23 - 18 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 18 of 20 1. For remote monitoring/ control each drive shall include duel ethernet connections and hardwired I/O as shown on the plans. a. The Ethernet interfaces shall be compatible With a device level ring within a Schneider Electric PLC I/O connection. A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Control fuses of type used. 2. Three — Power fuses of type used. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number 2.8 FACTORY TESTING A. The VFDs shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Prior to factory testing, submit confirmation that the manufacturer has checked and verifies that all selections and settings required by the Power System Study Engineer have been performed. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist in the installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for a period of not less than two working days, with not less than one working day per VFD. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.2 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing low voltage adjustable frequency drives with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-18 26 29 23 - 19 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 19 of 20 B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings except for motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. The VFD manufacturer's field engineer shall perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of the drive. B. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for approval and for their permanent records. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. tR[Ils-01T.W�i1 T 1: Y IIKY"00 A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative who shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-19 26 29 23 - 20 LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFDs) Page 20 of 20 A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the adjustable frequency drives furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight - hour day. C. The cost of the training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. 110401XITOM OW9113121 CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-20 26 29 86 - 1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page I of 20 3Q SECTION 26 29 86 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMs) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install functional control panels to manually or automatically operate control systems as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and as described in the Process Equipment Division Specifications. B. All submittals for, process equipment panels specified under this Section, shall be submitted as a part of the Process Equipment manufacturer's submittal under the Process Equipment Division submittals. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Process Equipment Division and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering to produce coordination curves, showing coordination between existing and breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned un-reviewed. D. All shop drawings shall be created by the mechanical equipment manufacturer, including all wiring diagrams. The shop drawings shall be created in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the mechanical equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the mechanical equipment manufacturer's archive file system. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 29 86 -2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 2 of 20 1. The mechanical equipment manufacturer shall use his control systems engineering department to produce custom unit elementary drawings. Drawings shall be on the mechanical equipment manufacturer's drawing sheets and shall include all schematics for control logic as described in the Process Equipment Specifications, and any associated control schematics shown on the Engineer's Drawings for this project. Show interwiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for devices as required by the mechanical equipment manufacturer or as may be shown on the Drawings. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. 2. Equipment outline drawings shall show elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 3. Provide power and control schematics which shall include all external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers and color -coding. 4. Provide instruction and replacement parts books, which shall include manufacturer's part numbers, selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 5. Provide as -built final drawings. 6. Provide documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL-508 certified facility. 7. Provide a facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel. 8. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers. 9. Manufacturer's cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately marked to show the items being included. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision. 10. Assembly ratings shall be provided including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 11. Major component ratings shall be provided including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 12. Cable terminal sizes. 13. Instruction and renewal parts books. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 29 86 - 3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 3 of 20 F. Factory Tests: Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports: Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided which shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. I. Submit the manufacturer's training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 — 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. UL 508/508A— Industrial Control Enclosures B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the control panels shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL-508 certified facility. A submittal of documentation certifying that the panel fabrication facility is a UL-508 certified facility, is required. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Control panels submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 262986-4 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 4 of 20 A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in the Contract Price or Schedule. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following electrical material manufacturers are acceptable: IW: C 2. Eaton 3. Square D Co. 4. Allen Bradley 5. No equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. C. Provide control panels supplied by the mechanical equipment manufacturer who shall be responsible for providing all required controls and apparatus as specified utilizing the specified components herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 26 29 86 -5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 5 of 20 D. The acceptable electrical material manufactures listed above may not manufacture all materials required in the completed control panels. Other sections list acceptable material manufacturers, which produce those additional required components. Submittals shall include all components required. 2.2 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be not less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480Y/277 Volts, and equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Control Panel. This includes all circuit breakers and combination motor starters. Systems of motor controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used and are not acceptable. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL 508A labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. B. There shall be selective device coordination between the Main Breaker, Feeder Breakers and control circuit protective devices. When using a circuit breaker or fuses as a main protective device, the instantaneous trip levels of the main protective device shall be higher than the available fault current to the control panel. If fuses are utilized in the control panel design, the protective devices for three-phase loads shall contain single phase protection of such equipment. If a fault occurs in the circuit of one load of a design with a backup load, the feeder protective device shall not remove both loads from the control system. C. Use ground fault sensing on grounded Wye systems. D. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified and carry a UL listing for "Industrial Control Panels". E. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. F. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA rated as specified herein. G. Motor controllers, including associated devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. H. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the mechanical equipment specifications and the Drawings. I. The Manufacturer shall produce and install on each panel, an Arc Flash Warning Label listing the various Flash Hazard Protection Boundaries, calculated from NFPA 70E, Annexes, as listed below: 1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. 2. Limited Approach Boundary. 3. Restricted Boundary. 4. Prohibited Boundary. 5. Incident Energy Level. 6. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class. 7. Type of Fire Rated Clothing. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 29 86 - 6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 6 of 20 A. General 1. Submit actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. NEMA ratings of all devices shall meet or exceed the rating of each panel. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. Except for AFD components, where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). 4. Where Kirk -Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD (Heavy Duty) 316 Series of 316 stainless steel, or approved equal. 5. Nameplates a. Exterior 1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16-inch thick by 3/4-inch by 2-1/2-inch, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2 inch, or equal. Prior to installing the adhesive nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residues have been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. 2) There shall be a master nameplate that indicates supply voltage equipment ratings, short circuit current rating, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. 3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on Main Power Disconnect or Disconnects. 6. The Contractor shall have no expectation of remote connectivity. Remote connections are not allowed. The first offence shall be a penalty of $5,000 and/or removal from District sites. All subsequent offences shall incur a penalty of $10,000 and removal from District sites." 7. No computer shall be connected to the District's SCADA system and the Internet simultaneously. This will be treated as an unauthorized remote connection. a. Internal 1) Provide the panel with a UL 508A label. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262986-7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 7 of 20 2) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. b. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. 8. Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are not acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push -to -test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. c. Mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE, etc.) shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons shall be as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker CLOSE and mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP. 2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker OPEN. 3) Black for RESET. e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. f. Original equipment or device nameplates shall not be removed, reused, altered, or replaced including equipment tags associated with equipment or components supplied by the manufacturer's suppliers and sub -suppliers. g. Control and Instrument Power Transformers 1) Control power transformers shall be provided. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including starter coils, relays coils, condensation control space heaters, air conditioners, cooling fans and all other required auxiliary loads, plus 25% spare capacity. In no case shall the control transformer be not less than 100VA. Provide a load calculation showing that the sizing of the control power transformer complies with this requirement. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262986-8 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 8 of 20 2) Control power transformers shall be 120-volt grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded, and the other leg shall be fused. 9. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified. Silence and Reset buttons shall be furnished. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal Signal; Crouse -Hinds, or equal, NEMA 4X for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas, which shall be NEMA 7/4X cast aluminum. B. Enclosures 1. General a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. b. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same construction as the enclosure. c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. h. Provide manufacturer's window kits where shown on the Drawings. i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. j. All enclosures shall be pad lockable. 2. NEMA 7/4X a. Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, or as defined in NFPA 70). Boxes shall be constructed as follows: 1) Copper free cast aluminum body and cover 2) Stainless steel hinges 3) Watertight neoprene gasket 4) Stainless steel cover bolts 5) All penetrations shall be factory drilled and tapped. b. Manufacturers 1) Cooper Crouse Hinds Type EJB, Style C 2) Appleton Electric Type AJBEW 3) Approved equal 3. NON-METALLIC a. Chemical Rooms. NEMA 4X constructed as follows: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 262986-9 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 9 of 20 1) PVC or Fiberglass reinforced polyester body and door. 2) UV inhibitors 3) Luggage type quick release latches 4) Foam -in -place gasketed doors b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffman Polypro 2) Hubbell-Wiegmann Non -Metallic 3) Approved equal 4. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffman Comline 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved equal 5. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others three- point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffinan Comline 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved equal 6. Otherwise Not Defined NEMA 4X Stainless Steel a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3-point latch b. Manufacturers CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 29 86 - 10 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 10 of 20 1) Hoffman Comline Series 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved equal 7. NEMA 1 or NEMA 1 A boxes shall not be used. 8. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. C. Environmental Conditioning 1. Condensation Control a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non -air- conditioned space. 1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120-volt, single-phase power supply and sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure. 2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations on the hardware. 3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment range of 40°F to 90°F. Provide a circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure. 4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH or equal. b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240-volt rated, powered at 120 volts AC and do not have a surface temperature higher than 60°C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Chromalox or equal. 1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5-in wide, 240 Volts, single phase, 150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT-715, Product Code No. 129314, or equal. Provide enough wattage in heaters to prevent condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew point. 2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177, or equal. 3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and the heater terminals. Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded, nickel -plated copper with Teflon glass insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6-CFI-12, Product Code No. 263783, or equal. c. Each panel shall have 1/2" stainless steel condensate drains, installed on a stainless -steel conduit hub, HGTZ Series, T&B or equal, in the bottom of the enclosure. Drain shall be O-Z Gedney DBB-50SS, or equal. 2. Corrosion Control CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 29 86 - 11 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 11 of 20 a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion -Inhibiting vapor capsule as manufactured by Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC, or Hoffman Engineering; Model A-HCI, or equal. 3. Panel Interior Ambient Control a. The manufacturer shall provide ambient temperature control within the panel to maintain internal temperatures below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. an ambient temperature range of -20°C to 40°C. b. The manufacturer shall provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. c. The calculation shall show all the internal and external heat gain loads, the expected internal rise in temperature in degrees C above the specified ambient. Panels for which the calculated heat rise exceeds 40°C. shall have an air conditioning system, sized as required to reduce the heat rise to 40°C. or less, without violating the NEMA rating of the enclosure. d. The air conditioner, when required, shall have the following features: 1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant. 2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that maintains NEMA 4X rating of the panel. 3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and prevents over -cooling. 4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off cycling. 5) Separated blower -driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop cooling. 6) UL listed. 7) Stainless steel enclosure. 8) Internal corrosion resistant coating. 9) Low ambient kit. 10) Short cycle protector. 11) The air conditioning unit shall be Hoffman, Thermo Electric or approved equal. 4. Enclosure Fans a. Fans shall be furnished for soft start starters and AFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. Fans shall be controlled by a temperature switch. The fan shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped Otherwise the fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. The NEMA rating of the enclosure shall not be violated in any case. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 262986-12 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 12 of 20 b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive design. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. c. A "loss of cooling" fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, be shut down safely without electronic component failure by the temperature switch. d. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan failure. D. Internal Wiring 1. Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600 Volt, 90-degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device. 2. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted shielded #16 AWG pair. 3. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on any panel -mounted device. 4. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 5. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power. The following trough color code shall be used. a. Black: for all 480-volt AC circuits b. Grey: 24-volt DC circuit c. White: 120-volt AC circuits d. Blue: intrinsically safe circuits 6. All control panel wiring shall use the following color code. a. Black: AC power at line voltage b. Red: switched AC power c. Orange: May be energized while the main disconnect is in the off position d. White: AC neutral e. Orange/white stripe or white/orange stripe: separate derived neutral f. Red/white stripe or white/red stripe: switched neutral g. Green or green w/ yellow tracer: ground/earth ground h. Blue: Ungrounded DC power i. Blue/white stripe or white/blue stripe: DC grounded common CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 26 29 86 - 13 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 13 of 20 j. Brown: 480V AC 3 phase - phase A k. Orange: 480V AC 3 phase - phase B 1. Yellow: 480V AC 3 Phase - phase C in. Purple: common for analog signal wiring n. Brown: positive leg of an analog signal E. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type like Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. Top entry of conduits is prohibited unless approved by the Owner/Engineer on a case -by -case basis. F. Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type and end barriers. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts except for control and instrumentation circuits, or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors. 2. Provide 600-volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. 3. Provide 600-volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 4. Power conductors carrying over 20 amperes, at any voltage, shall be terminated to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs. Lugs shall be the appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap -screw terminal point. 5. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20% spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 6. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating common or ground conductors. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 26 29 86 - 14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 14 of 20 Twisted shielded pair or triad cables shall have each individual conductor and shield drain wire landed on individual terminal blocks. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors. 8. Control circuits, 120-volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors shall be terminated with manufacturer's recommended insulated connectors. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20% spare terminals. 10. Provided ground terminal blocks for each twisted -shielded pair or triad cable drain wire. Double lugging of any twisted -shielded pair or triad cable conductor is prohibited. 2.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICE A. Control Panel which are rated or rated and used as a service entrance panel, shall be provided with factory installed dedicated Surge Protective Device (SPD), Type 2, permanently connected, on the load side of the service entrance device. Provided the SPD as specified in Section 26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). 2.5 MAIN CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the main circuit protective device shall be a molded case (MCCB), Three -Pole, 600-Volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored energy closing mechanism. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch, adjustable ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping. B. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. Where panels are shown or specified with inner and outer doors, disconnecting handles and controls shall be located on the inner door. 2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. General Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturer's heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. 2. All incoming power and control wiring leaving or entering the control panel shall be terminated with the lugs specified for the size and type of wire required. Furnish terminals appropriately sized to terminate the specified wire lugs. Allow adequate clearance for bending and terminating of wire and cables which are the size and type specified, shown or required. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 26 29 86 - 15 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 15 of 20 3. A NEMA rated magnetic motor starter shall be furnished for each motor. Each motor starter shall be provided with a motor circuit protector, or circuit breaker, and equipped to provide undervoltage release and overload protection on all three phases. The short circuit protective device shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1400 percent of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. MCPs shall be labeled in accordance with UL489. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the horsepower indicated but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. If the manufacturer of the equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on the Drawings, provide a motor starter sized to control the motor supplied. 4. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to each motor. Disconnects mechanisms shall be located inside the enclosure such that the main circuit breaker handle is the only device interlocked with the panel door. 5. Each motor starter shall have a 120-volt operating coil unless otherwise noted. 6. Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by pushbutton located on front of the starter door. A normally closed contact shall be directly connected in series with the starter circuit to shut off the starter and a normally open contact from the overload relay shall be wired to a terminal block for an overload alarm. 7. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an interposing relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 VAC and 10 Amperes continuous. Relays shall be Control Relays as specified herein. B. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be two or three -pole, single or three-phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600-volt, magnetically operated, full voltage reversing or non -reversing as required by the mechanical process design. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepower shown on the Drawings, but not less than NEMA 1. Each motor starter shall have a 120-volt operating coil, and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one N.O. and one N.C. auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts required connected as specified above. 3. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. 4. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings. 5. All wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be tagged. 6. Provide as -built wiring diagrams mounted in a protective cover inside the panel. C. Contactors CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 26 29 86 - 16 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 16 of 20 1. Contactors shall be a circuit breaker and contactor, 600-Volt, three -pole, 60 Hz, magnetically operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings required for the equipment provided but shall be not less than NEMA size 1. 2. Contactors shall have a 120-Volt operating coil and control power transformer. Furnish the control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan. D. Control Relays 1. Control relays shall be 300-volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120 VAC, operating temperature minus 10°C to plus 55°C. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series or equal with neon coil indicator light. Timing relays shall be 300-Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. E. Elapsed Time Meter 1. A six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section 26 27 13. 2.7 LOGIC DEVICES A. Programmable Logic Controller Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) for programming of the control logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. 2. Provide a fully documented and scripted program file for each PLC. 3. PLCs shall meet the requirements of Section 40 63 00, no exceptions. B. Operator Interface Terminal 1. Where the control panel contains an Operation Interface Terminal for interfacing to the control logic, the manufacturer shall provide the address list, and an Ethernet and serial interface to connect to the related PLC for monitoring and control of the PLCs operation. 2. Provide a scripted application and fully documented setup for each OIT. 2.8 INSTRUMENTATION DEVICES A. Level Switches 1. Where Level Switches are specified or shown on the Drawings, refer to the Instrumentation Division for the required devices. B. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) 1. Where PLCs are specified herein or shown on the Drawings, refer to the Instrumentation Division for the required devices. C. Operator Interface Terminals (OITs) 1. Where OITs are specified herein or shown on the Drawings, refer to the Instrumentation Divisions for the required devices. 2.9 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 26 29 86 - 17 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 17 of 20 A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as specified in the Instrumentation Divisions. B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection. D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (W Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. E. Refer to the Instrumentation Divisions for monitored parameters. F. Communication 1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided: a. One integral 10/10013aseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP protocols. b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/10013aseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP. c. Transfer of basic I/O data via User Datagram Protocol (UDP)-based implicit messaging d. Uploading and downloading of parameters, setpoints, programs and recipes via TCP (i.e., explicit messaging.) e. Polled, cyclic and change -of -state monitoring via UDP, such as RPI and COS in Allen Bradley's ControlLogix control systems. f. One-to-one (unicast), one -to -many (multicast), and one -to -all (broadcast) communication via TCP g. Use of well-known TCP port number 44818 for explicit messaging and UDP port number 2222 for implicit messaging. 2. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria: a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable. b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air GAP meeting IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30VDC at 0.5A minimum. c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Division 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input. e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal. 2.10 FACTORY TESTING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-17 26 29 86 - 18 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 18 of 20 A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. D. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide an installer who shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment, with minimum 5 years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings except for motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. C. Conduits entering a Control Panel shall not enter the enclosure through the top. D. Install required safety labels. 3.4 RACEWAY SEALING A. Raceways entering junction boxes containing terminal blocks or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. B. This requirement applies to all raceways in the conduit system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide one set of as -built panel drawings, laminated, in each panel pocket. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-18 26 29 86 - 19 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 19 of 20 kcK11WyM1 •\1 Ilfl." 01 A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for one minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 VDC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. D. Test all control logic before energizing the motor or equipment. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. Provide a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative who shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, including all settings designated in the Power System Study, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the soft start starters furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight - hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-19 26 29 86 - 20 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (MEMS) Page 20 of 20 E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-20 262987-1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 1 of 18 SECTION 26 29 87 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install functional control panels to manually or automatically operate control systems as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and logic and schematics as shown on the Electrical Drawings. B. Submittals for Electrical Control Panels, not clearly specified as Control Panels by the Electrical Contractor, shall be submitted under the Section of the Specifications specified in the Process Equipment Division or Mechanical Equipment Division, and shall not be submitted under this Section. Control Panels for those Divisions shall meet the requirements of Section 26 29 86 Mechanical Equipment Manufacturer's Control Panels and shall be submitted as a part of the Mechanical Equipment manufacturer's submittals or Process Equipment Division Submittals. Control panels specified within the Instrumentation Sections of Division 40shall be submitted as a part of the Instrumentation submittals. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering to produce coordination curves, showing coordination between breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 262987-2 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 2 of 18 C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned unreviewed. D. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for overcurrent protective devices, motor starters, control relays, control stations, meters, pilot lights, etc. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 2. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing inter -wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 3. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 4. Schematic diagram, including manufacturer's selections of component ratings, and CT and PT ratios. 5. Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers, and color -coding. 6. Instruction and replacement parts books. 7. As -built final drawings. 8. Documentation that the panel assembly facility is a UL-508 certified panel shop. 9. Facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panel. 10. Furnish complete Bill of Materials indicating manufacturer's name and part numbers. 11. Manufacturer's cut sheets for every component used in the panel assembly adequately marked to show the items being included. The manufacturer's name shall be clearly visible on each cut sheet submitted. 12. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 13. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 262987-3 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 3 of 18 c. Interrupting ratings 14. Cable terminal sizes. 15. Instruction and renewal parts books. F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. L The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 — 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. UL 508/508A — Industrial Control Enclosures B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL-508 certified facility. A submittal of documentation certifying that the panel fabrication facility is a UL-508 certified facility, is required. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Control Panels submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 262987-4 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 4 of 18 F. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. The completed control panel shall be UL Labeled in accordance with UL 508 and 508A and other applicable UL standards. The panel shall also be UL labeled for the environment in which it is to be placed. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following material Manufacturers are acceptable for items not specifically specified else ware: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Eaton / Cutler -Hammer 3. Square D Co. 4. Allen Bradley CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 262987-5 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 5 of 18 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Control Panel, but not less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480/277 volts, this includes all circuit breakers and combination motor starters. Systems of motor controllers employing series connected ratings for main and feeder devices shall not be used. Motor starter units shall be tested and UL 508A labeled for the specified short circuit duty in combination with the motor branch circuit protective device. B. There shall be selective device coordination between the Main Breaker, Feeder Breakers and control circuit protective devices. When using a circuit breaker or fuses as a main protective device, the instantaneous trip levels of the main protective device shall be higher than the available fault current to the control panel. If fuses are utilized in the control panel design, the protective devices for three-phase loads shall contain single phase protection of such equipment. If a fault occurs in the circuit of one load of a design with a backup load, the feeder protective device shall not remove both loads from the control system. C. Use ground fault sensing on grounded Wye systems. D. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified or carry a UL listing for "Industrial Control Panels". E. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. F. Motor controllers, including associated devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40°C ambient temperature. G. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. H. The Manufacturer shall produce and install on each panel, an Arc Flash Warning Label listing the various Flash Hazard Protection Boundaries, calculated from NFPA 70E, Annexes, as listed below: 1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary. 2. Limited Approach Boundary. 3. Restricted Boundary. 4. Incident Energy Level. 5. Required Personal Protective Equipment Class. 6. Type of Fire Rated Clothing. I. Provide an Arc Flash Warning Label, printed in color and affixed to the front of each panel provided. J. Shown below is a typical label. Size of each label shall be not less than 6 inches Wide and 4 inches tall. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 262987-6 F,LECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 6 of 18 AWARNING Arc Flash and Shock Risk Appropriate PPE Required Flash Risk Boundary Flash Risk at Shirt & pants or coverall, Nonmelting (ASTM F1506) or Untreated Fiber Shock Risk when cover is removed Glove Class Limited Approach Restricted Approach Minimum Arc Rating Location: 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to Drawings for: actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. 2. Control units shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings. 3. Except for VFD equipment, where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or a uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). 4. W ere Kirk -Key arrangements are used, the Kirk keyed interlocks shall be Kirk HD Series (Heavy Duty) 316 Series, made of 316 stainless steel, or approved equal. 5. Nameplates a. External 1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16-inch thick by 3/4-inch by 2-1/2-inch, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2 inches, or equal. Prior to installing the adhesive nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. 2) There shall be a master nameplate that indicates supply voltage equipment ratings, short circuit current rating, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. 3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working On This Unit" on main power disconnect or disconnects. b. Internal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 262987-7 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 7 of 18 1) Provide the panel with a UL 508A label. 2) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. c. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. 6. Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30-millimeter, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are not acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push -to -test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) W ite for POWER ON. c. Mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE, etc.) shall be as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons, shall be as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker CLOSE and mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP. 2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker OPEN. 3) Black for RESET. e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. 7. Control and Instrument Power Transformers a. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity, and shall be not less than 100 VA. b. Control power transformers shall be 120 volt grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 8. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified. Silence and reset buttons shall be furnished. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal Signal; Crouse -Hinds, or equal, NEMA 4X for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas, which shall be NEMA 7/4X cast aluminum. 9. W ere specified or shown on the Drawings, a six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section 26 27 13. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 262987-8 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 8 of 18 B. Enclosures 1. General a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, and side panels, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. b. All free-standing enclosures shall be provided with feet of the same construction as the enclosure. c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. g. Enclosures shall not have holes or knockouts. h. Provide manufacturer's window kits where shown on the Drawings. i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. j. All enclosures shall be padlock provisioned. 2. ALUMINUM a. NEMA 4X Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20 inches X 24 inches and below). All others three-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffinan Comline 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved Equal NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Aluminum 1) Type 5052 aluminum, body and door 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20 inches X 24 inches and below). All others three-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffinan Comline 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved Equal 4. NEMA 12 a. NEMA 12 Mild Steel 1) Mild Steel, body and door painted ANSI 61 Gray CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 262987-9 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 9 of 18 2) Stainless steel continuous hinge pin 3) Foam in -place gasket 4) Single point quarter turn latches (20-inches x 24-inches and below). All others three-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Hoffinan 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company 5) Approved Equal Otherwise Not Defined NEMA 4X Stainless Steel a. W ere an enclosure is nohotherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuous hinge 4) Foam in -place gasket 5) Single point quarter turn latches (20-inches x 24-inches and below). All others three-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) EMF Company 2) NEMA Enclosures Company 3) Hammond Company 4) Rittal 5) Approved Equal 6. NEMA 1 or NEMA lA boxes shall not be used. 7. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. C. Environmental Conditioning Condensation Control a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non -air- conditioned space. 1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120-volt, single-phase power supply and sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure. 2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations on the hardware. 3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment range of 40°F to 90°F. Provide a circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure. 4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH or equal. b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240-volt rated, powered at 120 volts AC and do not have a surface temperature higher than 60°C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Chromalox or equal. 1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5-inches wide, 240 volts, single phase, 150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT-715, Product Code No. 129314, or equal. Provide sufficient wattage in heaters to prevent condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew point. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 29 87 - 10 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 10 of 18 2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177, or equal. 3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and the heater terminals. Wire shall be #12 AWG stranded, nickel -plated copper with Teflon glass insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6-CFI-12, Product Code No. 263783, or equal. c. Each panel shall have a 1/2-inch stainless steel condensate drain, installed on a stainless -steel conduit hub, HGTZ Series, T&B or equal, in the bottom of the enclosure. Drain shall be O-Z GedneyDBB-50SS, or equal. 2. Corrosion Control a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion -inhibiting vapor capsule b. Manufacturers 1) Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC 2) Hoffinan Engineering; Model A-HCI 3) Approved equal. Panel Interior Ambient Control a. The manufacturer shall provide ambient temperature control within the panel to maintain internal temperatures below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. an ambient temperature range of -20' C to 40°C. b. The manufacturer shall provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. c. The calculation shall show all the internal and external heat gain loads, the expected internal temperature rise in degrees C above the specified ambient, If the specified temperature range cannot be met, an air conditioning system shall be provided with sufficient capacity to maintain the temperature within the specified limits. Panels, for which the calculated heat rise exceeds 40°C., shall have an air conditioning system, sized as required to reduce the heat rise to 40°C. or less, without violating the NEMA rating of the enclosure. d. The air conditioner shall have the following features: 1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant. 2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that maintains NEMA 4X rating of the panel. 3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and prevents over -cooling. 4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off cycling. 5) Separated blower -driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop cooling. 6) UL listed. 7) Stainless steel enclosure. 8) Internal corrosion resistant coating. 9) Low ambient kit. 10) Short cycle protector. 11) Manufacturers a) Hoffman b) Thermo Electric CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 29 87 - 11 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 11 of 18 c) Approved equal. 4. Enclosure Fans a. Fans shall be furnished for soft start starters and VFDs, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. Fans shall be controlled by a temperature switch. The fan shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped Otherwise the fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive design. Plastic muffin fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. c. A "loss of cooling" fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, be shut down safely without electronic component failure by the temperature switch. d. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan failure. D. Internal Wiring 1. Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size #14 AWG, with 600 volt, 90°C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full rating or frame size of the connected device, and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted shielded #16 AWG pair. 3. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on any panel -mounted device. 4. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 5. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power. The following trough color code shall be used. a. Black: for all 480-volt AC circuits b. Grey: 24-volt DC circuit c. W ite: 120-volt AC circuits d. Blue: intrinsically safe circuits 6. All control panel wiring shall use the following color code. a. Black: AC power at line voltage b. Red: switched AC power c. Orange: May be energized while the main disconnect is in the off position d. W ite: AC neutral e. Orange/white stripe or white/orange stripe: separate derived neutral f. Red/white stripe or white/red stripe: switched neutral g. Green or green w/ yellow tracer: ground/earth ground CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 29 87 - 12 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 12 of 18 h. Blue: Ungrounded DC power i. Blue/white stripe or white/blue stripe: DC grounded common j. Brown: 480V AC three phase - phase A k. Orange: 480V AC three phase - phase B 1. Yellow: 480V AC three Phase - phase C in. Purple: common for analog signal wiring n. Brown: positive leg of an analog signal E. Field Installed Internal Wiring 1. Field installed interior wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 3. In general, all conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be stubbed up into the bottom of the enclosure directly below the area in which the conductors are to be terminated, or from the top if shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall not enter the side unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. F. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type and end barriers. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts except for control and instrumentation circuits, or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors. 2. Provide 600 volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. 3. Provide 600 volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amperes, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 4. Power conductors carrying over 20 amperes, at any voltage shall be terminated to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap - screw terminal point. 5. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20% spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 6. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating common or ground conductors. 7. Twisted shielded pair or triad cables shall have each individual conductor and shield drain wire landed on individual terminal blocks. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors. 8. Control circuits, 120 volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors shall be terminated with manufacturer's recommended insulated connectors. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 26 29 87 - 13 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 13 of 18 Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure (if metal) with 20% spare terminals. 10. Provided ground terminal blocks for each twisted -shielded pair drain wire. 2.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICE A. Where the Control Panel is rated and used as a service entrance panel, the manufacturer shall furnish factory installed in the Control Panel, a dedicated (SPD) (Type 2), permanently connected, Surge Protective Device on the load side of the service entrance panel, as specified in Section 26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). 2.5 MAIN CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the main circuit protective device shall be a molded case (MCCB), three Pole, 600-volt, fixed type, manually operated with stored energy closing mechanism. Trip device shall be solid state with adjustable long time pickup, and delay; adjustable short time pickup and delay; short time i2t switch; adjustable ground fault pickup and delay, and ground fault delay and pickup trips for selective tripping. B. Provide a flange mounted main power disconnect operating handle with mechanical interlock having a bypass that will allow the panel door to open only when the switch is in the OFF position. Where panels are shown or specified with inner and outer doors, disconnecting handles and controls shall be located on the inner door. 2.6 MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Eaton b. General Electric Company c. Allen Bradley d. Square D 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. General 1. The Drawings indicate the approximate horsepower and intended control scheme of the motor driven equipment. Provide the NEMA size starter, circuit breaker trip ratings, control power transformers and thermal overload heater element ratings matched to the motors and control equipment actually supplied, in compliance with the NEC and the manufacturer's heater selection tables. All variations necessary to accommodate the motors and controls as actually furnished shall be made without extra cost to the Owner. 2. Furnish lugs for incoming wiring, sizes as shown on the Drawings. Allow adequate clearance for bending and terminating of cable size and type specified. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 26 29 87 - 14 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 14 of 18 3. A NEMA rated magnetic motor starter shall be furnished for each motor. Each motor starter shall be provided with a motor circuit protector (MCP), or circuit breaker, and equipped to provide undervoltage release and overload protection on all three phases. The short circuit protective device shall have an adjustable magnetic trip range up to 1400% of rated continuous current and a trip test feature. MCPs shall be labeled in accordance with UL489. NEMA starter sizes and breaker trip ratings shall be as required for the horsepower indicated but shall be in no case less than NEMA Size 1. If the manufacturer of the equipment utilizing the motor, supplies a motor horsepower larger than that shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall supply a motor starter sufficient in size to control the motor supplied. 4. A mechanical disconnect mechanism, with bypass, shall be installed on each motor circuit protector, capable of being locked in the "OFF" position to provide a means of disconnecting power to each motor. Disconnects mechanisms shall be located inside the enclosure such that the main circuit breaker handle is the only device interlocked with the panel door. 5. Each motor starter shall have a 120-volt operating coil unless otherwise noted. 6. Overload relays shall be standard Class 20, ambient compensated, manually reset by pushbutton located on front of the starter door. A normally closed contact shall be directly used in the start circuit and a normally open contact shall be wire to a terminal board for overload alarm. 7. All interfaces between control panel and remote devices shall be isolated via an interposing relay. Interposing relays shall have contacts rated for 250 volts AC and 10 amperes continuous. Relays shall be Control Relays as specified herein. C. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Motor starters shall be two or three pole, single or three phase as required, 60 Hertz, 600 volts, magnetically operated, full voltage non reversing. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horsepower shown on the Drawings. 2. Each motor starter shall have a 120-volt operating coil, and control power transformer. Starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. A minimum of one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts required. 3. Overload relays shall be adjustable, ambient compensated and manually reset. 4. Built in control stations and indicating lights shall be furnished where shown on the Drawings. 5. All wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be tagged. 6. Provide as built wiring diagram and post it in a protective cover inside the cell. D. Contactors 1. Contactors shall be a circuit breaker and contactor, 600 volt, three -pole, 60 Hertz, magnetically operated. NEMA size shall be as required for the kilowatt ratings required for the equipment provided but shall be not less than NEMA size 1. 2. Contactors shall have a 120-volt operating coil and control power transformer. Furnish the control power transformer with extra capacity for the unit heater fan. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 26 29 87 - 15 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 15 of 18 Combination Contactors used for lighting control shall be as specified herein, magnetically operated, with the number of channels and poles as shown on the Drawings. Each contactor shall be controlled by an Astronomic Time Clock Tyco Model TC-100 or approved equal, 3000 VA photo control Precision Controls Model T-368-AL or approved equal, or a combination of both clock and photo control, all as shown on the Drawings. The photocell shall be separately located as shown on the Drawings. The photocell enclosure shall be as required by the area classification. E. Control Relays Control relays shall be 300-volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, 1/4 HP at 120-volt AC, operating temperature minus 10 to plus 55°C. Provide spare normally open and normally closed contacts. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series or equal with neon coil indicator light. Timing relays shall be 300 Volt, solid state type, with rotary switch to select the timing range. F. Elapsed Time Meter 1. A six -digit, non-resettable elapsed time meter shall be installed on the face of each motor starter. Meter shall be as specified in Section 26 27 13. 2.7 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) A. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) for programming of the control logic, as shown on the Drawings, the PLC shall be as specified in Section 40 63 00 Programmable Logic Controllers. The manufacturer shall provide the address list, and the interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. B. Provide a scripted program file for all PLCs. C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section26 43 13 Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). D. The manufacturer shall provide the address list and an Ethernet interface to connect to the Owner's plant monitoring system for monitoring of the PLC's operation. 2.8 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the following spare parts for each control panel in the quantities specified: 1. One box- replacement fuses, all types and sizes used 2. One replacement lamp, of each color, for pilot lights 3. One of each color replacement lens caps for pilot lights 4. One starter coil for each NEMA size furnished One, Three -pole set of replacement overload heaters of each size range used 6. One, Three -pole set of starter contacts of each [NEMA] size used. 7. One can of aerosol touch-up paint. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage. Identify each item with manufacturer's name, description and part number on the exterior of the package. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 26 29 87 - 16 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 16 of 18 2.9 FACTORY TESTING A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. C. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. D. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. I\I� IBM W4Oro[" 11130 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with minimum 5 years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted motor controllers as detailed on the Drawings with the exception of motor controllers which are to be installed adjacent to an existing unit. Housekeeping pads for these (if used) should match the existing installation. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. C. Conduits entering a control Panel or box containing electrical equipment, shall not enter the enclosure through the top. D. Install required safety labels. 3.4 RACEWAY SEALING A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 26 29 87 - 17 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 17 of 18 B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide one set of as -built panel drawings laminated, in each panel pocket. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Disconnect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Megger and record phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance. Megger, for one minute, at minimum voltage of 1000 volts DC. Measured Insulation resistance shall be at least 100 megohms. In no case shall the manufacturer's maximum test voltages be exceeded. C. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. D. Test all control logic before energizing the motor or equipment. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in Writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-17 26 29 87 - 18 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PROVIDED CONTROL PANELS (ECPs) Page 18 of 18 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the soft start starters furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight - hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, motor starters, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-18 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 1 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 1 of 22 SECTION 26 32 13 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install Standby Generator Sets with all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Generator shall meet all relevant city of Fort Worth Fuel storage and sound ordinances as codified at time of bid. B. Each generator size as shown on the drawings is a minimum size around which the electrical conductors and circuit breakers have been sized. The Contractor shall provide each engine -generator set that meets all the performance criteria, and shall increase the size of the engine generator, if necessary, to meet the specified criteria. If the generator size increases, the Contractor shall increase the breakers, conductors, and all associated equipment, including the automatic transfer switch, to accommodate the larger generator size. All sizing of associated equipment shall be in accordance with the NEC. Submit all required changes specified above to the Engineer/Owner. No changes shall be done to any of the power system components without approval. C. The Contractor shall provide fuel for startup and testing. At the completion of startup and testing, the Contractor shall fill the respective generator tank. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00, and as specified herein. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be caused to reject the submittal and return it for revision. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 2 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 2 of 22 B. Provide systems engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will also be returned without review. D. The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering Department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. E. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, complete shop drawings and product data for all components in one package in a single submittal. Submitting the engine -generator, fuel tank, sound enclosure and access platforms in separate packages will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Failure to submit all components at once may cause a delay in the Contractor's construction schedule because of a delay in receiving approval to release the equipment manufacture. Delays caused by incomplete submittals, incorrect submittals, submittals not meeting these specifications causing excessive resubmittals will not be an acceptable reason for extending the Contract Time or increasing the Contract Price. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Equipment outline drawings showing elevation and plan views, dimensions, weight, anchor details, and required operating clearances. 2. Conduit entrance drawings. 3. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for the engine, AC generator, battery charger, generator set control system, electronic governor system, control stations, meters, relays, pilot lights, circuit breaker, etc. List all options and accessories furnished specifically for this project. Clearly mark each sheet to indicate which items apply and/or those items that do not apply. 4. Provide control systems engineering to produce custom unit elementary drawings showing interconnecting wiring and interlocking between components and to remotely mounted devices. Include and identify all connecting equipment and remote devices on the schematics. The notation "Remote Device" will not be acceptable. Show wire and terminal numbers. Indicate special identifications for electrical devices per the Drawings. 5. Provide plan and elevation drawings of each Generator Set, with dimensions, exterior and interior views, showing component layouts, controls, terminal blocks, etc. 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 3 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 3 of 22 a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 13. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal size. 14. Service and feeder lugs and connectors. 15. Instruction and renewal parts books. 16. Sound enclosure and all items mounted to the sound enclosure (including lighting, electrical panels and raceway). The sound enclosure drawings shall clearly show all access doors and hatches which shall determine the width of the access platform. Provide cut sheets on all items. Cut sheets shall demonstrate that Section 26 05 33 Raceway and 26 05 29 Support Hardware have been met. 17. Provide structural drawings on the access platform including all specified details. Show that the width of the platform allows the sound enclosure doors to open a minimum of 90 degrees. See structural specifications and drawings for more information. If the Contractor provides a sound enclosure with doors which are wider than shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall modify the width of the access platform and modify the structural slab supporting the platform. Submit details of all required changes to the Engineer for review and approval. 18. Fuel tank and all associated instrumentation including engineering drawings showing dimensions, weights, capacity, materials of construction, finishes for steel components and cut sheets for all instrumentation components provided. 19. Cut sheets on all conductors provided showing that they are tinned and meet the requirements of Section 26 05 19. 20. Provide cut sheets on all electronic components and certify that all circuit boards are conformal coated. F. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. G. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. e. Operating instructions, including periodic generator set operational testing. f. Automatic and manual startup and shutdown sequences. I. The manufacturer shall submit for approval, a training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 32 13 SECTION 16470 - 4 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 4 of 22 J. If the generator size must be increased to meet the specified performance criteria, and the supporting components of the power system must be changed to support the increase in the generator size, the Contractor shall submit a list of all changes required along with supporting calculations. Submittal of any required changes shall be made to the Engineer/Owner prior to proceeding with the changes. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA Standard ICS 2 — 2000 Industrial Control and Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. NFPA 70E — Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 4. NFPA 110 for Level 1 Systems. 5. OSHA for rotating parts. 6. NEMA MG temperature limits. 7. UL508A 8. CSA282-M1989 9. IEC 8528 part 4 10. Mil — Std 461 C part 9 11. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, 801.5 12. IEEE587 13. ASTM D2794-93 14. ASTM D2247-92 15. UL 142 — Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. E. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. The space required for the engine - generator shall include that shown for the access platform complete with stairs. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 5 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 5 of 22 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. The instructions shall include detailed assembly instructions including but not limited to wiring interconnection diagrams, rigging for lifting, skidding, jacking and moving using rolling equipment to place the equipment, bolt torquing requirements for bus and all other components which require the installation of bolted connections, and instructions for storing the equipment prior to energizing. C. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. D. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. E. Equipment shall be immediately installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings, upon delivery to the jobsite. If the equipment cannot be immediately installed, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. F. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. G. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. `WMIAT :T77\efl 614 A. The Manufacturer of the alternator shall assume Manufacturer's responsibility for the Generator Set in its entirety and warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for three years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cummins 2. Kohler CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 6 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 6 of 22 3. Caterpillar 4. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 RATINGS A. The service voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Power: Standby, minimum size as shown on the Drawings, at 0.8 power factor, based on site elevation of 800 feet and ambient temperatures up to 50°C. C. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. 2.3 PERFORMANCE A. Voltage Regulation: Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5% for any constant load between no load and rated load for both parallel and non -parallel applications. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. B. Frequency Regulation: Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5%. The AC voltage waveform shall have not more than 5% total harmonic distortion at full linear load and with not more than 3% in any single harmonic. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 50. C. Load Pick Up: The engine generator set shall be capable of picking up the loads indicated on each step, in order, with starting and running voltage dips not exceeding 15% and frequency variation not more than plus or minus 5%. Contractor shall submit calculations showing that the generator sizing is correct for the voltage and frequency variations specified. If the minimum specified generator size is unable to start the loads in the sequence specified, the manufacturer shall increase the size of the generator set until the loads start in the load sequence specified with the specified voltage and frequency limits specified. D. The engine generator set shall be capable of operating up to 30 minutes monthly at no load, for up to 12 months, without damage to the unit. E. Load steps Step Number Step kVA / HP Name of Equipment 1 50 KW Air Conditioners, Lighting, Etc 2 185 HP Submersible Pump on 18 Pulse VFD 3 185 HP Submersible Pump on 18 Pulse VFD 4 185 HP Submersible Pump on 18 Pulse VFD 5 185 HP Submersible Pump on 18 Pulse VFD CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 7 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 7 of 22 W, ! DIiz[it k'Lo A. Each engine shall be diesel, four-stroke, water-cooled, with a minimum of four cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at its minimum tolerance level shall be sufficient to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. Engine shall be certified by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to conform to tier level 2 in effect at the time of manufacture. Two stroke engines are not acceptable. Engine shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Caterpillar 2. Cummins 3. Kohler 4. No Equal B. Engine accessories and features shall include: 1. Governor System: An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. 2. Radiator and Cooling System: Skid mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 122°F (50°C) ambient as measured at the generator air inlet. Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment supplier shall fill the cooling system with 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact per OSHA requirements. 3. Electric System: An electric starter capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating. 4. Lubrication Oil Pump: Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump. 5. Oil Filters: Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator. Oil filters shall be accessible from the side of the engine easily reached through one of the enclosure access doors. Provide drip pan below oil filter to catch oil leaks during filter change. 6. Air cleaner: Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. The air cleaner shall be easily accessible from the side of the generator without climbing on top of the engine. 7. Fuel Lines and Fuel Filter: Provide flexible fuel lines. Fuel filter shall be water separator type and shall be located on the side of the engine for easy access and maintenance. Filters shall not be located on top of the engine. 8. Battery Charging Alternator: Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 45- ampere minimum, and solid-state voltage regulator. 2.5 AC GENERATOR A. General: Each AC generator shall be; synchronous, four -pole, revolving field, drip - proof construction, pre -lubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 125°C, over a 50°C ambient. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 8 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 8 of 22 B. For generators 2000 kW and larger, additional requirements include providing a form wound, two bearing, epoxy vacuum pressure impregnated alternator with non - hygroscopic epoxy, wound and insulated for an output rating of 480 volts. The generator laminations shall utilize class C5 steel and shall be wound with copper conductors. C. Provide a generator circuit breaker as specified herein. D. Power: Each generator shall be capable of delivering rated output power (kW) at rated frequency and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5% above or below rated voltage. E. Excitation: A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than ten seconds. F. Provide 120-volt, single phase anti -condensation heater for each generator set. G. All current transformers shall have their secondary leads connected to shorting type terminal blocks. 2.6 CONTROL A. General: The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor -based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set, and remote monitoring and control as described in this specification. B. Where the control panel contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Surge Protection Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). C. Mounting: The control shall be mounted on the generator set. The control shall be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. D. Standards: The control panel shall be UL508 listed, CSA282 M1989 certified, and meet IEC8528 part 4. All switches lamps and meters shall be oil tight and dust tight, and the enclosure door shall be gasketed. There shall be no exposed points in the control panel (with the door open) that operate in excess of 50 volts. The controls shall meet or exceed the requirements of Mil Std 461C part 9, and IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. The entire control system shall be tested and meet the requirements of IEEE587 for voltage surge resistance. E. Features: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 9 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 9 of 22 1. Mode Select Switch: The AUTO -RUN-OFF Mode Selector Switch shall initiate the following control modes. When in the OFF position, the generator set is disabled, and cannot be started locally or from remote commands. If the generator set is running in the RUN or AUTO positions, turning the selector switch to OFF will cause the generator set to go into the cool down mode, and stop after cooling down. When the selector switch is in the Run position, the generator set shall start, and remain running until turned to OFF. If the selector switch is placed in AUTO, the generator set shall start upon a dry contact request from a remote device and remain running until the contact closure is removed or the selector switch is placed in the OFF position, causing a normal cool down and shutoff. 2. Emergency Stop Switch: Switch shall be Red "mushroom head," push to operate, pull to reset. A protective cover shall be provided to prevent accidental operation. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out until reset, 3. Reset Switch: The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4. Panel Lamp Switch: Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off ten minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time. 5. Digital Metering Set: Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current, frequency, output current, output kW, kW hours, and power factor. Generator output voltage shall be available in line to line and line to neutral voltages and shall display all three-phase voltages (line -to -neutral or line -to - line) simultaneously. 6. Generator Set Alarm Display: The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non automatic generator status, and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on a digital display panel: a. Low oil pressure (alarm) b. Low oil pressure (shutdown) c. Oil pressure sender failure (alarm) d. Low coolant temperature (alarm) e. High coolant temperature (alarm) f. High coolant temperature (shutdown) g. Engine temperature sender failure (alarm) h. Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown selectable) i. Fail to crank (shutdown) j. Over crank (shutdown) k. Over speed (shutdown) 1. Low DC voltage (alarm) m. High DC voltage (alarm) n. W ak battery (alarm) o. Low fuel day tank (alarm) p. High AC voltage (shutdown) q. Low AC voltage (shutdown) r. Under frequency (shutdown) s. Over current (warning) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 10 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 10 of 22 t. Over current (shutdown) u. Short circuit (shutdown) v. Overload (alarm) w. Emergency stop (shutdown) x. Fuel leak (alarm) y. Ground fault trip (shutdown) 7. Special Alarm or Shutdown Conditions: Provide spare indication points for two additional alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above -specified conditions 8. Engine Status Monitoring: The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set control: a. Engine oil pressure (psi. or kPA.) b. Engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C) c. Engine oil temperature (degrees F or C) d. Engine speed (rpm) e. Number of hours of operation (hours) f. Number of start attempts g. Battery voltage (DC volts) 9. Electromechanical Hour meter as specified in Section 26 27 13. 10. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of the last ten warning or shutdown indications on the generator set, as well as total time of operation at various loads, as a percent of the standby rating of the generator set. 11. A set of Form C dry contacts shall be provided for each genset remote condition specified herein. 2.7 CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Cycle Cranking System: The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which allows for user selected crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. Initial settings shall be for three cranking periods of 15 seconds each, with 15-second rest period between cranking periods. B. Idle Mode Control: The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode in the RUN position only. In this mode, the alternator excitation system shall be disabled. C. Engine Governor Control: The control system shall include an engine governor control, which functions to provide steady state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor control shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit exhaust smoke while the unit is starting. The governor control shall be suitable for use in paralleling applications without component changes. D. Time Delay Start: The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0 - 300 seconds) and time delay stop (adjustable 0 - 600 seconds) functions. E. Sender Failure Monitoring: The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure, and engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring components, and an actual failure conditions. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 11 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 11 of 22 F. Routine Exercising: The control system shall contain an automatic exercising function with scheduler to automatically start and run the generator and configurable intervals. 2.8 ALTERNATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS A. Alternator Control Functions shall include an 1/0 module for remote trip of a down- stream protective relay activated by any of the protective devices listed below. B. The alternator protective devices shall include the following protective devices: 1. Generator phase sequence, 2. Over/under voltage (27/59), 3. Over/under frequency (81 O/U) 4. Reverse power (kW)(32RP) 5. Reverse reactive power (kVAR)(32RV) 6. Overcurrent protection (50151) C. Digital voltage Regulation: The generator set shall include an automatic digital voltage regulation system that is matched, and prototype tested with the governing system provided. It shall be immune from incorrect operation due to load induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three phase RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below a threshold of 59HZ. The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll off. Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise -lower switches, with alpha -numeric LED readout to indicate setting level. D. Output Current: Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on any phase for more than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator. E. Output Power: Controls shall be provided to monitor the kW load on the generator set and initiate an alarm condition when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of five seconds. Controls shall include a load -shed control, to operate a set of dry contacts (for use in shedding customer load devices) when the generator set is overloaded. F. Over/under Voltage Monitor: An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator -set voltage level for more than ten seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur when the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than ten seconds. G. Battery Monitoring System: A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25 volts DC or more than 32 volts DC. During engine starting, the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and if DC voltage drops to less than 24 volts for more than two seconds a "weak battery" alarm shall be initiated. 2.9 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 12 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 12 of 22 A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be the manufacturer's standard in addition to the features specified herein. as described in the Control Strategies in Section 40 96 30. B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Equipment functions and alarms, to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection. D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. E. Refer to Section 40 96 15 Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters. F. Communication 1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided: a. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP protocols. b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/10013aseT Ethernet port supporting Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP and SNMP. 2. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria: a. The converter shall support 10/100 Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall support 230 kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF 1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable. b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air gap meeting IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30 volts DC at 0.5 amperes minimum. c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input. e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP, or approved equal. 2.10 BASE A. The engine generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold- down clamps within the rails. B. The generator base shall have at least three locations on each side where the generator platforms, specified herein, will be bolted to prevent the movement of the platform away from engine generator. The side of the platform closest to the generator shall not relay on the bolt locations to support the platform. The platform shall be entirely self- supporting. 2.11 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 26 32 13 SECTION 16470 - 13 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 13 of 22 A. Coolant Heater: Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each engine, with power from the Panelboard. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with silicone hose connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine coolant system wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall be installed using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss. The coolant heater shall be provided with a thermostat, installed at the engine thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power connection to the coolant heater system from the Panelboard. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the engine to a minimum of 1007 (40°C) in a 40oF ambient, in compliance with NFPA110 requirements. B. Furnish and install lube oil heaters. Power to the heater shall be from the Panelboard. C. Vibration Isolators: Vibration isolators, spring/pad type, and quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. D. Starting and Control Batteries: Starting battery bank, calcium/lead antimony type, 24- volt DC, sized as recommended by the generator set manufacturer, shall be supplied for each generator set with battery cables and connectors E. Exhaust Silencer: Exhaust muffler(s) shall be provided for each engine, size and type as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. The mufflers shall be critical grade. Exhaust system shall be installed according to the generator set manufacturers recommendations and applicable codes and standards. The portion of exhaust pipe and silencers shall be fully insulated with lagging to protect the insulation layer for all portions of the exhaust system which is within the sound enclosure. Fasteners used to secure the lagging shall be 316 stainless steel. f►�f►�13�11_IM I���it�1'.I:1 Z!� � :7 A. UL listed/CSA certified ten ampere voltage regulated battery charger shall be provided in the engine generator set enclosure. Input AC voltage and DC output voltage shall be as required. Chargers shall be equipped with float, taper and equalize charge settings. Operational monitors shall provide visual output along with individual form C contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 volts AC from the Panelboard, 30 volts DC for remote indication of: 1. Loss of AC power red light 2. Low battery voltage red light 3. High battery voltage red light 4. Analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12-hour equalize charge timer, AC and DC fuses shall also be provided on the charger. 2.13 OUTDOOR WEATHER -PROTECTIVE HOUSING A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the packaging facilities are acceptable: 1. ACS Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Wedlake Enclosure Systems 3. E&CA CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 14 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 14 of 22 4. Global Power Components 5. No equal B. Engine generator set housing shall be provided factory assembled to engine generator set base and radiator cowling and shall be of the sound -attenuated type. Housing shall provide ample airflow for engine generator set operation at rated load in the ambient conditions previously specified. The housing shall have hinged side access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be lockable. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer's standard color using a two-step electro-coating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating, which meets the following requirements: 1. Primer thickness: 0.5-2.0 mils. Topcoat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils. 2. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50%. 3. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 413-513. 4. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch -pounds. 5. Salt Spray: per ASTM B 117-90, 1000+ hours. 6. Humidity: per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. 7. Water Soak: per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours. 8. Painting of hoses, hose clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. C. Provide generator enclosure with horizontal intake and discharge louvers or a radial turn duct mounted on the radiator discharge end of the sound enclosure in order to turn the radiator air discharge vertically. Intermediate turn vanes shall also be used if needed in order to assure that proper backpressure on the system is not exceeded. This turn duct shall be manufactured as part of the sound enclosure package and can be used to reduce the sound level emitted from the generator set. The metal makeup and thickness shall be of the same as the rest of the sound enclosure. The discharge area is also to be built in such a way as to prevent trash and or leaves build up with in the turn duct area. It shall also be built in such a way that it drains any rain water that may have entered into the space and does not enter into the engine generator area. D. The critical silencer shall be mounted inside the enclosure. E. Each door on the sound enclosure shall be provided with an intrusion alarm switch with contacts which close when the door is opened. Provide limit switch type switches. Magnetic reed switches are not acceptable. Provide raceway and conductors to connect the switches to a junction terminal box and terminate the conductors on terminal blocks for connection to the Owner's SCADA system. F. A gasketed access hatch maintaining the enclosure rating shall be provided on the top of the generator enclosure to access the radiator fill port. In addition, the manufacturer shall provide a stainless steel ladder with a safety cage to easily reach the access hatch. G. Sound Attenuation 1. Housing shall be sound attenuating type, producing a noise level not greater than 62 dBa at 23 feet. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 15 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 15 of 22 2. Enclosure sound ratings shall be submitted. H. Furnish and install a generator mounted Dry -Type Transformer and panelboard, of a size, rating and capacity, as required by the generator manufacturer.. 1. Furnish and install a flange -operated circuit breaker disconnect on the lineside of the dry -type transformer. Manufacturer shall size the breaker size per the final dry - type transformer size chosen by the manufacturer. Circuit Breaker Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X, 316 SS, 65KAIC. I. Dry -Type Transformer 1. Transformer insulation system shall be as follows: a. Up to 15 WA, three-phase and single-phase: UL recognized 180°C rated insulation system, encapsulated with 1150C rise. b. 15 WA, and above, three-phase and single-phase: UL recognized 200°C rated insulation system, ventilated, with 1150C rise. 2. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 400C maximum ambient, and a 24-hour average ambient of 300C 3. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D635. 4. W ndings shall have a BIL of 10 kV minimum. 5. Transformer shall be NEMA 3R, 316 Stainless Steel. Transformer core shall be constructed with high-grade, non -aging, silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Maximum magnetic flux densities shall be substantially below the saturation point. The transformer core volume shall allow efficient transformer operation at 10% above the nominal tap voltage. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed. Coils shall be wound of electrical grade copper with continuous wound construction. 7. On single and three-phase units, rated above 15 kVA, the core and coil assembly shall be ventilated, weatherproof enclosure. All ventilation openings shall be protected against falling dirt. The assembly shall be installed on vibration -absorbing pads. 8. Each transformer, pad -mounted, bracket -mounted, or suspended, shall utilize double deflecting neoprene mounting vibration isolators as manufactured by Mason Industries Type ND, sized according to rated capacities. 9. Approved Manufacturers: ABB Industrial Solutions, Eaton Corporation, Schneider Electric Company. J. Panelboard 1. Panelboard main and feeder breakers shall be sized by the enclosure manufacturer as required to supply the ancillary equipment of the generator. Panelboard shall be tin-plated copper bus type. 2. Panelboard and housing shall be NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. NEMA 12 Power panel in a NEMA 4X 316 SS box is not acceptable. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 16 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 16 of 22 3. The service voltage, overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the equipment and components shall be as shown on the Drawings, except that the minimum interrupting rating shall be 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 240/120 volt single- phase or 208Y/120 volt three-phase. 4. Panelboards shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment. 5. Panelboard shall contain a Type 2 (SPD). the complete panelboard, including the SPD, shall be UL67 listed. 6. Panelboards shall be designed for continuous operation, at rated current, in a 40°C ambient. 7. Approved Manufacturers: ABB Industrial Solutions, Eaton Corporation, Schneider Electric Company. K. LED Lighting and Receptacles 1. Six interior LED vandal proof light fixtures with two 4 foot bulbs wired to AC panel. 2. Two light switches. 3. Four 100W emergency light fixtures powered from generator set batteries with one 0-60 minute timer. 4. Exterior LED light fixture above each door with photocell and switch. One switch per enclosure side. 5. Four 20 amp GFCI duplex receptacles provided with aluminum clamshell enclosure, door, or hinged cover that prevents wetting of live parts. L. Two Break glass generator emergency stop station that positively prevents the startup and operation of the generator assembly located on the outside of the enclosure at each side. M. All electrical devices including generator -set ancillary loads shall be pre -wired before shipment. All generator auxiliary loads shall be wired to the AC load panel for the customer connection via rigid aluminum conduit raceway system, the minimum raceway size shall be 3/4". All conductors shall be 90% soft annealed, Tin -Plated Copper wire Type XHHW-2. Minimum conductor size shall be #12AWG for power circuits, # 14 for controls. 2.14 FUEL STORAGE TANK A. Provide a dual wall subbase fuel storage tank. The tank shall be sized to provide 24 hours usable capacity at 100% load. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall be double wall UL 2085 listed. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. Provide the fuel tank with a continuous level transmitter, and a leak detector. The fuel tank shall be constructed to place the fill spout on the intake end of the generator (rear access) such that the generator can be refueled with road access. 2.15 VIBRATION ISOLATOR A. Furnish and install spring type vibration -isolators between the sub -base tank and the generator set. A minimum of six isolators shall be used, properly sized for the generator set supplied. 2.16 GENERATOR ACCESS PLATFORM CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 17 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 17 of 22 A. Provide with the generator set, a set of platforms made of aluminum to serve as access into the enclosure via any of the generator set enclosure doors which are provided. This is to include frontage for any double door or single personnel door. The platforms shall be on both sides of the enclosure and meet all OSHA Code requirements for access, egress and safety. The platforms shall include hand railings around the entire perimeter of the platforms and stairs and support weight of any personnel whom may lean up against or fall into the railings. Handrails shall have openings where the sound enclosure doors are required to have full opening for access to the interior of the sound enclosure. B. Platform width shall allow for full 90-degree opening of all generator enclosure doors. Platform approval drawings shall illustrate door openings to show adequate clearance is being provided so the doors open 90 degrees without touching the handrails. Stairs shall be included on both platforms and steps are to be as OSHA prescribed for riser distances. The platforms shall be designed such that all rain snow or sleet will easily pass through the aluminum grates on all horizontal surfaces. The platforms shall be provided by the same vendor as the generator set. C. Platforms shall have lifting means permanently and shall be constructed with support legs on all sides so that no support is from the generator frame or sound enclosure, however they shall be bolted to the generator frame so that no movement away from the generator is possible without disconnecting the bolted connections. The platforms shall not be bolted to the sound enclosure, which shall be removable without unbolting the platforms from the generator frame. D. The platforms shall be installed by the contractor and leveled as necessary to provide a safe and level surface for all personnel. The platforms shall be anchored in such as way so that there is not a chance of swaying or other movement of the platforms while in use. E. Provide two ground pads on each platform. F. All fastener materials shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.17 SERVICE AND FEEDER LUGS AND CONNECTORS A. All service and feeder lugs and connectors shall be copper and shall be crimped type, with standard industry tooling. Lugs and connectors shall match the wire size where used and shall be clearly identified and color coded on the connector. All connections shall be made for stranded wire and shall be made electrically and mechanically secured. The lugs and connectors shall have a current carrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and meet UL 486 requirements for 75°C. Lugs larger than #8 AWG shall be two -hole long barrel lugs with NEMA spacing. The lugs shall be of closed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor. 2.18 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Furnish and install a generator mounted molded case circuit breaker of the rating and size as indicated on the drawing. The circuit breaker shall meet the specification in Section 26 28 16 Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches. The Circuit breaker shall be one of the listed manufacturers and shall not be a special breaker which is not commonly available from stock. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-17 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 18 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 18 of 22 B. Where shown on the Drawings, furnish and install two mounted main line circuit breakers, sized to carry the rated output current of the generator set. C. The circuit breakers interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum asymmetrical short circuit output of the generator. D. Provide the following spare parts in the quantities specified: 1. Two air cleaner elements of each type. 2. Two Fuses of each type. 3. One Radiator hoses of each type. 4. Two Fuel filters of each type. 5. Two Oil filters of each type. 6. One Belt of each type. 2.19 FACTORY TESTING A. The standby generator shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for a period of not less than two working days, with not less than one working day per standby generator. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Concrete pads shall be installed as shown on the Structural Drawings. C. Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install the generator set with sub — base fuel tank on the concrete pad as shown on the drawings. Install the vibro-isolators between the sub — base fuel tank and the generator set. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-18 26 32 13SECTION 16470 -19 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 19 of 22 C. Install required safety labels. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. M1WWM1 -\1 111.` 61004 A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.6 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Operate unit to demonstrate ability to operate continuously without vibration, jamming, leakage or overheating and to perform specified functions, after installation and after manufacturer's Engineer's check of installed equipment. B. Comply with manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions during start up and operation. C. Promptly correct improper installation of equipment. D. Cooperate with supplier of equipment at time of startup and in making of all final adjustments necessary to place equipment in satisfactory working order. Startup shall not commence without the presence of the manufacturer's Engineer. 3.7 FIELD TEST A. Upon completion of the installation and as soon as conditions permit, the emergency power supply system including the engine driven generator, electrical circuits, controls, transfer switch and other devices shall be tested in the presence of the Owner/Engineer by the Contractor and the service representative for the manufacturer of the engine driven generator unit to assure that the system functions as specified. The test shall be conducted in accordance with the Owner's process needs at a time of day or day of the week as directed by the Owner in order to manually load the generator with actual plant loads. The time may be any time of the day or night and the day of the week may be any day as selected by the Owner. No increase in Contract Price will be accepted for after-hours testing. B. Prior to scheduling the test, notify the Owner/Engineer in writing that all requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, that all apparatus shall be clean, properly adjusted and ready for operation and that the Instruction Manuals, parts lists and record drawings have been submitted. C. The manufacturers' Engineer shall make such changes in wiring or connections and such adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to make the circuit, device or control system function as specified and otherwise comply with the Contract Documents. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-19 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 20 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 20 of 22 D. As part of the field test, the automatic shutdown devices shall be tested, and the respective values recorded at which the devices will stop the engine. Any adjustments required shall be made in the devices to make the operating values correspond to those recommended by the engine manufacturer and as recorded during the stop test. E. After a two-hour test has been completed, additional testing shall be performed to demonstrate the emergency power supply system's ability to meet the automatic starting, load transfer and motor starting requirements. F. If the emergency power supply system fails to fulfill the performance requirements of this specification, corrective action shall be taken, and the system retested to assure full compliance. All expenses associated with the field tests, including any corrective action, shall be borne to the Contractor. G. The Contractor shall provide all fuel and all engine fluids to perform all required testing. All fluid levels and fuel shall be filled to full following testing and shall be turned over to the Owner filled when the project has been completed and the unit is turned over to the Owner for their use. If the Owner experiences an emergency condition and causes the engine generator to run prior to final competition, then the fuel and engine fluids used will be the responsibility of the Owner to replenish. H. The field testing shall include a demonstration of the generator tripping due to an engine or generator fault condition initiated by the package engine- generator controls and shall include a trip of the generator differential relay if present. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the motor controllers. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the Standby Generator Sets furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one eight - hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-20 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 21 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 21 of 22 D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, circuit breaker, engine, alternator, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training session for the Owner's use. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-21 26 32 13SECTION 16470 - 22 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SET Page 22 of 22 THIS PAGE INTNETIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-22 26 33 53 - 1 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 33 53 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish and install continuous -duty single-phase, solid-state, uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS shall provide high -quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads, together with appurtenances, complete and operable, as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. B. Provide systems engineering with coordination curves, to demonstrate coordination between proposed breakers and/or fuses submitted, such that protective device coordination is accomplished. Such curves and settings shall be included as a part of these submittals. C. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related sections to which reference is made in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed. D. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision. E. The original equipment manufacturer (OEM) shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturer's logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the OEM's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. F. Submit for approval, a manufacturer's conducted training agenda for all training specified herein. Training agenda shall not be submitted until final approval of the Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Shop Drawings and Product Data. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 33 53 - 2 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 2 of 8 8. UL Listing of the completed assembly. 9. Component list with detailed component information, including original manufacturer's part number. 10. Conduit entry/exit locations 11. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 12. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 13. Descriptive bulletins 14. Product data sheets. 15. Number and size of cables per phase, neutral if present, ground and all cable terminal sizes. H. Factory Tests. Submittals shall be made for factory tests specified herein. I. Field Test Reports. Submittals shall be made for field tests specified herein. J. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. e. Field Test Reports 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The UPS assembly and all components in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E — Standard For Electrical Safety in the Workplace 3. ASME 4. CSA 22.2, No. 107.1 5. FCC Part 15, Class A 6. IEC 1000-4-5 7. ISO 9001 8. NEMA PE-1 9. OSHA 10. UL Standard 1778 CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 33 53 - 3 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 3 of 8 11. NEMA ICS 6 — Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of ten years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. All assemblies shall be of the same manufacturer. Equipment that is manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" shall not be acceptable. C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. E. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, or equipment which failed any factory tests, will not be permitted. B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Two copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. C. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Breakers and accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. D. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. E. Equipment shall not be stored onsite without written approval of the Owner/Engineer. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment with no change in Contract Price or Schedule. Payment will not be approved for equipment stored off site. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 33 53 - 4 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 4 of 8 A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. B. Provide a 365/24 support available via a toll -free phone number, with 20-minute response on all issues. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Eaton Powerware Model Ferrups 2. American Power Conversion Smart — UPS 3. Approved equal. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 GENERAL A. The UPS described in this specification shall be designed for operation on the voltage systems as shown on the Drawings. B. Rating shall be as shown on the Drawings C. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or specified elsewhere. A. The UPS shall sustain operation of the indicated equipment and shall provide power for an orderly shutdown to prevent the loss of the System during power failure. The UPS shall provide isolation between the System and the plant power system. A single UPS unit shall be provided by the electrical contractor to provide power to each control panel. The power feed to each control panel shall be fed from this source. B. The UPS shall consist of a microprocessor -controlled inverter, precision 3 step battery charger, batteries to store emergency power, a detachable keypad, and electronic digital meter, and an integrally mounted manual isolated break before make bypass switch. C. Under normal operating conditions, the critical load shall be powered by a normal AC line supply that has been filtered through the transformer. When AC line power is present, the inverter shall be off and the battery charger shall be off, if the batteries are fully charged. When AC line power fails, or goes out of tolerance, the inverter shall supply AC power to the transformer from the batteries. There shall be no measurable break in the output of the system during transfer from normal AC line supply to the inverter battery supply or back to line. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 26 33 53 - 5 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 5 of 8 1. The UPS system shall be sized to sustain 1.5 times the connected full load for a minimum period of 30 minutes in an operating environment of 327 to 1047. Exact sizing is the responsibility of the supplier. 2. The UPS system shall be lightning, and surge tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and shall be capable of reducing an input spike to less than 3 volts on the output for a 2000-to-1-spike attenuation. The UPS system shall have 120-dB common mode and 60 dB transverse mode noise attenuation. 3. The UPS system shall provide a true separately derived power source as defined in the NEC article 250-5d with output neutral bonded to ground. There shall be no direct connection between input and output and less than 2 pf of effective input to output capacitance. 4. The UPS system output shall be regulated to 120 VAC + 3%, 60 Hz + 0.5 Hz over the full dynamic range from no load to full load, low line VAC to high line VAC, and low battery voltage to high battery voltage. 5. The UPS system shall provide computer grade sine wave power with 5% or less total harmonic distortion. The UPS system capacity shall be rated in volt-amperes (VA) while loaded with typical computer grade switch mode power supplies having a power factor of 0.6 to 0.7 and crest factor of 2.7 to 3.5. The UPS system shall have an efficiency of at least 90% when operated from AC line. 8. The UPS system shall have built-in self -diagnostic monitoring capable of monitoring as a minimum AC volts in/out, AC current in/out, battery voltage, VA load, watts, power factor percent of full load, time of day, system hours, inverter hours and projected run time available. Unit shall have two normally open relay contacts for remote alarm condition reporting. The supplier shall connect all available status contacts to the control system. 9. The UPS system shall have a dual track redundant configuration that utilizes either line or inverter output for power and shall be designed to meet or exceed a MTBF of 100,000 hours. 10. All cables and connectors for power distribution to the system components shall be furnished and installed under this contract. 11. UPS systems greater than 3 kVA shall be provided with an input voltage of 240 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hertz. All others shall be provided with an input voltage of 120 VAC, 1 phase 60 Hertz. The supplier shall coordinate the input voltage and neutral requirements with the electrical contractor before ordering the UPS. 12. The system batteries shall be sealed, no maintenance type rated for 100 amp hour at 12 VDC. 13. Each UPS shall provide dry contacts to tie into computer system such as UPS Fail, UPS bypass, etc. 14. The UPSs shall all be dual conversion UPS. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 33 53 - 6 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 6 of 8 15. The UPS sizes are for reference only. The supplier shall provide sizing data on the UPS listing all loads and calculations required for sizing the UPS system for Consulting Engineer review and approval. The system supplier shall provide test data on the UPS to show conformance with these specifications including, but not limited to, full load back-up time, half load back-up time, efficiency at full load, output voltage/frequency regulation during adverse input power conditions, etc. 16. Each UPS shall be provided with a external bypass switch, in a NEMA IA enclosure, wall mounted, which will permit seamless transfer of the UPS to a separate source and back, without loss of load, for maintenance of the UPS. The manufacturer of the transfer switch shall be the manufacturer of the UPS. 2.4 REMOTE MONITORING AND CONTROL INTERFACE A. General: All control and interconnection points from the equipment to the plant control and monitoring system shall be brought to a separate connection box. No field connections shall be made directly to the equipment control devices. Functions to be brought out shall be as described in the Control Strategies in Section 40 96 30. B. Discrete control or status functions shall be form C relays with contacts rated at 120 volts AC. Analog signals shall be isolated from each other. C. Equipment functions to be directly interfaced to the Plant Control and Monitoring System, shall be designed for operation with an Ethernet Connection. D. The equipment manufacturer shall factory enter the proper IP Address for such connection. Upon request by the Contractor, the Owner/Engineer will provide the proper Internet Protocol Address (IP Address), to be configured by the equipment manufacturer. E. Refer to Section 40 96 15 Instrumentation Input Output List for monitored parameters. F. Communication 1. For remote monitoring, one of the following communication capabilities shall be provided: a. One integral 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting SNMP protocol. b. One media protocol converter, interfacing the provided equipment to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port supporting SNMP protocol. 2. The media protocol converter shall meet the following criteria: a. The converter shall support 10/100Base-T Ethernet. The serial port speed (baud rate) shall support 230kbps. The protocol shall support Modbus TCP, Ethernet IP, DF1, and Modbus RTU/ASCII. Protocol shall be Web Browser configurable. b. Operating limits shall be 0-60°C, with humidity range minimum of 5-90%. Shock capability on the serial port shall be ESD +15 kV air gap meeting IEC 1000-4-2. Power requirements shall be 9-30 VDC at 0.5 A minimum. c. The converter shall have LED status for serial, signals, power, and Ethernet. d. The converter housing shall be UL 1604, Class 1 Div 2, DIN Rail mountable. The converter shall have DB-9M port connection, with screw terminals, to the input. e. Converter shall be Digi One IAP,or approved equal. 2.5 SPARE PARTS CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 33 53 - 7 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 7 of 8 A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Three — Control fuses of type used. 2. Three — Power fuses of type used. B. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage, vacuum sealed, and clearly identified on the exterior of package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number 2.6 FACTORY TESTING A. The UPS shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the factory and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. Prior to factory testing, the manufacturer shall check to see that all selections and settings required by the Power System Study Engineer have been performed. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform with the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards. D. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide the services of a qualified factory -trained manufacturer's field engineer to assist the Contractor in installation and start-up of each type of the equipment specified below for a period of not less than one working day, with not less than one working day per UPS. The manufacturer's field engineer shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. 3.2 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing UPSs with minimum five years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Install required safety labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 26 33 53 - 8 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY Page 8 of 8 A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. B. The Power Monitoring and Protective Relays shall be set in the field by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, retained by the Contractor, in accordance with settings designated in a coordinated study of the system as required in Section 26 05 73 Power System Study. All such settings, including the application of arc flash labels, shall have been made and Approved by the Owner/Engineer, prior to energizing of the equipment. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. The UPS manufacturer's field engineer shall perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer and make all control adjustments required for the individual application of the drive. B. Submit the results of all specified tests to the Engineer/Owner within five business days for approval and for their permanent records. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the UPS. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory -trained manufacturer's representative shall personally inspect the equipment at the jobsite and shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including all settings designated in the Power System Study. B. Provide three copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.11 TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer's services for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the UPSs furnished under this Section. B. The training for each type of equipment shall be for a period of not less than one-half eight -hour day. C. The cost of training program to be conducted with Owner's personnel shall be included in the Contract Price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the system being supplied. D. Provide detailed O&M manuals to supplement the training course. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project. E. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer's qualified representative. Training program shall include instructions on the assembly, protective devices, metering, and other major components. F. The Owner reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for the Owner's use END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 264100-1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 4100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install a lightning protection system that fully meets the UL Standards listed herein. The Contractor shall provide an inspection of each new structure, or modified existing structure, by Underwriters Laboratories and shall obtain a Master Label for each new or modified structure B. The Contractor shall employ the services of a licensed lightning protection systems engineering company to design and install the lightning protection system and prepare detailed installation drawings and material specifications. The system shall include ground wires, ground rods, exothermic connections, mechanical connectors, structural steel connections, all as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein, to provide a bonding to earth ground of all metallic materials likely to become energized. Compliance with all provisions of Section 26 05 26 shall be included under this specification. C. The Franklin Rod system shall be used. Other systems such as the early streamer emission (ESE) are not acceptable D. The Bid Price shall be in complete compliance with the Contact Documents. Any exception shall be included in the bid with a detailed explanation that clearly indicates the paragraph of this Specification and / or the item in the Drawings to which the exception applies. The Contractor shall explain in detail the reasons for the exception. The inclusion of an exception and its explanation as specified shall not constitute any obligation on the part of the Engineer / Owner to accept the Bid Price with the exception. E. This Specification shall have precedence over any conflict in the bidder's submittals and / or descriptive information and the Contract Documents unless an exception is made at the time of bidding as specified herein, and the bid price is accepted with the bidder's exception by the Engineer / Owner. F. The Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment, supplies, and shall perform all labor required to install the equipment specified in the Contract Documents in order to install, test, and place into satisfactory operation in the time specified for completion in the Contract Documents. Failure of any of the Contractors sub -contractors or suppliers to perform the work as specified shall not constitute an acceptable reason for the Owner to grant any change in the Contract Price or additions to the Contract Time. 1.2 RELATED WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 264100-2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 2 of 6 A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references, and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings, and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time, 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Complete design drawings, for each structure and the site, showing the type, size, and locations of all grounding, down conductors, through roof/through wall assemblies, roof conductors and air terminals, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. B. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision. C. All shop drawing submittals and all O&M submittals shall be submitted accordance with Division 1. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed, manufactured, and installed according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 780 — Lightning Protection Code 3. LPI 175 - Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard 4. UL 96A — Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems B. All equipment specified in this Section of the Specifications shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 264100-3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 3 of 6 A. The manufacturer of the lightning protection system equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five years and the lightning protection engineering company shall have been designing and installing lighting protection systems for at least five years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning protection system of the LPI, UL and NFPA. Standard requirements C. All components and material shall be new and of the latest field proven design and in current production. Obsolete components or components scheduled for immediate discontinuation shall not be used. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, complete all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer prior to delivery of the equipment and materials, an approved copy of all such submittals. B. Protect equipment and materials during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the system and equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Suppliers are acceptable: 1. Bonded Lightning / Advanced Lightning Technology, Argyle, Texas Hicks Lightning Protection, Ponder, Texas VFC, Inc. Grapevine, Texas 4. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific suppliers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 2.2 GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 41 00 - 4 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 4 of 6 A. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. Lightning protection system installers / designers shall be certified by the Lightning Protection Institute for the work. Submit LPI training and qualifications for each designer and installer. The installation shall be in full compliance with UL 96A and NFPA 780. Should conflict between the two standards be discovered and at issue for the project, submit the issue to the Engineer for resolution. B. All equipment shall be new and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, and NFPA standard requirements. C. At the point where an electrical service of 1000 Volts or less is generated, a surge protection device shall be provided and installed, complying with UL96A, for a UL Master Label Certificate of Inspection. The surge protection device shall comply with UL Standard 1449 Third Edition, as a Type 1 or Type 2 lightning rated unit of 20ka or more, as specified in Section 26 43 13. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Class I Class II materials may be utilized for Class I structures, not exceeding 75 feet above grade. All other structures shall utilize Class H materials. B. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with 316 stainless steel fasteners (nuts, bolts, washers and anchors) , and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements. C. Aluminum materials, with 316 stainless steel fasteners (nuts, bolts, washers and anchors), shall be used only on aluminum, galvalume or galvanized metal structures. Where aluminum, galvalume or galvanized metal parapet caps are used, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components. Approved transitional components shall be used for transitions to aluminum materials. Down leads and grounding shall utilize tinned copper with the bimetal transition occurring at the bi- metal through roof assembly. D. All air terminal bases for flat roof areas shall be the adhesive type. E. Conductors shall be tinned copper, (aluminum where installed on aluminum roofs). Provide conductors with their wire size, stranding, and weight in accordance with NFPA 780. F. Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non -corrosive metal, and have ample strength to support conductors. Cable fasteners shall be of the adhesive type. G. All cable connecters shall be tin coated copper cast bronze with screw pressure type 316 stainless steel bolts, washers and nuts. H. Where any part of a protection system is exposed to potential mechanical injury, protect it by covering it with PVC conduit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 264100-5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 5 of 6 A. All materials shall be installed by experienced workmen that specialize in this type of work. The lightning protection system shall be installed per approved shop drawings and UL and NFPA recommended practices. B. Install air terminals on structure steel framework bonded to the down coming cables. Unless otherwise specified herein, all materials shall be tin plated copper with 316 stainless steel fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers and anchors) , and used in accordance with LPI, UL and NFPA code requirements. Conduit shall be as specified under Section 26 0533. C. Bond structure steel framework as required by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. D. Bond all metal pipes and metal structures as required by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. E. All concealed conductors shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC conduit. F. Provide a dedicated lightning protection system ground rod at the ground end of each down lead in accordance with NFPA 780 4.13.1.1(1). If a grounding counterpoise loop is present, bond each lightning protection system down lead to the nearest power system grounding electrode (ground rod) which is a part of the counterpoise in accordance with NFPA 780 4.13.1.1(2). Exothermically weld each down lead to the ground rod. All down lead conductors shall be installed without splice from the roof lightning protection conductors to the dedicated lightning protection system ground rod. G. All concealed lightning protection system connections shall be exothermically welded. The only exception shall be for lightning protection systems installed in NEC Classified areas as determined by NFPA 820, the Engineer or the NEC Authority Having Jurisdiction. H. All components of the system, on or above the roof, shall be connected to the system ground. 3.2 TESTING A. Employ the services of a UL field inspector, for inspection of the system upon completion of the installation. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the correctness of the installation and shall make any and all corrections and additions deemed necessary by the UL inspector. The Contractor shall pay for all costs of the UL inspection and any subsequent re -inspections as required. B. Inspection and testing to be performed by personnel regularly engaged in the installation and testing of Master Labeled lightning protection systems. C. Inspect the system for proper installation. D. Test the complete system for continuity to the electrical grounding system. E. An application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for inspection and certification, and shall be delivered to the Engineer, confirming that all concealed components have been monitored during job construction. F. A UL Certification shall be provided for each and every new structure, including all parts of existing structures that are expanded, as defined by NFPA 780 and UL 96A. A Master Label shall be obtained for all structures where the service voltage is less than 1000 VAC. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 264100-6 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM Page 6 of 6 G. All inspections shall be done by a third parry inspector in person on site by a UL or LPI certified inspector. Self -inspection by the lightning protection system designer or installer is not acceptable. Photographic inspection is not acceptable. All lightning protection system inspections shall be witnessed by the Engineer / Owner. Unwitnessed inspections are not acceptable and shall be re -done if not witnessed with no change in the Contract Price or Contract Time. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 2643 13 - 1 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 43 13 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for low voltage AC surge protective devices (SPDs 1Kv and less), to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted, and factory installed, as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division 26 00 00 for related work and electrical coordination requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned unreviewed. Unmarked cut sheets will cause rejection of the submittal and its return for revision. B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related sections to which reference is made in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned unreviewed. C. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., enough to confirm that the SPD provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated, with the reason for such deviations. Acceptance of any deviation will be at the sole discretion of the Owner/Engineer. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned unreviewed. D. The submittals shall include: 1. Dimensional drawing of each SPD type. 2. UL 1449 Third Edition Listing, Standard for Safety, Surge Protective Devices, documentation. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 3. UL 1283 Listing, Electromagnetic Interference Filters, documentation. 4. ANSI/IEEE C6241 and C6245, Category C3 (20kV-1.2/50, IOkA-8/20µs waveform) clamping voltage test results. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 2643 13 - 2 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 2 of 8 d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. UL 1449 Third Edition — Surge Protective Devices 2. UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2-2002 — IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits 4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 — IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. 5. NEC Article 285 - Surge Protective Devices 6. NEMA/ISCI —109 Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test 7. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90A Surge Withstand Capability Tests 8. IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests B. All SPDs and their installation shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The manufacturer of the SPD shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. The protected electrical equipment, after installation of the SPD, shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards: 1. UL 67 - Panelboards. 2. UL 845 - Motor Control Centers. 3. UL 891 - Switchboards. 4. UL 1558 - Low Voltage Switchgear. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warrantees, including the manufacturer's warrantee, for the equipment specified and the proper installation thereof, to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of final acceptance of the equipment and its installation. Within such period of warranty, all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition shall be provided. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 2643 13 - 3 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 3 of 8 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable (Type 1 and Type 2): 1. Cutler Hammer. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Square D 4. Allen Bradley 5. Approved equal. B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable (Type 3): 1. Edco SLAC Series 2. Phoenix Contact 3. Brick Wall Model PWOM20 4. Approved equal. 2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT A. General 1. All SPDs shall be internal to the equipment being protected. Externally housed SPDs will not be acceptable. 2. All SPDs shall be marked with a short-circuit current rating and shall meet or exceed the available fault current at the connection point. 3. UL 1449 Usage Classifications. a. Type 1 — Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment overcurrent device and intended to be installed without an external overcurrent protective device. b. Type 2 — Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of service equipment overcurrent device; including SPDs located at the branch panel. c. Type 3 — Point of utilization SPDs, installed at a minimum conductor length of 10 meters (30 feet) from the electrical service panel to the point of utilization, for example cord connected, direct plug-in, receptacle type and SPDs installed at the utilization equipment being protected. The distance (10 meters) is exclusive of conductors provided with or used to attach SPDs. 4. Construction of Type 1 and Type 2. a. Fully Integrated Component Design: All of the SPD's components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality will not be accepted. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 2643 13 - 4 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 4 of 8 b. Overcurrent Protection: The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. The thermally protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. c. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. SPDs that require maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not acceptable. d. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules are not acceptable. e. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. f. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. g. Power and ground connections shall be prewired within the protected equipment. h. Local Monitoring: Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push -to -test button shall be provided to test each phase indicator. Push -to -test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes. i. Surge Counter: The SPD shall indicate user how many surges have occurred at the location. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short -duration button press. To prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of two seconds in order to clear the surge count total. The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile memory or UPS backup. j. Remote Monitoring: For remote monitoring, the SPDs shall provide the same discrete and analog signal and control functions as specified for local monitoring and the surge counter, to a terminal strip for outgoing connection to a PLC as shown on the Drawings. The functions shall be converted as specified for interface to the monitored equipment. k. The voltage surge suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal -oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 2643 13 - 5 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 5 of 8 1. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. in. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition, Section 37.3.2 and 37.4 at the standard's highest short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current testing. n. SPD shall be tested with the ANSUIEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20W-1.2/50µs, IOkA-8/20µs). o. SPD shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and N-G in WYE systems (7 Mode). Construction of Type 3. a. Fully Integrated Component Design: All of the SPD's components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality will not be accepted. b. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries are not acceptable. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections are not acceptable. c. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. d. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. e. Power and ground connections shall be prewired within the protected equipment. f. Local Monitoring: Visible indication of proper SPD connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator light shall indicate that the module is fully operable. The status of each SPD module shall be monitored on the front cover of the module. g. SPD shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Third Edition and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters. h. SPD shall be tested with the ANSUIEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20W-1.2/50µs, IOkA-8/20µs). B. Applications. Service Entrance Rated Equipment (Type 1). a. This applies to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other devices installed as service entrance equipment where the SPD is to be permanently connected between the secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment overcurrent device. b. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSUIEEE C62.41 Category C environments. c. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the equipment d. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the equipment, at the assembly point, by the original equipment manufacturer e. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bars. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 2643 13 - 6 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 6 of 8 f. The SPD shall be connected through a UL approved disconnecting means. The disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible. g. The SPD shall be integral to the equipment as a factory standardized design. h. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 2. Distribution Equipment Applications (Type 2). a. This applies to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other non -service entrance equipment where the SPD is to be permanently connected on the load side of the equipment overcurrent device. b. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the equipment. c. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the equipment by the manufacturer. d. The manufacturer shall size and provide the overcurrent and disconnecting means for the SPD. e. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSUIEEE C62.41 Category B environments. f. The SPD shall be located within the panelboard, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. g. The SPD shall not limit the use of through -feed lugs, sub -feed lugs, and sub - feed breaker options. h. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 3. Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). a. Locate the SPD on the load side of the ground and neutral connections. b. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect circuit breaker or fuse as shown on the drawings. The disconnecting means shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible. c. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 4. Mechanical Equipment Manufacturer's Provided Control Panels (MEMs) and Electrical Manufacturer's Provided Control Panels (OEMs) Applications (Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3) a. Where any such panel is installed as service entrance equipment, a Type 1 SPD shall be installed. 1) The same requirements for other service entrance equipment listed above apply to this application except for the requirement that the Type 1 SPD shall not be required to be of the same manufacturer as the panel. b. Where any such panel is installed as non -service entrance equipment, but within 50' of wire length of the incoming power line when that line is overhead. 1) The same requirements for other non -service entrance equipment listed above apply to this application except for the requirement that the Type 2 SPD shall not be required to be of the same manufacturer as the panel. 2) Where a Type 1 SPD is installed, a Type 2 SPD is not required on the same panel unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 2643 13 - 7 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 7 of 8 c. Where any such panel includes a PLC, a Type 3 SPD shall be installed. 1) The same requirements for other individual control panel and related equipment listed above apply to this application. 2) The SPD shall be integral to the MEM or OEM panel, as a factory standardized design. C. Ratings 1. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. SPD shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage. 3. Minimum surge current rating shall be 240 kA per phase (120 kA per mode) for service entrance and 120 kA per phase (60 kA per mode) for distribution applications. 4. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following: Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) Voltage LN LG N-G 240/ 120 1200/800V 800V 800V 208Y/120 800V 800V 800V 480Y.277 1200V 1200V 1200V 600Y/347 1500V 1500V 1500V 5. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSFIEEE Category C High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%. 6. Minimum UL 1449 3rd edition withstand Nominal Discharge Current (In) rating to be 20kA per mode 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated on drawings. Color schemes shall be as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in the individual equipment Specification. B. Types 1 and 2 shall be grounded and bonded as a part of the individual equipment as specified in the individual equipment Section. Type 3 shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the SPD manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 2643 13 - 8 LOW VOLTAGE AC SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs) Page 8 of 8 "II f1M.I11DIN 01 III 0 log J:A0W§]X'A CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - I LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 1 of 12 SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING SYSTEM PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install a complete lighting system ready for operation as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references, and include such information or work as may be specified. B. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings, and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide external wiring and raceways, as required to provide a fully functioning power, control and process control systems. If the equipment requires more conductors and/or wiring, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional conductors, raceways and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 26 00 00 and as specified herein. All cut sheets shall be clearly marked to indicate which products are being submitted for use on this project. Unmarked cut sheets will be cause to reject the submittal and return it for revision. B. Submittals shall also contain information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification but described in the related sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned without review. C. Manufacturer's technical information for the materials proposed for use in the systems. D. For all light pole foundations shown to be installed in earth, provide installation and anchoring drawings that are stamped and sealed by a licensed engineer in the state of Texas. The soil condition shall be assumed to be disturbed earth. If compaction is assumed, a compaction test shall be performed on all foundation locations, showing the minimum field density assumed in the foundation design. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 2 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 2 of 12 E. Submit manufacturer's name and catalog data for all lighting equipment specified in this Section and on the lighting fixture schedule. F. Shop drawings: Clearly indicate luminaire type, name of the job. Contractor shall endeavor to submit all luminaires, drivers and integral controls shop drawings at one time, in one package. Any re -submittals shall include all luminaire, driver and integral controls previously rejected or requiring further information. Specialty SSL, custom, or modified fixtures may be submitted as a separate package. G. Shop Drawings: Reproductions of the Contract Drawings are not acceptable as shop drawings. H. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings and specific catalog number and identification of items and accessories and performance data. I. Shop Drawings: Indicate any dimensions and components for each luminaire that are not a standard product of the manufacturer. J. Wiring Diagrams — as needed for special operation or interaction with other system(s). K. Photometric Data: Where indicated below or for substitutions, supply complete photometric data for the fixture, including optical performance, rendered by NVLAP approved laboratory developed according to the methods of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Submit electronically, in IESNA LM-63 standard format. Types XX and YY. L. Submit photometric data for all substitute luminaries. Photometric reports are not required from specified manufacturer unless noted in paragraph H above. M. Specification Sheets: If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with Contract Documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer's complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. N. Substitutions shall include complete photometric data as outlined in paragraph H above, and point -by -point calculations for the specific conditions on the project. Samples shall be required for consideration of any substitutions and must be submitted in accordance with the terms outlined in paragraph below. O. Working Samples of all substitutions: Samples shall be 120-volt with cord and plug attached, and shall include specified LEDs and all modifications necessary to meet the requirements specified in the Contract Documents. P. Energy Efficiency: I . Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under work of this Section. 2. Submit data indicating luminaire efficiency. 3. Submit data indicating Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF). 4. Submit data indicating Luminaire Efficacy rating (LER). 5. Submit data indicating color rendition index of light source. Q. Submit environmental data in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM E2129 for products provided under work of this Section. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 3 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 3 of 12 R. Manufacturer's technical information for the materials proposed for use in the systems. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" (NEC), and shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) "Standards for Safety, Electric Lighting Fixtures". B. National Energy Policy Act of 2005, Public Law No. 109-58. C. IESNA LM-63 - ANSI Approved Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and Related Information; 2002. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. E. IESNA LM-79-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric. F. Measurements of Solid State Lighting Products; 2008. G. IESNA LM-80-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. H. IESNA LM-80-08 IESNA - Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. I. IESNA TM-21-2011 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. J. UL 8750 — Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products. K. OSHA 29CFR1910.7 — Luminaires shall be listed by national recognized testing laboratory approved by United Stated Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall be of the energy -efficient type. B. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar lighting fixtures for a minimum period of five years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar systems shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. C. The luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of the modules built to meet this specification. These tests shall include: CCT, CRI, Lumen output and wattage. Tests shall be recorded, analyzed and maintained for future reference. D. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. E. LED luminaire designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 4 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 4 of 12 F. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment, an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by suitable complete enclosures. Protect equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry. C. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent location shown on the Drawings within seven calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven calendar days, the equipment shall be stored on site in a dry heated and air conditioned space. If there is no such storage space on site, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the system and equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. B. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the Luminaires for a period of five years after acceptance of the Luminaires. Warranty shall cover all components comprising the luminaire. All warranty documentation shall be provided to customer prior to the first shipment. C. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no additional cost (including parts, labor, and travel expenses) to the Owner. D. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 5 of 12 1. Lighting fixture manufacturers and types as required by the "Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the Drawings. The catalog numbers are given as a guide to the design and quality of fixture desired. Equivalent designs and equal quality fixtures of other manufacturers will be acceptable upon approval by the Owner/Engineer. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Where specified to match existing fixtures, fixtures of the same manufacturer and type shall be installed. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General 1. All lamps shall be of one manufacturer and shall be as manufactured by Osram/Sylvania Electric Products, Inc.; General Electric Co.; North American Philips Lighting Corp. or equal. 2. All ballasts shall be UL listed, ETL certified, Class "P", high power factor (minimum 0.90). 3. Ballasts shall have an "A" sound rating or better. 4. All ballasts used in exterior applications shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0°F unless otherwise specified. 5. All interior ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 50°F. 6. Ballasts shall be parallel wired type and designed to operate the number and length of lamps specified. 7. The total harmonic distortion (THD) of each ballast shall be 10% or less. 8. Ballasts shall have a minimum ballast factor of 0.88 = N and as specified in the fixture schedule. 9. Ballasts shall have nominal power factor 0.90 or higher. 10. Ballasts shall have a maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.4. 11. Ballast shall provide normal rated life for the lamp specified. 12. All electronic ballasts shall be warranted for parts and replacement for five full years from the date of installation. 13. All ballasts shall be as manufactured by G.E., Advance, Model Mark V, similar by Osram/Sylvania; MagneTek or equal. 14. Where the equipment contains a programmable logic controller (PLC) or an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), the equipment manufacturer shall furnish factory installed, a dedicated Point of Utilization Device (SPD), as specified in Section 26 43 13, Individual Control Panel and Related Equipment Protection (Type 3). B. Fixed Mount 1. Fluorescent Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Furnish high lumen fluorescent lamps where listed. 2) Linear fluorescent lamps shall be T8 or T5 as required by the fixture, rapid/instant start, tri-phosphor, minimum CRI 86, and compact types all as shown on the Fixture Schedule" b. Ballasts CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 6 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 6 of 12 1) All linear fluorescent light fixtures shall have an electronic ballast unless otherwise noted on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. High Pressure Sodium Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Dual arc tube HPS as shown on the "Lighting Fixture Schedule." 2) High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear, non -cycling, and of the size and type as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. b. Ballasts 1) High pressure sodium ballasts shall be of the constant wattage type, with multi -tap windings, of the correct size and voltage for the fixture it is to serve as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3. Metal Halide Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Metal halide lamps shall be clear pulse -start, and of the size and type as shown on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. b. Ballasts 1) Pulse -start metal halide ballasts shall be of the constant wattage auto - transformer type, with a minimum efficiency of 88%, for lamp wattages from 150 watts to 500 watts. 2) Non -pulse start electronic ballasts shall have an efficiency of 92% for wattages greater than 250 watts and a minimum efficiency of 90% for wattages less than or equal to 250 watts. 4. Incandescent Fixtures a. Lamps 1) Incandescent lamps shall be compact fluorescent self -ballasted, minimum 1000 hours. C. LED Luminaires 1. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply) and integral controls as per this specification. 2. Each luminaire shall be designed to operate at an average operating temperature of 25°C. 3. The operating temperature range shall be 0°C to +25°C. Each luminaire shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout the minimum operational life when operated at the average operating temperature. 4. Nominal luminaire dimensions: refer to light fixture schedules. D. Luminaire Construction: 1. Luminaire housing to have no visible welding, screws, springs, hooks, rivets, bare LEDs or plastic supports. 2. The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring onsite assembly for installation. The power supply and circuit board for the luminaire shall be integral to the unit. 3. Luminaires shall be fabricated from post painted cold rolled steel and shall be a rigid structure with integral T-bar clips. 4. Finish: Polyester powder coat painted with 92% high -reflective paint after fabrication. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 7 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 7 of 12 5. Reflector: rugged one-piece cold rolled steel with embossed multi -facets, echoing the frequency of the refractor prisms to distribute soft light at multiple angles, without flashing thus reducing high luminance contrast. 6. End caps shall be sloped at 70 degrees to create depth. 7. Luminaire to have smooth transition between T-bar and reflector arch. No doorframe or exposed hardware. 8. Polymeric materials (if used) of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. Luminaire lenses are excluded from this requirement. 9. Integral Grid Clips required on recessed mounted luminaires along with integral tie wire mounting points. 10. Luminaire to have air removal capability as specified. 11. The assembly and manufacturing process for the SSL luminaire shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration. E. LED Sources LEDs shall be manufactured by: a. Nichia b. Samsung c. Osram 2. Lumen Output — minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall be as follows for the lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0-90 degree zone - as measured by IESNA Standard LM-79-08 in an accredited lab. Exact tested lumen output shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings. 3. Lumen output shall not decrease by more than 20% over the minimum operational life of 50,000 hours. 4. Individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 5. LED Boards shall be suitable for field maintenance or service from below the ceiling with plug-in connectors. LED boards shall be upgradable. 6. Light Color/Quality a. Correlated Color temperature (CCT) range as per specification, between 3500K, 4100K and 5000K shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart. b. The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater. c. Color shift over 6,000 hours shall be <0.007 change in u' v' as demonstrated in IES LM80 report. F. Power Supply and Driver Driver: AccuDrive, 120-277 Volt, UL Listed, CSA Certified, Sound Rated A+. Driver shall be greater than 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages. Input wires shall be #18 AWG solid copper minimum. 2. Driver shall be suitable for full -range dimming. The luminaire shall be capable of continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 5% of rated lumen output with a smooth shutoff function. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10 volt signal. 3. Driver shall be UL listed. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 8 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 8 of 12 4. Maximum stand-by power shall be one watt. 5. Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes. 6. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL luminaire and be accessible per UL requirements. 7. The surge protection which resides within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSFIEEE C64.41 2002 for Location Category A, where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event. G. Electrical 1. Operation Voltage - The luminaire shall operate from a 50 or 60 Hertz ±3 Hertz AC line over a voltage ranging from 120 volts AC to 277 volts AC. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output. The standard operating voltages are 120 volts AC, 277 volts AC, 347 volts AC. 2. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 90% or greater at all standard operating voltages and full luminaire output. 3. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20% at any standard input voltage. 4. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high repetition noise and other interference. 5. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated onboard circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 Non -Consumer requirements for EMIWI emissions. 6. Electrical connections between normal power and driver must be modular utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after installation and be replaceable without removing the fixture from the ceiling. 7. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant. H. Exit Sign: UL listed. Provide with automatic power failure device with integral self - testing module and fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type; shall operate unattended; and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not less than five years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1-1/2 hours (minimum). The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum). All exit sign fixtures shall be rated maximum of five watts per fixture. I. Photometric Requirements 1. Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein. 2. Luminaire performance shall be judged against the specified minimum illuminance in the specified pattern for a particular application. 3. Luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the minimum life expectancy (Section 2.2.5). 4. The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the LED manufacturer's data or the data from the IESNA Standard TM-21 test report, which ever one results in a higher level of lumen depreciation. 5. The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photometrically, i£ a. The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100% of the area of the specified lighting pattern. b. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 9 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 9 of 12 c. Add specific project requirements. J. Thermal Management 1. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life (Section 1.2.9 c). 2. The LED manufacturer's maximum junction temperature for the expected life (Section 1.2.9 c) shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient (Section 1.2.4). 3. The LED manufacturer's maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient (Section 1.2.5). 4. The luminaire shall have an UL IC rating. 5. The Driver manufacturer's maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed. K. Emergency Lighting Battery Units 1. Emergency lighting units shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on the Drawings. 2. Battery units shall be of the self-contained, fully automatic type with sealed lead acid batteries, volt -meters. 3. Unit enclosures shall be compatible to their environment and units shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). 4. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide all necessary mounting hardware. 5. Shall be factory installed and provide a range of 800 to 1400 lumens of light for 90 minutes. Output is based on the size and wattage of the luminaire. 6. Integral or remote test switch shall be provided as per specification. L. Flexible Fixture Hangers 1. Flexible fixture hangers used in non -hazardous areas shall be type ARB and flexible fixture supports used in hazardous areas shall be Type EFH as manufactured by the Crouse -Hinds Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co; Killark a Division of Hubbell Inc.; or equal. 2. Where required in Section 26 00 00 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS, all pendent -mounted and recessed in suspended ceilings, recessed lighting fixtures shall be provided with four anti -sway supports to meet Type H seismic requirements. M. Portable Fixtures 1. Explosion -proof Portable Handlamp a. An explosion -proof handlamp complete with heavy duty, Type SO, 50-foot cord and plug shall be furnished. The handlamp shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Co.; the plug shall be manufactured by Appleton Electric Co., similar to Daniel Woodhead Co. or equal. 2. Vapor -tight Portable Handlamp a. A vapor -tight handlamp with reflector shall be furnished complete with 50-foot cord and grounding plug. The handlamp shall be manufactured by Daniel Woodhead Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co. or equal. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 10 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 10 of 12 N. Emergency Lighting Battery Units 1. Emergency lighting units and remote lighting heads shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on the Drawings. 2. Battery units shall be of the self-contained, fully automatic type with sealed lead acid batteries, volt -meters and time delay relays where used in H.I.D. lighted areas. 3. Unit enclosures shall be compatible to their environment and units shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC). 4. All necessary mounting hardware shall be provided. O. Flexible Fixture Hangers 1. Flexible fixture hangers used in non -hazardous areas shall be type ARB and flexible fixture supports used in hazardous areas shall be Type ECHF as manufactured by the Crouse -Hinds Co., similar by Appleton Electric Co.; Killark Electrical Mfg. Co. or equal. P. Lamp Changing Equipment 1. Lamp changing equipment shall be able to handle BT-37, ED-18, ED-23-1/2 and ED-28 type H.I.D. lamps in open luminaries. 2. Equipment shall consist of three five-foot steel poles each similar and equal to McGill Catalog No. 160-P and two lamp holders similar and equal to McGill Catalog Nos. 158C and 161C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The location of lighting fixtures shown on the Drawings is approximate. The Contractor shall install the lighting fixtures after major ducts and piping are installed, to avoid conflicts. He shall install the fixtures to avoid shadows and blocking of light, relocating the fixtures as necessary, at no cost to the Owner. B. Each fixture shall be a completely finished unit with all components, mounting and/or hanging devices necessary, for the proper installation of the particular fixture in its designated location and shall be completely wired ready for connection to the branch circuit wires at the outlet. C. All flush mounted fixtures shall be supported from the structure and shall not be dependent on the hung ceilings for their support. D. Fixtures noted to be installed flush in suspended ceilings shall be of mounting types suited for the type ceiling involved. Troffers (2 X 4), provided in suspended ceiling grids, shall be installed with safety clips to hold the fixture securely in the ceiling grid. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the ceiling types prior to ordering fixtures. E. Flexible fixture hangers shall be used for all pendant mounted fixtures. Fixtures two feet long and larger shall be supported with a minimum of two fixture hangers. F. Conduit run in areas with hung ceilings shall be installed in the space above the hung ceiling as close to the structure as possible. Conduits shall be supported from the structure. G. Exterior lighting poles shall be mounted plumb. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 11 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 11 of 12 H. Fixture locations are shown on the Drawings in approximate locations; however exact locations shall be coordinated so as to avoid conflicts with HVAC ducts, equipment and other obstacles. 3.2 REPLACEMENT A. Lamps (except for H.I.D.) used during the building construction, prior to two weeks from completion of the work, shall be removed and replaced with new lamps. 3.3 CLEANING UP A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from lens enclosures. 1. For cleaning acrylic lenses or diffusers, use a feather duster or dry cotton cheesecloth to rid the lens/diffuser of any minor dust. For fingerprints, smudges, or other dirt present, use an ammonia -based cleaner (such as Windex) and wipe carefully with cotton cheesecloth (so as to avoid injury from any prismatic texture of the lens). 2. Job site contamination may not necessarily be removed using the above recommendations. In that case the lens would need to be replaced. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Plastic dust cover bags to be provided with new parabolic reflector lighting fixtures shall be removed after all construction activity that may cause dust formation on reflector surfaces has been completed. E. All fixtures shall be left in a clean condition, free of dirt and defects, before acceptance by the Owner/Engineer. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 26 50 0016120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) - 12 LIGHTING SYSTEM Page 12 of 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK SECTION 3105 13 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 3105 13 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK Page 1 of 1 A.This Section of the specifications describes the various classes of Earth Fill. All of the classes of Earth Fill contained in this specification may not be used on this project. The classes of Earth Fill used on this project are shown on the drawings or specified in other sections of the specifications. This Section does not include specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill. Specifications for placement and compaction of Earth Fill are included in other sections of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Soil materials shall be classified into the appropriate class of Earth Fill shown below according to ASTM D2487 "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" or other appropriate methods as designated by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS; CLASSIFICATIONS A.Class 1 Earth Fill: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH material with a liquid limit greater than or equal to 50, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 25, and a minimum of 60 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. B.Class 2 Earth Fill: Limited to clays and sandy clays classified as CH and CL materials with a coefficient of permeability less than or equal to 1.0 x 10-' cm/sec, a liquid limit greater than or equal to 30, a plasticity index greater than or equal to 15, and more than 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. C.Class 3 Earth Fill: Consist of any materials classified as CH, CL, SM, SP, SP-SM, SC, and GC, which have a minimum plasticity index of 4, which are free of organic materials. D.Class 4 Earth Fill: Consist of materials which are classified as SP, SM, SC, CL, or dual classifications thereof, which have a liquid limit less than or equal to 35 and a plasticity index of a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 15, which are free of organic materials. E. Class 5 Earth Fill: Consist of materials classified as SP or SP-SM which have a plasticity index less than or equal to 4 and a maximum of 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, which are free of organic materials. F. Class 12 Earth Fill: Consist of soils suitable for topsoil which are relatively free of stones or other objectionable debris, which have sufficient humus content to readily support vegetative growth. The suitability of soils for topsoil shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 312310-1 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Pagel of 5 SECTION 3123 10 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies excavation, backfill materials, backfill placement and compaction procedures, and other construction activities incidental to project structures. B. The Specification does not include excavation and backfilling for utility lines, manholes, valve boxes, and other minor structures related to utility lines. Refer to Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment, and Backfill" for utility line related excavation and backfill. 1.2 QUALIFICATION ASSURANCE C. Testing Agency: An independent testing agency that is AASHTO accredited. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and shall include: 1. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 2. Provide list of compaction equipment to be used. 3. Backfill material classifications: For each soil or aggregate backfill material provide a certification by the testing agency. 4. Compaction Test Results: Submit test results within 24 hours of successful testing. A. Material classification, placing, and testing shall be in compliance with the latest revisions of the following standards, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. 1. ASTM International (ASTM) Standards: ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 600 kN-m/m3 ASTM Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by D 1556 Sand -Cone Method ASTM Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes D2487 Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight D4253 of Soils Using a Vibratory Table ASTM Standard Test Methods for In -Place Density and Water Content of D6938 Soil and Soil -Aggregate by Nuclear Methods Shallow Depth) B. Any other testing required by these specifications and not specifically referenced to a standard shall be performed under ASTM or other appropriate standards as designated by the Engineer. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 3123 10-2 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Page 2 of 5 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deposit material to be used for backfill in storage piles at points convenient for handling of the material during the backfilling operations and as required to prevent contamination with other materials. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Review subsurface investigations. A limited subsurface investigation has been performed by Freese and Nichols. A geotechnical report from that investigation is available at the Engineer's office for information purposes only. The precise profile of soil and rock strata beneath this Site is not known. B. Review the Site and determine the conditions which may affect the structural excavation, prior to the commencement of the excavation. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Flexbase : shall be flexible base in accordance with TxDOT 2014 Standard Specifications, Item 247, Grade 1 or 2, Type A or D. B. Clay Cap: Clay cap shall be Class 2 Earth Fill as specified in Section 3105 13 "Soils for Earthwork." C. Seal Slab: Lean concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 "Cast -In -Place Concrete." D. Flowable Fill: Flowable fill shall be in accordance with Section 3123 23.34 "Flowable Fill." E. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be Class 12 Earth Fill as specified in Section 3105 13 "Soils for Earthwork." 2.2 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT A. Compaction equipment shall conform to the following requirements. 1. Heavy Compaction Equipment: a. Tamping Compactor: Steel wheels with rectangular face, tapered pads that prevent fluffing the soil. Compactor shall be equipped with cleaning fingers to remove soil accumulation from between pads. 1) Operating Weight, Minimum: 30,000 pounds. 2) Wheels or Drum Size, Minimum: 4 feet diameter. 3) Travel Speed, Maximum: 10 mph. b. Pneumatic Rollers: Minimum eight -tire, pneumatic roller with a modular ballast system and flexible operating weight, and which will equally distribute load between tires to provide compaction uniformity. 1) Operating Weight Range: As required for specified compaction, 36,000 to 50,000 pounds. 2) Tire Pressure Range: 80 psi to 100 psi. 3) Travel Speed, Maximum: 10 mph. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 3123 10 - 3 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Page 3 of 5 4) Distance Between Edges of Adjacent Tires: Less than 50 percent of tire width. c. Vibratory Rollers: Smooth drum roller with 90 percent of the static weight transmitted through a single drum. 1) Static Weight, Minimum: 20,000 pounds 2) Centrifugal Force Per Drum, Minimum: 40,000 pounds 3) Frequency: 1400 v/min 4) Drum Size: Diameter 5 feet, +/- 1 foot; width between 6 and 9 feet. 5) Travel Speed: 5 mph for self-propelled; 2 mph for towed. 6) No backing up of the vibratory roller will be allowed on an embankment unless the vibrating mechanism is capable of being reversed. 2. Hand -Directed Compaction Equipment: Use power tampers and vibratory plate compactors in areas where it is impracticable or unacceptable to use heavy compaction equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clear and grub the area to be excavated prior to the start of excavation in accordance with Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing." 3.2 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS A. General: Excavate subgrade to the depth indicated on Drawings, +/- 0.1 feet tolerance Extend limits of the excavation beyond the perimeter of the foundations as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Exposed subgrade surfaces shall be level and of sound, stable material; free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. Testing agency or Owner's representative shall confirm exposed subgrade is a suitable bearing material based on the Construction Documents. 2. Where unsound or unstable material is uncovered, notify Owner's representative Remove objectionable material and replace after approval is received from Owner's representative. Replacement material shall be as indicated here unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Rock subgrade replacement material: Flowable fill. b. Soil subgrade replacement material: Compacted Flexbase. B. Seal Slab: Where indicated, install seal slab on exposed foundation subgrade surface within 8 hours of subgrade exposure. Confirm subgrade is free of loose, unsound, and/or deleterious material before placement of seal slab. C. Excavation Safety: All excavations shall be in accordance with OSHA requirements. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 3123 10 - 4 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Page 4 of 5 3.3 WATER IN FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS A. General: Prevent water infiltration into foundation excavations. Remove standing water from excavation prior to placing concrete. If removal of standing water is not possible due to continuous water infiltration, then contact Owner's representative for additional direction regarding placing concrete underwater. 2. Do not dewater a foundation excavation while placing concrete or for a period of at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Rock Foundation Subgrade: If rock material becomes weathered due to water infiltration, then remove weathered material and provide rock replacement material to restore foundation subgrade elevation. C. Soil Foundation Subgrade: If foundation subgrade becomes saturated do not disturb the subgrade. Wait for water to evacuate the subgrade and subgrade surface to adequately stiffen prior to placing concrete. If subgrade is disturbed, then wait until subgrade has dried out, excavate disturbed subgrade and provide replacement material as indicated above. 3.4 COMPACTED BACKFILL A. General: Backfill excavated spaces and areas not occupied by the permanent structure. 1. Backfill behind a retaining wall or basement -type wall shall not be placed until the concrete has reached its 28-day compressive strength or 7 days, whichever is longer. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, structures with a top slab shall not backfilled until the top slab has been in place at least 4 days. 3. Structures with soil on opposing (opposite) sides shall be backfilled to prevent uneven loading of the structure — evenly raise backfill on opposing sides of the structure. The maximum differential backfill height between opposing sides is 1 foot. 4. Do not permit rollers to operate within 3 feet of structures. 5. Maximum Loose Lift Height: a. Heavy Compaction Equipment: 8 inches. b. Hand -Directed Compaction Equipment: 4 inches. 6. Previous Compacted Layer: If backfill placement occurs over a period of time greater than 24 hours, then scarify and recompact the previous day's final compacted layer. a. Scarify and Recompact: 6-inch depth; adjust the moisture content; recompact. b. Saturated subgrades shall not be worked on until sufficiently dry and harden so as not to be rutted with compaction equipment. Scarify and recompact layers damaged by weather or construction equipment. B. Moisture: Prior to compacting backfill, mix and aerate or water the loose lift backfill material as necessary to adjust the moisture content and evenly distribute throughout. The material shall contain moisture within the limits specified below. 1. In accordance with ASTM D6938, determine the optimum moisture content for the maximum dry density. 2. Backfill moisture content shall be as indicated in Table 1, "Compacted Fill." FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 3123 10 - 5 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Page 5 of 5 3. Aggregate fill: Completely cohesionless materials, shall be at a moisture content which will allow use of the specified compaction equipment and consistent achievement of the specified density. C. Compaction: As required to achieve the specified density, increase the number of passes above the minimum specified and/or modify the weight of the equipment. 1. Determine the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 for cohesive soils and ASTM D4253 for cohesionless soils. 2. Minimum number of passes for all compacted fill types: 8. 3. Cohesive Soils: A tamping compactor or tamping compactor followed by a pneumatic roller shall be used. 4. Cohesionless or low cohesive soils: A vibratory roller or vibratory plate compactors shall be required if the material is cohesionless or with less than 15 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Confirm applicability of vibratory compaction equipment in the field. 5. Overlap passes a minimum of 1 feet for heavy compaction equipment and 50 percent of the baseplate width for hand -directed equipment. 6. Backfill density shall be as indicated in Table 1, "Compacted Fill." Table 1: Compacted Fill Backfill Type Density',' Moistu s e Content Comments Flexbase 95% -0% to +5% N/A ' The percentage indicated is the minimum required percentage of the maximum dry density as determined by the applicable ASTM. z Below Vehicular Pavement: Scarify to a depth of 8, moisture condition, and recompact to not less than 100 percent of the maximum dry density. ' Range indicated is the acceptable tolerance with respect to the optimum moisture content. 4 Completely cohesionless materials, shall be at a moisture content which will allow use of the specified compaction equipment and result in consistent achievement of the specified density. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner is responsible for the costs involved in providing an approved testing agency to perform quality control testing of backfill operations and verification of subgrade bearing material. The testing laboratory shall make tests of in -place density and moisture in accordance with ASTM Standards previously mentioned in this Section. The testing agency shall monitor backfill operations continuously or at intervals acceptable to the Owner's representative. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the testing agency a minimum of 2 business days before backfill operations begin. 1. Unless noted otherwise, in -place density tests shall be conducted at a rate of one test per 2500 square feet for every lift. 2. [In -place density tests shall be conducted at a rate acceptable to the Owner's resident representative.] END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 3123 23.34 FLOWABLE FILL PART1- GENERAL l .1 WORK INCLUDED 31 23 23.34 FLOWABLE FILL Page 1 of 4 A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to mix and place flowable fill, consisting of Portland cement, fine aggregate, fly ash, and water in the proper proportions as specified hereinafter. Flowable fill (Controlled Low -Strength Material, CLSM) shall be used to bed and backfill around piping, utilities, and structures where indicated. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria — Flowable Fill Proportions and Consistency: Flowable fill shall be proportioned to give the necessary workability, strength, and consistency, and shall conform to the following governing requirements: 1. Permeability: Maximum permeability limit of 1x10-6 cm/sec. This limit shall apply at all locations where flowable fill is used as a utility trench plug (dam) within trench backfill materials. 2. Subsidence: Evaporation of bleed water shall not result in shrinkage of more than 10.4 mm per m (1/8 inch per ft.) of flowable fill depth. Measurement of a Final Bleeding shall be as measured in Section 10 of ASTM C940. 3. Strength for Excavatable Flowable Fill: Unconfined compressive strength at 28-days when tested in accordance with ASTM D4832: 100 psi (+/- 50 psi). a. Long-term strengths (greater than 90 days) shall not exceed 150 psi. b. Where indicated provide Excavatable Flowable Fill around utilities, unless noted otherwise. c. Excavatable Flowable Fill shall be excavatable with hand tools and conventional machinery such as backhoes. 4. Strength for Non-Excavatable Flowable Fill: Unconfined compressive strength at 28- days when tested in accordance with ASTM D4832: 150 psi minimum. a. Where indicated provide Non-Excavatable Flowable Fill below structures and/or around structures, unless noted otherwise. 5. Fluidity: Flowable fill shall be self -consolidating and non -segregating in accordance with ASTM C1611: a. Slump Flow Test: Minimum 20-inch mean spread. b. Visual Stability Index (VSI) Test: Less than or equal to 1. 6. Density, minimum: 100 pcf B. Factory Testing: The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the material. A trial mix shall be designed by an independent testing laboratory, retained by the Contractor. The testing laboratory shall submit verification that the materials and proportions of the trial mix design meets the requirement of the Specifications. In lieu of trial mix design, Contractor may submit historical data for a mix design used successfully in previous similar work. The Contractor shall not make changes in materials, either in gradation, source, or brand, or FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 31 23 23.34 FLOWABLE FILL Page 2 of 4 proportions of the mixture after having been approved, except by specific approval of the Engineer. C. Owner Testing: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to achieve and maintain the quality of material required by this Section. However, the Owner may secure the services of an independent testing laboratory to verify the quality of the flowable fill. The Owner shall have the right to require additional testing, strengthening, or replacement of flowable fill which has failed to meet the minimum requirements of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit mix design on each material required. Provide backup data as required below. B. Submit historical or trial mix data and test results as a basis for mix design approval. Required data shall include: 1. Permeability test results if plugs are required on Project. 2. Subsidence test results. 3. Strength test results for Excavatable and Non-Excavatable Flowable Fill if used on Project. 4. Fluidity test results. 1.4 STANDARDS AND REFERNCES A. Materials shall meet recommendation for mix design and placement, as published by National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. B. The applicable provisions of the following references and standards shall apply to this Section as if written herein in their entirety. 1. ASTM International (ASTM) Standards: ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C 940 Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory ASTM C Standard Test Method for Slump flow of Self Consolidating Concrete 1611 ASTM D Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low 4832 Strength Material CLSM Test Cylinders PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or H; or ASTM C595, Type IL. B. Fly Ash/Pozzolans: ASTM C618, Class F or C. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 31 23 23.34 FLOWABLE FILL Page 3 of 4 C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, fine aggregate. 1. ASTM C40: Aggregate shall not contain strong alkali, or organic material which gives a color darker than the standard color. D. Water: Potable and in conformance with ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1602, Table 2. E. Performance Additive: As required to meet specification requirements: 1. DaraFill by GCP Applied Technologies. 2. MasterCell 25 by Master Builders Solutions US LLC. 3. Sika Lightcrete Powder by Sika Corporation. 4. Approved equal. F. Chemical Admixtures for Concrete per ASTM C 494, as required by performance requirements. 2.2 MIXES A. In the determination of the amount of water required for mix, consideration shall be given to the moisture content of the aggregate. The net amount of water in the mix will be the amount added at the mixer; plus the free water in the aggregate; and minus the absorption of the aggregate, based on a 30 minute absorption period. No water allowance shall be made for evaporation after batching. B. The methods of measurement of materials shall be such that the proportions of water to cement are closely controlled during the progress of the Work and easily checked at any time by the Owner's representative. To avoid unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency, the aggregate shall be obtained from sources which will insure a uniform quality and grading during any single day's operation and they shall be delivered to the Work and handled in such a manner that the variation in moisture content will not interfere with the steady production of flowable fill of reasonable degree of uniformity. Sources of supply shall be approved by the Owner's representative. C. All material shall be separately and accurately measured. All equipment for measurement of materials shall be subject to approval by the Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall give the Owner's representative sufficient advance notice before starting to place material in any area, to permit inspection of the area, and preparation for pouring. B. Conduct the operation of depositing the material so as to form a well consolidated mass and so as not to develop air pockets in confined spaces. C. Unless specified otherwise, flowable fill shall be uniformly placed to the depth shown on the Drawings. The fill shall be brought up uniformly to the top of excavation elevation or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Placement of flowable fill shall then cease and the fill protected from traffic for a period of not less than 72 hours. 1. To prevent pipe flotation place material in lifts or provide alternate means. 2. Around structures, material shall be placed in lifts. Lift depth shall not exceed one -tenth of total structure embedment into subgrade nor 4 feet, whichever is less. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 31 23 23.34 FLOWABLE FILL Page 4 of 4 3. When multiple lifts are required, material shall be allowed to harden before placing next lift. Hardening time varies with each mix. Verify flowable fill has reached a penetration number of 1500, in accordance with ASTM C 403, but not less than 3 hours. D. The material shall be placed against undisturbed trench walls and shall not be placed on or against frozen ground. E. At time of placement the ambient temperature shall be 35 F and rising. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner will hire testing laboratory shall perform the quality control testing of backfill operations. The testing laboratory shall sample material in accordance with ASTM D5971. The testing laboratory shall monitor backfill operation continuously or at intervals acceptable to the Owner and Engineer at structures. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sufficient advance notification to the testing laboratory before backfill operations begin. 1. Strength: A strength test is the average of two cylinders per ASTM D4832. 2. Fluidity: A fluidity test is a Slump Flow Test and a VSI Test per ASTM C1611. 3. For all tests required, at a minimum perform one test per day, but not less than one per 150 cubic yards. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 330516-1 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Pagel of 5 SECTION 33 0516 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS (MOD) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete vaults to be used in water utility applications B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C.4. 2. Modified 1.2.A. 3. Modified 2.2.13.1. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 01—General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 4. Seetien03 80 00 r,r, difi .atiers t Existing Cone -ete c,...,,.twes 5. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. This Item is considered subsidiary to Wa4e - Mete,- and Vauft Reinforced Concrete (All Structures). 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item are subsidiary to the unit price bid per eaeb "Water :Mete and Va lump sum "Reinforced Concrete (All Structures)" complete in place and no other compensation will be allowed. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. b. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 330516-2 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 2 of 5 Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures c. C858, Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. d. C891, Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. e. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) a. 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Vault 2. Connection materials 3. Pipe connections at vault walls 4. Stubs and stub plugs 5. Grade ring 6. Ladder 7. External coating material 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Meet the requirements of ACI 318. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver vault or panels (units) to project site in such quantity to assure continuity of installation. B. Store units at the project site in a manner which prevents cracking, distortion, staining or other physical damage. C. Lift units by designed lifting points or supports. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 01. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 330516-3 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 3 of 5 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 0160 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Performance / Design Criteria 1. Vault a. Precast reinforced concrete valve vault shall conform: 1) To the requirements of ASTM C857 and C858 for underground precast concrete utility structures. 2) Be designed for the specific site conditions and construction document requirements. 3) Be designed to resist buoyant forces due saturated soil b. Wall and slab minimum thicknesses shall be as calculated to resist design forces but shall not be less than that required for: manufacture and handling, proper embedment of access hatch, and proper installation of pipe penetration seal. c. Vault dimensions per the Drawings d. Opening per the Drawings e. Incorporate a sump into the base or floor of the vault. 1) Avoid conflicts with piping. 2) Do not locate directly under the access location if applicable. f. Place floor on a minimum 2 percent slope towards the sump. 2. Water Pipe Penetrations a. Use adjustable -linked rubber seal devices or grout, as shown in Drawings, to provide seals around pipe penetrations. 3. Vault Access a. Cover / Door 1) For non -traffic areas — non H-20 loading 30-inch x 36-inch steel single leaf door, Bilco Type J model or approved equal 2) For traffic areas — 32-inch hinged ductile iron frame and cover or as shown in manhole lid assembly in Drawings 3) With steel door, provide an automatic hold -open arm with release handle and locking device. 4) Provide Bilco type fall protection grating under aluminum door that meets OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements or approved equal. 5) Incorporate a drain gutter with an outlet routed to the exterior of the vault lid. b. Ladder 1) Provide aluminum ladder by Heron Industries or approved equal. 2) Provide ladder to dimensions shown on Drawings. C. Materials 1. Concrete for utility construction —Conform to Section 03 30 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 330516-4 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 4 of 5 2. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. 3. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C 478. 4. Reinforcing Steel — Conform to Section 03 30 00. 5. Sewer Pipe Connections — Conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C1628. 6. Adjustable -linked rubber seal devices a. Manufactured by Link -Seal or approved equal 7. Interior Coating or Liner — Conform to Section 33 39 60. 8. Exterior Coating a. Coal Tar Bitumastic for below grade damp proofing b. Dry film thickness (DFT) no less than 12 mils and no greater than 30 mils c. Solids content is 68 percent by volume ± 2 percent. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Vault a. Perform installation in accordance to ASTM C891. b. Construct vault to dimensions shown on Drawings. c. Precast Sections 1) Clean bell spigot and gaskets a) Lubricate and join 2) Minimize number of segments. d. Vault Base 1) Place vault base on 6-inch minimum base of compacted crushed rock (per Section 33 05 10) over undisturbed soils and grade level to elevation shown on the Drawings. 2. Water Pipe Penetrations a. Install adjustable -linked rubber seal devices around pipe penetrations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Modifications and pipe penetrations into vaults shall conform to Section 03 80 00. 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 330516-5 CONCRETE WATER VAULTS Page 5 of 5 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 2.2.13.3 — Modified vault hatch door and ladder requirements 2.2.C.6 — Modified rubber seal requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 SECTION 331110 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (MOD) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe 3-inch through 64-inch for potable water, wastewater and reuse B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.I.C.7. 2. Modified 1.6.13.2. 3. Modified 2.2.13.15.b.1. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 01 —General Requirements 3. Section 33 01 31— Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection 4. Section 33 04 10 — Joint Bonding and Electrical Isolation 5. Section 33 04 40 — Cleaning and Acceptance Testing of Water Mains 6. Section 33 05 10 —Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill Tocccxva33v5 24 Installation vx�zciii@£Tipe in casing 9i Twinc z}}3c�T iltc 8. Section 33 1105 — Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 9. Section 33 11 11 — Ductile Iron Fittings 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Ductile Iron Pipe a. Measurement 1) Measured horizontally along the surface from center line to center line of the fitting, manhole, or appurtenance b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per linear foot for "DIP" installed for: a) Various sizes b) Various types of backfill CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 c) Various linings d) Various Depths, for miscellaneous sewer projects only e) Various restraints f) Various uses c. The price bid shall include: 1) Furnishing and installing Ductile Iron Pipe with joints as specified by the Drawings 2) Mobilization 3) Polyethylene encasement 4) Lining 5) Pavement removal 6) Excavation 7) Hauling 8) Disposal of excess material 9) Furnishing, placement and compaction of embedment 10) Furnishing, placement and compaction of backfill 11) Trench water stops 12) Thrust restraint, if required in Contract Documents 13) Bolts and nuts 14) Gaskets 15) Clean-up 16) Cleaning 17) Disinfection 18) Testing 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Gland or Follower Gland a. Non -restrained, mechanical joint fitting 2. Retainer Gland a. Mechanically restrained mechanical joint fitting B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B 16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25, 125 and 250). 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications b. A 194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both c. A242, Standard Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Structural Steel. d. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. e. A674, Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids. f. B 117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. g. B633, Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C203, Coal -Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines — Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied. b. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. c. M41, Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. 6. American Water Works Association/American National Standards Institute (AWWA/ANSI): a. C I04/A21.4, Cement —Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. b. C 105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. c. C1 I I/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. C 115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. e. C 150/A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. f. C151/A21.51, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. g. C600, Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances 7. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 8. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 A.A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery and/or fabrication for specials. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Data 1. Interior lining a. If it is other than cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSIC104/A21.4, including: 1) Material 2) Application recommendations 3) Field touch-up procedures 2. Thrust Restraint a. Retainer glands, thrust harnesses or any other means 3. Gaskets a. If hydrocarbon or other special gaskets are required B. Shop Drawings — Furnish for Ductile Iron Pipe used in the water distribution system or for a wastewater force main for 24-inch and greater diameters, including: 1. Wall thickness design calculations sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas including: a. Working pressure b. Surge pressure c. Deflection 2. Provide thrust restraint calculations for all fittings and valves, sealed by a T :eensoa nr Engineer- in T&Eas, to verify the mstfaint lengths shevi% in the . The Contractor is responsible for determining and providing all thrust restraint. Thrust restraint calculations for all fittings and valves including the restraint length must be provided and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas. 3. Lay schedule/drawing for 24-inch and greater diameters, sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in Texas including: a. Pipe class b. Joints type c. Fittings d. Stationing e. Transitions f. Joint deflection C. Certificates CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 1. Furnish an affidavit certifying that all Ductile Iron Pipe meets the provisions of this Section, each run of pipe furnished has met Specifications, all inspections have been made, and that all tests have been performed in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. 2. Furnish a certificate stating that buried bolts and nuts conform to ASTM B 117. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Finished pipe shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. 1) Change orders, specials, and field changes may be provided by a different manufacturer upon City approval. b. Pipe manufacturing operations (pipe, lining, and coatings) shall be performed under the control of the manufacturer. c. Ductile Iron Pipe 1) Manufactured in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51 a) Perform quality control tests and maintain results as outlined within standard to assure compliance. 2) Subject each pipe to a hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi for duration of at least 10 seconds. B. Preconstruction Testing 1. The City may, at its own cost, subject random lengths of pipe for testing by an independent laboratory for compliance with this Specification. a. The compliance test shall be performed in the United States. b. Any visible defects or failure to meet the quality standards herein will be grounds for rejecting the entire order. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be stored and handled in accordance with the guidelines as stated in AWWA M41.1 2. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 0166 00. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES AND MATERIALS A.Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed in the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00. B. Pipe 1. Pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11, AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.15, and AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. 2. All pipe shall meet the requirements of NSF 61. 3. Pipe shall have a lay length of 18 feet or 20 feet except for special fittings or closure pieces and necessary to comply with the Drawings. 4. As a minimum the following pressures classes apply. The Drawings may specify a higher pressure class or the pressure and deflection design criteria may also require a higher pressure class, but in no case should they be less than the following: Diameter (inches) Min Pressure Class (psi) 3 through 12 350 14 through 20 250 24 200 30 through 64 150 5. Pipe markings shall meet the minimum requirements of AWWA/ANSI C 151/A21.51. Minimum pipe markings shall be as follows: a. "DI" or "Ductile" shall be clearly labeled on each pipe b. Weight, pressure class and nominal thickness of each pipe c. Year and country pipe were cast d. Manufacturer's mark 6. Pressure and Deflection Design a. Pipe design shall be based on trench conditions and design pressure class specified in the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 b. Pipe shall be designed according to the methods indicated in AWWA/ANSI C 150/A21.50, AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51, and AWWA M41 for trench construction, using the following parameters: 1) Unit Weight of Fill (w) = 130 pcf 2) Live Load = AASHTO HS 20 3) Trench Depth = 12 feet minimum, or as indicated in Drawings 4) Bedding Conditions = Type 4 5) Working Pressure (PW) = 150 psi 6) Surge Allowance (Ps) = 100 psi 7) Design Internal Pressure (Pi) = Pw + Ps or 2:1 safety factor of the actual working pressure plus the actual surge pressure, whichever is greater. a) Test Pressure = (1) No less than 1.25 minimum times the stated working pressure (187 psi minimum) of the pipeline measured at the highest elevation along the test section. (2) No less than 1.5 times the stated working pressure (225 psi minimum) at the lowest elevation of the test section. 8) Maximum Calculated Deflection (DX) = 3 percent 9) Restrained Joint Safety Factor (Sf) =15 percent c. Trench depths shall be verified after existing utilities are located. 1) Vertical alignment changes required because of existing utility or other conflicts shall be accommodated by an appropriate change in pipe design depth. 2) In no case shall pipe be installed deeper than its design allows. 7. Provisions for Thrust a. Thrust at bends, tees, plugs or other fittings shall be mechanically restrained joints when required by the Drawings, corrosion resistant joints. b. In addition to the mechanical joint restraint required for all bends and fittings, horizontal and vertical bends shall be restrained by concrete thrust blocking and by mechanical joint restraint along the length of the pipe, as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, unless shown otherwise in the design drawings. Inclusion in the plans of dimensions for joint restraint lengths along the pipe, or dimensions for concrete thrust blocking, shall be interpreted to mean the exclusion of the other method of restraint, unless both methods are specifically required in the plans. c. No thrust restraint contribution shall be allowed for the restrained length of pipe within the casing. d. Restrained joints, when required, shall be used for a sufficient distance from each side of the bend, tee, plug, valve or other fitting to resist thrust which will be developed at the design pressure of the pipe. For the purpose of thrust, the following shall apply: 1) Valves shall be calculated as dead ends. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 2) Design pressure shall be greater than the working pressure of the pipe or the internal pressure (P) whichever is greater. 3) Restrained joints shall consist of approved mechanical restrained or push -on restrained joints as listed in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 01 60 00. e. The Pipe Manufacturer shall verify the length of pipe with restrained joints to resist thrust in accordance with the Drawings, AWWA M41, and the following: 1) The weight of earth (We) shall be calculated as the weight of the projected soil prism above the pipe, for unsaturated soil conditions. 2) Soil density =130 pcf (maximum value to be used), for unsaturated soil conditions 3) If indicated on the Drawings and the Geotechnical Borings that ground water is expected, account for reduced soil density. 8. Joints a. General —Comply with AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11. b. Push -On Joints c. Mechanical Joints d. Push -On Restrained Joints 1) Restraining Push -on joints by means of a special gasket a) Only those products that are listed in Section 0160 00 b) The working pressure rating of the restrained gasket must exceed the test pressure of the pipe line to be installed. c) Approved for use of restraining Ductile Iron Pipe in casing with a carrier pipe of fl- inches to 12-inches d) Otherwise only approved if specially listed on the Drawings 2) Push -on Restrained Joint bell and spigot a) Only those products list in the standard products list will be allowed for the size listed in the standard products list per Section 01 60 00. b) Pressure rating shall exceed the working and test pressure of the pipe line. e. Flanged Joints — AWWA/ANSI C115/A21.15, ASME B 16.1, Class 125 f. Flange bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ASME B 16.1, Class 125. g. Field fabricated flanges are prohibited. 9. Gaskets a. Provide Gaskets in accordance with Section 33 1105. 10. Isolation Flanges a. Flanges required by the drawings to be Isolation Flanges shall conform to Section 33 04 10. 11. Bolts and Nuts a. Mechanical Joints CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 1) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. b. Flanged Ends 1) Meet requirements of AWWA C 115. a) Provide bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 33 1105. 12. Flange Coatings a. Connections to Steel Flanges 1) Buried connections with Steel Flanges shall be coated with a Petrolatum Tape System in accordance with Section 33 1105. 13. Ductile Iron Pipe Exterior Coatings a. All ductile iron shall have an asphaltic coating, minimum of 1 mil thick, on the pipe exterior, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 14. Polyethylene Encasement a. All buried Ductile Iron Pipe shall be polyethylene encased. b. Only manufacturers listed in the City's Standard Products List as shown in Section 01 60 00 will be considered acceptable. c. Use only virgin polyethylene material. d. Encasement for buried pipe shall be 8 mil linear low density (LLD) polyethylene conforming to AWWA/ANSI C 105/A21.5 or 4 mil high density cross -laminated (HDCL) polyethylene encasement conforming to AWWA/ANSI CI05/A21.5 and ASTM A674. e. Marking: At a minimum of every 2 feet along its length, the mark the polyethylene film with the following information: 1) Manufacturer's name or trademark 2) 2Year of manufacturer 3) AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5 4) Minimum film thickness and material type 5) Applicable range of nominal diameter sizes 6) Warning — Corrosion Protection — Repair Any Damage f. Special Markings/Colors 1) Reclaimed Water, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "RECLAIMED WATER", b) Provide purple polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach purple reclaimed water marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. 2) Wastewater, perform one of the following: a) Label polyethylene encasement with "WASTEWATER"; :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 b) Provide green polyethylene in accordance with the American Public Works Association Uniform Color Code; or c) Attach green sanitary sewer marker tape to the polyethylene wrap. g. Minimum widths Polyethylene Tube and Sheet Sizes for Push -On Joint Pipe Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) Min. Width — Flat Tube (inches) Min. Width — Sheet (inches) 3 14 28 4 14 28 6 16 32 8 20 40 10 24 48 12 27 54 14 30 60 16 34 68 18 37 74 20 41 82 24 54 108 30 67 134 36 81 162 42 81 162 48 95 190 54 108 216 60 108 216 64 121 242 15. Ductile Iron Pipe Interior Lining a. Cement Mortar Lining 1) Ductile Iron Pipe for potable water shall have a cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI CI04/A21.04 and be acceptable according to NSF 61. b. Ceramic Epoxy or Epoxy Linings 1) Ductile Iron Pipe for use in wastewater applications shall be lined with Protecto 401 a-- 1) 's Standard Pr-edtiets List as sh %,n i Seet o n1600707. 2) Apply lining at a minimum of 40 mils DFT. 3) Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using a Joint Compound as supplied by the manufacturer. :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 a) Apply the joint compound by brush to ensure coverage. b) Care should be taken that the joint compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. c) Coat the gasket seat and spigot ends after the application of the lining. 4) Surface preparation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5) Check thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge in accordance with the method outlined in SSPC PA 2. 6) Test the interior lining of all pipe barrels for pinholes with a non-destructive 2,500 volt test. a) Repair any defects prior to shipment. 7) Mark each fitting with the date of application of the lining system along with its numerical sequence of application on that date and records maintained by the applicator of his work. 8) For all Ductile Iron Pipe in wastewater service where the pipe has been cut, coat the exposed surface with the touch-up material as recommended by the manufacturer. a) The touch-up material and the lining shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 1.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] L2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] W PREPARATION [NOT USED] L4 INSTALLATION A.General 1. Install pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances as specified herein, as specified in AWWA C600, AWWA M41 and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2. See Section 33 11 11 for installation requirements for Ductile Iron Fittings. 3. Lay pipe to the lines and grades as indicated in the Drawings. 4. Excavate and backfill trenches in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 5. Embed Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with Section 33 05 10. 6. For installation of carrier pipe within casing, see Section 33 05 24. B. Pipe Handling 1. Haul and distribute pipe and fittings at the project site. 2. Handle piping with care to avoid damage. :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 a. Inspect each joint of pipe and reject or repair any damaged pipe prior to lowering into the trench. b. Do not handle the pipe in such a way that will damage the interior lining. c. Use only nylon ropes, slings or other lifting devices that will not damage the surface of the pipe for handling the pipe. 3. At the close of each operating day: a. Keep the pipe clean and free of debris, dirt, animals and trash — during and after the laying operation. b. Effectively seal the open end of the pipe using a gasketed night cap. C. Joint Making 1. Mechanical Joints a. Bolt the follower ring into compression against the gasket with the bolts tightened down evenly then cross torqued in accordance with AWWA C600. b. Overstressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation practice will not be permitted. 2. Push -on Joints a. Install Push -on joints as defined in AWWA/ANSI C1 I I/A21.11. b. Wipe clean the gasket seat inside the bell of all extraneous matter. c. Place the gasket in the bell in the position prescribed by the manufacturer. d. Apply a thin film of non -toxic vegetable soap lubricant to the inside of the gasket and the outside of the spigot prior to entering the spigot into the bell. e. When using a field cut plain end piece of pipe, refinish the field cut and scarf to conform to AWWA C600. 3. Flanged Joints a. Use erection bolts and drift pins to make flanged connections. 1) Do not use undue force or restraint on the ends of the fittings. 2) Apply even and uniform pressure to the gasket. b. The fitting must be free to move in any direction while bolting. 1) Install flange bolts with all bolt heads faced in one direction. 4. Joint Deflection a. Deflect the pipe only when necessary to avoid obstructions or to meet the lines and grades and shown in the Drawings. b. The deflection of each joint must be in accordance with AWWA C600 Table 3. c. The maximum deflection allowed is 50 percent of that indicated in AWWA C600. d. The manufacturer's recommendation may be used with the approval of the Engineer. D.Polyethylene Encasement Installation 1. Preparation :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 a. Remove all lumps of clay, mud, cinders, etc., on pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. 1) Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene. b. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect a snug, but not tight encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. 1) Provide sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces such as bell -spigot interfaces, bolted joints or fittings and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. 2) Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape and hold. c. For installations below water table and/or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap. 2. Tubular Type (Method A) a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section and bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends. c. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. d. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube. e. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube, pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of the new length of pipe and wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. f. Secure overlap in place. g. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of next pipe in same manner. 3. Tubular Type (Method B) a. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section. b. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. c. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make a snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends. d. Before making up joint, slip 3-foot length of polyethylene tube over end of proceeding pipe section, bunching it accordion -fashion lengthwise. e. After completing joint, pull 3-foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously installed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least 1 foot; make each end snug and secure. 4. Sheet Type a. Cut polyethylene sheet to a length approximately 2 feet longer than piece section. :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 levised December 9, 2022 b. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching it until it clears the pipe ends. c. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that it circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. d. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet. e. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. f. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. g. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends. h. Repair cuts, tears, punctures or other damage to polyethylene. i. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner. 5. Pipe -Shaped Appurtenances a. Cover bends, reducers, offsets and other pipe -shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe and fittings. 6. Odd -Shaped Appurtenances a. When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and other odd -shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length polyethylene tube by passing sheet under appurtenances and bringing it up around body. b. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice and taping down. c. Tape polyethylene securely in place at the valve stem and at any other penetrations. 7. Repairs a. Repair any cuts, tears, punctures or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around fitting to cover damaged area and secured in place. 8. Openings in Encasement a. Provide openings for branches, service taps, blow -offs, air valves and similar appurtenances by making an X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. b. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene with tape. c. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with any resulting damaged areas being repaired as described above. 9. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: a. Where polyethylene -wrapped pipe joins an adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. b. Secure end with circumferential turns of tape. c. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from Cast or Ductile Iron Pipe. :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 3.5 REPAIR/RESTORATION A.Patching 1. Excessive field -patching is not permitted of lining or coating. 2. Patching of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no dimensions greater than 12 inches. 3. In general, there shall not be more than 1 patch on either the lining or the coating of any 1 joint of pipe. 4. Wherever necessary to patch the pipe: a. Make patch with cement mortar as previously specified for interior joints. b. Do not install patched pipe until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and approved for laying by the City 5. Promptly remove rejected pipe from the site 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A.Potable Water Mains 1. Cleaning, disinfection, hydrostatic testing and bacteriological testing of water mains a. Clean, flush, pig, disinfect, hydrostatic test and bacteriological test the water main as specified in Section 33 04 40. B. Wastewater Lines 1. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection a. Provide a Post -CCTV Inspection in accordance with Section 33 0131. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 9, 2022 Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.2.A.1.b. — Updated Payment types 1.3 — Added definitions of gland types for clarity 2.2.B.9, 10, 11 and 12 — Added reference to Section 33 11 05 and removed material specification for bolts, nuts and gaskets 12/9/2022 W Norwood 2.2 B. 7. Revised "Provisions for Thrust' section :ITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A iTANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 3evised December 9, 2022 333170-1 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 33 3170 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS (MOD) PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 3-inch through 8-inch Combination Air -Release and Air/Vacuum Valve Assemblies (Combination Air Valves) for sanitary sewer force mains to include: a. Combination air -release and air/vacuum valve b. Tap to force main c. Inlet piping and appurtenances d. Vent piping and appurtenances e. Vault enclosure and appurtenances B. Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Modified 1.1.C.5. 2. Modified 2.2.A. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 01—General Requirements 3. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover and Grade Rings 4. Section 33 05 14 — Adjusting Manholes, Inlets, Valve Boxes, and Other Structures to Grade 5. Section 33 1110 — Ductile Iron Pipe (MOD) 6. Section 33 11 11—Ductile Iron Fittings 7. Section 33 12 20 —Resilient Seated (Wedge) Gate Valve 8. Section 33 39 20 — Precast Concrete Manholes 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for Combination Air Valves shall be per each. 2. Payment a. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Sewer Air Release Valve and Vault" installed for: 1) Various inlet sizes 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing Combination Air Valves with appurtenances as specified in the Drawings b. Air valve vault and appurtenances c. Tapping the main d. Isolation valves CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 333170-2 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 2 of 6 e. Fittings f. Vent piping g. Vent cover and/or enclosure h. Vent enclosure and/or pipe bollard protection, if required i. Excavation and backfill 1.3 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Combination Air Valve: A device having the features of both an air -release valve and an air/vacuum valve 2. Inlet: The opening at the base of the Combination Air Valve mechanism through which air from the force main enters 3. Inlet Piping: The piping and appurtenances between the force main and the valve inlet 4. Orifice: The opening in the Combination Air Valve mechanism through which air is expelled from or admitted into the force main 5. Outlet: The opening at the top of Combination Air Valve mechanism, including the orifice, through which air enters or exits the force main 6. Vent Piping: The piping and appurtenances from the Combination Air Valve outlet to its termination point outside the vault B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. ANSI/AWWA C512 — Air -Release, Air/Vacuum Valves, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. b. AWWA Manual of Water Supply Practices M51 (AWWA Manual M51) —Air- Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Combination Air Valves, air/vacuum valves, or combination air valves stating: a. Application type b. Working pressure rating c. Test pressure rating d. Surge pressure rating e. Inlet size CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 333170-3 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 3 of 6 f. Small orifice size g. Large orifice size h. Cleaning ports 2. Valve vault and appurtenances 3. Tapping appurtenances 4. Isolation valves 5. Fittings 6. Vent piping 7. Vent cover and/or enclosure 8. Vent enclosure and/or pipe bollard protection 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Manufacturers a. Combination Air Valves of the same size shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Protect all parts such that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 2. Protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged period at the site. 3. Protect the finished surfaces of all exposed flanges by wooden blank flanges, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. 4. Protect finished iron or steel surfaces not painted to prevent rust and corrosion. 5. Prevent plastic and similar brittle items from being directly exposed to sunlight or extremes in temperature. 6. Secure and maintain a location to store the material in accordance with Section 01 6600. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS [NOT USED] A. Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 01. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 33 31 70 - 4 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 4 of 6 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS A. Manufacturers I I _i P1N .. ..... . =_ 3. Combination Air Valves shall be: a. A.R.I. Model D-26 NS b. Vent-O-Mat Model RGXH c. Vent Tech Model SXG 4. The Combination Air Valve shall be new and the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of air release/air vacuum valves having similar service and size. B. Performance / Design Criteria Capacities a. Application = Sanitary Sewer b. Working Pressure from 10 psi to 150 psi c. Test Pressure = 225 psi d. Surge Pressure = 100 psi minimum, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents e. Size 1) Each orifice size must be sufficient to meet the requirements set forth in AWWA Manual M51 and indicated on the Drawings. Function a. High volume discharge during force main filling b. High volume intake through the large orifice c. Pressurized air discharge d. Surge Dampening/Controlled discharge rates 1) The valve shall have an integral surge alleviation mechanism which shall operate automatically to limit transient pressure rise or shock induced by closure due to high velocity air discharge or the subsequent rejoining of the separated water columns. The limitation of the pressure rise shall be achieved by decelerating the approaching water prior to valve closure. e. Must operate effectively with the presence of solids encountered in sanitary sewer C. Materials 1. Combination Air Valve a. Internal parts 1) Non -corroding material such as stainless steel or high density polyethylene b. Valve body 1) SAE 304 or SAE 316 stainless steel 2) Equipped with intake and discharge flanges c. Inlet/Discharge orifice area CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 333170-5 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 5 of 6 1) Equal to the nominal size of the valve or greater 2.3 ACCESSORIES Inlet Piping a. Shall be in accordance with Drawings 2. Isolation Valves a. Gate valve (flanged) in accordance with Section 33 12 20 with: 1) 2-inch operating nut, non -rising stem with enclosed miter gearing for 3- inch and larger gate valves 3. Vent Piping a. 4-inch minimum Duefile Ifen Pipe 316 Stainless Steel in accordance with Drawings b. No galvanized piping allowed. 4. Vent Screen a. Stainless Steel (AISI 304) 5. Dropover Enclosure a. Channell SPH-1420 thermoplastic enclosure, or approved equal 6. Vault a. Provide a flat top, concrete manhole in accordance with Section 33 39 20. b. Manhole dimensions shall be in accordance with Drawings. c. Provide a 32-inch hinged cover with frame and grade ring in accordance with Section 33 05 13. d. Secure Air Valve to vault wall using a galvanized or stainless steel bracket manufactured by Grinell, or approved equal, in accordance with the Drawings 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections Testing and inspection of Combination Air Valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C412. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.3 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. 2. All ductile iron piping and valves above ground or within the vault interior shall be painted in accordance with City requirements, unless otherwise stated in the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 333170-6 COMBINATION AIR VALVE FOR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS Page 6 of 6 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspections 1. The valve shall perform as intended with no deformation, leaking or damage of any kind for the pressure ranges indicated. 2. Before acceptance of the installed valve, the City Field Operations Staff shall have the opportunity to inspect and operate the valve. 3. The City will assess the ease of access to the operating nut and ease of operating the corporation stop. 4. If access and operation of the valve and its appurtenances meet the City Standard Detail, then the valve will be accepted as installed. 5. The Combination Air Valve assembly shall be free from any leaks. B. Non -Conforming Work 1. If access and operation of the valve or its appurtenances does not meet the City's criteria, the Contractor will remedy the situation until it meets the City's criteria, at the Contractor's expense. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 12/20/2012 D. Johnson General: Modified specification to reflect materials and equipment in City Standard Detail; Removed cast -in -place manhole references CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised December 20, 2012 333920-1 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 1 of 10 SECTION 33 39 20 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE 3 PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary Sewer, Water Appurtenance, or Reclaimed Water Appurtenance Precast Concrete Manholes B.Deviations from this City of Fort Worth Standard Specification 1. Added Paragraph 1.2.A.4. 2. Added Paragraph 1.2.A.5. 3. Modified Paragraph 1.3.11.2. 4. Modified Paragraph 1.9. 5. Added Paragraph 2.2.C. C.Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 — Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 — General Requirements 3. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete 4. Section 03 80 00 — Modifications to Existing Concrete Structures 5. Section 33 0130 — Sewer and Manhole Testing 6. Section 33 05 13 — Frame, Cover, and Grade Rings 7. Section 33 39 60 — Epoxy Liners for Sanitary Sewer Structures 8. Section 33 05 10 — Utility Trench Excavation, Embedment and Backfill 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Manhole a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each concrete manhole installed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Manhole" installed for: a) Various sizes b) Various types c. The price bid will include: 1) Manhole structure complete in place 2) Excavation 3) Forms 4) Reinforcing steel (if required) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-2 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 2 of 10 S) Concrete 6) Backfill (except where imported CSS/CLSM is required around manhole in construction drawings) 7) Foundation 8) Drop pipe 9) Stubs 10)Frame I I)Cover 12)Grade rings 13)Pipe connections 14)Pavement removal 15)Hauling 16)Disposal of excess material 17)Placement and compaction of backfill 18)Clean-up 2. Extra Depth Manhole a. Measurement 1) Measurement for added depth beyond 6 feet will be per vertical foot, measured to the nearest 1/10 foot. b. Payment 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per vertical foot for "Extra Depth Manhole" specified for: a) Various sizes c. The price bid will include: 1) Manhole structure complete in place 2) Excavation 3) Forms 4) Reinforcing steel (if required) 5) Concrete 6) Backfill 7) Foundation 8) Drop pipe 9) Stubs 10)Frame 11)Cover 12)Grade rings 13)Pipe connections 14)Pavement removal 15)Hauling 16)Disposal of excess material 17)Placement and compaction of backfill 18)Clean-up Imported Embedment/Backfill - CSS/CLSM a. Measurement 1) Measured by the cubic yard as delivered to the site and recorded by truck ticket provided to the City CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-3 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 3 of 10 b. Payment 1) Imported CSS/CLSM backfill around manholes/junction boxes shall be paid when the following conditions exist: a) When depths are 15 feet and greater/under existing or future pavement b) When working in redevelopment areas where work is required in constrained spaces c) When required in the Construction Drawings 2) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per cubic yard of "Imported Embedment/Backfill, CSS" or "Imported Embedment/Backfill, CLSM" for material placed in areas around manholes/junction boxes. 4. Polymer Concrete Manhole a. Measurement 1) Measurement for this Item shall be per each polymer concrete manhole installed. b. Payment 1) The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per each "Polymer Manhole" installed for: a) Various sizes b) Various types c. The price bid will include: 1) Manhole structure complete in place 2) Excavation 3) Forms 4) Reinforcing steel (if required) 5) Concrete 6) Backfill (except where imported CSS/CLSM is required around manhole in construction drawings) 7) Foundation 8) Drop pipe 9) Stubs 1O)Frame 11) Cover 12)Grade rings 13)Pipe connections 14)Pavement removal 15)Hauling 16)Disposal of excess material 17)Placement and compaction of backfill 18)Clean-up 5. Extra Depth Polymer Concrete Manhole a. Measurement 1) Measurement for added depth beyond 6 feet will be per vertical foot, measured to the nearest 1/10 foot. b. Payment CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-4 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 4 of 10 1) The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid per vertical foot for "Extra Depth Manhole" specified for: a) Various sizes c. The price bid will include: 1) Manhole structure complete in place 2) Excavation 3) Forms 4) Reinforcing steel (if required) 5) Concrete 6) Backfill 7) Foundation 8) Drop pipe 9) Stubs 1O)Frame 11) Cover 12)Grade rings 13)Pipe connections 14)Pavement removal 15)Hauling 16)Disposal of excess material 17)Placement and compaction of backfill 18) Clean-up 1.3 REFERENCES A.Defmitions Manhole Type a. Standard Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Greater than 4 feet deep up to 6 feet deep b. Standard Drop Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Same as Standard Manhole with external drop connection(s) c. Type "A" Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Manhole set on a reinforced concrete block placed around 39-inch and larger sewer pipe. d. Shallow Manhole (See City Standard Details) 1) Less than four 4 deep with formed invert for sewer pipe diameters smaller than 39-inch 2. Manhole Size a. 4 foot diameter 1) Used with pipe ranging from 8-inch to 15-inch b. 5 foot diameter 1) Used with pipe ranging from 18-inch to 36-inch 2) See specific manhole design on Drawings for pipes larger than 36-inch. B.Reference Standards CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-5 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 5 of 10 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C443, Standard Specification for Joint for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets b. C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. c. C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manholes Structures, Pipes, and Laterals. d. D 1187, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsion for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal e. D1227, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing f. C267, Test Methods for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes g. C579, Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes h. C857, Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes i. D6783, Specifications for Polymer Concrete Pipe 3. OSHA a. Occupational Safety and Health Administration CFR 29, Part 1926-Safety Regulations for Construction, Subpart P — Excavations 4. ACI a. 440-1R-15, Guide for the Design and Construction of Structural Concrete Reinforced with Fiber -Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Bars 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALSANFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Data 1. Precast Concrete Manhole 2. Drop connection materials 3. Pipe connections at manhole walls 4. Stubs and stub plugs 5. Admixtures 6. Concrete Mix Design B.Polymer Concrete Manholes: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-6 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 6 of 10 1. Certification from the manufacturer that polymer concrete manhole design meets or exceeds the load and strength requirements of ASTM C478 and ASTM C857, reinforced in accordance with ASTM C478 or ACI 440.111. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE !NOT- USED1 A. Polymer Concrete Manholes: B. Certification from manufacturer that polymer concrete manhole design meets or exceeds the load and strength requirements of ASTM C478 and ASTM C857, reinforced in accordance with ASTM C478 or ACI 440.1R. C. Proof of independent chemical resistance testing conducted in accordance with ASTM C267. D. Manufacturer must provide references of 10 previous polymer concrete projects including scope in the last 5 years performed with both the owner and contractor for reference and review. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer Warranty 1. Manufacturer's Warranty shall be in accordance with Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER -FURNISHED [oR] OWNER -SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.2 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS A.Manufacturers 1. Only the manufacturers as listed on the City's Standard Products List will be considered as shown in Section 01 60 00. a. The manufacturer must comply with this Specification and related Sections. 2. Any product that is not listed on the Standard Products List is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B.Materials 1. Precast Reinforced Concrete Sections — Conform to ASTM C478. 2. Precast Joints a. Provide gasketed joints in accordance with ASTM C443. b. Minimize number of segments. c. Use long joints at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top. d. Include manufacturer's stamp on each section. 3. Lifting Devices CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-7 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 7 of 10 a. Manhole sections and cones may be furnished with lift lugs or lift holes. 1) If lift lugs are provided, place 180 degrees apart. 2) If lift holes are provided, place 180 degrees apart and grout during manhole installation. 4. Frame and Cover — Conform to Section 33 05 13. Backfill — CSS/CLSM (when required in construction Drawings) — Conform to Section 33 05 10. 6. Grade Ring — Conform to Section 33 05 13 and ASTM C478. 7. Pipe Connections a. Utilize either an integrally cast embedded pipe connector or a boot -type connector installed in a circular block out opening conforming to ASTM C923. Steps a. No steps are allowed. 9. Interior Coating or Liner— Conform to Section 33 39 60. 10. Exterior Coating a. Coat with non-fibered asphaltic emulsion in accordance with ASTM DI 187 Type I and ASTM D 1227 Type III Class I. C.Polymer Concrete Manholes: 1. Riser Sections: a. Provide base riser section with monolithic floors, unless shown otherwise in the Drawings. b. Provide riser sections joined with bell and spigot/ship-lap design seamed with butyl mastic (ASTM C990) and or rubber gaskets (ASTM C443) so that on assembly, manhole base, riser and top section make a continuous and uniform manhole structure. Joints shall meet the testing requirements without the use of an external joint wrap. c. Construct riser sections for polymer concrete manholes from standard polymer concrete manhole sections of the diameter indicated in the Drawings. Use various lengths of polymer concrete manhole sections in combination to provide the correct height with the fewest joints. Lifting inserts shall not fully penetrate the wall. 2. Resin: The manufacturer must use only polyester or vinyl ester resin systems designed for use with this particular application. Resin additives such as curing agents, pigments, dyes, fillers and thixotropic agents, when used, must not be detrimental to the manhole. Minimum resin content shall not be less than 7 percent by weight. 3. Aggregate: All aggregate, sand and quartz powder must meet the requirement of ASTM C33, where applicable. Limestone aggregates shall not be used. 4. Polymer concrete must have a minimum compressive strength of 9000 psi when measured in accordance with ASTM C497. 5. Elastomeric Gaskets: Gaskets must be suitable for the service intended and must meet the requirements of ASTM C443. Assembled joints shall meet the CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-8 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 8 of 10 testing requirements of ASTM C443 without the use of an external joint wrap. Pipe to manhole connections shall be accomplished with connectors meeting ASTM C923 for both materials and performance requirements. Proof of connector testing can be requested from connector manufacturer. 6. Marking and Identification: Each manhole must be marked with the manufacturer's name and production date. 7. Invert Channel: Construct invert channels to provide smooth flow transition with minimal disruption of flow at pipe to manhole connections. Polymer bench and channel are to be constructed with all polymer concrete material. Extended ballast slab for buoyancy concerns can be addressed with cementitious concrete material. 8. Manholes must be reinforced per ASTM C478 or ACI 440.1R and designed to withstand all live loads and dead loads as described in the Drawings. Manhole wall thickness must be designed to resist hydrostatic pressures with a minimum safety factor of 2.0 for full depth conditions from grade to invert. 9. Materials needed for grouting and patching must be a polyester mortar compound provided by the manufacturer or as approved by the manufacturer. 10. Approved Manufacturers: a. Armorock Polymer Concrete. b. U.S. Composite Pipe, Inc. (a division of Thompson Pipe Group). c. Approved equal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.2 EXAMINATION A.Evaluation and Assessment 1. Verify lines and grades are in accordance to the Drawings. 3.3 PREPARATION A.Foundation Preparation 1. Excavate 8 inches below manhole foundation. 2. Replace excavated soil with coarse aggregate; creating a stable base for manhole construction. a. If soil conditions or ground water prevent use of coarse aggregate base a 2-inch mud slab may be substituted. 3.4 INSTALLATION A.Manhole 1. Construct manhole to dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. Precast Sections CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-9 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 9 of 10 a. Provide bell -and -spigot design incorporating a premolded joint sealing compound for wastewater use. b. Clean bell spigot and gaskets, lubricate and join. c. Minimize number of segments. d. Use long joints used at the bottom and shorter joints toward the top. B.Invert 1. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe -manhole connections. 2. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. a. Provide curves for side inlets. 3. For all standard manholes provide full depth invert. 4. For example, if 8-inch pipe in connected to manhole construct the invert to full 8 inches in depth. C.Drop Manhole Connection 1. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24 inches above the invert. D.Final Rim Elevation 1. Install concrete grade rings for height adjustment. a. Construct grade ring on load bearing shoulder of manhole. b. Use sealant between rings as shown on Drawings. 2. Set frame on top of manhole or grade rings using continuous water sealant. 3. Remove debris, stones and dirt to ensure a watertight seal. 4. Do not use steel shims, wood, stones or other unspecified material to obtain the final surface elevation of the manhole frame. E. Internal coating 1. Internal coating application will conform to Section 33 39 60, if required by Drawings. 2. Internal coating is not required for Polymer Concrete Manhole. F. External coating 1. Remove dirt, dust, oil and other contaminants that could interfere with adhesion of the coating. 2. Cure manhole for 3 days before backfilling around the structure. 3. Application will follow manufacturer's recommendation. G.Modifications and Pipe Penetrations 1. Conform to Section 03 80 00. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 333920-10 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE Page 10 of 10 3.5 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.6 RE -INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Field Tests and Inspections 1. Perform vacuum test in accordance with Section 33 01 30. 3.8 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.9 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Revision Log DATE NAME SUMMARY OF CHANGE 1. LA.I — Modified to include precast manholes for water and reclaimed water applications 12/20/2012 D. Johnson 1.3.B.2 — Modified to include ASTM C443, D 1187 and D 1227 as references 2.2.B.1-3 — Modified in accordance with new ASTM references 2.2.B.10 — Modified in accordance with new ASTM references 1.1 C. — Referenced 33 05 10 1.2 A. Revised to add pay item when imported CSS/LSM is required in Construction Drawings 12/13/2024 M Owen 1.3 B. — Updated reference standards 2.2 B. — Referenced 33 05 10 for import CSS/CLSM material if required in Construction Drawings 3.3 A. 2. — Corrected typo - coarse CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS CPN104490-1 Revised December 13, 2024 DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 1 of 16 SECTION 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, appurtenances, and incidentals required to furnish and install, complete, the process piping specified herein as further specified in the detailed piping specifications provided in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Integration" of the Specifications. f�l➢•�:i�li/,11Y�1���.�L�7:i� A. Piping materials and installation methods peculiar to individual piping systems are specified within the respective system specifications provided in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Integration" of the Specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Buried Pipe: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil. B. Exposed Pipe: Piping that is located above ground, in pipe chases, or located inside of a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure. C. Underground Pipe: Refer to Paragraph 1.03A. D. Submerged or Wetted Pipe: Piping that is within an area described below: 1. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs. 2. Top face of tank or basin walls and walkways. 3. Under tank or basin cover. 4. Liquid surface or within 2 feet above the top of the liquid surface. E. Wet Wall: A wall with water on at least one side. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards must apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch ASME B16.47 Standard 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA C107 Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C207 Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services — Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 1 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 2 of 16 3. ASTM International (ASTM): Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for ASTM A193 High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless ASTM A194 Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM F37 Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot -Dip, Requirements of ASTM F2329 Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners 4. NSF International (NSF): NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects NSF/ANSI 372 Drinking Water System Components — Lead Content 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Design Requirements: 1. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust restraint is not shown or specified, design piping systems in accordance with the following: a. Process Piping: ASME B31.3, normal fluid service unless otherwise specified. b. Building Service Piping: ASME 31.9, as applicable for sanitary building drainage and vent systems. c. Buried Piping: H20-S 16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor, AASHTO HB-17, as applicable. 2. All equipment, supports, anchors, and fasteners must be of adequate strength to withstand loads associated with pumping, turbulence, thrusts from liquid movement, thermal expansion and contraction, and other loads encountered under normal operating conditions. 3. The components, materials, and arrangements described in this Section are typically based on equipment manufacturers' recommendations and are considered minimum limits of acceptability. B. Project Conditions: 1. All components specified herein must be specifically designed for the specified service and the environment encountered in this installation. 2. NSF/ANSI 61 and 372 Certifications: All components in contact with water being treated for potable use, potable water, and chemicals used in the treatment of water for potable use must comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and must be certified to meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. An accredited testing laboratory or facility must provide the certification as required by the Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 2 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 3 of 16 NSF/ANSI certification process. The products must bear the mark or seal of the accredited testing laboratory and the NSF seal. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance: Provide the services of an independent inspection and testing agency for welding operations. 1. The presence of an Owner's quality control and quality assurance inspector does not relieve the Contractor from performing its own quality control, including 100 percent visual inspection of welds. B. Source Limitation: Material of each type specified in this Section must be supplied by a single manufacturer. C. The manufacturer must be fully experienced, reputable, qualified, and regularly engaged for at least the last 5 years in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. D. All pipes and fittings must be new and must be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and must comply with this Section. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and must include the following: 1. Items specifically called out in the individual piping systems within the respective system specifications provided in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Integration" of the Specifications. 2. Shop Fabricated Piping: a. Detailed pipe fabrication or spool drawings showing special fittings, and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent information. b. Layout drawings showing the location of each pipe section and each special length and number or otherwise designate laying sequence on each piece. 3. Identify the wall thickness and rational method or standard applied to determine the wall thickness for each size of each difference service including exposed, submerged, buried, and concrete -encased installations. 4. Dissimilar pipe joint types and assembly drawings. 5. Gasket material, temperate rating, and pressure rating for each type of pipe and each type of service. 6. Manufacturer's data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, and overall lengths. 7. Product data on materials specified in this Section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The pipe must be prepared for shipment to afford the maximum protection from normal hazards of transportation and allow the pipe to reach the Project Site in an undamaged condition. Pipes must be carefully supported during shipment and storage. Pipe, fittings, and specials must be separated so that they do not bear against each other, and the whole load must be securely fastened to prevent movement in transit. Ship pipe on padded bunks with Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 3 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 4 of 16 tie -down straps. Store pipes on padded skids, sand or soil berms, tires, or other suitable means to protect the pipe from damage, based on the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Care must be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading the materials to prevent damage to the pipe, fittings, and specials. Pipe, fittings, and specials must not be dropped. Pipe, fittings and specials must be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed that is found to be defective. C. Upon delivery, Contractor must off-load, store, and handle the materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions and guidelines. D. In handling the pipe, wide cushioned slings or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer must be used. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges, or levers shall be used in handling the pipe, fittings, or couplings. Stainless steel components must be handled with materials dedicated to stainless steel in order to minimize cross contamination and surface corrosion. E. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been delivered, stored, and handled, it must be removed and replaced with sound pipe by the Contractor, at the Contractor's own expense prior to installation. All pipes, fittings, specials, and couplings must be thoroughly cleaned before installation and must be kept clean until they are put into service. 1.09 WARRANTY A. All materials furnished in this Section must be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by the Contractor must be included in the warranty, as well as correction of defective Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Refer to the individual piping specification sections in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Interconnections" for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that system. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filter metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. C. Soldering Materials: Refer to the individual piping system specifications for solder appropriate for each respective system. D. Flange Bolts and Nuts 1. General: a. Washer: 1). Provide a washer for each nut. 2). Washer must be of the same material as the nut. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 4 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 5 of 16 b. Nuts: Heavy hex -head. c. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4-inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly. d. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. e. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts: 1). Chloride -free. 2). Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: a). Huskey FG-1800 Anti -Seize. b). Welcon Anti -Seize High -Tech. 2. Thermoplastic Pipe: a. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 2 (316SS). b. Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8M (316SS). c. Washers: Stainless steel, type 316. E. Mechanical Joint Bolts and Nuts: 1. Bolts including T-Bolts: Stainless steel (type 316) in accordance with ASTM F193. 2. Heavy Hex Nuts: Stainless steel (type 316) in accordance with ASTM F594. F. Gaskets: 1. General: a. Gaskets must be suitable for the specific fluids, pressures, and temperature conditions. b. Capable of being applied on the surface of the piping with cavities to provide for an improved seal with the internal pressure. c. Contractor is responsible for coordinating gaskets for full-faced and raised face flanges. d. Gasket material must meet the NSF/ANSI 61 requirements for the following services: 1). Potable water. 2). Finished water. 3). Filter effluent. 4). Membrane filtrate. 5). Any other services in direct contract with potable water or in direct contact with a process used to produce potable water. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Flanged Joints: a. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 psi, and temperatures equal to or less than 120 deg F, unless noted otherwise. b. Material: EPDM. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 5 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 6of16 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: 1). Garlock. 2). John Crane. 2.03 INSULATING FLANGES, COUPLINGS, AND UNIONS A. Dielectric Insulating Gasket Kits for Flanges: 1. Dielectric insulating flange gasket kits must be installed at all the following locations whether shown on the Drawings or not: a. Dissimilar metal pipe connections. b. Stainless steel pipe flanges connected to flanges constructed of bronze alloys, carbon steel alloys, or nickel alloys (Monel, Hastelloy, and Inconel). c. Process piping connecting with valves and other equipment and appurtenances of dissimilar metals. d. Exposed piping making a vertical transition to buried piping. e. Locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Insulating flange gaskets must be furnished as a kit including the dielectric gasket, bolt sleeves, and washers in accordance with the nominal flange size. 3. Each dielectric insulating gasket must be a full -face isolation and sealing gasket, Type "E", 1/8-inch thick, epoxy -glass retainer with bolt holes cut to match the mating flange drilling. The retain must contain a precision tapered groove to accommodate the controlled compression of an FPM/FKM (Viton) sealing element. The quad -ring seal must be pressure energized. The epoxy -glass retainer must have 550-volt/mil dielectric strength and a minimum 50,000 psi compression strength. 4. Insulating bolt -sleeves must be manufactured of Mylar having a dielectric strength of not less than 4000-volt/mil. 5. Insulating washers must be manufactured of G-10 epoxy -glass having a dielectric strength of 400 to 500 volts/mil. Insulating washers must be installed with metallic backing washers to prevent damage to the epoxy -glass washers during bolting. The metallic washers must be as specified in this Section. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: a. CALPICO, Inc. b. GPT (EnPro Industries) — LineBackea Isolating Gasket/Kits and LineBacker® 61TM NSF Certified Isolation Gaskets/Kits. c. Advance Products & Systems, LLC — Trojan Duplex Seal. B. Insulating Coupling: 1. Insulating couplings must be installed at all the following locations whether shown on the Drawings or not: Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 6 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 7of16 a. Dissimilar metal pipe connections. b. Stainless steel pipe flanges connected to flanges constructed of bronze alloys, carbon steel alloys, or nickel alloys (Monel, Hastelloy, and Inconel). c. Process piping connecting with valves and other equipment and appurtenances of dissimilar metals. d. Exposed piping makes a vertical transition to buried piping. e. Locations shown on the Drawing. 2. Materials of Construction: a. Follower Ring: ASTM A576 or ASTM A36. b. Middle Ring: ASTM A36 or ASTM A53 c. Gasket: Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR). d. Lining: NSF 61 certified fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213. e. Coating: NSF 61 certified fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213. f. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: stainless steel, type 316 (ASTM A193/A194). g. Insulation Boot: Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR). 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: a. Dresser Utility Solutions — Series 39 Insulating Couplings. b. Baker Coupling, LLC — Series 216 Insulating Flex Couplings. C. Dielectric Couplings and Unions 1. Provide dielectric coupling and unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials installed (threaded, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. 2. The dielectric coupling and union must be factory fabricated with a pressure rating of 150 psi at 180 deg F. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: a. CALPICO, Inc. b. Capital Group, Inc. c. HART Industrial Unions, LLC. d. Watts. 2.04 VENT AND DRAIN VALVES A. Pipelines 3-inch Diameter and Smaller: 1. Valve Style: Ball valve - PVC Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 7 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 8of16 a). Body: Valves shall be manufactured to ASTM F1970 and constructed from PVC Type 1, ASTM D1784 Cell Classification 12454-A. b. Seats shall be Teflon Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) with elastomeric backing 0- ring cushions to provide smooth even stem torque and to compensate for wear. c. Seals shall be made of Viton Fluorocarbon Rubber (FPM/FKM) or ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber (EPDM), as required for chemical compatibility. 2. Valves shall be PVC construction to match adjacent piping unless specifically noted or called out on the Drawings. 3. All valve stems shall be equipped with a double O-ring. 4. The valve shall be capable of blocking in two directions (upstream and downstream), leaving full pressure on the opposite end of the valve. 5. End Connection: a. 3 Inches and Smaller: True Union. b. 4 Inches and Larger: Flanged. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ASAHI-America Type 21/21A; b. Georg Fischer Type 546; c. Hayward TB Series; d. IPEX USA LLC VXE/VKD Series; or e. Engineer -approved Manufacturer. 2.05 ESCUTCHEONS A. Escutcheons must be chrome plated, stamped steel, hinged, split -ring escutcheon, with a set screw. B. The inside diameter must closely fit the outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation when pipe is specified to be insulated. C. The outside diameter must completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: 1. Chicago Specialty Manufacturing Company. 2. Dearborn Brass Company. 3. Grinnell. 4. Keeney Manufacturing Company. 5. Sanitary -Dash Manufacturing Company. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 8 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 9 of 16 2.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification as required by the City and as specified in Section 40 05 36.13 "FRP Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control." 2.07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide pipe hangers and supports as specified in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping." 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the size, material, joint types, elevations, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment. B. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify the adequacy of wall pipes, sleeves, and other openings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to the specific pipe system Sections in Division 33 "Utilities," Division 40 "Process Integration," and Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings" for additional requirements. B. Inspect the pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and soil from inside. C. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using the original coating and lining materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except for glass -lined pipe or PVDF-lined pipe. Glass -lined pipe or PVDF-lined pipe with a damaged coating and lining must be promptly removed from the Site and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 WELDING A. Perform welding in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.3 for Pressure Piping, as may be specified in the specific pipe system sections in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Integration" and if recommended by the piping or fitting manufacturer. B. Weld Identification: Keep a paper record of which welder welded each joint. C. Pipe End Preparation: 1. Machine Shaping: Preferred. 2. Oxygen or Arc Cutting: Smooth to the touch, true, and slag removal by chipping or grinding. 3. Beveled Ends for Butt Welding: ASME B 16.25. D. Surfaces: 1. Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material detrimental to welding. 2. Clean stainless steel joints with stainless steel wire brushes or stainless steel wool prior to welding. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 9 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 10 of 16 Thoroughly clean each layer of deposit weld metal, including the final pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a power -driven wire brush. E. Alignment and Spacing: 1. Align ends to be joined within existing commercial tolerances on diameters, wall thickness, and out -of -roundness. 2. Root Opening of Joint: As stated in the qualified welding procedure. 3. Minimum Spacing of Circumferential Butt Welds: Minimum four times the pipe wall thickness or 1 inch, whichever is greater. F. Climatic Conditions: 1. Do not perform welding if there is impingement of any rain, snow, sleet, or wind exceeding 5 mph on the weld area or if the ambient temperature is below 32 deg F. 2. Stainless Steel and Alloy Piping: If the ambient temperature is less than 32 deg F, local preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required. G. Tack Welds: Performed by a qualified welder using the same procedure as for completed weld, made with an electrode similar or equivalent to the electrode to be used for the first weld pass and not defective. Remove those not meeting the requirements prior to commencing welding procedures. H. Surface Defects: Chip or grind out those affecting the soundness of the weld. I. The weld quality must meet the requirements of the governing welding codes. 3.04 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Piping Drawings: 1. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings. 2. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or other types of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Time. 3. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Piping Alternatives Provide piping as specified in this Section and specific pipe system sections in Division 33 "Utilities" and Division 40 "Process Integration", unless indicated on the Drawings or specified otherwise. 2. Alternative Pipe Ratings: a. Piping with a greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price. b. Piping of a different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping. 3. Valves in piping sections must be capable of withstanding the specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 10 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 11 of 16 4. Grooved Joints: Use couplings, flange adapters, and fittings of the same manufacturer. The manufacturer's factory trained representative must provide on -site training for the Contractor's field personnel and periodically visit the jobsite to verify that the Contractor is following the manufacturer's best recommended practices. A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visits. 5. Flanged Joints: Where one of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange. C. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings, couplings, and equipment must be installed without rotation, angular deflection, vertical offset, or horizontal offset. D. Connections to Existing Piping 1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings. 2. Protect potable water supplies from contamination. Make connections between the potable water supply and other water systems in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. 3. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory. 4. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make connections to existing piping. 5. For flanged connections, provide isolating gasket kits as specified in this Section. E. Refer to Section 01 35 13 "Special Procedures" for work restrictions regarding connections to existing facilities. F. Connections Between Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals 1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals. 2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys. G. Provide insulating gasket kits at flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel pipe. Insulating gasket kits must meet the requirements specified in this Section. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED PIPING A. Unless shown otherwise, piping must be parallel to building lines. Hangers on adjacent piping must be aligned where possible on common size ranges. 1. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Drain piping must slope with a minimum 1/4-inch per foot downward in the direction of flow. 2. All flanges must be true and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in the flanges must straddle vertical centerline of pipes. B. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations have been determined. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 11 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 12 of 16 C. Unions, mechanical couplings, or flanged coupling adapters must be installed where required for piping or equipment installation, even though they are not shown on the Drawings. All mechanical couplings and flanged coupling adapters must be anchored with joint harnessed assemblies. D. Support piping as required in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping." Do not transfer pipe loads to equipment. E. Piping must be installed without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner that would set up stresses in the pipe, valves, or connected equipment. 1. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections. 2. Do not subject the piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting the piping. 3. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting the flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses. 4. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements must slip freely into place. 5. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction piping. F. Required straight runs of piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices must be smooth. G. Where valve handwheels or chainwheels are shown, valve orientation must be as shown on the Drawings. Where valve handwheels or chainwheels are not shown on the Drawings, the valves must be oriented to permit easy access to the handwheels or chainwheels and to avoid interferences. H. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building space and not interfere with the use of space or other work. I. Provide a union or flange at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation on the equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal of the equipment or instrumentation. J. Restraining Above Ground Piping: 1. Restrain piping at valves and fittings where piping changes direction, changes sizes, and at ends. a. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural restraints. b. Determine the thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross -sectional area of the piping by the design test pressure of the piping. K. Piping Clearances, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Over Walkways and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet-6 inches, measured from the walking surface or stair tread to the lowest extremity of the piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. 2. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum of 3 feet-0 inches, measured from the equipment extremity and extremity of the piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. 3. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 0 feet-1 inch from the nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 12 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 13 of 16 4. Do not route piping in front of or interfere with accessways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows. Do not route between ladders and the ladder mounting surface. 5. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows must not be less than the top of the opening. 6. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms. 7. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF BURIED PIPING A. Bury piping with the minimum cover specified in this Section, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, and without air traps. B. Where two similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and disassembly of joints, thrust blocks, other structures, and to meet the separation requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality. C. Refer to Section 33 05 10 "Utility Trench Excavation Embedment and Backfill (MOD)" for additional requirements. D. Removal of Water: 1. Provide and maintain ample means and devices at all times to remove and dispose of water entering the trench during the process of pipe laying. 2. The Work is being performed at a lift station. Contractor is responsible for the control and removal of water during the Work described in this Section at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. The trench must be kept dry until the pipe laying and jointing are completed. Prevent trench water and animals from entering the pipe: a. During installation, keep the interior of all pipes, fittings, and other accessories as free as possible from soil and foreign matter at all times. b. When pipe laying is not in progress, including work breaks, the open ends of the pipe must be sealed by a plug or cap to prevent trench water, animals, or foreign material from entering the pipe. If water has accumulated in the trench, the seal must remain in place until the trench water has been removed to such an extent that it will not enter the pipe. E. Laying Piping: 1. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water and debris. Begin at the lowest point with bell ends up slope. 2. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in the proper position. 3. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the length of the pipe barrels. 4. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 13 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 14 of 16 5. At the end of each day's construction, temporarily plug open ends of piping to prevent the entrance of water, debris, or animals. F. Venting and Draining Piping Under Pressure: 1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install vent valves as air vents at high points in the piping. Install drain valves as low points in the piping. Provide additional pipe taps with valves and riser pipes along the piping as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling. Not all vent and drain valves may be shown on the Drawings; however, the Contractor must install vents on high points and drains on low points of pipelines at all low and high point locations. 3. Before the piping is placed into service, close the valves and install plugs. Protect the plugs and valves from corrosion as specified in Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." G. Tolerances: 1. Deflection from Horizontal Line: Maximum 2 inches. 2. Deflection from Vertical Grade: Maximum 1/4 inch. 3. Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The horizontal position of the pipe centerline on alignment around curves maximum variation of 1.75 feet from position shown. 5. Pipe Cover: Minimum 4 feet, unless otherwise shown. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE ENCASED PIPE A. Provide concrete pipe encasement shown on the Drawings and where otherwise required. Some piping may be required to be concrete encased for pipe strength requirements that are included in the Specifications. Piping under and within the influence of buildings, utility trenches, vaults, slabs, and other structures must be concrete encased. B. Refer to the details in the Drawings for encasement requirements. C. Where concrete encased piping crosses structure construction and expansion joints, provide flexible piping joints to coincide with the structure joints to prevent excessive pipe stress. 3.08 VENTS AND DRAINS A. Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on low points of pipelines at all low and high point locations. 3.09 FIELD FINISHING A. Notify the Owner's Representative 3 days before the start of surface preparation or coating application work. B. Refer to Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings" for additional finishing requirements. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 14 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 15 of 16 3.10 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 40 05 97 "Identification for Process Piping and Equipment" for requirements. 3.11 FINAL CLEANING A. Following the assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush expect as stated below with water at 2.5 feet per second (fps) minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed. B. The following process pipelines must be blown clean of loose debris with compressed air at 4000 feet per minute (fpm); do not flush with water: 1. Plant process or high-pressure air. 2. Dry chlorine (gas or liquid). Immediately after cleaning dry chlorine (gas or liquid) service piping, dry to 40 deg F dew point with dry compressed instrument air or compressed commercial grade nitrogen. C. If it is impractical to flush large diameter piping at 2.5 fps or blow at 4000 fpm velocity, clean in -place from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or blow line at a lower velocity. D. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in -place until cleaning is complete. E. Remove all accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from the piping. F. Cleaning Air Piping: 1. Perform special cleaning of filtered air piping from the intake clean air plenums to the discharge points and high-pressure air piping. Protect all surfaces from contamination. 2. Special cleaning shall include wire brushing, power tool cleaning, wiping down with lint - free cloths, brooming, and vacuuming to remove dust, scale, weld spatter, dust, soil, oil, and other matter deleterious to the air system. Do not abrasively blast installed piping. 3. To the greatest extent possible, clean piping immediately before final closure of the piping systems. Enter piping, clean and wipe down surfaces, and vacuum outside residue. Clean surfaces not accessible to this cleaning operation after installation within 6 hours preceding installation. 4. Subsequent to cleaning, protect the surfaces from contamination by dust, soil, construction debris, and moisture, including atmospheric moisture. Whether or not the pipe upstream has been cleaned, temporarily seal openings in partially completed work except when installation is actively in progress. When installation is actively in progress, seal openings at the end of each day's construction or when construction is temporarily stopped. 5. Suspend cleaning and seal openings when inclement weather, including dust storms, is imminent. 6. Use clean, dry air for testing the piping and other elements of the system. 7. Prior to introduction of air to the system, blow piping clean. Blow with the maximum discharge rate possible for a minimum of 4 hours, using new blowers or compressors and filters. Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 15 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS Page 16 of 16 8. Clean surfaces that become contaminated prior to acceptance. G. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified. END OF SECTION Common Work Results for Process Interconnections 40 05 00 - 16 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 1 of 21 SECTION 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Design a pipe support system and provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appurtenances, and incidentals required to furnish and install a complete and functional pipe support system. The pipe support system must be furnished complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, washers, threaded rods, and other components necessary for a complete and functional system. B. This Section requires the Contractor to delegate pipe support design to a pipe support design engineer hired by the Contractor. Where the Drawings show support types and/or locations, they shall be analyzed for adequacy to support the loads and stresses calculated by the pipe support designer, modified if required, installed generally where shown, and integrated with the pipe support system design provided by the Contractor. Modifications to the supports shown on the Drawings must be made to all components of the support system as required by the analysis. These modifications must include changes to the structural steel (i.e., base plates and anchorage, welds, etc.). C. The hangers and supports for process piping specified herein include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hangers and Supports. 2. Preformed Channel Pipe Support System. 3. Non -Metallic Preformed Channel Pipe Support Systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Buried Pipe: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil. B. Double Wall: A secondary contained piping system; a pipe within a pipe. C. Exposed Pipe: Piping that is located above ground, in pipe chases, or located inside of a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure. D. Pipe or Piping: All piping, piping systems, hoses, tubes, fittings, joints, valves, and similar appurtenances. E. Pipe Supports or Supports: Wherever the word "pipe supports" or "supports" are used, it shall mean pipe supports, hangers, structural connections, concrete inserts (when allowed), anchors, guides, bolts, expansion components, restraints, and other means of attaching the piping systems. F. Thermoplastic Pipe: Pipe fabricated from polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyethylene (PE), acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene (ABS), cross -linked polyethylene (PEX), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), or polypropylene (PP). G. Underground Pipe: Refer to Paragraph 1.02A. H. Submerged or Wetted Pipe: Piping that is within an area described below: Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 1 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 2 of 21 1. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs. 2. Top face of tank or basin walls and walkways. 3. Under tank or basin cover. 4. Liquid surface or within 2 feet above the top of the liquid surface. I. Wet Wall: A wall with water on at least one side. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards must apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): ASME B31.1 Power Piping ASME B31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping 3. American Welding Society (AWS): AWS 131.1 Structural Welding Code — Steel AWS 131.2 Structural Welding Code — Aluminum AWS 131.6 Structural Welding Code — Stainless Steel 4. ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Ferric Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM Al81 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, For General - Purpose Piping ASTM A380 Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems ASTM A576 Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot -Wrought, Special Quality ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process ASTM A967 Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for Stainless Steel Parts ASTM E87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 5. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design, Manufacturer, Selection, Application, and Installation Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 2 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 3 of 21 MSS SP-127 Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic — Wind -Dynamic Design, Selection, and Application 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Design Requirements: Contractor is responsible for engaging the services of a licensed professional engineer to design, size, and locate piping support systems throughout the facility, whether shown or not. The professional engineer must be licensed in the state of Texas and be regularly engaged in the business of pipe support system analysis and design. This system design must also include the design, size, and spacing of the support anchoring devices including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor the pipe hangers and supports, to withstand the shear and pullout loads imposed by the loading and spacing on each particular support. 2. Prepare design calculations using the design criteria specified herein. 3. Prepare detailed Shop Drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system. 4. General: a. Meet the requirements of MSS SP 58, ASME B31.1, and ASME B31.9 or as modified by this Section. b. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of the hanger and support system. c. NFPA Compliance: Hanger and support system must comply with NFPA 13 when used as a component of a fire protection system and NFPA 14 when used as a component of a standpipe system. d. UL and FM Compliance: Hanger and support system components must be listed and labeled by UL and FM when used for fire protection systems. e. National Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance: Instead of UL and FM compliance, the hanger and support system components must be listed and labeled by a national recognized testing laboratory where used for fire protection systems. The term national recognized testing laboratory shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 5. Include live, dead, seismic, and wind loads associated with piping, valves, and appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in the load calculations. 6. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/240 of span. 7. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 8. Future Loads: a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended to accommodate future piping. b. Assume such are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need to be considered. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 3 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 4 of 21 c. Include the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads. Assume pipe contents are water unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 9. Wind Design Criteria: Pipe support systems for exposed piping must be designed to withstand loadings impacted by winds per IBC 2021/ASCE 7-16. a. Basic Wind Speed: 112 mph. b. Risk Category: III. c. Wind Exposure Category: C. 10. Snow Design Criteria: Pipe support systems for exposed piping must be designed to withstand loadings impacted by snow per IBC 2021/ASCE 7-16 based on a ground snow load of 5 psf. 11. Seismic Design Criteria: All pipe support systems must be designed to withstand the loadings impacted by seismic forces in accordance with IBC 2021/ASCE 7-16 , Chapter 13 and 15, and the requirements outlined below: a. Risk Category: III. b. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.25. c. Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Coefficients: 1). Ss: 0.099. 2). Si: 0.052. d. Design Spectral Response Coefficients: 1). SDS: 0.086. 2). SDI: 0.052. e. Site Class: C. f. Seismic Design Category: A. 12. All supports and appurtenances must be standard products from approved manufacturers wherever possible and must be adequate to maintain the supported load in the proper position under all operating conditions. 13. All items must be designed with strength and stiffness to support, restrain, and allow expansion of the respective piping systems under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations, and all probable externally applied stressed. 14. Support spacing must be per ASME B31.3, ASME B31.5, ASME B31.9, and MSS SP- 58. 15. The pipe support system must not impose loads on the supporting structures in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is designed. 16. The minimum working factor of safety for all items, with the exception of springs, must be five times the ultimate tensile strength of the material. Design for all loads using a safety factor of five . These criteria do not apply to the preformed channel pipe support system and the non-metallic preformed channel pipe support system. 17. Preformed Channel Pipe Support System: Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 4 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 5 of 21 a. The following criteria are in addition to the design criteria specified in Paragraphs 1.04A.1 through 1.04A.15. b. Minimum Thickness: 12-gauge. c. Allowable Stress of Channels: 1). Steel Channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch or 0.66 times the yield stress of steel. 2). Stainless Steel Channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel alloy. d. Allowable Column Loads: As recommended by the manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system in published instructions for a column's unsupported height and a "K" value for calculating the effective column length of not less than 1.0. e. The spacing of the supports must be as required to comply with the design requirements, but not more than 5 feet. f. Factor of Safety: 3 to 1. 18. Non -Metallic Pipe Support System: a. The following criteria are in addition to the design criteria specified in Paragraphs 1.04A.1 through 1.04A.15. b. Allowable Column Loads: As recommended by the manufacturer of the non-metallic pipe support system in published instructions for a column's unsupported height and a "K' value for calculating the effective column length of not less than 1.0. c. The spacing of the supports must be as required to comply with the design requirements, but not more than 5 feet. d. Factor of Safety: 3 to 1. B. Project Conditions: 1. Environmental Conditions: a. Ambient Temperate Conditions: Minus 10 to 120 deg F. b. All hangers and support systems specified herein must be specifically designed for the stated services and environment encountered in the Project installation. c. When installed in wastewater treatment areas, the environment will be moist and corrosive, exhibiting hydrogen sulfide and other corrosive gases encountered in municipal water resource recovery facilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: 1. Quality welding processes and welders according to the following codes, depending on the material welded: AWS D1.1, AWS D1.2, and AWS D1.6. 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed the AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has underdone recertification. 3. Qualify welding processes and welders according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 5 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 6 of 21 B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 3. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by power -operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and must include the items specified in this Section. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's catalog data including capacities. 2. Maintenance information on the piping support system components. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit scaled piping layouts for each piping system showing the following information: a. Flow stream. b. Pipe sizes. c. Pipe materials. d. Schedules. e. Linings. f. Critical dimensions between pipes, equipment, and building features. 2. Indicate by schedule the pipe hanger and support style and locations. 3. Provide details of each type of hanger, support, guides, and anchor. Details must include the design features, load capacities, material designations by UNS allow number or ASTM specification and grade, data needed to verify compliance with the Contract Documents, catalog data. D. Deleted Design Submittals: 1. Contractor must engage the services of an independent registered professional engineer, licensed in the state of Texas, ordinarily engaged in the business of pipe support systems analysis and design, to analyze the piping systems and service conditions, and to develop a detailed support system design, specific to the piping material, pipe joints, valves, and piping appurtenances proposed for use in the Project. a. The proposed support system engineer must have at least 5 years of experience in the analysis and design of similar systems, including the use of commercial and custom supports, and in the use of commercial pipe stress software programs. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 6 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 7 of 21 b. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available independent engineering firms offering these services include: 1). Fenny Engineering Company (Venice, Florida). 2). Contractor -selected engineer meeting the requirements of this Section. 2. The support system design must include the following: a. Criteria by piping system. b. Summary of Contractor -selected related components including pipe materials, pipe joints, pipe class, valves, appurtenances, etc., and commercial supports. c. Dead weight and dynamic analysis, including system thermal effects and pressure thrusts. The design must utilize a computer -based software system equivalent to Bentley Systems AutoPIPE or SST Systems CAEPIPE. d. Present each system in an isometric graphic and show the resolved and resultant force and moment systems, as well as all recommended hangers, supports, anchors, restraints, and expansion/flexible joints. e. Submit a support system design to the Engineer for record purposes. The submittal must be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of Texas. The submittal must include the structural steel Shop Drawings for the entire pipe support system with the design loads clearly indicated. f. All aspects of the analysis and design must comply with this Section and referenced standards where applicable. g. Coordinate the pipe support systems to eliminate interferences with similar systems to be installed for HVAC, plumbing, and electrical; to account for structural expansion joints; and to maintain access for both personnel and for the removal of equipment. 3. A piping system stress analysis must be performed by an independent professional engineer licensed in the state of Texas in accordance with the requirements of this Section. E. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products meet or exceed the requirements of this Section and the Contract Documents. 2. Welders' Certificate: Submit the welders' certifications. 3. Submit qualifications for the manufacturer, fabricator, installed, and licensed professional engineer. 4. Submit the manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The hangers and supports must be prepared for shipment to afford the maximum protection from normal hazards of transportation and allow the hangers and supports to reach the Project Site in an undamaged condition. B. Hangers and supports must be separated so that they do not bear against each other. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 7 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 8 of 21 C. Care must be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading the materials to prevent damage to the hangers and supports. Hangers and supports must not be dropped. Hangers and supports must be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. D. Upon delivery, the Contractor must off-load, store, and handle the materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions and guidelines. E. If any defective hanger or support is discovered after it has been delivered, stored, and handled, it must be removed and replaced by the Contractor, at the Contractor's own expense prior to installation. All hangers and supports must be thoroughly cleaned before installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. All materials furnished in this Section must be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by the Contractor must be included in the warranty, as well as correction of defective Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: 1. Hangers and Supports: a. Anvil International. b. Bergen Pipe Supports. c. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. d. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. e. Taylor Pipe Supports. 2. Preformed Channel Pipe Support System: a. Allied Support Systems. b. Atkore — Unistrut. c. Cooper B-Line — Strut Systems. d. Anvil — Power -Strut. e. National Pipe Hangers Corporation. 3. Non -Metallic Preformed Channel Pipe Support Systems: a. Atkore — Unistrut. b. Enduro — Durostrut. c. Century Composite. B. Any reference to a specific figure number or a specific manufacturer is for the purposes of establishing a type and quality of project and shall not be considered as proprietary. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 8 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 9 of 21 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of the correct material and to the general configuration indicated. B. Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard catalog supports are not applicable. C. Support pipe and appurtenances to be connected to equipment to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment. Comply with the manufacturer's requirements regarding piping loads being or not being transmitted to its equipment. Submit certification stating that such requirements have been met. D. Support and secure all pipe and tubing in the intended position and alignment to prevent significant stresses in the pipe or tubing materials, valves, fittings, and other pipe appurtenances. Design all supports to adequately secure the pipe against dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe, and personnel contact. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from dislocation must conform to the application requirements of Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" and must be furnished and installed under this Section. E. Contractor may propose minor adjustments to the piping arrangements in order to simplify the supports, or in order to resolve minor conflicts in the Work. Such an adjustment may involve minor changes to a pipe centerline so that a single trapeze support may be used. F. Where flexible sleeve, split ring, vibration, or other couplings are required at equipment, tanks, and etc., the end opposite of the piece of equipment, tank, and etc. must be rigidly supported to prevent the transfer of force and pipe support system weight to the equipment. Do not install fixed or restraining supports between a flexible coupling and the piece of equipment. G. Pipe Supports must not induce point loadings but must distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. H. Provide supports at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings and as required by the delegated design specified in this Section. I. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized in writing by the Engineer. J. Provide pipe supports to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of flexible spilt ring type couplings and sleeve type couplings, and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings must not be utilized to support connecting pipes. K. The effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe must be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. L. Insofar as practical, floor supports shall be given preference. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, concrete supports may be used. Base elbow and base tees must be supported on concrete pedestals. M. The pipe support system must account for restraints, flexible connections, expansion items, and related items as included in other specifications and shown on the Drawings. 2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Materials: Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 9 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 10 of 21 1. General: a. Carbon Steel: 1). Fabricate as specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 2). Finish Requirements: Prepare and coat in accordance with Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." b. Hot -Dip Galvanized: 1). Fabricate as specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 2). Hot dip after fabrication of the support in accordance with ASTM A123. 3). Repair galvanized surface as specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications". c. Stainless Steel: 1). Fabricate as specified in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications." 2). Finish Requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. 3). At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces, inside and outside, in accordance with ASTM 380 or A967. Passivation treatments using citric acid are not allowed. 4). Field welding is prohibited unless specifically allowed by the Owner. All field welds must be passivated. B. Pipe Supports: 1. Adjustable Clevis Hangers (MSS SP-58, Type 1): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 260 or 590. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports -Figure 100. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3100 or B3102. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 200 or 215. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 24Z. 2. Adjustable Clevis Hangers for Insulated Pipe (Oversized): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 300. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports -Figure 100EL. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3108. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation -Figure 210. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 24L. 3. Adjustable `J' Hanger (MSS SP-58, Type 5): 1). Anvil International - Figure 67. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3690. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping - Material Selection 40 05 07 - 10 Bonds Ranch Lift Station - A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 11 of 21 4. Adjustable Offset Pipe Clamp: a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International -Figure 100. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3149. 3). Taylor Pipe Supports -Figure 88. 5. Adjustable Ring Hangers (MSS SP-58, Type 10): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 69. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports -Figure 100. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 200. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 110. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 41. 6. Adjustable Steel Yoke Pipe Roller (MSS SP-58, Type 43): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International -Figure 181. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3110. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 250. 4). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 93. 7. Eye Bolts: a. For Stainless Steel Piping: 1). Stainless steel (type 316), welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod. b. For All Other Piping: 1). Welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod. 8. Eyebolt Rod (Welded) a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 278. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 93. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3211. 4). FM Stainless Fasteners. 9. Floor Stand or Stanchion Saddles (Adjustable) With U-Bolt Hold Down Yokes (MSS SP- 58, Type 38): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 265. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports -Figure 191. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping - Material Selection 40 05 07 - 11 Bonds Ranch Lift Station - A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 12 of 21 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 3092. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 538 or 539. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 527. 6). Threaded Pipe Stand Support Stanchion - Match pipe support material: a). Anvil International - Figure 63T. b). Bergen Pipe Supports. c). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 3088T. d). National Pipe Hanger Corporation. e). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 529KT. 10. Floor Standard or Stanchion Saddle (Non -Adjustable) with U-Bolt Hold Down Yokes (MSS Sp-58, Type 37): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 259. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 3090. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 519 or 520. b. Pipe Saddle Support - Match pipe support material: 1). Anvil International - Figure 63P. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 3088. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 521. 11. Hanger Rods: a. Sized to match the suspended pipe hanger and as required for the hanger and support system. b. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 140. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 133. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3205. 4). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 57. 12. Hanger Rods - Continuously Threaded: a. Sized to match the suspended pipe hanger and as required for the hanger and support system. b. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 146. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 94. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure ATR. 4). FM Stainless Fasteners. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping - Material Selection 40 05 07 - 12 Bonds Ranch Lift Station - A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 13 of 21 5). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 755. 6). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 54. 7). Taylor Pipe Supports -Figure 801. 13. Insulation Shields (MSS SP-58 Type 40) a. Anvil International - Figure 167. b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. -Figure B3151. c. National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 307. d. Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 95. 14. Offset Pipe Clamp: a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 103. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3148. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 430. 4). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 87. 15. Pipe Clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 4): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 212. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 175. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3140. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 400. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 31. 16. Pipe Clamp - Heavy Duty (MSS SP-58, Type 4): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 216. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 198. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3142. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 405. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 31H. 17. Pipe Saddle - Heavy Duty: a. Manufacturers: 1). Piping Technology and Products - Figure 2000. 18. Roller Chair (MSS SP-58, Type 44): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 175. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping - Material Selection 40 05 07 - 13 Bonds Ranch Lift Station - A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 14 of 21 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure 113. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 245. 4). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 94. 19. Standard U-bolt (MSS SP-58, Type 24): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International -Figure 137. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 283. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3188. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 165 or 166. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 14. 20. Two -Hole Pipe Strap (MSS SP-58, Type 26): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 262. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 244B. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B2400. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 420. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 45. 21. Riser Clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 8): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International -Figure 261. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 126. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3373. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 136 and 137. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure 82. 22. Spring Hangers: a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure B-268 2). Bergen Pipe Supports - Figure 920. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. - Figure B3262. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation - Figure 521. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports - Figure SHA. 23. Welded Bracket (Heavy) Rated for 3000 Pounds (MSS SP-58, Type 33): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International - Figure 199. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping - Material Selection 40 05 07 - 14 Bonds Ranch Lift Station - A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 15 of 21 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. — Figure 3067. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation — Figure710. 4). Taylor Pipe Supports — Figure 802. 24. Welded Bracket (Medium) Rated for 1,500 Pounds (MSS SP-58, Type 32): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International — Figure 195. 2). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. — Figure B3066. 3). National Pipe Hanger Corporation — Figure 705. 25. Welded Beam Attachment (MSS SP-58, Type 22): a. Manufacturers: 1). Anvil International — Figure 66. 2). Bergen Pipe Supports —Figure 113. 3). Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. — Figure B3083. 4). National Pipe Hanger Corporation — Figure 650. 5). Taylor Pipe Supports — Figure 66. 2.04 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM A. All components associated with the preformed channel pipe support system must be furnished by the system manufacturer. B. Materials: All components of the preformed channel pipe support system must be constructed of stainless steel (type 316). C. Components: 1. Channel Framing and Fittings: a. The channel suctions must be 12-gauge and 1-5/8-inch wide channel. b. Locate notches on the interior flange to prevent slippage of pipe clamps and fittings after installation. c. All channel framing must be supplied with integral 1-inch-long notches located on 2-inch centers. 2. Hardware: Channel nuts with spring, channel nuts without spring, channel stud nut with spring, hardware (bolts, screws, nuts, washers, and threaded rod) must be furnished by the system manufacturer. 3. Pipe clamps and pipe straps must be manufactured and supplied by the system manufacturer. 4. Pipe clamps and straps used for thermoplastic piping must be provided with a thermoplastic elastomer, cushion wrap designed for use from -50 to 350 deg F. Contractor must add the cushion strip at each pipe support location that meets these criteria. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 15 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 16 of 21 5. Channel end caps must be constructed of PVC and specifically designed for the provided channel. End caps must be furnished on all exposed channel ends. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: 1. Allied Support Systems. 2. Atkore — Unistrut. 3. Cooper B-Line — Strut Systems. 4. Anvil — Power -Strut. 5. National Pipe Hangers Corporation. 2.05 NON-METALLIC PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. All components associated with the non-metallic preformed channel pipe system must be furnished by the system manufacturer. B. Materials: 1. The fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) channel must be pultruded glass -resin reinforced vinyl ester resin with the physical properties specified in this Section. The use of polyester resin is not acceptable. 2. Accessories that are only available as injection molded, must be 40-percent long -glass fiber reinforced polyurethane. 3. Touch-up Resin: Krylon 7006-Satin Polyurethane Clear Finish or as recommended by the non-metallic pipe support system manufacturer. C. Standards: 1. FRP channels provided by this Section must have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested per ASTM E84 and meet the requirements of UL 94VO thereby qualifying them as Class 1 materials in the International Building Code. 2. FRP channels specified in this Section must comply with the requirements of ASTM D3917 and ASTM D4385 which govern the dimensional tolerance and visual defect of pultruded shapes. D. Physical Properties of Fiberglass: Physical Property Longitudinal Transverse Tensile Strength 37,500 psi 10,000 psi Tensile Modulus 3.0 X 106 psi 1.0 X 106 psi Flexural Strength 37,500 psi 14,000 psi Flexural Modulus 2.0 X 106 psi 1.0 X 106 psi Compressive Strength 37,500 psi 20,000 psi Shear Strength 6,000 psi 5,500 psi Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 16 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 17 of 21 Physical Property Longitudinal Transverse ft • lb ft • lb Izod Impact 30 5 in2 in E. FRP channel must have a synthetic surfacing veil applied on exterior surfaces to improve weatherability and inhibit ultraviolet degradation. An ultraviolet stabilizer must be incorporated in the resin formulation to further inhibit degradation. F. Components: 1. Channel Framing and Fittings: a. The channel sections must be constructed of glass -reinforced vinyl ester. b. Channel fittings are required to fabricate structures that are easily attached to channels with channel nuts and fasteners. To the maximum extent possible, fittings must be fabricated using glass -reinforced vinyl ester. In circumstances where a vinyl ester option is not available, the molded fitting may be constructed of polyurethane. c. All channel framing must be supplied with integral 1-inch-long notches located on 2-inch centers. d. Locate notches on the interior flange to prevent slippage of pipe clamps and fittings after installation. 2. Hardware: a. Heavy-duty channel nuts are designed for high -thread shear values or when spring nuts are required. The heavy-duty channel nuts must be constructed of glass - reinforced polyurethane. b. Standard -duty channel nuts are designed for light duty applications that do not require high -thread shear values. The standard -duty channel nuts must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. c. Saddle clips mate with the exterior of the channel flanges and are secured with threaded rods and nuts. These clips must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. d. Stop -lock assemblies reduce the change of pipe slippage when running supports vertically. The stop -lock assembly is required at each support installed in a vertical orientation. The stop lock assembly must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. e. Hex flange bolts and hex bolts must be 3/8-inch diameter and specifically designed for use on channel support systems and furnished by the system manufacturer. The hex bolts must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. f. Hut flange nuts must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane and furnished by the system manufacturer. g. Hex nuts must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane and furnished by the system manufacturer. h. Flat washers must be constructed of PVC and furnished by the system manufacturer. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 17 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 18 of 21 i. Channel spacers must be constructed from polyurethane and designed to prevent wall compression under heavy loading conditions. Threaded rods must be constructed of glass -filled vinyl ester resin. Rod couplers, when required, must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. k. U-bolts must be constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane. 1. Channel end caps must be constructed of PVC and specifically designed for the provided channel. End caps must be furnished on all exposed channel ends. 3. Pipe clamps and pipe straps must be manufactured and supplied by the system manufacturer and include the following: a. Adjustable Pipe Clamps: not allowed on the Project. b. Ridged Pipe Clamps: glass -reinforced polyurethane. c. Two Hole Pipe Straps: glass -reinforced polyurethane or glass -reinforced vinyl ester. 4. Clevis Hangers: a. For pipe sizes with a nominal diameter of 1/2-inch to 6-inch, molded clevis hangers constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane must be utilized. b. pipe sizes with a nominal diameter greater than 6-inch, fabricated clevis hangers constructed of glass -reinforced polyurethane must be utilized. 5. Pipe clamps and straps and clevis hangers used for thermoplastic piping must be provided with a thermoplastic elastomer, cushion wrap designed for use from -50 to 350 deg F. Contractor must add the cushion strip at each pipe support location that meets these criteria. G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following specific manufacturers: 1. Atkore Unistrut. 2. Enduro Durostrut. 3. Century Composite. 3.00 EXECUTION k][11 ' C ' .1W. WK830 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the hangers and support systems will be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Proceed with the installation of the hanger and support systems only after the required structural work has been completed in areas where Work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including, but not limited to, proper placement of inserts, anchors, and other structural attachments. Review Drawings to obtain the structural support limitations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 18 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 19 of 21 1. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless noted otherwise. 2. Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut down, startup, or operation. 3. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. 4. Support large and heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of the connected piping. 5. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. 6. Support pipe at the following locations: a. Any change in direction or elevation. b. Both sides of flexible pipe connections. c. Base of risers. d. Floor penetrations. e. Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment. £ Valves and appurtenances. 7. Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or walls. 8. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. 9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup. 10. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction. 11. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. 12. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are completed. B. Standard Pipe Supports: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split -ring. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system. 2. Horizontal Piping Support from Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or wall -mounted framing with anchors. Clips attached to wall mounted framing are also acceptable. b. Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and `J' hangers are acceptable for pipes smaller than 3 inches in diameter. c. Pipe clamps that resist axial movement of the pipe through the support is not acceptable. Use pipe rollers support from a wall bracket. 3. Horizontal Piping Support from Floors: a. Saddle Supports: 1). Pedestal type, elbow and flange. Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 19 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 20 of 21 2). Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch non -shrink grout beneath the support baseplate. 3). Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18 inches or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. 4). Provide neoprene waffle isolation pads under anchoring flanges, adjacent to equipment, or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation. b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1). Use for pipes smaller than 3 inches in diameter running along floors and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports. 2). Attach channel frame to floors with baseplate on minimum 1-1/2-inch grout non - shrink grout beneath the support baseplate and anchor bolts. 3). Attach pipes to channel with clips or pipe clamps. c. Concrete Cradles: Use for pipes larger than 3 inches in diameter along floor and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type. 4. Insulated Pipe: a. Pipe hangers and supports must be on the outside of the insulation. Do not enclose the hanger or support within the insulation. b. Provide a precut 120-degree section of rigid insulation with a minimum length matching the shield, shields, and oversized hangers or insulation saddle system. c. Wall -mounted pipe clips are not acceptable for insulated piping. 5. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall brackets and elbow supports, or riser clamp on floor penetrations. C. Standard Attachments: 1. New Concrete Ceiling: a. Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or concrete anchors as limited below: 1). Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4-inch rod and smaller (fl- inch diameter and small pipe). 2). Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size. 2. Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. 3. Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with concrete anchors. 4. Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into the bottom of the beam. D. Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90-degree to 120-degree pipe saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches in diameter and larger when installed on top of steel or concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated point supports would be encountered. E. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides: Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 20 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 07 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PROCESS PIPING Page 21 of 21 1. Provide pipe alignment guides or pipe supports that provide the same function at expansion joints and loops. 2. Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 and 14 diameters from each joint or loop. 3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support system not carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide. F. Accessories: 1. Insulation Shield: Install on all insulated piping with oversize rollers and supports. 2. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize rollers and supports. 3. Dielectric Barrier: a. Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports and non -stainless steel ferrous metal piping. b. Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute the loads equally on attachments and achieve the indicated pipe slope. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports for Process Piping — Material Selection 40 05 07 - 21 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment, tools, supplies, fittings, appurtenances, and incidentals required to install thermoplastic process and chemical piping, fittings, accessories and appurtenances as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. Where the word "pipe" is used, it shall refer to pipe, fittings, hangers, supports, and appurtenances unless noted otherwise. C. The process piping specified in this Section includes the following: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Process Pipe. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Buried Pipe: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations, or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil. B. Double Wall: A secondary contained piping system; a pipe within a pipe. C. Exposed Pipe: Piping that is located above ground, in pipe chases, or located inside of a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure. D. Thermoplastic Pipe: Pipe fabricated from polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyethylene (PE), acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene (ABS), cross -linked polyethylene (PEX), or polypropylene (PP). E. Underground Pipe: Refer to Paragraph 1.02A. F. Submerged or Wetted Pipe: Piping that is within an area described below: 1. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs. 2. Top face of tank or basin walls and walkways. 3. Under tank or basin cover. 4. Liquid surface or within 2 feet above the top of the liquid surface. G. Wet Wall: A wall with water on at least one side. 1.03 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards must apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24, Metric/Inch Standard Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 1 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 2 of 8 2. ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Compounds and D1784 Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM Specifications for Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, D1785 80, and 120 ASTM Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic D2122 Pipe and Fittings ASTM Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile- D2235 Butadiene-S rene ABS Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe D2321 for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications ASTM Specification for Threaded Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, D2464 Schedule 80 ASTM Specification for Socket -Type Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, D2466 Schedule 80 ASTM Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe D2467 Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) D2564 PVC Plastic Piping Systems ASTM Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) D2661 Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, D2665 Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic D2774 Pressure Piping ASTM Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for D2837 Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products ASTM Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Polyvinylchloride D2855 PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM Specification for Joints and Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible D3139 Elastomeric Seals ASTM Standard Classification System and Basis for Specifications for Rigid D3965 Ac lonitrile-Butadiene-S rene (ABS) Materials for Pipe and Fittings ASTM Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for D4101 Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials ASTM F437 Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F439 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM F441 Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80 ASTM F493 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM F628 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe With a Cellular Core Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 -2 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 3 of 8 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of ASTM F656 Pol Vin 1 Chloride PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM F891 Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core ASTM Standard Guide for Construction Procedures for Buried Plastic Pipe F1668 ASTM Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic F1866 Schedule 40 Drainage and DWV Fabricated Fittings ASTM Standard Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances F 1970 or Valves for use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. C900 Through 60 In. (100 mm Through 1,500 mm) AWWA Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing 3/4 In. (19 mm) through C901 3 In. 76 mm for Water Service AWWA Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 In. Through 24 In. C906 (100 mm Through 300 mm) 4. NSF International (NSF): NSF/ANSI plastics Piping System Compounds and Related Materials 14 NSF/ANSI Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects 61 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Conditions: 1. All piping, fittings, appurtenances, and incidentals specified herein must be suitable for the specified service and the environment encountered at the Project Site. NSF/ANSI 61 Certification: All components in contact with water being treated for potable use, potable water, and chemicals used in the treatment of water for potable use must comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and must be certified to meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61. An accredited testing laboratory or facility must provide the certification as required by the NSF/ANSI certification process. The products must bear the mark or seal of the accredited testing laboratory and the NSF seal. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitation: Material of each type specified in this Section must be supplied by a single manufacturer. B. The manufacturer must be fully experienced, reputable, qualified, and regularly engaged for at least the last 5 years in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. C. All pipes and fittings must be new and must be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and must comply with this Section. Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 -3 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 4 of 8 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and must include the following: 1. Certified testing reports from the manufacturer's testing facilities or any approved testing laboratory. 2. Shop Drawings and product data including the following information: a. Manufacturer. b. Dimensions. c. Joint types. d. Materials of construction, including gaskets, O-rings, etc. e. Other information necessary to verify compliance with this Section. f. Manufacturer's recommendation for maximum deflected joint angle and minimum longitudinal bending radius for pipe and tube/hose products. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The pipe must be prepared for shipment to afford the maximum protection from normal hazards of transportation and allow the pipe to reach the Project Site in an undamaged condition. Pipes must be carefully supported during shipment and storage. Pipe, fittings, and specials must be separated so that they do not bear against each other, and the whole load must be securely fastened to prevent movement in transit. Ship pipe on padded bunks with tie -down straps. Store pipes on padded skids, sand or soil berms, tires, or other suitable means to protect the pipe from damage, based on the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Care must be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading the materials to prevent damage to the pipe, fittings, and specials. Pipe, fittings, and specials must not be dropped. Pipe, fittings and specials must be examined before installation and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. C. Upon delivery, the Contractor must off-load, store, and handle the materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's written instructions and guidelines. D. In handling the pipe, wide cushioned slings or other devices and methods acceptable to the Engineer must be used. No uncushioned ropes, chairs, wedges, or levers shall be used in handling the pipe, fittings, or couplings. E. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been delivered, stored, and handled, it must be removed and replaced with sound pipe by the Contractor, at the Contractor's own expense prior to installation. All pipe, fittings, specials, and couplings must be thoroughly cleaned before installation and must be kept clean until they are put into service. F. Store materials and accessories under cover, protected from direct sunlight. 1.08 WARRANTY A. All materials furnished in this Section must be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion. Cost for the Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 4 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 5 of 8 removal, shipment, repair, and installation by the Contractor must be included in the warranty, as well as correction of defective Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Piping, fittings, appurtenances, and incidentals must be of the size shown on the Drawings or as noted. 2.02 Clear Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Process Pipe A. This paragraph addresses clear PVC piping for pressure applications. This system is intended for pressure applications where the operating temperature will not exceed 140 deg F. This piping system is for indoor use only. B. Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following manufacturers: a. Georg Fisher — Harvel Clear PVC. b. IPEX USA LLC — Clear -Guard High Pressure Clear PVC Pipe. C. Piping: 1. Schedule 40 Piping is not acceptable for this application. 2. Schedule 80 piping must be produced from a rigid, virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 16443 per ASTM D 1784. The piping must have a maximum service temperature of 140 deg F when appropriate temperature/pressure de -rating factors are applied. 3. The schedule 80 piping must meet the following pressure requirements: Nominal Size (in.) Minimum Pressure Rating (psi g 73 F) 0.50 420 0.75 340 1.00 320 1.25 260 1.50 240 2.00 200 3.00 190 4.00 160 6.00 140 Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 5 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 6 of 8 D. Fittings: 1. Fittings must be compatible with the piping system and have the same minimum pressure rating. E. Pipe and fittings must be manufactured as a system and be the product of one manufacturer. F. The piping must be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM F441. G. The piping and fittings must conform to NSF/ANSI 61. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING PRODUCTS AND INCIDENTALS A. PVC and CPVC Primer and Solvent Cement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following manufacturers: b. Primer: 1). IPS Weld -On P-70 Primer Industrial Grade (Purple Color). 2). Oatey Industrial Grade Purple Primer (Purple Color). 3). No approved equals or equivalents. c. Solvent Cement: 1). IPS Weld -On 724 CPVC Industrial Grade (Orange Color). 2). Oatey Industrial Grade Heavy Duty Orange CPVC Cement (Orange Color). 3). No approved equals or equivalents. 2. The primer and solvent cement must conform to ASTM F493. 3. The primer and solvent cement must conform to NSF/ANSI 14 and 61. B. A13S Solvent Cement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Section, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following manufacturers: b. Solvent Cement: 1). IPS Weld -On. 2). Oatey. 2. The primer and solvent cement must conform to ASTM D2335. 3. The primer and solvent cement must conform to NSF/ANSI 14. Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 6 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 7 of 8 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay pipe snaking from one side of the trench to the other. 2. Provide offsets as recommended by the manufacturer for maximum temperature variation between the time of solvent welding and during operation. 3. Do not lay pipe when the temperature is below 40 or above 90 deg F when exposed to direct sunlight. 4. Shield ends to be joints from direct sunlight prior to and during the laying operation. B. Install pipe, fittings, and specials to the lines and grades indicated. Install hangers, brackets, supports, etc., at spacings as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Flexible connections shall be required at locations where pipe passes through concrete walls. Begin installation at the main supply line valve and make connections where indicated. C. Excavate trenches where required to alignment and depth specified or as required for proper installation of pipe. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, and specials into the trench to avoid damage to the pipe and/or fittings. Take necessary precautions to protect pipe during backfilling operations. Replace any damaged pipe before it is buried. Keep the pipe clean during laying operations and seal the pipe against the entrance of objects at the close of each operating day. D. Solvent welded joints shall be in accordance with ASTM D2855 and shall be made generally as follows: cut square and smooth the ends of the plastic pipe and wipe clean. Apply primer and solvent cement to the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting socket with a small brush. Immediately push the coated surfaces snugly together and rotate the pipe approximately one-half turn to insure uniform distribution of the cement. Remove the excess cement by wiping. E. Flanged Joints: Flange bolt torque and sequence must be determined by the pipe manufacturer. Use lubricant for threads, nuts, and washers, Before the joint is assembled, thoroughly clean the flange faces of foreign materials. Center the gasket in the connecting flanges and draw -up watertight, without unnecessary stressing the flanges. Tighten bolts in a progressive, diametrically opposite sequence and torque with a suitable, approved, and calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Appl clamping torque to the nuts only. 3.02 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Pipe supports and hangers must be as specified in Section 40 05 07 "Hangers and Supports for Process Piping." 3.03 PURGING OF LINES A. Every effort must be made to keep the inside of the pipe, fittings, and valves free of foreign material. B. Flush all piping before testing and commissioning. Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 7 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 31 THERMOPLASTIC PROCESS PIPE Page 8 of 8 END OF SECTION Thermoplastic Process Pipe 40 05 31 - 8 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 1 of 10 SECTION 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. Related specifications include but not limited: 1. Section 1- General 2. Division 33 - Utilities 3. Division 41 - Material Processing & Handling Equipment 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. The terms "pipe" and "duct" in this section are used interchangeably. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials and equipment supplied under this section shall be suitable for use in a wastewater treatment plant environment exposed to sunlight, variable weather conditions, temperatures ranging from 0°F to 110°F, internal hydrogen sulfide concentrations up to 1,200 ppm, external ambient hydrogen sulfide, and incidental exposure to chemicals in common use at such facilities. B. References: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. M-45 American Water Works Manual of Water Supply Practices "Fiberglass Pipe Design" 2. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM): a. C582 Specification for Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion -Resistant Equipment b. D2310 Classification for Machine -Made "Fiberglass" Pipe c. D2996 — Standard Specification for Filament -Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber - Reinforced -Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe d. D3982 Specification for Contact Molded "Fiberglass" Duct and Hoods 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): a. Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual 1). Use only for rectangular duct. 4. Voluntary Product Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce (VPS): Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 1 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 2 of 10 a. PS 15-69 Custom Contact -Molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical -Resistant Process Equipment C. Sole Source Responsibility: 1. Supplier may purchase items from different manufacturers as listed herein; however, the supplier shall have sole source responsibility for all equipment in the specification section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Sectionl. B. Product Data for the following products: 1. FRP Duct and Fittings 2. Dampers 3. Accessories C. Shop Drawings: 1. Scaled layout drawings of fiberglass, ductwork, and fittings include, but are not limited to: duct sizes, locations, elevations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Provide a detailed layout of the duct support system showing locations and types of hangers and supports. If supports are anchor or guided/sliding supports, provide details. 3. Provide field butt and wrap joint connection details on shop drawings. 4. Expansion joint dimensions, connections, and retainer rings. 5. Damper cutsheets, dimensions, and connections. 6. Size and locations of duct drains at low points. 7. The layout drawings of the ductwork and supports shall be sealed by a professional engineer in the State of Florida and include a statement on the letterhead that the duct wall thickness has been calculated to meet the requirements of this specification and is suitable for the installation. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Operation and Maintenance Data in Section 1. 1.05 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES A. All materials furnished in this Section must be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion. Cost for the removal, shipment, repair, and installation by the Contractor must be included in the warranty, as well as correction of defective Work. 1.06 MANUFACTURERS A. The specified component is acceptable to be manufactured by the manufacturer specified below: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 2 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 3 of 10 1. FRP Duct a. Daniel Company b. Engineered Composite Systems c. Belco Manufacturing d. Ameron e. Smith Fibercast f. Augusta Fiberglass 2. FRP Balancing and Isolation Dampers a. Daniel Company b. Engineered Composite Systems c. Belco Manufacturing d. Swartwout 3. FRP Backdraft Dampers a. Daniel Company b. Engineered Composite Systems c. Belco Manufacturing d. Swartwout 4. Expansion Joints a. Red Valve b. Mercer Rubber Company c. Holz Rubber d. Proco 1.07 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Filament wound and hand lay-up circular fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe (duct) and fittings for transporting odorous air in the odor control system. 2. Hand layup and contact molded rectangular fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) duct and fittings for transporting odorous air in the odor control system. 3. Fiberglass dampers for odor control duct, including balancing, isolation, and back draft dampers. 4. Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) expansion joints for odor control duct. 5. Accessories. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 3 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 4 of 10 2. It is the Contractors responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes, dimensions, and locations with connecting equipment and structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRP DUCT AND FITTINGS A. Design conditions for FRP Duct and Fittings 1. Minimum structural wall thickness: Designed by Manufacturer to meet the following: a. Minimum Internal Pressure: 25 psig b. Minimum Internal Vacuum: 30 in. W.C. c. Design safety factors: d. Buried Duct: e. Temperature range, °F: FS=10 for pressure and FS=5 for vacuum H-20 loading per AW WA M45 0 to 110 f. Contractor shall coordinate duct support spacing. Duct support shall not sag more than 0.25-inches long term. Duct shall withstand loads imposed, including condensate buildup within the duct, without excessive sagging. g. Total wall thickness shall be the greater of the design by the Manufacturer to meet the above requirements or: Duct Inside Above Grade Minimum Buried Minimum Wall Diameter, Inches Wall Thickness, mils Thickness, mils 20" and less 340 340 24" to 36" inclusive 400 420 42" and larger 460 600 h. Structural wall thickness calculations shall not include the thickness of the interior corrosion barrier, inner surface, and interior layer. i. Provide FRP shear collars at anchored duct support saddles as recommended by the manufacturer. j. Buried duct shall not deflect more than 5 percent in the installed condition and under HS20 loads. 2. Coefficient of linear thermal expansion: Shall not exceed 10.5 x 10' in/in/'F. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 4 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 5 of 10 B. Materials 1. Resin: a. Resin Type: Premium corrosion resistant and fire -retardant brominated bisphenol-A vinyl ester. Resin shall not contain pigments, dyes, colorants or fillers. b. Flame Spread Rating: Class 1 flame spread rating (25 or less). c. Thixotropic agents may be added to control resin viscosity per resin manufacturer's instructions. Corrosion liner shall be clear with no fillers or additives. d. Resins shall be as recommended by AOC-Resins, DOW or Ashland. Submit resin manufacturer's certification that resin used is suitable for the intended application. 2. Reinforcement: a. Surfacing Veil: Class C with a silane finish and a styrene soluble binder. b. Chopped Strand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1-1/2 ounces per square foot with a silane finish and a styrene soluble binder. c. Continuous Roving, Chopper Gun Spray -up: Type E glass. d. Woven Roving: Type E glass, minimum 24 ounces per square yard with a five by four weave. e. Continuous Roving, Filament Wound: Type E glass with a silane finish. C. Fabrication: 1. Duct sizes 10-inch diameter and smaller shall be fabricated using hand layup or filament wound construction. 2. Duct sizes 12-inch diameter and larger shall be fabricated using filament wound construction. 3. Rectangular duct shall be fabricated using hand layup or contact molded construction. 4. Duct fabricated using centrifugally cast construction is not acceptable. 5. Laminates: a. Interior corrosion barrier shall be 100-mil total thickness. 1). Inner surface shall consist of a 10-mil thickness composed of a single ply of type C glass surfacing veil embedded in resin rich surface. Resin content shall be 90%. 2). Interior layer shall consist of a 90-mil thickness composed of at least two layers of chopped strand mat. Resin content shall be 75%. b. Structural Layer shall be Type E glass to meet wall thickness requirements. 1). Hand lay construction shall include alternate layers of chopped strand mat and woven roving. 2). Filament wound construction shall be preceded by a layer of chopped strand mat or spray chop. The structural layer shall consist of a minimum of two complete cross hatched layers of continuous filaments applied in a helix angle of 55 degrees for above ground duct and 75 °F degrees for buried duct. c. Exterior corrosion layer shall be 10-mil thickness composed of a single A or C veil. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 5 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 6 of 10 d. UV Coating shall be a gel coat with UV inhibitors. 6. Fittings: a. All fittings shall be short -radius design, unless otherwise noted. b. Elbows 12-inch diameter and smaller shall be smooth radius. c. 90' Elbows 14-inch diameter and larger shall be 5 piece mitered duct construction. d. 45' Elbows 14-inch diameter and larger shall be 3 piece mitered duct construction. e. Tees and crosses shall be the manufacturer's standard product constructed to attach to the connecting duct. f. Wyes and specials shall be constructed of duct, mitered and FRP wrapped. Special fittings called out on the drawings may have a laying length other than 1.5 times the diameter. 7. Flanges shall be hand layup construction, with a minimum thickness of 3/4 inches, drilled to ASTM D3982 bolt pattern or to match connecting equipment and accessories. D. Curing: 1. Post curing with indirect heaters or steam. Temperatures and length of curing shall be per resin manufacturer recommendations. 2.02 DUCT SUPPORT SADDLES A. Duct support saddles shall be hot -dipped galvanized steel construction. Duct support saddles shall be either anchored (fixed) or guided (sliding) as indicated on the drawings and shall be designed to be bolted to the support column cross -member. Provide an neoprene cushion on the inside of the duct support ring. Provide FRP shear collars at anchored duct supports as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Saddle construction shall be coordinated with fabrication of the duct support columns and cross members. 2.03 FRP DAMPERS A. Isolation Dampers: All dampers shall be isolation dampers unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 1. Materials of construction: a. Body: Vinyl Ester FRP b. Blade: Vinyl Ester FRP c. Blade Seal: PTFE encapsulated O-ring, EPDM 0- ring. d. Blade Stop: FRP integral to the damper body e. Shaft: 316 stainless steel f. Shaft Seal: Viton O-ring Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 6 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 7 of 10 g. Bearings and bushings: Graphite impregnated PTFE h. Hardware: 316 stainless steel i. Maximum Operating 1750F Temperature: j. Minimum Pressure: 30 in. W.C. k. Resin System: Fire retardant vinyl ester with MEKP cure system I. Internal Corrosion Barrier: Minimum 100 mils thickness m. Connections: Flanged per NBS PSI 5-69 Table 2 n. External Coating: Gel coat with UV inhibitors o. Gaskets: EPDM p. Maximum leakage: 4.4 cfin/sq. ft. at 30 in. W.C. B. Balancing Dampers: Use where shown on the drawings. 1. Materials of construction: a. Body: Vinyl Ester FRP b. Blade: Vinyl Ester FRP c. Shaft: 316 stainless steel d. Shaft Seal: EPDM, Viton, or PTFE e. Bearings and bushings: Graphite impregnated PTFE f. Hardware: 316 stainless steel g. Maximum Operating 1750F Temperature: h. Minimum Pressure: 30 in. W.C. i. Resin System: Fire retardant vinyl ester with MEKP cure system j. Internal Corrosion Barrier: Minimum 100-mils thickness k. Connections: Flanged per NBS PS 15-69 Table 2 I. External Coating: Gel coat with UV inhibitors Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 7 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL m. Gaskets: C. Actuators: EPDM Page 8 of 10 1. Dampers 24-inches and smaller: Hand quadrant actuator fabricated from 316 stainless steel with a fully adjustable slot with extra hole drilled in handle to permit 316 stainless steel locking pin once system has been balanced. Provide drilled hole in the actuator handle support plate to permit locking in the full open and full closed positions. 2. Dampers larger than 24-inches: Epoxy coated gear operator with locking handwheel. 3. Dampers below grade or located in areas not normally accessible (all sizes) such as in wetwells or junction boxes: a. Operator: Geared 'A turn, Dynatorque stainless steel series DT7 (no chain wheel), DT21 (with chain wheel) or equal. b. Shaft: 316 stainless steel c. Enclosure: 316 stainless steel d. Hardware: 316 stainless steel e. Gears: 316 stainless steel or 6061 aluminum f. Extension: 316 stainless steel with 2" operating nut, minimum 1-inch diameter or equal to the shaft diameter, whichever is larger. Provide an indicator at the top of the extension stem to indicate full open and full closed positions. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, dampers located 6 feet or more above finished floor or grade elevation shall use geared operators as specified above with chain wheel operator and chain extending to within 3 feet of finished floor or grade elevation. Chain wheels shall be aluminum by Babbitt, Rotohammer or equal and shall come equipped with 316SS chain. For installations where operator and chain weight exceed 40 lbs the damper shall be reinforced to accommodate the added weight. 5. Remote cable operators: Where indicated on the drawings for dampers that are located very high off of the ground, provide cable operating system for remote control. a. Design for operation of damper size indicated on the drawings. b. 316 stainless steel construction for operator body, handwheel and floor stand. c. Manufacturer: F1exiDrive system by Smith Flow Control LTD, or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 8 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 9 of 10 A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which fiberglass ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. In 2-inch black lettering, stencil "FOUL AIR" and a flow direction arrow on the duct at each vertical riser duct, at each horizontal duct at maximum 40-ft spacing, and at each duct junction. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. General: 1. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air -tight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. 2. Shop fabricate duct to the maximum extent possible. 3. Install each run with minimum number of joints. 4. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. 5. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor or as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Duct connections shall be by butt connections with FRP wrap per ASTM D3982. Gel Coat wet joints to match duct. Color to be selected by the City through shop drawing submittal. Coating and color to match like new conditions. 7. Connections to equipment, structures, dampers, and expansion joints shall be flanged. a. Duct manufacturer shall supply all field weld kits. Field weld kits shall include all necessary fiberglass reinforcing material precut and individually packaged for each joint. b. Hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. Duct manufacturer shall provide a materials list of all hardware required for procurement by the contractor. 8. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop - fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. 9. Routing: Locate ductwork runs as indicated in the plans. Field verify centerline elevations for all ducts prior to fabrication of duct supports. 10. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, equipment, controls, odor control covers, and other associated work of ductwork system. 11. A condensate drain shall be provided at each low point in the suction ductwork and be connected to the plant drain system, or ducts shall be sloped to drain to a low point with and equipment drain. Condensate drains shown on the drawings are at anticipated low points; however any additional low points in the duct after installation shall have condensate drains and isolation ball valves installed at no additional cost. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS A. The dampers shall be positioned to fit in the connecting piping. Unless otherwise necessary for proper operation of the damper, the axles shall be installed in the horizontal position. The inside of the dampers shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters and dirt when installed. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 9 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 40 05 36.13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PIPE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ODOR CONTROL Page 10 of 10 Dampers in isolation service shall be installed with the shaft side of the damper on the pressure side (toward the equipment isolated). 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Any ductwork found to be improperly installed shall be removed and replaced with ductwork, liner or fittings meeting these specifications. Improper installation shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Fiberglass duct smaller than specified. 2. Construction joints not properly sealed or aligned to industry tolerances. B. All FRP ductwork, fitting, and connections to have all manufacturer coatings reapplied in the field. 3.05 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and sufficient supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Defects shall be repaired. B. Field Testing: FRP piping shall be tested for a period of not less than one hour at 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices as part of the WORK. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. 2. Leaks shall be repaired, and the system shall be re -tested until no leaks are found. 3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of fiberglass. B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. END OF SECTION Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control 40 05 36.13 - 10 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 SECTION 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 1 of 9 A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install miscellaneous Valves complete and ready for operation as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Valves and accessories specified in this Section are to be installed only in the absence of product specifications in other Sections and must be approved by the Engineer. Review other Sections for specific requirements. B.The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following; however, not all items specified herein may be included in this Project. 1. General Requirements. 2. Stainless Steel Ball Valves. 3. Corporation Stops. 4. Yard Hydrants. 5. Globe Valves. 6. Mud Valves. 7. Backflow Preventers. 8. Duckbill Check Valves. 9. Solenoid Valves. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for "Miscellaneous Valves" shall be per Lump Sum. 2. Payment a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be subsidiary to the unit price bid per Lump Sum for the bid item, "Lift Station Mechanical, including valves, sluice gates, pipe supports, and sump pump", installed for: 1) Various inlet sizes. 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing the "Miscellaneous Valves" with appurtenances as specified in the Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 2 of 9 A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals. 1.4 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A.Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment and materials furnished under this Section against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure for a period of 1 year from the date of Owner acceptance. B.In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the first year of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the manufacturer shall furnish and deliver a replacement for the defective part or parts at the manufacturer's own expense. Manufacturer is also responsible for equipment freight. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings 3. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings 4. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat -Resisting Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels 5. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 6. ASTM A380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 7. ASTM A436 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings 8. ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings 9. ASTM B30 - Standard Specification for Copper -Base Alloys in Ingot Form 10. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings 11. ASTM B98 - Standard Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes 12. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications 13. ASTM D1784 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 14. ASTM F1970 - Standard Specification for Special Engineered Fittings, Appurtenances or Valves for use in Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Systems B.American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. AWWA C111 - Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 2. AWWA C511 - Reduced -Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 3 of 9 3. AWWA C550 - Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 4. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings C.American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers 2. ANSI B 1.20.1 - Specifications, Dimensions, Gauging for Taper and Straight Pipe Threads (except dry seals) 3. ANSI B16.1/B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Fittings Package 4. ANSI B16.10 - Face -to -Face and End -to -End Dimensions of Valves D.Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS): 1. MSS SP-25 - Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions 2. MSS SP-72 - Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt -Welding Ends for General Services 3. MSS SP-110 -Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Experience Requirements: Manufacturer shall have had successful experience in manufacturing valves for this type of service in the sizes indicated. Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the manufacture of the valves. B.Uniformity Requirements: Units of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. C.Inspection of units may also be made by the Engineer or other representative of the Owner after delivery. Equipment shall be subject to rejection at any time due to failure to meet any of specified requirements, even though submittal data may have been accepted previously. Equipment rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from the Site at once. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.Valves and appurtenances shall be of size shown on the Drawings or as noted. B. Valves and appurtenances shall have name of maker, nominal size, flow directional arrows, working pressure for which they are designed and standard referenced, cast in raised letters or via riveted stainless steel nameplate upon some appropriate part of the body. C.Unless otherwise noted, all valves and fittings shall have a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or shall be rated for the test pressures associated with the pipe they connect to, whichever is higher. D.Joints, size and material - unless otherwise noted or required by the Engineer: 1. Except where noted, joints referred to herein shall be of same type, nominal diameter, material and with a minimum rating equal to pipe or fittings they are connected to. 2. Valves and appurtenances shall be of same nominal diameter as pipe or fittings they are connected to. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 4 of 9 E. Despite any of these specified requirements, coatings and lubricants in contact with potable water shall be NSF61 certified as acceptable for use with that fluid. F. Unless otherwise noted, interior ferrous surfaces of valves shall be given a shop finish of an epoxy conforming to AWWA C550 with a minimum thickness of 6 mils. G.Exterior surface of various parts of valves, operators, floor stands and miscellaneous piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale, dirt, grease or other foreign matter; and thereafter, one shop coat of an approved rust -inhibitive primer shall be applied in accordance with Division 9. H.Special tools and the manufacturer's standard spare parts, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied with the equipment. Tools shall be packaged, clearly and permanently marked on the exterior to indicate equipment for which tools are intended. I. Provide special adaptors as required to ensure compatibility between valves, appurtenances, and adjacent pipe. J. Where valve handwheels are installed with a centerline higher than 6 feet, the valve shall be installed in an orientation and equipped with a chainwheel to allow for operation from standing at grade. Chain and accessories shall be stainless steel. Chain wheels shall be: 1. Ductile iron coated per Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings"; or 2. Stainless steel. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVES A.1/2 to 2 Inches: 1. Three-piece body, full port, vented ball, blowout -proof stem, type 316 stainless steel trim, reinforced PTFE seat and seal, level operator, rated 1000 psi cold water pressure (CWP). Conforms to MSS SP-110. 2. End Connection: Threaded. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO Stainless Steel 3-Piece Ball Valve; b. Cameron Series Navco S30; c. Neles — Jamesbury Series 3A; or d. Engineer approved equivalent. e. Larger Than 2 Inches: 4. Unibody design, blowout -proof steam, type 316 stainless steel trim, mounting pad, fire safe, vented ball, rated 275 cold water pressure (CWP). Conforms to MSS SP-72 and MSS SP- 25. 5. End Connection: Class 150 ANSI flange. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO Stainless Steel Unibody Ball Valve; b. Cameron Series WKM 320F; c. Neles — Jamesbury Series 7000; or FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 5 of 9 d. Engineer approved equivalent. 2.3 CORPORATION STOPS A.Corporation Stops 3/4 inch through 2 inches shall be ball valve type, meeting AWWA C800, Section 4.2.3 (High Pressure), withstanding working pressures up to 300 psi. Body, ball, operating stem, T-head, and service line connector shall be manufactured from red brass and conform to ASTM B62 and/or ASTM B584, UNS No. C83600. Ball shall be fluorocarbon coated and shall float on two EPDM seats and be watertight in both directions. Operating stem and nut shall be one piece, held in place by a mating machined flange on stem and in body. Operating stem shall have an EPDM 0-ring to provide a watertight seal against the body. B.Inlet threads shall be AWWA Taper, except where used with service clamps, where threads shall be IPS threads. Thread types and diameters shall conform to AWWA C800. Inlet threads will be integral to body. Waterway diameter shall be approximately equivalent to nominal size of stop, and shall accommodate maximum cutter size established by AWWA C800. Outlet shall be a compression connection meeting AWWA C800 Section 4.4.9. C. Where corporation stops are used with plastic pipe, a brass companion flange shall be provided on outlet of each corporation stop. Corporation stops shall be bronze with tapered plug and flat key operator. D.Subject to compliance with requirements, corporation stops shall be: 1. The Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. FB Style Ballcorp; or 2. Engineer approved equivalent. 2.4 YARD HYDRANT A.Yard Hydrant shall be automatically draining, backflow protected with standard 3/4-inch garden hose thread outlet and lever handle. B.Depth of bury shall be 4 feet. C.Yard hydrants shall be coated per Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." D.Subject to compliance with requirements, yard hydrants shall be: 1. Woodford Model Y2; 2. Jay R. Smith Figure Number 5909; 3. Zum Z1395; or 4. Engineer approved equivalent. 2.5 GLOBE VALVES A.Globe valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be pressure Class 200 or better. B.Materials: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Disc: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Ring: Stainless steel. 4. Stem: Silicon bronze. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 6 of 9 C.End Connection: Threaded. Model numbers referenced below are for threaded ends; flanged ends shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and shall be equal construction with appropriate end connections. D.Globe valves shall be coated per Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." E. Subject to compliance with requirements, globe valves shall be: 1. Walworth Co. Figure 3245P; 2. Jenkins Figure 592J; 3. Stockham Figure B-62; 4. Lunkenheimer Figure 73-PS; 5. Fairbanks Figure 0505; or 6. Engineer approved equivalent. 2.6 MUD (DRAIN) VALVES A.General: 1. Mud (drain) valves shall be designed to allow for draining fluid and sludge from a tank. 2. Stems shall be of the non -rising type. 3. Base flange shall be drilled per ANSI Class 125 and shall be machined to provide a smooth seating surface. 4. Fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 5. Mud valves shall be provided with stem guides. The stem guide shall be of the adjustable design for plumb alignment. The adjusting bolt and washer shall be type 316 stainless. Stem guides shall be spaced so that the unsupported length between extension stems shall not exceed 7 feet. 6. Mud valves shall be outfitted with stem extensions, where necessary to reach the floor stand or operating nut. B. Where floor stands are not scheduled, the operating nut shall be outfitted with a position indicator and incidentals as necessary. Position indicators should be outfitted with a housing adapter or wall bracket depending on the application. Position indicator and incidentals shall be by Trumbull Industries, Inc. C.Cast Iron Body Mud Valves (MV1): 1. Base flange, yoke, and gate shall be ASTM A126 cast iron. 2. Stem, stem nut, seats and stem extensions shall be ASTM B62 bronze. 3. Stem Guides shall be constructed of ductile iron or stainless steel. Stem guides shall include a bronze bushing. 4. Indicating floor stands shall be ASTM A126 cast iron, outfitted with a handwheel, and indicate the position of the valve. 5. Cast iron mud valves shall be coated per Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 7 of 9 6. Subject to compliance with requirements, cast iron body mud valves shall be: a. Trumbull Industries, Inc., Iron Mud Valve; b. Clow Valve, F-3075-T; c. M&H Valve, 140-02; d. Troy Valve, Model A2500; or e. Engineer approved equivalent. D. Stainless Steel Mud Valves (MV2): The body flange, yoke, guides and gate shall be cast 316 stainless steel. After machining, all castings shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A380. E. The stem shall either be cast stainless steel with a permanently bonded coating or rolled to prevent galling. If coated, the coating shall be safe for potable water use and capable of enduring a minimum of 15,000 open -close cycles without galling or excessive wear. 1. Stem Guides shall be constructed of cast 316 stainless steel. Stem guides shall include a bronze bushing with an inside diameter 1/16 inch larger than the outside diameter of the extension stem and shall be retained with two stainless steel screws. 2. Indicating floor stands shall be 316 stainless steel, outfitted with a 316 stainless steel handwheel, and indicate the position of the valve. F. Subject to compliance with requirements, stainless steel mud valves shall be: a. Trumbull Industries, Inc., Stainless Mud Valve; or b. Engineer approved equivalent. 2.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be designed to provide cross -connection protection of potable water supply. B.Provide reduced pressure principle backflow preventers meeting requirements of ANSI/ASSE 1013, compliant with AWWA C511, and approved by the Foundation for Cross -Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern California. C. Valves shall be coated per Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." D.Units 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 1. Units shall consist of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically operating pressure relief valve, two gate valves, and four test cocks, epoxy lined bronze or iron body with stainless steel internal parts. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Watts, LF909; b. Zurn, 375; or c. Febco, LF860. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 8 of 9 E. Units 2 Inches and Smaller: 1. Units shall consist of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically operating pressure relief valve, two ball valves, strainer, and four test cocks, epoxy lined bronze or iron body with bronze internal parts. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, acceptable manufacturers and models are: a. Watts, LF009; b. Zurn, 975YL2; or c. Febco, LF825Y. F. Provide test kit consisting of gauge test valves, hoses, adaptors, securing strap, instruction guide and lightweight case. Acceptable manufacturers and models are: 1. Watts, TK-9A; 2. Zurn, TG-5; or 3. Febco, TK-1. 2.8 DUCKBILL CHECK VALVES A.General: 1. Duck bill check valves shall be of the flow -operated check type. 2. Inlet port areas shall be 100 percent of the mating pipe port size. The port area shall contour down to a duckbill which shall allow passage of flow in one direction while preventing reverse flow. 3. Valves shall open in the proper direction under less than 2 inches of pressure, and shall withstand up to 10 feet of back pressure. B. Slip-on Duck Bill Check Valves (DBCV 1): 1. Materials: a. Body: EPDM. b. Mounting Clamps: 316 stainless steel. 2. End Connection: Slip-on. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, Slip-on Duck Bill Check valves shall be: a. Tideflex Series TF-1; b. CLA-VAL Series RF-DBO-SB; or c. Engineer approved equivalent. C.Flanged Duck Bill Check Valves (DBCV2): 1. Materials: a. Body: EPDM. b. Retaining Rings: 316 stainless steel. 2. End Connection: 125# ANSI flange. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 43 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES Page 9 of 9 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, Flanged Duck Bill Check valves shall be: a. Tideflex Series 35 or Series 35-1; b. CLA-VAL Series RF-DBF-SB; or c. Engineer approved equivalent. A. Solenoid valves shall be packless piston type, direct acting for sizes less than 2-inch and internal pilot operated for sizes 2 inches and larger; 2-way or 3-way valves. All solenoids shall be NEMA 4X rated and shall be ASCO Valve; Red Hat by Automatic Switch Co.; similar by Circle Seal Controls-Atkomatic Valve Co., for air and water service. B. Valves shall be energized to open, except for valves on water seal lines to pumps, which shall be energized to close. C. Valves shall be Type 316 stainless steel bodies, NPT end connections of connected piping, Type 304 stainless steel internal parts, and Buna-N or Ethylene Propylene valve seats. Valves shall have a minimum 150-psig safe working pressure and zero minimum operating pressure differential. Connections shall be threaded. D.Solenoid valves size 3 inches and larger shall be full bore bronze body, Type 430 stainless steel plunger, copper coil Class A encapsulated, Type 302 stainless steel spring, wash -down safe, equal to Type A as manufactured by Magnatrol Valve Corp., Hawthorne, NJ, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Carefully handle and install valves in a manner that prevents damage to any part of the valves. Install valves in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Upon completion of installation of the equipment, conduct an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer and/or Owner. The unit shall be checked for general operation and leakage. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 1 of 11 A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to fabricate, test and install sluice gates as shown on the Drawings and indicated in gate schedule with operators, gate stems, frames, gate guides, wall thimbles and other related appurtenances. 1.2 Price and Payment Procedures A.Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for "Fabricated Gates" shall be per Each. 2. Payment a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be subsidiary to the bid item "9999.0002 Lift Station Wet Well and Valve Vault." 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing Sluice Gate and all appurtenances as specified and shown in the Drawings, including but not limited to: 1) Frame 2) Slide and Guides 3) Gate Stem 4) Manual Operator b. Installation c. Testing d. Cleanup 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Whipps. 2. Fontaine. 3. Golden Harvest. 4. RW Gate. B.Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing: The services of the manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for pre -startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as required in Section 01 75 00 "Starting and Adjusting." FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 2 of 11 C.The fully assembled gates shall be shop inspected, tested for operation and leakage, and adjusted before shipping. Manufacturer shall provide test certificates to show that they meet the leakage rate required in this Section. There shall be no assembling or adjusting on the Site other than for the lifting mechanism 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A.The gate manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and compliant or have an approved Quality Assurance Policy. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and shall include at least the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Certified shop and installation drawings showing all materials, details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. General arrangement drawings and catalog cut sheets are not acceptable for use as shop and installation drawings. b. Maximum deflection and bending stress of the slide and frame of each sluice gate loaded under the maximum design head. c. Submit a list of not less than 10 operating installations in the United States with similar size gates as scheduled, as evidence of meeting the experience requirement. Include project reference contact information. 2. Record Data: a. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of the equipment. b. Prior to shipment of gates, submit certified affidavit of compliance stating that the gates for this Contract were manufactured, inspected, and tested in accordance with all applicable AWWA and ASTM Standards. c. Shop test reports, including test results from operation and shop leakage tests on all gates. Leakage tests shall be performed with water in the unseating head condition. Feeler gauge testing is not acceptable in lieu of testing with water. d. ISO 9001:2015 certification or paperwork confirmation a similar QA/QA program. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.6 STANDARDS A.The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in its entirety unless expressly contradicted in the text of this specification: L American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA C561-21, Fabricated Stainless - Steel Slide Gates (latest revision). 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA C542-16, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates (latest revision). 3. ASTM International (ASTM). 4. American Welding Society (AWS). FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 3 of 11 1.7 EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS A. The equipment Supplier shall have at least 10 years of experience in the design, application and supply of stainless steel fabricated gates in wastewater service. The equipment supplier shall submit a list of not less than 10 operating installations in the United States with similar size gate as scheduled, as evidence of meeting the experience requirement. Installation list shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. 1.8 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A.Gate Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment furnished under this specification for a minimum period of 2 years against defects in materials and workmanship, and operational failure. B.In the event of a defect in material or workmanship or equipment design of any part or parts of the equipment during the first 2 years of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the Gate Manufacturer shall furnish, deliver and install a replacement for the defective part or parts at its own expense. C. The first 2 years of service shall be interpreted as the 24 month period following the installation, adjusting, and acceptance tests of all gates and appurtenances. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Materials in fabricated gates and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of the applicable specifications listed below for the alloy, grade, type, or class of material and the condition and finish appropriate to the structural and operational requirements: 1. Carbon Steel Bars: ASTM A108 or ASTM A575. 2. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. 3. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, ASTM A276 or ASTM A582, Type 302, 303, 304 or 304L, 316 or 316L. 4. Bronze Bar, Rods, Shapes: ASTM B21 or ASTM B98. 5. Cast Bronze: ASTM B584. 6. Rubber for Gaskets and Seals: ASTM D2000. 7. UHMW Polyethylene: ASTM D4020. 2.2 GATE DEFINITIONS A. Sluice gates are defined as fabricated gates with top, bottom and side seals. Sluice gates are typically used at pipe ends in basins or influent and effluent boxes and fully submerged wall openings and/or orifices. B. Weir gates are defined as fabricated gates with bottom and side seals. Weir gates are typically used as overflow downward opening adjustable weirs. The top of weir gates are typically submerged and set at the desired overflow elevation. Weir gates are mounted flush to the wall surface at the weir opening in the structural wall. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 4 of 11 2.3 FABRICATED GATES A.General: Gates shall be as specified herein and have the characteristics and dimensions shown on the Contract Documents and schedule. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 2. Leakage for fabricated gates shall not exceed 0.05 gpm/ft of wetted seal perimeter in seating and unseating head conditions. 3. The maximum allowable leakage for stop gates and stop logs shall be 0.1 gpm/ft of wetted seal perimeter in seating and unseating head conditions. 4. The gate seal design shall meet the latest applicable AWWA standards. 5. All structural components of the frame and slide shall be constructed of fabricated stainless steel having a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch and shall have adequate strength to prevent distortion during normal handling, during installation and while in service. 6. All welding shall be performed by welders with AWS or ASME Section IX certification and be completed in the manufacturing facility. No welding is allowed in the field during installation. 7. Fabricated components shall be passivated in accordance with ASTM A380 to remove weld bum and discoloration for uniform finish. If sandblasting or glass bead blasting is utilized, the entire frame and slide shall be blasted for a uniform finish. 8. Materials: Components Materials Frame Assembly and Retainers 304L stainless steel Slide and Stiffeners 304L stainless steel Stem 304L stainless steel Fasteners, Nuts and Bolts 304L stainless steel Invert Seal (Upward Opening Gates Only) EPDM Seat/Seals and Facing UHMWPE Lift Nuts Bronze Pedestal and Wall Brackets Stainless steel Operator Housing Stainless steel B.Frames: 1. Frame shall be of flange -back design for wall mounted gates and formed or extruded construction consisting of guides and invert members and top member where top closure is required. Suitable reinforcements will be provided to resist all operating loads. The mounting and bolting flange of the frame to the wall shall be separate and independent from the seating and sealing plane of the slide. 2. Frame shall be designed for various mounting styles as shown on the Drawings. 3. The structural portion of the frame that incorporates the seat/seals shall be formed into a one-piece shape for rigidity. Gussets shall be provided on the guides to transfer the load FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 5 of 11 from unseating head conditions to the wall. Guide member designs where water loads are transferred through the assembly bolts are not acceptable. 4. The portion of the wall mounted guide, where the anchor bolt penetrates, shall have a minimum thickness of 1/2-inch. Guide extensions shall be formed plate C-channel or Z- channel members and shall have a minimum weight of 6 lb/ft. Angles are not acceptable as guide extensions. Alternatively, the manufacturer may supply frames with a flange -back design utilizing fully welded gusset plate stiffeners, minimum 1/4-inch thickness in order to limit the frame deflection to lesser of 1/360 x L or 1/16 inch. 5. On self-contained gates, a yoke shall be provided across the top of the frame. The yoke shall be formed by two C-channel shaped structural members affixed to the top of the side frame members to provide a one-piece rigid assembly. The yoke shall be designed to allow removal of the slide. The maximum deflection of the yoke shall be 1/360 of the gate's span or 1/16 inch, whichever is less. 6. A rigid stainless steel invert member shall be provided across the bottom of the opening. The invert member shall be of the flushbottom type on upward opening gates. Flushbottom seal shall incorporate an embedded frame channel gate for new construction or an existing channel gate mount for existing channels. 7. A rigid stainless steel top seal member shall be provided across the top of the opening on gates designed to cover submerged openings. 8. The frame shall be capable of withstanding lateral forces as appropriate in this configuration as well as during the extraction of the slide with lifting cables at angles of up to 10 degrees. C. Slides and Guides: 1. The slide and reinforcing stiffeners shall be constructed of stainless steel plate. All structural components shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. 2. The gate slide deflection shall not exceed 1/360th of gate width at maximum design head or 1/16 inch, whichever is less. 3. Reinforcing stiffeners shall be welded to the slide and mounted horizontally. Vertical stiffeners shall be welded on the outside of the horizontal stiffeners for additional reinforcement. 4. The stem connector shall be constructed of two angles or plates. The stem connector shall be welded to the slide. A minimum of two bolts shall connect the stem to the stem connector. 5. The gate guides shall be designed for maximum rigidity, having a weight of not less than 2- 1/2 pounds for aluminum stop gates, 4.5 pounds for aluminum slide gates, and 9 pounds for stainless steel. The guides shall be of sufficient length to properly support two-thirds of the height of the slide when the gate is fully open. On self-contained gates, where the guides extend above the operating floor, they shall be strong enough so that no further reinforcing shall be required. 6. Downward opening weir gates shall have a self -containing frame that extends beyond the weir elevation so that the top of gate slide elevation is at or lower than the weir elevation when fully open. 7. Each gate frame shall be fabricated with two integrated lifting lugs or eyes capable of supporting the entire weight of the gate assembly. The location of the lifting points shall be determined by the manufacturer for lifting from above. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 6 of 11 D.Gate Stem and Lift: 1. Stems shall be of suitable length with minimum 1.5-inch diameter, and ample strength for the intended service. The operating stem shall be rising. The stem diameter shall be capable of withstanding twice the rated output of the operator at 40 pounds crank or hand wheel pull and shall be capable of moving the gate slide with the specified seating and unseating head against the gate. 2. The stem shall be furnished in sections of sufficient length to completely open the gate as necessary and to permit reasonable ease transportation and in installation. Couplings shall be stainless steel and shall be bored and bolted or pinned. Stem threads shall be machine rolled or machine -cut full depth ACME threads. The threads shall be smooth and of uniform lead and cross-section, such that the nut can travel the full length without binding or excessive friction. The stem shall be provided with two bolt holes for connection to the stem connector on the slide or the stem shall be threaded for connection to the stem block or thrust nut on the gate slide. The entire stem shall be of solid stainless steel material and the threaded portion of the stem shall have a rolled or machine cut full depth, full depth ACME threads with a 16-microinch finish or better. Stem extension pipes are not acceptable unless specifically required by the Contract Documents and approved prior to installation by the Engineer. 3. Stem guides shall be fabricated from stainless steel with UHMWPE bushed collars and adjustable in two directions. Stem guide spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but in no case shall it exceed slenderness ratio 1/r ratio of 200, or 9 feet-0 inches center to center spacing. 4. An adjustable aluminum, bronze, or stainless steel stop collar shall be provided to limit both upward and downward travel of the fabricated gate. The stop collar shall be internally threaded and provided with a stainless steel set screw. Removable upstops and downstops can also be provided on the slide and frame. 5. Provision shall be made to prevent stem rotation within the thrust nut at the connection with the gate slide. E. Seals: All gates shall be equipped with self-adjusting UHMW polyethylene side and bottom seat/seals to restrict leakage and to prevent metal to metal contact between the frame and slide. 2. Upward opening gates requiring top closure shall be provided with self-adjusting UHMW seals across the top seal member. Downward opening gates shall be provided with self adjusting UHMW seals along the invert member. 3. The seat/seals shall extend the full height of the frame and guides to accommodate the height of the slide when the slide is in the fully closed or fully opened position. 4. The seal system shall be durable and shall be designed to accommodate high velocities and frequent cycling without loosening or suffering damage. 5. Wall mounted upward opening gates shall be provided with a resilient seal to seal the bottom portion of the gate. The seal shall be attached to the invert member or the bottom of the slide and it shall be held in place with stainless steel attachment hardware. 6. All seals must be bolted or otherwise mechanically fastened to the frame or slide. All seals must be field replaceable without the need to remove the gate frame from the wall or FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 7 of 11 without the need to remove grout. Arrangement with seals that are force fit or held in place with adhesives are unacceptable. 7. The seals shall be mounted so as not to obstruct the gate opening. 8. The seal system shall be factory tested to confirm negligible wear (less than 0.02 inches) and proper sealing. F. Manual Operators: Gates shall be operated by a manual handwheel or crank -operated gearbox. The operator shall be mounted on the yoke of self-contained gates or on the pedestal of non -self- contained gates. 1. The gate manufacturer shall select the proper gear ratio to ensure that the gate can be operated with no more than a 40-pound effort when the gate is in the closed position and experiencing the maximum operating head. 2. An arrow with the word "OPEN" shall be permanently attached or cast onto the operator to indicate the direction or rotation to open the gate. 3. Manufacturer shall provide the appropriate operator handwheel, crank -operated gearbox, off -set crank, or other approved mechanism at 36 inches above operating floor unless noted otherwise in the schedule or the Drawings. 4. Handwheel operators shall be fully enclosed and shall have a cast aluminum, stainless steel or ductile iron housing. a. Handwheel operators shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. b. Handwheel operators shall be equipped with roller bearings above and below the operating nut. c. Positive mechanical seals shall be provided above and below the operating nut to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist. d. The handwheel shall be removable and shall have a minimum diameter of 16 inches. 5. Crank -operated gearboxes shall be fully enclosed and shall have a cast aluminum housing. a. All gearboxes shall have input shafts suitable for operation via a portable operator. b. Gearboxes shall have single gear reduction. c. Gearboxes shall be provided with a threaded cast bronze lift nut to engage the operating stem. d. Bearings shall be provided above and below the flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. e. Gears shall be steel with machined cut teeth designed for smooth operation. f. The pinion shaft shall be stainless steel and shall be supported on ball or tapered roller bearings. g. Positive mechanical seals shall be provided on the operating nut and the pinion shafts to exclude moisture and dirt and prevent leakage of lubricant out of the hoist. h. The crank shall be cast aluminum with a revolving nylon, or aluminum grip. i. The crank shall be non -removable. Provide a minimum of one crank for every gate unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 8 of 11 6. All gates having widths in excess of 72 inches and widths greater than twice the slide height shall be provided with two gearboxes connected by an interconnecting shaft for simultaneous operation. a. Interconnecting shafting shall be constructed of stainless steel. b. Flexible couplings shall be provided at each end of the interconnecting shaft. c. One crank shall be provided to mount on the pinion shaft of one of the gearboxes. 7. An extended geared operator system utilizing chain and sprockets shall be furnished by the manufacturer when the centerline of t2e crank or handwheel, on a non -geared operator, is located over 60 inches above the operating floor. a. A removable stainless steel or aluminum cover shall be provided to enclose chain and sprockets. b. The extended operator system shall lower the centerline of the pinion shaft to 36 inches above the operating floor. c. A handwheel may be utilized in conjunction with a gearbox in lieu of the extended operator system if the centerline of the pinion shaft is 60 inches or less above the operating floor. 8. Pedestals shall be constructed of stainless steel. Aluminum pedestals are not acceptable. a. The pedestal height shall be such that the handwheel or pinion shaft on the crank - operated gearbox is located 36 inches above the operating floor. b. Wall brackets shall be used to support floor stands where shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed of stainless steel. c. Wall brackets shall be reinforced to withstand in compression at least two times the rated output of the operator with a 40-pound effort on the crank or handwheel. d. The design and detail of the brackets and anchor bolts shall be provided by the gate manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer. The gate manufacturer shall supply the bracket, anchor bolts and accessories as part of the gate assembly. 9. Operators shall be equipped with fracture resistant clear butyrate or lexan plastic stem covers. a. The top of the stem cover shall be closed. b. The bottom end of the stem cover shall be mounted in a housing or adapter for easy field mounting. c. Stem covers shall be complete with indicator markings to indicate gate position. d. Vent holes shall be provided to prevent condensation. e. Cover shall not become brittle or discolored when subjected to local weather conditions for a minimum of 5 years after installation. Replacement of covers less than 5 years after installation shall be provided under warranty. 10. When shown in Paragraph 3.04, provide 2-inch square nut, mounted in a floor box, with a non -rising stem. a. The square nut shall be constructed of stainless steel. b. The floor box shall be constructed of stainless steel or cast iron and shall be set into the concrete floor above the gate as shown. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 9 of 11 c. Provide one stainless steel T-handle wrench for operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Fabricated gates shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the gate manufacturer. Guide frames for fabricated gates shall be as shown on the schedule. The bottom of the fabricated gate structure shall be embedded flush bottom, unless otherwise indicated. B.Install the gates in a manner that will prevent leakage around the frame and will prevent binding of the slide during operation. Keep surfaces where metal and the concrete placed come in contact free from oil, grease, loose mill scale, loose paint, surface rust, and other debris or objectionable coatings. Secure anchor bolts, thimbles and spigot frames in true position in the forms and hold in alignment during the placement of the concrete. Finish surfaces to provide a smooth and uniform contact surface where concrete and rubber seals come in contact and where frames or plates are installed. When a gate or stop log frame is installed against concrete, the Contractor shall either install using double -nuts and a nominal 1-inch grout pad or a minimum 3/8-inch thick 1/2-inch EPDM mounting gasket or 1/2-inch non -shrink grout shall be placed between the gate and the concrete. When the gate is attached to a thimble, apply a gasket and mastic between the face of the thimble and the gasket and the gasket and the gate frame. Apply the mastic between the wall thimble stud holes and the gate opening. If a gasket is utilized, the installer must ensure that the surface around the opening is sufficiently flat per the manufacturer's instructions. C. Carefully align gate stems, stem guides and gate lifts so the stem is parallel to the guide bars or angles on the gate frame after installation. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the slide gates shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer. A seating head and/or unseating head, at the Engineer's request, corresponding to the maximum water level shall be placed on the slide gate and the gate examined for leakage. Manufacturer shall provide test certificates to show that they meet the leakage rate required in this Section. The slide gate shall be opened from the fully closed position under maximum seating head, and closed from the fully open position under average flow conditions to verify that the gate lift is operational and in satisfactory working order. 3.3 CLEAN AND ADJUST A.After installation, clean, lubricate, and otherwise service the gate and lift in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 SCHEDULES Fabricated gates shall be supplied in accordance with the following schedule: The required gates and certain pertinent data are given below. This list is given to facilitate description of the various gates and as an aid to plan take -off and is not guaranteed to be complete. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 50 FABRICATED GATES Page 10 of 10 No. ID Opening Opening Gate Gate SeatinglOperator Req. Location/Service Tag Size Direction Type Material Mount Unseating Type Head (feet) 2 Wet well influent SLU-001 3'-6" X Upward SLU 304L SS WM 25/25 MAN 3'-6" 1 Wet well SLU-003 3'- " X Upward SLU 304L SS PC 25/25 MAN interconnect 3'-66 LEGEND Opening Upward (Fabricated Gates) Direction Downward(Weir Gates Slide Gate (SLD) Gate Sluice Gate (SLU) Type Stop Gate (STP) Weir Gate WRG Existing Structure Existing Channel Mount (EC) Existing Wall Mount (EW) New Structure Frame Embedded Mount (FE) Wall Thimble (WT) Mount Concrete Wall Mount (CW) End of Pipe Pipe Flange (PF) Flush Pipe in Concrete Wall (PC) Bottom Seal Chanel Mount (CB) Wall Mount (WM) Operator Motor (MTR) Type Manual (MAN) Stem Nut STM END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 40 05 61 GATE VALVES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 40 05 61 GATE VALVES Page 1 of 5 A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to install gate valves and appurtenances, including valve boxes, operators, bolts, nuts, and gaskets. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for "Gate Valves" shall be per Each. 2. Payment a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be subsidiary to the bid item "9999.0005 Lift Station Mechanical Valves, Electromagnetic Flow Meter, Gates, Access Hatches, Supports, Appurtenances, and all other appurtenant work and items not specifically listed elsewhere, complete and as indicated in the Contract Documents.": 1) Various sizes 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing "Gate Valves" and all appurtenances as specified and shown in the Drawings b. Coating c. Testing d. Cleanup 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.The intent of these specifications is to purchase a quality product of the manufacturer's latest design, meeting the minimum standards set forth. B. The services of the manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for pre -startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as required in Section 0175 00 "Starting and Adjusting." C.Experience Requirements: The manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the manufacture of valves used in the water and wastewater treatment environment. References and installation list shall be provided on request. D.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Flow Control. 2. M&H. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 61 GATE VALVES Page 2 of 5 3. Mueller. 4. Clow. 5. U.S. Pipe. 6. Kennedy Valve. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.5 STANDARDS A.The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Standards: ASME B 16.1 1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250 2. ASTM International (ASTM) Standards: ASTM Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and A126 Pipe Fittings ASTM Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings A536 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C 111 /A21.11 Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C500 Metal -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service AWWA C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service AWWA C515 Reduced -Wall, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service AWWA C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A.Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment and materials furnished under this Section against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure for a period of 2 years from the date of Owner acceptance. B.In the event of failure of any part or parts of the equipment during the first 2 years of service, provided that the equipment has been operated and maintained in accordance with good practice, the manufacturer shall furnish, deliver, and install a replacement for the defective part or parts at the manufacturer's own expense. Manufacturer is also responsible for equipment removal, reinstallation, and freight. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 61 GATE VALVES Page 3 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GATE VALVES A.General: 1. Gate valves greater than 36 inches in size shall be double disc, parallel seat internal wedging type in accordance with AWWA C500. a. Double disc gate valves 14 inches and larger shall have tracks and scrapers. 2. Gate valves 3 inches through 36 inches shall be resilient wedge type with non -rising stem in strict accordance with AWWA C509/C515. Valves 16 inches and larger shall be provided with gearing to reduce the maximum required opening and closing torque to 80 ft-lb. 3. Gate valves smaller than 3 inches shall be bronze, non -rising stem with wedge disc and screwed ends for 300-psi W.O.G. working pressure. Bronze gate valves shall be Crane No. 636E or approved equal. 4. Gate valves 30 inches and larger shall be equipped with non -rising stem and with spur -gears in enclosed oil or grease lubricated gear cases. Gear boxes shall be factory lubricated. Flanges shall conform to ANSI, Class 125 or 250. B.Gate: Gate for double disc valves shall be ductile iron with bronze mounted wedges and seats. Gate for resilient seated valves shall be ductile iron with rubber -seat compound bonded to the valve gate. C.Manual Operators: Operators shall turn clockwise to open the valve. Exposed valves shall have handwheel operators unless otherwise designated. A directional arrow and the word "open" shall be cast on the handwheel. Valves for buried service shall have a 2-inch square nut operator and shall be installed with extension stems where required to extend operating nut to within 12 inches of the finished grade. Provide a cast iron valve box to enclose the operating stem. Valve box shall be three-piece extension type equal to Mueller No. 10380 or Clow F2450. D. Stem and Seal: The non -rising stem shall be bronze or stainless steel with inside screw. Shaft seal shall employ O-rings or V-type packing. E.Bell Ends: Where designated, valves shall be mechanical joint or rubber gasketed push on joints in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.2 PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS A.The exterior surfaces of all exposed valves shall be furnished with a factory applied rust - inhibitive primer. Primer shall be coordinated with field painting to ensure compatibility. B. The valve manufacturer's standard paint will be acceptable provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified paint and is in accordance with the field painting specified in Section 09 96 00 "High -Performance Coatings." C.Provide factory coatings and linings per AWWA C550. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Carefully handle and lower buried valves into position to prevent damage to any part of the valves. Place the valve in the proper position with stem truly vertical and securely hold until FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 61 GATE VALVES Page 4 of 5 connections have been made. Furnish bolts, nuts, and gaskets. Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting the valve boxes to the proper length to conform with the ground surface. 3.2 BLOCKING UNDER GATE VALVE A.Gate valves 18 inches and larger which are buried shall rest on a concrete pad. Pad shall extend for the full width of the trench and from back of hub to back of hub (or flange). Care shall be taken to not interfere with the jointing. Concrete shall be minimum 1500-psi compressive strength. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Upon completion of installation of the equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted. The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit shall be checked for general operation and leakage. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. 3.4 SCHEDULES A.Equipment shall be supplied in accordance with the following schedule: The required equipment and certain pertinent data are given below. This list is given to facilitate description of the various equipment and as an aid to plan take -off and is not guaranteed to be complete. Max. Installation Location Valve Size Type End Process Diff. Operator (Buried/ Service ID In. ( ) Connect. Fluid Pressure Type yp (psi) Exposed) Wet GV — 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 01 Wet GV — 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 02 Wet GV — 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 03 Wet GV — 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 04 Wet GV — 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 05 Wet GV - 12 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 06 Wet GV - 16 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 07 Wet GV - 16 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Well 08 Yard GV- 16 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Vault 09 Yard GV- Vault 10 16 RS F Wastewater 136 Manual Exposed O/C Type: MS = Metal Seated, RS = Resilient Seated End Connection: F = Flange, MJ = Mechanical Joint, PJ = Push -on Joint Service: O/C = Open/Close, T = Throttling, M = Modulating FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 40 05 61 GATE VALVES Page 5 of 5 END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 20, 2025 SECTION 40 05 65.23 SWING CHECK VALVES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 40 05 65.23 SWING CHECK VALVES Pagel of 3 A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install swing check Valves at the locations shown on the Drawings, and type and size as indicated. Valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association Standards ANSI/AWWA C508. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DeZurik, Inc. 2. Val-Matic Valve and Manufacturing Company. 3. Approved equal. B.Experience Requirements: Manufacturer shall have successful experience in manufacturing valves for the type of service and the sizes indicated. Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years of experience in the manufacture of this type of valves. C.All valves shall be hydrostatically tested and seat tested to demonstrate zero leakage. When requested, the Manufacturer shall provide test certification and required documentation. D.Where valves are in contact with potable water, coating systems and other surfaces shall be NSF 61 / 372 compliant. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. List as necessary. 1.4 STANDARDS A.The following standards shall apply as if they are included in these documents: L American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A126 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A276 Standard Specifications for Stainless Steel Bars ASTM A582 T303 rStandard Specification for Free -Machining Stainless Steel Bars FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 40 05 65.23 SWING CHECK VALVES Page 2 of 3 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards: AWWA C508 Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2- through 48-inch NPS 1.5 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A.Contractor shall provide a written guarantee to the Owner, which shall guarantee the satisfactory performance of the system and components in accordance with the performance requirements specified in this Section. B. Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment furnished under this Section for a minimum period against defects in materials and workmanship and operational failure. C. The minimum period is defined as the 24-month period following the installation, adjusting, acceptance testing, and the start of actual operation of the equipment, or 24 months after delivery, whichever occurs first. D.In the event of a defect in material or workmanship or equipment design of any part or parts of the equipment during the first year of service, the manufacturer shall furnish, deliver, and replace the defective part or parts at the manufacturer's expense without cost or obligation to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERNAL LEVER TYPE SWING CHECK VALVES A.General: 1. External lever type swing check valves shall conform to AWWA C508, latest edition. 2. Valves shall be self-contained, free -swinging style allowing a full waterway opening. The valve disc shall absolutely prevent the return of water or sewage back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases below the delivery pressure, on pump shutoff or power failure. The valve shall be tight -seating and shall be constructed to permit top entry for complete removal of internal components without removing the valve from the line. The valve disc shall be suspended from a shaft which passes through bushings and shall be connected to the lever on the outside of the valve. The shaft shall be keyed into the disc and lever arm. Set screws shall not be acceptable. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 200 psi for valves 2 to 12 inches in diameter; 150 psi for valves 14 to 48 inches in diameter. 4. Materials: a. Body and Cover: ASTM A126 Class B cast iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron. b. Body Seat Ring: Bronze or stainless steel. c. Hinge Pins/Shaft: 303/304/316 stainless steel. d. Disc: ASTM A126 Class B cast iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron. e. Disc Seat: Buna-N B. Swing check valves shall be furnished with ANSI 125/150 pound flat faced flanges. Valve exterior and interior to be factory -coated with an epoxy paint system per AWWA C550. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 40 05 65.23 SWING CHECK VALVES Page 3 of 3 C.Oil Cushion Check Valves: 1. Provide valves with a side -mounted, oil cylinder device to provide 2-stage control for the opening and closing speed of the valve. The closing and opening rate of the valve shall be field adjustable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Carefully handle and lower the valves into position so to prevent damage to any part of the valves. 3.2 CLEAN AND ADJUST A.Adjust weight position, springs, air/oil cushion cylinders, position indicators, backflow actuators and other appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Furnish the services of a factory representative for one 8-hour day that has complete knowledge of proper installation, startup and operation of the plug valves, to inspect the final installation and supervise a test of the units. If there are difficulties in operation of the equipment due to the manufacturer's fabrication or Contractor's installation, additional service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. B. After all check valves have been completely installed, the Contractor, under the direction of the manufacturer's factory representative, shall conduct in the presence of the Engineer and Owner's representative, such tests as are necessary to ensure that the operation of all equipment conforms to the specifications. Field tests shall include all equipment included under this section. END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 406100-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 1 of 14 QSECTION 40 6100 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to provide, install, test and make operational, a Process Instrumentation and Control System as specified herein and related specifications, and as shown on the Drawings. B. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed in each Section of Division 40 Process Control System Sections. C. Throughout the Process Control System Sections of Division 40, the term Contractor shall refer to the General Contractor. D. Equipment furnished as a part of other Divisions and shown on the Instrumentation and/or Electrical Drawings shall be integrated into the overall Instrumentation System under the Process Control System Sections of this Division. Instrumentation specified in other Divisions shall meet the Specification requirements of the Process Control System Sections of this Division. E. The Contractor shall provide the services of specialized personnel that meet all of the qualifications of a Process Control Systems Integrator (PCSI) who shall perform all work necessary to select, furnish, configure, customize, debug, install, connect, calibrate, and place into operation all process control system instrumentation hardware specified within this Division, except for application software programming, which is specified for Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), as described in Section 40 68 60 Application Services Provider. The PCSI shall coordinate with the Owner/ Engineer and ASP, for all scheduling, installation, and startup services. The PCSI shall have qualifications as described herein. The personnel meeting these qualifications shall be submitted as part of the project plan submittal as described below. The personnel need not be direct employees of the contractor but, they shall be employed by a firm with a direct subcontract to the contractor. F. The Contractor shall provide the services of an Application Services Provider (ASP) for all work as specified in Section 40 68 60. The ASP shall have qualifications as described herein. G. The Contractor shall coordinate, and schedule all required testing with the General Contractor, Owner, Engineer, PCSI and ASP. H. The work shall include the following: l . Make connections, including field connections and interfacing between instrumentation, controllers, control devices, control panels and instrumentation furnished under other Divisions. The Contractor shall coordinate his construction schedule and instrumentation and control interface with the supplier of instrumentation and control equipment specified under other Divisions. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406100-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 2 of 14 2. Make wiring terminations for all field -mounted instruments furnished and mounted under other Divisions, including process instrumentation primary elements, transmitters, local indicators and control panels. Install vendors furnished cables specified under other Divisions. 3. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other Sections of these specifications, shall be included whether they are shown on the Drawings. These devices include, but are not limited to, transducers, current isolators, and signal conditioners, interposing relays or protocol converters. 4. System design shall allow the removal of individual devices from service without disrupting other unrelated devices in service. 5. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations by the equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. 6. Actual installation of the system need not be performed by the Contractor's PCSI employees; however, the PCSI shall provide the on -site technical supervision of the installation. 7. The PCSI shall furnish equipment which is the product of one manufacturer to the maximum practical extent. Where this is not practical, all equipment of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 8. All materials, equipment, labor, and services necessary to achieve the monitoring and control functions described herein shall be provided in a timely manner so that the monitoring and control functions are available when the equipment is ready to be placed into service. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Wherever references are made to Related Work in other Specification Sections of the Specifications, the Contractor is to provide such information or work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All Instrumentation work related to Process and Mechanical Divisions equipment that is shown on the Instrumentation Drawings shall be provided under Division 40 Process Control System Sections unless otherwise explicitly shown. C. All instrumentation Equipment and work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 40 Process Control Systems Sections. D. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole, with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. E. Other Divisions CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406100-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 3 of 14 The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide appurtenances, as required to provide a fully functioning process control system. If the equipment requires added options, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional appurtenances and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Process Submit Shop Drawings, in accordance with Division 1's requirements, for equipment, materials and all other equipment specified under each Instrumentation Section of Division 40, except where specifically stated otherwise. An individually packaged submittal shall be made for each Section and shall contain all the information required by that Section, unless specifically directed otherwise by the submittal requirements of that section. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed. B. No submittals will be accepted for Section 40 6100, except for the qualifications of the Contractor's PCSI and the Contractor's ASP, as specified herein, and the Project Plan, Schedule and Deviation List Submittal. C. Each section submittal shall be complete, contain all the items listed in the Specification Section, and shall be clearly marked to indicate which items are applicable on each cut sheet page. The Submittal shall list any exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings, and the reason for such deviation. Shop drawings, not so checked and noted, will be returned un-reviewed. D. The Contractor shall check shop drawings for accuracy and Contract Requirements prior to submittal to the Engineer. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a Statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. Only one Specification Section submittals will be allowed per transmittal unless sections are indicated for grouping in the individual sections. E. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No material shall be ordered, or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED CONFIRM", "APPROVED AS NOTED RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED". F. Shop Drawings, O&M Manuals, and other documentation shall be submitted as listed in each of the individual Instrumentation Specification Sections. 1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in accordance with Division 1. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions. 2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum: a. A comprehensive index. b. A complete "As -Built" set of approved shop drawings. c. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and pertinent data. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 406100-4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 4 of 14 d. A table listing of the "as left" settings for all timing relays and alarm and trip setpoints. e. System schematic drawings "As -Built", illustrating all components, piping and electric connections of the systems supplied under this Division. f. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. g. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. h. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entire system, with references to the system's schematic drawings and instructions. i. Complete parts list with stock numbers, including spare parts. G. Record Drawings shall be promptly furnished when the equipment installation is complete. Payment will be withheld until Record Drawings have been furnished and approved. The PCSI shall provide markups on all Process and Instrumentation Contract Drawings. H. At the time of delivery of the equipment, the Contractor shall have an approved shop drawing in his possession for the Owner's Inspector and Owner's Engineer's verifications. I. Project Plan, Schedule and Deviation List Submittal Submit, as soon as possible following PCSI's receipt of Notice to Proceed, a Project Plan, Schedule and Deviation List Submittal. The Project Plan, Schedule and Deviation List Submittal shall be made and approved before any further submittals will be accepted and prior to scheduling of the first PCSI coordination meeting. The Project Plan, Schedule and Deviation List Submittal shall, as a minimum, contain the following: a. Overview of the Process Control System, clearly describing the PCSI's understanding of the project work and interfaces to other systems; and including a preliminary system architecture drawing and proposed project work schedule detailing all PCSI's work activities. Description of PCSI's understanding of the work shall be an original write-up authored by the PCSI. Copying of the Scope of Work included herein or utilizing contract drawings in any form shall not be acceptable. b. Approach to work clearly describing how the PCSI intends to execute the work, including detailed discussion of switchover, startup, replacement of existing equipment with new, and other tasks as required by these specifications as applicable. c. Preliminary HMI software, PLC software, and PLC hardware list submittal information shall be included solely for determining compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to beginning development of application programming. Review and approval of software and hardware systems as part of this Project Plan stage shall not relieve the PCSI of meeting all the functional and performance requirements of the system as specified herein. Substitution of manufacturer or model of these systems after the submittal is approved shall not be permitted without prior Engineer approval. d. Details of personnel assigned to the project and organizational structure including the PCSI's project manager, project engineer, and lead project technicians. Include resumes of each key individual and specify in writing their commitment to this project. e. Preliminary coordination meeting agendas as specified herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 406100-5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 5 of 14 f. Preliminary training plan g. Samples of shop drawings to be submitted in conformance with the requirements of the Specifications shall be submitted. At a minimum include samples of panel fabrication drawings, loop, and UO wiring diagrams. 2. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a separate Deviation List. The Deviation List shall consist of a paragraph -by -paragraph review of the Specifications indicating acceptance or any proposed deviations, the reason for exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed substitution so that an evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an "equal' or "exception" to the specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer. If no exceptions are taken to the Specifications or Drawings, the PCSI shall make a statement indicating so. If there is no statement included by the PCSI, it shall be interpreted by the Engineer to mean that no exceptions are taken. 3. A Project Schedule shall be prepared and submitted using an ISO/IEC 26300:2006 formatted file. The schedule shall be prepared in Gantt chart format clearly showing task linkages for all tasks and identifying critical path elements. The PCSI's schedule shall be based on and coordinated with the Contractor's and ASP's schedules and must meet all field installation, testing, and startup milestones in those schedules. Updates to this schedule when approved shall be resubmitted for record before each construction milestone, or every month whichever is greater 4. The PCSI schedule shall illustrate all major project milestones including the following: a. Schedule for all subsequent project submittals: include in the time allotment, the time required for Contractor submittal preparation, Engineer's review, and a minimum of two complete review cycles. b. Proposed dates for all required project Coordination Meetings. c. Hardware purchasing, fabrication, and assembly (following approval of related submittals) d. Software purchasing and configuration (following approval of related submittals) e. Shipment of all instrumentation and control system equipment f. Installation of all instrumentation and control system equipment g. Duration and dates for all required testing activities. The test schedule shall include submitting test procedures a minimum of 30 days prior to commencement of testing. Schedule shall also include submittal of completed documentation of testing activities for review and approval by the Engineer prior to equipment shipment, startup, or subsequent project work. h. The PCSI shall arrange the schedule to accommodate the requirements of the ASP to develop, test, troubleshoot, and train the Owner's staff on the PLC and HMI application and systems. The riming of these coordination efforts shall be jointly determined by the ASP and PCSI; however, the PCSI shall include all necessary costs to accommodate the minimum time slots in their overall project schedule. All time allotments shall exclude any legal holidays, or days lost due to delays caused by the Contractor or PCSI. i. Include a schedule for system cutover, startup, and/or placing in service for each major system. At a minimum, include the schedule for each process controller and HMI server/workstation provided under this Contract. j. Schedule for all training including submittal and approval of O&M manuals, factory training, and field training CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406100-6 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 6 of 14 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Instrumentation equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ILEA) 7. The International Society of Automation (ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. UL 508, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment 10. UL 508A, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels 11. UL 50, the Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 12. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 13. Factory Mutual (FM) 14. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State, and local codes. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. C. All material and equipment, for which a UL standard exists, shall bear a UL label. No such material or equipment shall be brought onsite without the UL label affixed. D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence if they are more stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Owner/Engineer. E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times F. All control panels shall be constructed, and the labeling shall be affixed in a UL 508 facility. 1.5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR (PCSI) A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a City of Fort Worth pre -approved Process Control Systems Integrator (PCSI) for all work under the instrumentation sections of this and related Divisions, as described in this section and related sections. B. Were shown on the Bid Documents, the Contractor shall name the proposed PCSI. Only approved suppliers, as listed herein, will be accepted. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406100-7 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 7 of 14 C. Qualifications 1. The PCSI shall be a "systems house," regularly engaged in the design and installation of control and instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they apply to the municipal water or wastewater industry. For the purposes of this and other applicable Divisions, a "systems house" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all the following criteria: 2. Employs a registered professional Control Systems Engineer or Electrical Engineer in the state of Texas to supervise or perform the work required by this Specification Section. 3. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed a manufacturer's training course on the hardware configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. 4. Has been in the water/wastewater industry performing the type of work specified in this specification section for a minimum of five (5) continuous years. 5. The PCSI shall maintain a fully equipped office/production facility with full-time employees capable of fabricating, configuring, installing, calibrating, troubleshooting, and testing the system specified herein. Qualified repair personnel shall be available and capable of reaching the facility within 24 hours. 6. PCSI shall have an Electrical Contractor's license in the State of Texas. D. The PCSI shall be one of the following: 1. Prime Controls 815 Office Park Circle Lewisville, Texas 75057 Attn: Brian Poarch Phone: 972.221.4849 2. Richardson Logic Control 8115 Hicks Hollow McKinney, Texas 75071 Attn: Michel Cunningham Phone: 972.542.7375 3. RED Group, LLC 9500 Ray White Rd, Ste 223 Fort Worth, TX 76244 Attn: Jake Mattix Phone: 682.394.4493 E. The listing of specific PCSI organizations above does not imply acceptance of their products and capabilities that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. PCSI's listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 1.6 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER (ASP) A. The Contractor shall provide an Application Services Provider (ASP) for application software programming for Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Human Machine Interface (HMI) computers and other equipment as specified. The ASP may be drawn from within one of the listed PSCI's forces. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 406100-8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 8 of 14 B. All other programming, configuration, and integration, including but not limited to, loading software for process devices, Ethernet configuration and communications, shall be by the PCSI as specified in other Sections. C. Qualifications 1. The ASP shall perform all work necessary to configure, customize, debug, install, connect, and place into operation all HMI and PLC software specified within this Division and other related divisions. The ASP shall coordinate with the PCSI all scheduling, installation, and startup services. The personnel performing the duties of the ASP shall be in the employ of the PCSI for the purpose of performing the work as specified: 2. The ASP shall meet the following qualifications and/or submit the following documentation as specified: a. Shall secure an independent performance bond and provide documentation of same from a bonding agency. b. Shall present an adequate Certificate of Insurance. c. Shall submit resumes of team members with completed training and certifications. d. Shall submit a team organization chart. e. Shall have completed five projects of this size or larger in dollar value and shall provide project names, client name, and reference contacts of same. f. Shall demonstrate five years of experience working on projects in water or wastewater plant work. g. Shall provide project names, client names, time period of work and reference contacts h. Staff proposed shall have all certifications as provided from the manufactures of the equipment supplied. i. ASP shall have an electrical or control systems professional engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, on staff or under contract for this project. j. ASP shall provide 24-hour Service Contract for the length of the warranty period. The service contract requirements shall include telephone support as far as possible. If necessary, ASP shall provide on -site support for correction of any errors and/or omissions in order to fully meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. D. The ASP shall be one of the following: 1. Prime Controls 815 Office Park Circle Lewisville, Texas 75057 Attn: Brian Poarch Phone: 972.221.4849 2. Richardson Logic Control 8115 Hicks Hollow McKinney, Texas 75071 Attn: Michel Cunningham Phone: 972.542.7375 3. RED Group, LLC 9500 Ray White Rd, Ste 223 Fort Worth, TX 76244 Attn: Jake Mattix CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 406100-9 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 9 of 14 Phone: 682.394.4493 1.7 HAZARDOUS AREAS A. Equipment, materials and installation in areas designated as hazardous on the Drawings shall comply with NEC Articles 500, 501, 502 and 503. B. Equipment and materials installed in hazardous areas shall be UL listed for the appropriate hazardous area classification. 1.8 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections. 1.9 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure. B. The equipment shall always be kept upright during storage and handling. When equipment must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the progress of the work, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings, hereinafter called the "Record Drawings". The Record Drawings and Specifications shall be kept up to date throughout the project. B. Record Drawings shall accurately show the installed condition of the following items: 1. One -line Diagram(s). 2. Raceways and pull boxes. 3. Conductor sizes. 4. Panel Schedule(s). 5. Control Wiring Diagrams) including all wire tags. 6. Process Instrumentation Diagram(s) 7. Mounting Details C. Submit a typical example of a schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers, including the following information: 1. Circuit origin, destination and wire numbers. 2. Field wiring terminal strip names and numbers with field connection wire color. D. As an alternate, submit a typical example of point-to-point connection diagrams showing the same information, may be submitted in place of the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers. E. Submit the record drawings and the schedule of control wiring raceways and wire numbers (or the point-to-point connection diagram) to the Owner/Engineer. F. The Contractor's retainage shall not be paid until the point-to-point connection diagrams have been furnished to the Owner/Engineer. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 40 61 00 - 10 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 10 of 14 1.11 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Review the shop drawings of equipment furnished under other related Divisions and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings. B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections. 1.12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be new, except where specifically indicated on the Drawings to be re -used. B. The Contractor shall not bring onsite, material or equipment from a manufacturer, not submitted and approved for this project. Use of any such material or equipment, will be rejected, removed and replaced by the Contractor, with the approved material and equipment, at his own expense. C. Material and equipment shall be UL listed where such listing exists. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, product, equipment and workmanship being furnished by him for the duration of the project. He shall replace the equipment if it does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Two (2) copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner. B. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. C. Equipment shall be equipped to be handled by crane. Where cranes are not available, equipment shall be suitable for skidding in place on rollers using jacks to raise and lower the groups. D. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent, finished location shown on the Drawings within seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. E. Where space heaters are provided in equipment or control panels, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during jobsite storage and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.14 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's warranties shall be as specified in each of the Specification Sections. 1.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify equipment (control panels, control stations, instruments, etc) furnished under instrumentation sections of Division 40 with the name of the equipment it serves. Control panels, Instruments, meters junction or terminal boxes, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 40 61 00 - 11 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 11 of 14 B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, black lettering on a white background, matte finishes not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/z", no equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, with a 70% alcohol solution, until the metal surface residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. The PCSI shall schedule and administer a minimum of one mandatory Coordination Meetings. The PCSI shall make arrangements for meetings; prepare agendas and distribute copies to participants at least one (1) week before scheduled meetings. The meetings shall be held at the Contractor's field office at the site and shall include, as a minimum, attendance by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor's Project Engineer, ASP'S Project Engineer, PCSI's Project Engineer, and the Electrical Subcontractor. 1. The first coordination meeting shall be held in advance of the first PCSI shop drawing submittals (Project Plan and 1/0 List). The purpose of the first meeting shall be for PCSI to: a. Summarize their understanding of the project b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives c. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates d. Provide a forum for the PCSI and Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues e. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. f. The PCSI shall bring a draft version of shop drawings to the meeting to provide the basis for the Owner's and Engineer's input into their development. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. Raceways and conductors for instrumentation, communications and other miscellaneous low voltage power and signal systems as specified not shown on the Drawings shall be provided as required for a complete operating system. B. The PCSI shall terminate all conductors of instrumentation systems to RTU and/or PLC Termination Cabinets, where designated on the Drawings. The conduit and wire, as shown on the electrical interface drawings, may not necessarily be shown on the floor plan. C. Install conductors carrying low voltage signals (typically twisted shielded pair cables) in raceways totally separate from all other raceways containing power or 120-volt control conductors, Refer to NEC article 725. DC and AC control wiring shall be installed in separate raceways. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 40 61 00 - 12 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 12 of 14 D. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of a pre -approved alternate instrumentation or control item, or arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be done by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work, either on his/her own or others, caused by such a redesign. 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION EQUIPMENT PADS AND SUPPORTS A. Equipment pads and supports, of concrete or steel including structural reinforcing and foundations, are shown on the Structural Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Any work not installed according to the Drawings and this Section shall be subject to change as directed by the Owner/Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. B. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other trades. C. Equipment shall always be protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters as required by each Specification Section. Do not install equipment in its permanent location until the structures are weather -tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, Equipment shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the Owner/Engineer or shall be replaced at no additional cost at the Owner/Engineer's discretion. D. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the Owner/Engineer's discretion. E. Repaint any damage to the factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. If the metallic portion of the panel or section is damaged, the entire panel or section shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and startup of the equipment as listed in each individual Specification Section. B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be used for manufacturer's warranty repairs. C. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by schematics, wiring diagrams and Control Descriptions. D. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment. E. Refer to the individual Instrumentation Equipment Sections for additional specific testing requirements. F. Make all adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 40 61 00 - 13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 13 of 14 3.6 TESTING A. Test systems and equipment as furnished under Division 40 Process Control System Sections and repair or replace all defective work. Make any adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. B. Make the tests and checks prior to energizing instrumentation equipment in accordance with Section 40 80 00, and the individual Specification sections. C. Testing shall be scheduled and coordinated with the Owner/Engineer at least two weeks in advance. Provide qualified test personnel, instruments and test equipment, including manufacturer's services, as specified in the individual Specification sections. D. Where test reports show unsatisfactory results, the Owner/Engineer will require the removal of all defective or suspected materials, equipment and/or apparatus, and their replacement with new items, all at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all cost for any retesting. 3.7 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide training as specified in Section 40 6160. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 40 61 00 - 14 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS GENERAL PROVISIONS Page 14 of 14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 406196-1 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 6196 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section provides the detailed requirements for the programming of the Process Control System Application by the Applications Services Providers for the Lift Station. B. Refer to specification section 40 68 60 for additional information. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole, with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Specification Sections 40 6100 Process control Systems General Provisions and 40 68 60 Application Services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND DEFINITIONS A. The following represent the general "performance" requirements for all control loops. These Process Control Descriptions shall be used in conjunction with all project drawings and the required ASP workshops in determining the specific controls required. The alarms described herein shall be provided for all devices described below whether the alarm described herein is shown on the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) or not. a. For all controlled devices such as pumps, motorized equipment, or any device, currently under control by the PLC, that generates a start/stop, or on/off, and has one or two discrete feedback state signals, provide an equipment discrepancy alarm. b. The discrepancy alarm shall be generated in the PLC when a device receives a change of state discrete command signal from the PLC, and the device feedback state does not match the commanded state within a preset time frame. c. The equipment discrepancy alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HM1. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406196-2 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 2 of 6 d. If, after attaining the commanded change of state, a device feedback state does not match the commanded state, an equipment deviation alarm shall be generated by the PLC. e. The equipment deviation alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. f. After a deviation alarm occurs, the device cannot be restarted by the PLC until the user has issued a reset at the HMI. For all controlled valves or gates, currently under control by the PLC, that generate an open/close and have one or two discrete open/closed feedback signals, provide an equipment discrepancy alarm. a. The discrepancy alarm shall be generated in the PLC when a device receives an open/close discrete command signal from the PLC and the device feedback state does not match the commanded state within a preset time. b. The equipment discrepancy alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. c. If a device feedback state does not match the commanded state, after attaining the commanded state, an equipment deviation alarm shall be generated by the PLC. d. The equipment deviation alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. e. After a deviation alarm occurs, the device cannot be restarted by the PLC until the user has issued a reset at the HMI. 3. For all analog modulating valves, currently under control by the PLC, that generate an analog state request and have a position feedback signal, provide an equipment discrepancy alarm. a. The discrepancy alarm shall be generated in the PLC when a valve receives a signal to open or close to a specific position and the position feedback signal does not indicate the desired position, plus or minus a dead band, within a preset time period. b. The equipment discrepancy alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. c. If a device feedback position does not match the commanded position, after attaining the commanded position, plus or minus a dead band, a deviation alarm shall be generated by the PLC. d. The equipment deviation alarm shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. e. After a deviation alarm occurs, the valve cannot be moved again by the PLC until the Operator has issued a reset at the HMI. 4. For all variable speed pumps, currently under control by the PLC, that generate an analog speed request and have a speed feedback signal, provide an equipment discrepancy alarm. a. The discrepancy alarm shall be generated in the PLC when a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) receives a signal to increase or decrease speed, and the speed feedback signal does not indicate the requested speed, plus or minus a dead band, within a preset time period. b. The equipment discrepancy alarm generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. c. If a pump is off, and the pump is requested to run, and the pump does not start within a preset time delay period after the request has been made, a pump discrepancy alarm shall be generated by the PLC. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406196-3 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 3 of 6 d. If a device feedback speed does not match the commanded speed, plus or minus a dead band, after attaining the commanded speed, a deviation alarm is generated. e. After a deviation alarm occurs, the pump cannot be controlled again by the PLC until the user has issued a reset at the HMI. 5. Provide at least two high alarms and two low alarms for each analog input. The quantities and types of alarms shall be configured for each input as appropriate. The alarms generated by the PLC shall be displayed and alarmed at the HMI. To eliminate excessive alarm reporting, the analog point shall remain in alarm until its value returns to its alarm limit, plus or minus its alarm limit dead band. 6. All alarms shall be generated by the PLC. No alarms shall be calculated within the HMI. 7. For each analog point, an alarm shall be generated in the PLC and displayed at the HMI if the PLC detects a loss of signal. For analog points that are used for automatic control, the last "good value" shall be used as the process variable until the alarm is cleared. 8. For each analog point, if the value of the analog point is above or below the instrument range, an out -of -range alarm shall be generated in the PLC and displayed and alarmed at the HMI. C. Interlocks 1. Interlocks described below are intended to detail hardware interlocks between processes or sub -processes. The discussion below is not intended to detail the interlocks associated within MCCs, VFDs, etc. For those details, please see the manufacturer's supplied information. D. Tuning Parameters All tuning parameters for each PID in the PLC shall be available at the server/ workstations for monitoring and adjustment even if not shown on the P&IDs. Tuning trends shall be provided to monitor the PID functions. However, these parameter settings shall be password protected to allow access only to users who are given clearance by the Owner. E. Equipment Runtimes 1. Runtimes for all motorized equipment shall be totaled in the PLC and indicated at the HMI with one -hour resolution even if not shown on the drawings. 2. The total runtime shall be reset from the HMI; however, this reset shall be password protected to allow access only to users who are given clearance by the Owner. 3. A second accumulated runtime shall also be provided. The Operator shall not have the capability to reset this accumulated runtime. F. Historical Recording 1. All analog inputs shall be recorded historically even if not shown on the P&IDs. G. Flow Totalization 1. All flows shall be totalized in the PLC. Yesterday's total flow and today's total flow shall be indicated at the HMI even if not shown on the P&IDs. To eliminate errors due to noise or calibration issues, flows will not be totalized when an associated valve or pump is in the closed or off state. 2. The total flows shall have the ability to be reset from the HMI. However, this reset shall be password protected to allow access only to users who are given clearance by the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 40 61 96 - 4 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 4 of 6 A. The Lift station will consist of three pumps in each wet well with a common influent piping. Each wet well will have an isolation gate on the influent piping. The pump controls are via Variable Frequency Drives 1. Overview a. Each Wet Well will have three submersible pumps with a common effluent header for that wet well. A common influent channel is connected to the incoming wastewater manhole. All level instrumentation is installed within the wet well between the pumps two and three within the wet well. 2. Control a. All pumps can be operated in Local Manual and Remote (Computer) Auto as described above. When operating in Remote (Computer) Auto the system will be programmed to provide Automatic Wet -well Level Control. Additionally, a flushing mode is to be incorporated that will operate regardless of level as further described below. b. Automatic Wet -well Level Control: 1) When the level in the wet -well reaches the start setpoint the Lead Pump will start. If the level continues to rise to six inches above start level, then the lag pump will be called to run. If a pump fails to start or fails to run, the next pump in the sequence is started. 2) On a falling wet well level, at the stop setpoint all pumps are called to stop. 3. Automatic Lead Lag selection b. When all pumps are off, the PLC will perform an automatic Lead/Lag rotation. The criteria for the rotation are: 1) The pump is in Remote Automatic mode. 2) The pump has no fault alarms indicated. 3) If a pump starter indicates a fault or is not in remote automatic it shall not be included as an available pump. 2. At no time should more than three pumps be called to run. However, all pumps should be included in the selection process if available. 3. The Lead/Lag rotation occurs when all pumps are confirmed in a stopped condition: a. The pump that was the LEAD pump becomes the last LAG pump. b. The pump that was the first LAG pump becomes the LEAD pump. c. The other LAG pumps move up in the sequence. 4. Software Permissive a. There are no software interlocks associated with this control description. 5. Hardwired Interlocks a. The wet well level must be above five feet indication as per the low-level float as hardwire interlock associated with this control description. If the wet well has set the low-level alarm, then the level must rise to the pump start level from the Radar level instrument and PLC logic or the start level float set approximately one foot above the Start level to clear via the level control panel. 6. Calculated Alarms and Variables CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 406196-5 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 5 of 6 a. No additional calculated alarms or variables are associated with this control description. 7. Field Alarms a. Refer to the P&IDs for field alarms associated with this control description. 8. Field Inputs and Outputs a. Refer to the P&IDs for field input and output points associated with this control description. B. Flushing Sequence Control: 1. Twice each day at operator settable times a flushing sequence will be called to execute. The sequence will call for the Lead Pump to start and once confirmed that it is running then the lag pump will be called to run. If a pump fails to start or fails to run, the next pump in the sequence is started. The pumps will continue to run until the level has dropped to below the stop level or a flushing timer has expired with an initial setpoint of 15 minutes. 2. If the flushing the flushing shutoff level is reached before the flushing timer has expired the timer will reset and end the flushing sequence. 3. If a level control sequence has occurred 12 hours or less from the time of a flushing sequence, then the flushing sequence may be skipped C. Each wet well is to operate independently from each other. Each group of three pumps are to operate as described above. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406196-6 PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406300-1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 1 of 6 SECTION 40 63 00 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in the Related Work paragraph of this Section. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. [llIM1110 u 1 10 cl A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed. B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. The submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficiently to confirm that the equipment provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. C. Submit catalog data sheets for all software licenses provided under this Specification Section. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. e. Copy of the software license data including serial numbers, license key, etc. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Instrumentation equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406300-2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 2 of 6 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. NEMA ICS 1-101 Diagrams, Designations and Symbols 4. ANSI/ISA-5.06.01-2007 - Functional Requirements Documentation for Control Software Applications. 5. ISA-TR20.00.01-2001 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New Specification Forms in 2004-2005. 6. ISA-5.4-1991 Instrument Loop Diagrams. 7. ISA-5.5-1985 Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 8. ISA-5.1-1984 (R1992) Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 9. ISA-5.3-1983 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 10. ISA-20-1981 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 11. ISA-5.2-1976 (R1992) Binary Logic Diagrams For Process Operations. 12. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 15. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 16. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 17. The International Society of Automation (ISA) 18. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 19. UL 508, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment 20. UL 508A, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels 21. UL 50, the Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 22. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 23. Factory Mutual (FM) 24. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 25. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 26. ANSI C37.90.2 Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 27. NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 28. NEMA LS1 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices. 29. UL 1283 Standard for Safety -Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 30. UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Protective Devices 31. IEEE 1815-2012 - IEEE Standard for Electric Power Systems Communications - Distributed Network Protocol (DNP3) 32. All equipment and installations shall conform to applicable Federal, State, and local codes. B. All equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406300-3 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 3 of 6 C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. fR=K17►5iuIVol COF111[130.`lJ.Tell111ZK470s&9101aWuIwoIm A. The PLC systems must communicate as shown on the plans and as described else ware within the contract documents. The systems are to utilize and support the protocols as described within this section. 1. Where shown or otherwise indicated Modbus TCP Protocol to have the following as minimum capabilities as a minimum: a. All data shall be available and/or mirrored within the Modbus 4x or "Holding Register" memory area. The other areas can be optionally supported, but all Ox, lx, and 3x data shall be readable and writable in the 4x memory area. For digital writes, supports of single -bit writes (function 5) to the Ox area are acceptable on a case -by -case basis. Products that require access to the Ix and 3x area to operate are not acceptable; access to Ix/3x area shall be optional. b. Register 4x00001 shall exist and be readable to allow simple, predictable "communications tests". c. Software tools shall function properly with slaves' only supporting Modbus functions 3, 4 and 16. Requiring support of diagnostic function 8 is not acceptable. d. Software tools shall be configurable to write a single register as either function 6 or 16. e. Software tools shall allow setting the Modbus/TCP "Unit Id" to be a value other than zero. This is required for Ethernet -to -Serial bridging. 2. Where indicated the PLC System shall communicate utilizing Ethernet/IP Protocol with the following as minimum capabilities: a. Transfer of basic I/O data via User Datagram Protocol (UDP)-based implicit messaging b. Uploading and downloading of parameters, setpoints, programs and recipes via TCP (i.e., explicit messaging.) c. Polled, cyclic and change -of -state monitoring via UDP, such as RPI and COS in Allen Bradley's ControlLogix control systems. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 406300-4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 4 of 6 d. One-to-one (unicast), one -to -many (multicast), and one -to -all (broadcast) communication via TCP e. Use of well-known TCP port number 44818 for explicit messaging and UDP port number 2222 for implicit messaging. 3. For communications links indicated to use DNP3 provide the minimum of level 2 implementation for all devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Schneider Electric M340 2. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions as specified. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. The following table indicates the PLC used as the basis of design for each location indicated. PLC LOCATION PLC TYPE CONTROL PANEL ID Lift Station M340 RTU C. Where an existing PLC is to be modified or expanded as a part of this Contract, as specified in Specification Section Process System Control Panels or as indicated on the plans, the modified PLC is to meet the requirements and functionality of this Section. D. Programming Languages 1. Each PLC shall support IEC Standard 61131-3 with all of the following programming languages unless explicitly excluded within this section: a. Ladder (LD) b. Function Block Diagram (FBD) c. Structured Text (ST) 2. Processor shall have a minimum IEC Program Memory size of 2048 KB. 3. All Programming to utilize Function Block Diagram unless otherwise approved by the Owner. E. Input / Output Capacity 1. Total Configurable Input / Output Capacity within the manufactures software package for the device shall not be less than 1024. 2. Installed minimum physical Input / Output capacity shall not be less than the following: a. Analog Inputs — 8 b. Analog Outputs — 4 c. Discrete Inputs —16 d. Discrete Outputs — 8 F. Physical Construction CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 406300-5 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 5 of 6 The PLC shall be of modular construction, consisting of a back plane or buss, plug in modules for the processor, communication modules, I/O modules and expansion modules. 2. The power supply shall be 24 Volt DC and shall be sized for the total of all installed 1/0 fully loaded including the power requirement any spare 1/0 slots. 3. Analog inputs and outputs shall be isolated physically and electronically from each other and shall be of the 4-20ma type. 4. Discrete inputs shall be 24VDC and individually buffered with external single poll form C relays. 5. Discrete outputs shall be individually buffered with external form C relays with the number of polls as required. 6. Systems shall include as a minimum 1 Ethernet, 1 RS-485/232, or 1 USB programming port. 7. A separate Ethernet module shall be included for connection to the SCADA network. This port should include distributed/remote I/O scanning capability utilizing the protocol specified on the plans without the use of high-level logic programming. G. Spare Equipment 1. Provide the minimum of 20 percent wired spare I/O channels of each type provided. In no case shall I/O channels be left un wired to terminal blocks. 2. Provide 1 spare card/module of each type provided, including CPU and power supplies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed, programmed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406300-6 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406600-1 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 66 00 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for Communications Interface Equipment and Systems to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in the Related Work paragraph of this Section. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and furnished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in the Related Work Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed. B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the equipment provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Instrumentation equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. NEMA ICS 1-101 Diagrams, Designations and Symbols 4. ANSI/ISA-5.06.01-2007 - Functional Requirements Documentation for Control Software Applications. 5. ISA-5.2-1976 (R1992) Binary Logic Diagrams For Process Operations. 6. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406600-2 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 8 9. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 10. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 11. The International Society of Automation (ISA) 12. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 13. UL 508, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment 14. UL 508A, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels 15. UL 50, the Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 16. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Control Panels and Industrial Machinery 17. Factory Mutual (FM) 18. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 19. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 20. ANSI C37.90.2 Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 21. NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 22. NEMA LS1 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices. 23. UL 1283 Standard for Safety -Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 24. UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Protective Devices 25. All equipment and installations shall conform to applicable Federal, State, and local codes. B. All equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406600-3 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 8 PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH LAYER 3 MODULAR (TYPE A) A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Extreme Networks 1600 Series 2. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 Deg F to 167 Deg F 2. Operating humidity: 10 — 95% Non -condensing 3. Storage Temperature: -13 to 185 Deg F 4. Electrical Classification: Intrinsically safe for UL 1602 Class I Division 2 A-D locations D. Physical 1. Enclosure: NEMA TS-2. Fully Modular construction 2. Power Supply: 120VAC from UPS source 2. Microprocessor based managed type. 3. Din rail mountable capability. 4. 19-inch rack mountable where shown in plans E. Functional Performance 1. Per Port status LED indication. 2. Port based Ethernet MAC security individually port configurable. 3. Wire Speed switching, 16 Gigabit Switching Fabric. 4. HSRP Protocol Support. 5. Cisco Express Forwarding Hardware Routing Architecture. 6. SNMPvl, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3 Support 7. 802.1 d Spanning Tree Protocol Support 8. HTTPS accessible. 9. Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Management Objects Support. 10 Smart Templates for Ethernet/IP 11. PROFINET v2 certification. 12. Alarm Contacts for external fault notification. 13. 10/100 BaseT ports with RJ-45 connectors for Category 5 cabling. 14. Switch Configuration on removable/ configurable via Flash Memory module. 15. LC type Fiber Optic Connectors for I00BascFX, I000BaseSX for Multimode Fiber and 1000BaseLX for Single Mode Fiber as shown on the drawings 16. Fully managed switch capability. F. Options and Accessories Required: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 406600-4 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 8 1. Provide maximum installation space for additional future modules for each switch location. 2. Provide twenty (20) percent spare port capacity for each port type. 2.2 REMOTE SITE LICENSED RADIO (NARROW BAND) A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. GE MDS Orbit MCR radio MXNCL9CN4GYNNSIFISUNN 900MHz 2. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 Deg C to 70 Deg C 2. Operating humidity: 10 — 95% non -condensing D. Physical 1. Power Supply: 10 to 30 VDC input 2. Microprocessor based unmanaged type. 3. DIN Rail mountable. 4. Class 1 Division 2 groups A, B, C and D rated 5. Interface connections: TIA-232-E Serial interface implemented in a 1313-9 connection, Ethernet 10/100 BaseT implemented in a RJ45 and Antenna connection utilizing a TNC Female connector E. Functional Performance 1. RF data rate 9,600 to 19,200 bps @ 12.5 KHz channel size. 2. Licensed Frequency bands: 820-870 MHz, 880-915 MHz, 850-860/926-936 MHZ, and 928-960 MHz 3. Aluminum case. 4. Receiver type: double conversion super heterodynes with selectivity >70 dB, Sensitivity-100dBm. 5. Transmitter with programmable carrier power from 0.1 to 5 Watts, Continuous duty cycle. 6. Operating mode: Simplex, half -duplex 7. Modulation: Digital, CPFSK F. Options and Accessories Required: 1. Provide a minimum 2-year warranty. 2.3 ANTENNA TOWER (LADDER TYPE) A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rohn 2. Sabre 3. Approved equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 406600-5 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 8 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Provide radio towers as shown within the drawings. At a minimum, the towers provided shall be as follows: 1. Each section shall be double bolted constructed of ASTM 123 hot dipped galvanized steel. 2. Free standing and self-supporting type. 3. Tower sections shall have a minimum 12-1/2" face. 4. Tower shall be made up of a base section, midsection and top sections. 5. Heights of towers shall be a minimum of 50 feet tall from ground level. D. The radio tower shall be a self-supporting structure. The final tower and base design shall be furnished by the contractor. Each individual tower installation shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas to be compliant in all respects with TIA-222-H, Structural Standard for Antenna Supporting Structures and Antennas. The installation design, along with this certification, shall be submitted by the contractor. No general or manufacturers reference designs are acceptable for this purpose. The material submitted shall take into consideration the specific site location geotechnical information. A separate drawing for each tower installation, including all furnished accessories, including but not limited to grounding system, safety system, etc., shall be submitted. 2.4 YAGI DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Laird 2. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 degrees F to 176 degrees F 2. Operating humidity: 95% non -condensing for indoor applications D. Physical 1. Number of Elements as required balancing gain and output power. 2. Impedance 50 ohms 3. Max Power 10 watts 4. Radiation Directional 5. Polarization Vertical 6. ConnectorN-Female 7. Material Aluminum 8. Mount Mounts on pipe with 0.5 inch to 1.5-inch diameter CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406600-6 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 8 2.5 ETHERNET SURGE PROTECTOR A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. PolyPhaser 3. Cooper Bussman 4. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 degrees F to 176 degrees F 2. Operating humidity: 95% non -condensing for indoor applications 3. Storage Temperature: -40 to 176 degrees F D. Physical 1. DIN Rail Mountable indoors and pole mountable outdoors applications 2. I/O connectors: RJ-45 3. Power over Ethernet POE+ to IEEE802.3 at up to 57VDC E. Functional Performance 1. Protection: handles 100 or more lightning strikes at surge levels of 8/20uSec at 6kV/3kA 2. Standard: Compliant to IEC61000-4-5. _\ 7 C17.�il.Yl-y�U.[.YijTl�.Ii �31y 113L�JI C1�7 A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. PolyPhaser 3. Cooper Bussman 4. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -40 degrees F to 176 degrees F 2. Operating humidity: 95% non -condensing for indoor applications 3. Storage Temperature: -40 to 176 degrees F D. Physical 1. Barrel configuration for control panel applications 2. TNC type connectors E. Functional Performance CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406600-7 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 7 of 8 1. Protection: handles 100 or more lightning strikes at surge levels of 8/20uSec at 6kV/3kA 2. Standard: Compliant to IEC61000-4-5. 2.7 RADIO ANTENNA CABLES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Times Microwave LMR-600 runs under 75 feet 2. CommScope AVA7-50 HELIAX runs 75 feet and greater 3. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Provide sufficient lengths of cables for installation for connection to all Radio Equipment with no splices. D. Cable Construction 1. Inner Conductor Solid BCCAI 2. Dielectric Foam PE 3. Outer Conductor Aluminum Tape 4. Overall Braid Tinned Copper 5. Jacket Black PE. E. Function/Performance: 1. Max Operating Frequency GHz 2.5 2. Minimum Operating Frequency 800 MHz 3. Velocity of Propagation % 87 4. Dielectric Constant NA 1.32 5. Time Delay nS/ft (nS/m) 1.17 (3.83) 6. Impedance ohms 50 7. Capacitance pF/ft (pF/m) 15.6 (51.1) 8. Inductance uH/ft (uH/m) 0.088 (0.29) 9. Shielding Effectiveness dB >90 10. DC Resistance a. Inner Conductor ohms/1000ft (/km) 1.39 (4.56) b. Outer Conductor ohms/1000ft (/km) 1.2 (3.9) 11. Peak Power kW 40 F. Required Options/Accessories 1. Provide Surge Arrestors at the antenna connection and the entrance to the equipment per the NEC. 2.8 REMOTE SITE 4G/LTE CELLULAR RADIO A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 406600-8 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE EQUIPMENT Page 8 of 8 1. Ericsson Cradlepoint a. Model: COR IBR900 Series B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating temperature: -22 Deg F to 158 Deg F 2. Operating humidity: 5 — 95% non -condensing D. Physical 1. Power Supply: 10 to 30 VDC input 2. UL Listed 3. Interface connections: Ethernet 10/100 BaseT implemented in a RJ45 and Antenna connection utilizing SMA connectors E. Functional Performance 1. Integrated 4G/LTE Modem with Verizon and/or AT&T support and with 3G failover 2. 1 WAN port minimum 3. 2 LAN ports minimum 4. VPN support for IPsec tunnels (up to 5 concurrent sessions) 5. Quality of Service capabilities 6. MAC address filtering and IP address filtering 7. 802.1x authentication for Ethernet PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment specified herein shall be factory installed in an overall assembly, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 406700-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 1 of 16 SECTION 40 67 00 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install functional control panels to manually or automatically operate control systems as specified in the detailed requirements of this Section, and logic and schematics as shown on the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings. B. Control panels as specified in the Process Equipment Division, Electrical Equipment Division or Mechanical Equipment Divisions, except as specifically stated herein, shall not be submitted under this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Wherever references are made to Related Work in other Specification Sections of the Specifications, the Contractor is to provide such information or work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. B. All Instrumentation work related to Process and Mechanical Divisions equipment that is shown on the Instrumentation Drawings shall be provided under Division 40 Process Control System Sections unless otherwise explicitly shown. C. All Control Panels and work provided under any Division of the Specifications shall fully comply with the requirements of Division 40 Process Control System Sections. D. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole, with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. E. Other Divisions The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings and shall determine the power and wiring requirements and shall provide appurtenances, as required to provide a fully functioning process control system. If the equipment requires added options, due to different equipment being supplied, the Contractor shall furnish the additional appurtenances and/or wiring, with no change in the Contract Price, and with no increase in Contract Time. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Process 1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 40 6100, and as specified herein. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406700-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 2 of 16 2. Submittals require information on related equipment to be furnished under this Specification and described in the related Sections listed in the Related Work paragraph above. Incomplete submittals not containing the required information on the related equipment will be returned un-reviewed. 3. Equipment specified in Process, Mechanical, or Electrical Equipment Divisions, and supplied as an integral part of a process equipment manufacturer's package shall be submitted with the manufacturer's submittals, in those Divisions. B. Submittal Content The original equipment manufacturer shall create all equipment shop drawings, including all wiring diagrams, in the manufacturer's Engineering department. All equipment shop drawings shall bear the original equipment manufacturers logo, drawing file numbers, and shall be maintained on file in the original equipment manufacturer's archive file system. Photocopies of the Engineer's ladder schematics are unacceptable as shop drawings. C. Required Submittals 1. Copies of previously Approved Related Work submittals. 2. Documentation confirming that the Panel Assembly Facility is a UL-508 certified panel shop. 3. Facsimile of the UL label that is to be applied to the completed panels. 4. Shop Drawings a. Shop Drawings shall include the following: 1) Drawings shall be to scale and shall show the location of panel mounted devices, including doors, louvers, and sub panels. 2) Equipment outlines drawings showing elevation, plan and interior views, front panel arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits, conduit entrances and anchor bolt pattern. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section's requirements. 3) The first sheet of each Panel Drawing Packet shall contain a Bill of Materials for that panel. The Bill of Materials shall list all devices mounted within the panel, and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number of each item. 4) Following the Bill of Material shall be a listing, uniquely identifying each component of the Panel, and a description of the item used, i.e. devices by their assigned tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legend, and annunciator inscriptions. 5) Power and control schematics including external connections. Show wire and terminal numbers and color -coding. b. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams 1) Provide interconnecting wiring diagrams showing electrical connections between equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components. 2) Diagrams shall show component and panel terminal board identification numbers, and external wire and cable numbers. 3) Circuit names corresponding to the Circuit and Raceway Schedule shall be shown. The diagram shall include intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.). 5. Factory Tests. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406700-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 3 of 16 a. Submittals shall be made for factory tests as specified herein. Owner/Engineer approval of required factory tests is required prior to shipment of the equipment. 6. Field Tests. a. Submittals shall be made for field tests as specified herein. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. a. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: 1) Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. 2) Instruction books and/or leaflets 3) Recommended renewal parts list 4) Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals paragraph above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Instrumentation equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. NEMA ICS 1-101 Diagrams, Designations and Symbols 4. ANSI/ISA-5.06.01-2007 - Functional Requirements Documentation for Control Software Applications 5. ISA-TR20.00.01-2001 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New Specification Forms in 2004-2005. 6. ISA-5.4-1991 Instrument Loop Diagrams. 7. ISA-5.5-1985 Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 8. ISA-5.1-1984 (R1992) Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 9. ISA-5.3-1983 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 10. ISA-20-1981 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 11. ISA-5.2-1976 (R1992) Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 12. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 15. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 16. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 17. The International Society of Automation (ISA) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 406700-4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 4 of 16 18. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 19. UL 508, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment 20. UL 508A, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels 21. UL 50, the Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 22. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 23. Factory Mutual (FM) 24. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 25. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 26. ANSI C37.90.2 Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 27. NEMA ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 28. NEMA LS1 Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices. 29. UL 1283 Standard for Safety -Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 30. UL 1449 Third Edition Surge Protective Devices 31. All equipment and installations shall conform to applicable Federal, State, and local codes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. The control panels shall be assembled in a UL-certified panel shop, experienced in the assembling of control panels for wastewater and water treatment systems. A submittal of the documentation, that certifies the panel fabrication shop is a UL-certified shop, is required. C. Equipment components and devices shall be UL labeled wherever UL standards exist for such equipment. The completed control panel shall be UL Labeled in accordance with UL 508, 508A or UL 698A, whichever is the applicable UL standard for the installed location of the panel were indicated on the drawings. The panel shall also be UL labeled for the environment in which it is to be placed. A UL label shall be affixed to the inside of the external door by the panel fabrication assembly. Submit a facsimile of the UL label in the submittal information. D. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space is not acceptable. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Two (2) copies of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment and shall be made available to the Contractor and Owner/Engineer. B. Shipping groups shall be designed to be shipped by truck, rail, or ship. Indoor groups shall be bolted to skids. Accessories shall be packaged and shipped separately. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 406700-5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 5 of 16 C. Within (5) five days after shipment of all equipment, Manufacturer shall ship all software, supplied under this Section of the Specifications, by Registered Mail or Approved Courier, to the Owner's Representative, with a copy of the Shipment Manifest. D. Visible shipping damage to any portion of a shipment shall be assumed to have also damaged the surrounding portion. The visibly damaged and the surrounding panels shall be returned to the Manufacturer's UL 508 facility, for examination and damaged equipment replaced, followed by a Witnessed Test of the returned portion, as specified in Paragraph 2.07, at no expense to the Owner. E. Equipment shall be installed in its permanent finished location shown on the Drawings within seven (7) calendar days of arriving onsite. If the equipment cannot be installed within seven (7) calendar days, the equipment shall not be delivered to the site, but stored offsite, at the Contractor's expense, until such time that the site is ready for permanent installation of the equipment. F. Where space heaters are provided in equipment, provide temporary electrical power and operate space heaters during storage, and after equipment is installed in permanent location, until equipment is placed in service. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Manufacturer, at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following electrical material manufacturers are acceptable for all materials not otherwise specifically specified within the contract documents. 1. General Electric Co. 2. Schneider Electric / Square D Co. 3. Rockwell Automation / Allen Bradley B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Materials listed above are not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety. C. Manufactures of all related devices and components shall be as specified elsewhere in the contract documents. 2.2 RATINGS A. The complete control panel assembly shall be UL certified and carry a UL 508A listing for "Industrial Control Panels". B. The control panel shall meet all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406700-6 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 6 of 16 C. Motor controllers, including associated devices, shall be designed for continuous operation at rated current in a 40-degree C ambient temperature. D. For additional ratings and construction notes, refer to the Drawings. E. The service voltage shall be as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The overall short circuit withstand, and interrupting rating of the equipment and devices shall be equal to or greater than the overall short circuit withstand and interrupting rating of the feeder device immediately upstream of the Control Panel, but not less than 10,000amperes at 120 volts single phase. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. General 1. Refer to the Drawings for: schematics, actual layout and location of equipment and components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, components; protective relays, voltage ratings of devices, components and assemblies; and other required details. B. Enclosures 1. General a. Each enclosure shall incorporate a removable back panel, on which control components shall be mounted. Back panel shall be secured to the enclosure with collar studs for wall mounted enclosures, and 316 SS hardware for free standing enclosures. b. All floor -mounted enclosures shall be provided with floor stands of the same materials of construction as the enclosure. c. The enclosure door shall be interlocked with the main circuit breaker by a panel mounted cable driven operating mechanism. d. Back panel shall be tapped to accept all mounting screws. Self -tapping screws shall not be used to mount any components. e. All enclosure doors shall have bonding studs. The enclosure interior shall have a bonding stud. f. Each enclosure shall be provided with a documentation pocket on the inner door. g. Enclosures shall not have factory holes or knockouts, and all mounting tabs are to be welded as part of the enclosure manufacturing process. h. Provide manufacturer's window kits were shown on the Drawings. i. All panels installed outdoors shall have a factory applied, suitable primer and final coat of weatherproof white paint. All stainless -steel panels installed outdoors shall be of 304 or 316 grade materials when painted white unless otherwise shown on the drawings. j. All enclosures shall include provisions for a padlock on doors. k. Overload tables shall be laminated and adhered to the inside of the door. 1. Each enclosure shall have one, UPS powered, 150-watt receptacle labeled "COMPUTER ONLY". in. All enclosures shall be lockable, and keyed alike. n. Were indicated or specified, provide a minimum 18x18-inch foldable shelf mounted no more than 40 inches above finished floor. The shelf to be constructed of the same material and fmish as the control panel. Shelves as manufactured by Saginaw Control and Engineering, Hoffinan or approved equal are acceptable. 2. NEMA 4X for all panels not otherwise defined CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406700-7 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 7 of 16 a. Where an enclosure is not otherwise defined or shown on the Drawing 1) NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel 2) Type 316 stainless steel, body and door 3) Stainless steel continuously hinged 4) Foam in -place gasket S) Single point quarter turn latches (20"x24" and below). All others 3-point latch b. Manufacturers 1) Rittal WM Series 2) EMF Company 3) NEMA Enclosures Company 4) Hammond Company S) Saginaw Control and Engineering 6) Approved Equal 3. NEMA 1 or NEMA IA boxes shall not be used. 4. Malleable iron boxes shall not be used. C. Environmental Controls Enclosure Condensate Heaters a. A self-contained enclosure condensation heater with thermostat and fan shall be mounted inside the control panel, if panel is mounted outdoors or in a non -air- conditioned space. 1) Enclosure heaters shall be energized from 120-volt, single-phase power supply and sized to prevent condensation within the enclosure. 2) Locate enclosure heaters to avoid overheating electronic hardware or producing large temperature fluctuations on the hardware. 3) Enclosure heaters shall have an internal fan for heat distribution and shall be controlled with adjustable thermostats. The thermostat shall have an adjustment range of 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide a circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch within the enclosure. 4) Enclosure heaters shall be Hoffman type DAH or equal. b. Strip heaters may be provided if they are 240 volts rated, powered at 120 volts AC and do not have a surface temperature higher than 60°C. Strip heaters and thermostats shall be as manufactured by Chromalox or equal. 1) Strip heaters shall be Chromalox, Type OT, 1.5-in wide, 240 Volts, single phase, 150 watts, energized at 120 volts, with rust resisting iron sheath, Catalog No. OT-715, Product Code No. 129314. Provide sufficient wattage rated heaters to prevent condensation should the interior temperature of the enclosure drop below the dew point. 2) A control thermostat mounted inside the control Panel shall be Chromalox, Type WR, single stage, Catalog No. WR-80, Product Code No.263177. 3) The strip heater terminals shall be guarded by a protective terminal cover. 4) High temperature connecting lead wire shall be used between the thermostat and the heater terminals. Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded nickel -plated copper with Teflon glass insulation and shall be the product of Chromalox, Catalog No. 6-CFI-12, and Product Code No. 263783. 2. Enclosure Air Conditioner a. Enclosures containing electronic devices or electrical equipment shall have air conditioners that will maintain the internal temperature at or below the equipment rating without violating the NEMA rating of the enclosure. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 406700-8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 8 of 16 b. The panel builder shall provide panel internal heat rise calculations to show that the panel internal temperatures will be maintained below the maximum operating temperatures of the panel components. 1) For enclosures mounted indoors in non -air-conditioned spaces, include an ambient air temperature of 40-degree C and a humidity of 100% non - condensing. 2) For enclosures mounted in direct sunlight, add the appropriate solar heat gain component to the calculation and raise the ambient temperature to 60 degrees Celsius. 3) The calculation shall show all the internal and external heat gain loads and the expected internal temperature rise, in degrees Celsius, above the specified ambient without the air conditioner. Provide a calculation showing the expected temperature rise in degrees C above the specified ambient with the air conditioner running. c. The air conditioner shall have the following features: 1) Use CFC-free R134a refrigerant. 2) Have fully gasketed flanges on all four mounting edges for a watertight seal that maintains NEMA rating of the panel. 3) Thermostatic low temperature control to provide energy efficient operation and prevent over -cooling. 4) EMI/RFI suppressor to minimize transient spikes during compressor on/off cycling. 5) Separated blower -driven evaporator and condenser air systems for closed loop cooling. 6) UL listed. 7) Stainless steel enclosure rated NEMA 4X. 8) Internal corrosion resistant coating and/or galvanized steel components. 9) Low ambient kit. 10) Short cycle protector. d. Manufactures 1) Rittal 2) Cooper B-Line 3) ICE Cube 4) Approved Equal 3. Enclosure Fans a. Fans shall be furnished for soft start starters and AFD's, as required by the manufacturer, to provide air circulation and cooling. Fans shall be controlled by a temperature switch. The fan shall operate only when the drive is "ON" and for a cool -down period after the drive has stopped. Otherwise, the fan shall not run when the drive is "OFF". Louvers, if provided, shall have externally removable filters. The filter shall be metallic and washable. b. Fan motors shall be protected by an input circuit breaker. Metal squirrel cage ball bearing, three phase fan motors with 10-year design life shall be used in the drive design. Plastic muffm fans are not acceptable. Fan power shall be obtained from a tap on the main control power transformer. c. A "loss of cooling" fault shall be furnished. In the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive shall produce an alarm and then, in a predetermined time, be shut down safely without electronic component failure by the temperature switch. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 406700-9 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 9 of 16 d. Redundant fans shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the event of fan failure. 4. Corrosion Protection a. Provide corrosion protection in each control panel with a corrosion -Inhibiting vapor capsule as manufactured by Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC, or Hoffinan Engineering; Model A-HCI. 2.4 PANEL EQUIPMENT A. Equipment Requirements 1. The requirements for equipment, controls, meters, converters, etc, for each Control Panel, shall be as shown on the Panel Schedule herein, the Drawings, panel schematics, and the functions specified in the Loop Descriptions. 2. Where a programmable logic controller is designed as a part of the control panel, the PLC shall be as specified in Section 40 63 00 Programmable Logic Controller System. 3. Where communications equipment is designed as part of the control panel, the equipment shall be as specified in Section 40 66 00 Communications Interface Equipment. 4. All other equipment, controls, meters, converters that are designed as a part of the control panel, shall be as specified in Section 40 78 00 Panel Mounted Control Devices, the Related Work Sections specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, panel schematics, and the functions specified in the Control Descriptions. 5. Furnish installed in the Control Panel, a dedicated Surge Protective Device (SPD) (Type 3), permanently connected, on the load side of the power entrance, as specified in Section 26 43 13 Low Voltage AC Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). 6. Provide a main circuit protective device, DIN rail mounted, to protect the panel equipment. 7. Provide an enclosure intrusion switch for all enclosures containing communications equipment or Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and related equipment. B. Panel Control Device Requirements Control Devices and Indicators a. All operating control devices, indicators, and instruments shall be securely mounted on the panel door. All controls and indicators shall be 30mm, corrosion resistant, NEMA 4X/13, anodized aluminum or reinforced plastic. Booted control devices are not acceptable. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided for remote run indication and indication of each status and alarm condition. Additional controls shall be provided as specified herein and as required by the detailed mechanical and electrical equipment requirements. b. Indicator lamps shall be LED type. For all control applications, indicator lamps shall incorporate a push -to -test feature. Lens colors shall be as follows: 1) Red for ON, Valve OPEN, and Breaker CLOSED. 2) Green for OFF, Valve CLOSED and Breaker OPEN. 3) Amber for FAIL. 4) Blue for READY 5) White for POWER ON. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 406700-10 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 10 of 16 c. Mode selector switches (HAND -OFF -AUTO, LOCAL -OFF -REMOTE, etc) shall be as shown on the Drawings. Units shall have the number of positions and contact arrangements, as required. Each switch shall have an extra dry contact for remote monitoring. d. Pushbuttons shall be as follows: 1) Red for STOP, Valve OPEN, Breaker CLOSE and mushroom Red for EMERGENCY STOP. 2) Green for START, Valve CLOSE and Breaker OPEN. 3) Black for RESET. e. Furnish nameplates for each device. All nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black lettering on a white background, attached with stainless steel screws. Device mounted nameplates are not acceptable. 2. A failure alarm with horn and beacon light shall be provided when required or specified. Silence and reset buttons shall be furnished. Alarm horn and beacon shall be by Federal Signal; Crouse -Hinds, or equal, NEMA 4X for all areas except for NEMA 7 areas, which shall be NEMA 7/4X cast aluminum. 3. Control and Instrument Power Transformers a. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for the entire load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity, and shall be not less than 100VA. b. Control power transformers shall be 120 volts grounded secondary. The primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 2.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting 1. The location of the installed equipment shall be as shown on the Panel Layouts on the Drawings. 2. Each piece of equipment shall be securely mounted to the backplate in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. All mounting hardware shall be from the front of the backplate or side plate with threaded screws. Attaching hardware shall not be installed from the rear of the backplate or side plate. Removal of any piece of equipment shall not require the removal or loosening of any other piece of equipment. 3. Operator interface equipment installed on the door shall be arranged as shown on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. No penetration of the door shall be made except for equipment mounting. Provide adequate clearance between pieces of equipment and door latching mechanisms. B. Nameplates 1. Nameplates a. External CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 406700-11 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 11 of 16 1) Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by 2-1/2-in, Rowmark 322402. Nameplates shall be 316 SS screw mounted to all enclosures except for NEMA 4 and 4X. Nameplates for NEMA 4 and 4X enclosures shall be attached with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/z", or equal. Prior to installing the adhesive nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residue has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. 2) There shall be a master nameplate that indicates supply voltage equipment ratings, short circuit current rating, manufacturer's name, shop order number and general information. Cubicle nameplates shall be mounted on the front face, on the rear panel and inside the assembly, visible when the rear panel is removed. 3) Provide permanent warning signs as follows: a) "Danger- High Voltage- Keep Out" on all doors. b) "Warning- Hazard of Electric Shock - Disconnect Power Before Opening or Working on This Unit" on main power disconnect or disconnects. b. Internal 1) Provide the panel with a UL 508A label. 2) Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification, corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. 3) Front of each PLC I/O module shall have label identifying each individual point interfaced to the module. c. Special 1) Identification nameplates shall be white with black letters, caution nameplates shall be yellow with black letters, and warning nameplates shall be red with white letters. C. Wiring Trough and Terminal Block Installation 1. Space between wiring troughs and equipment shall be such that space for terminal blocks is provided for termination of each conductor or group of conductors before connection to the equipment. Removal of equipment for service shall not leave any exposed conductors hanging unconnected. 2. Install the wiring troughs such that one may be removed without interference from the other. Troughs shall be installed such that trough covers may be removed without cover interference. 3. Install terminal blocks on DIN rail with adequate space for access to the terminal with clear view of the wire identification label. All incoming or outgoing wiring shall enter or leave the panel on terminal blocks. Terminal blocks or wiring troughs shall not be installed on the doors. Provide terminal blocks on side plates / backplates for all door mounted equipment. 4. In no case shall internal and external wiring share a wiring trough. 5. Provide 600 volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 406700-12 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 12 of 16 6. Provide 600 volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 7. Power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage shall be terminated to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap - screw terminal point. 8. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20 percent spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 9. Do not land more than two conductors per terminal point. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating common or ground conductors. 10. Twisted shielded pair or triad cables shall have each individual conductor and shield drain wire landed on individual terminal blocks. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors. 11. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure, if metal, with 20 percent spare terminals. 12. Provided ground terminal blocks for each twisted -shielded pair drain wire. D. Internal Panel Wiring 1. Power and control wiring shall be tinned stranded copper, minimum size No. 14 AWG, with 600-volt, 90-degree C, flame retardant, Type MTW thermoplastic insulation. Line side power wiring shall be sized for the full fault current rating or frame size of the connected device, and as shown on the Drawings. 2. Analog signal wires shall be 600 Volt Class, insulated stranded tinned copper, twisted shielded #16 AWG pair. 3. All interconnecting wires between panel mounted equipment and external equipment shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. Field wiring shall not be terminated directly on any panel -mounted device. 4. All wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number as shown on the Drawings. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end showing origination and destination of each wire. The marking shall be permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar too Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal. 5. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power. 6. All control panel wiring shall use the following color code. a. Black: AC power at line voltage b. Red: switched AC power c. Orange: May be energized while the main disconnect is in the off position d. White: AC neutral e. Orange/white stripe or white/orange stripe: separate derived neutral e. Red/white stripe or white/red stripe: switched neutral CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 406700-13 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 13 of 16 f. Green or green with yellow tracer: ground/earth ground g. Blue: Ungrounded DC power h. Blue/white stripe or white/blue stripe: DC grounded common i. Brown: 480V AC 3 phase - phase A j. Orange: 480V AC 3 phase - phase B k. Yellow: 480V AC 3 Phase - phase C 1. Purple: common for analog signal wiring in. Brown: positive leg of an analog signal E. Field Entrance Internal Wiring 1. Field entrance internal wiring shall be neatly grouped by circuit and bound by plastic tie wraps. Circuit groups shall be supported so that circuit terminations are not stressed. In addition, low signal wiring (millivolt and milliamp) shall be bundle separately from the rest of the control wiring. 2. All field wiring shall be tagged and coded with an identification number. Coding shall be typed on a heat shrinkable tube applied to each end of the wire. The marking shall be a permanent, non -smearing, solvent -resistant type similar to Raychem TMS-SCE, or equal 3. All conduit entering or leaving equipment shall be coordinated, in advance with the panel installer, so that the conduit entrances to the enclosure are directly below the termination area for immediate termination. Conduits shall not enter the top or side of the panel unless approved in writing by the Owner/Engineer. F. PLC / RTU Inputs and Outputs 1. All PLC and RTU Analog inputs and outputs shall be individually fused for each channel. All Discrete inputs and outputs shall be buffered with relays from the field connections. Discrete points shall be fused for each circuit group with no less than one fuse per card. 2.6 PCSI SHOP TESTING A. The entire control panel shall be completely assembled, wired, and adjusted at the PCSI's shop and shall be given the manufacturer's routine shop tests and any other additional operational test to insure the workability and reliable operation of the equipment. B. The operational test shall include the proper connection of supply and control voltage and, as far as practical, a mockup of simulated control signals and control devices shall be fed into the boards to check for proper operation. C. Factory test equipment and test methods shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI, IEEE, UL, and NEMA standards, and shall be subject to the Owner/Engineer's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with minimum 5 years documented experience. Experience documentation shall be submitted for approval prior to beginning work on this project. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-13 406700-14 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 14 of 16 A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Housekeeping pads shall be included for the floor mounted panels as detailed on the Drawings. C Check concrete pads and baseplates for uniformity and level surface. D. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. E. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. Conduit hubs for use on raceway system pull and junction boxes shall be watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. C. Conduits entering a control Panel or box containing electrical equipment shall not enter the enclosure through the top. D. Install required safety labels. 3.4 RACEWAY SEALING A. Where raceways enter junction boxes or control panels containing electrical or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. B. This requirement shall be strictly adhered to for all raceways in the conduit system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect the installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide laminated copies of the Control schematics in each enclosure door pocket. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all circuit breakers, switches, access doors, operating handles for free mechanical and electrical operation as described in manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. Discomlect all connections to solid-state equipment prior to testing. B. Test each key interlock system for proper functioning. C. Test all control logic before energizing the equipment. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-14 406700-15 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 15 of 16 IM410 W-101—ILICII A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the panel. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-15 406700-16 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS CONTROL PANELS Page 16 of 16 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-16 406860-1 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 1 of 8 3Q SECTION 40 68 60 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel to perform the work as defined herein, in the Related Work Paragraph of this Section, and other Specification Sections as specified herein. The service personnel shall be referred to as the Application Services Programmer (ASP). B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain and provide any and all information required from other Divisions, as listed in the related work below, to complete the work under this Section. C. The Contractors ASP shall perform all the work necessary to configure, customize, debug, install, connect, and place into operation all HMI and PLC software specified within this Division and other related divisions. F. The Contractors ASP shall coordinate with the PCSI all scheduling, installation, and startup services. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to any Pre -Submittal Conferences or Work Submittals as defined in section 40 61 00 Process Control Systems General Provisions, the Contractor shall submit the qualifications of the Application Service Provider. No Work Submittals will be accepted until the ASP has been approved by the owner. Submittals received prior to that Approval will be returned un-reviewed. B. Submittal Process 1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Division 1, Section 40 6100, and as specified herein. 2. All electronic submittals shall be submitted in an ISOJEC 26300:2006 or Comma Separated Values (CSV) readable electronic file format on a CD-ROM and an 8 I/z- inch by 11-inch hard copy. PLC Programs shall be submitted in the native export format of the PLC as suggested by the manufacture and as a fully annotated PDF file. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 406860-2 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 2 of 8 C. Submittal Content Submittals shall contain the following: a. Programming Standards 1) Programming standards to be used for both process graphics and PLC logic conventions shall be submitted after the standards workshop. b. Programmable Logic Controller Programming 1) I/O List with register assignments. 2) Diagrams of the process control functions by each strategy. 3) Listing of inputs to the control function. 4) A short narrative of each control strategy. 5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. 6) Cross references of all I/O, showing to which 1/0 modules or software modules, they are in. 7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. 8) An annotated program submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. c. Operation Interface Terminal Programming 1) I/O List with register assignments. 2) Listing of all Operator displays with inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Displays shall be illustrated to show data presentation. 3) Cross references of all I/O, showing to which I/O modules or software modules, they are in. 4) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. d. Human Machine Interface Programming 1) I/O List with register assignments. 2) Displays for each process area including all necessary pop ups. 3) Listing of data points on each display. 4) A short narrative of each control usage. 5) Listing of all Operator inputs and outputs to and from the control function. Any special displays related to the function shall be illustrated. A description of the operation of any display shall be described as it relates to the control function. 6) Cross references of all I/O, showing which software module at each point used. 7) Failure contingencies shall be described in detail. 8) A complete listing of all historical points. 9) Listing of all required configuration files for each SCADA client. 2. Submit a proposed Schedule of Work following the PCSI pre -submittal conference. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Instrumentation equipment and HMI programming shall comply with the following codes and standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. NEMA ICS 1-101 Diagrams, Designations and Symbols 3. ANSI/ISA-5.06.01-2007 - Functional Requirements Documentation for Control Software Applications CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 406860-3 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 3 of 8 4. ISA-TR20.00.01-2001 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27 New Specification Forms in 2004-2005. 5. ISA-5.4-1991 Instrument Loop Diagrams. 6. ISA-5.5-1985 Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 7. ISA-5.1-1984 (R1992) Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 8. ISA-5.3-1983 Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems. 9. ISA-20-1981 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 10. ISA-5.2-1976 (R1992) Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations. 11. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 12. The International Society of Automation (ISA) 13. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 14. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 15. Factory Mutual (FM) 16. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 17. All equipment and installations shall conform to applicable Federal, State, and local codes. B. All work associated with PLC and HMI programming services shall comply with the requirements set forth within the contract documents and as agreed and approved from the standards submittal. All programming is to follow the Owners standards as developed at time of Bid. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall provide verifiable documentation supporting the ASP's qualifications and work history as defined in Section 140 6100 Process Control Systems General Provisions. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Contractors ASP is responsible for providing all applications programming and configuration services to accomplish the control and monitoring functions as described in the contract specifications and drawings. The Contractors ASP shall provide all programming functions including, but not limited to, control strategies and communications for the Plant PCS PLCs and HMI. The Equipment manufacturer supplied PLC systems programming is the respective suppliers' responsibility. The Contractors ASP will obtain from the OWNER copies of all existing HMI and PLC configurations. The Contractors ASP shall also provide all applications programming and configuration services necessary to produce the HMI (graphic displays, reports, trends, historical archive, etc.) as described in the contract specifications and drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide a programming logic warranty as defined in division 1. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 406860-4 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 4 of 8 1.8 SYSTEM FINAL DOCUMENTATION A. Prior to final acceptance of the system and owner training, operating and maintenance manuals covering instruction and maintenance on each type of equipment shall be furnished in accordance with Division 1 and Section 40 6100. B. The instructions shall be bound in three-ring binders with Drawings reduced or folded for inclusion. As a minimum, the following information shall be provided: 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A complete "As Constructed" set of approved shop Drawings. 3. A complete list of the programming furnished. 4. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. 5. Operating instructions which incorporate a functional description of the entire system with references to the systems schematic Drawings and instructions. C. The final documentation shall be new documentation written specifically for this project but may include standard and modified standard documentation. Modifications to existing hardware or software manuals shall be made on the respective pages or inserted adjacent to the modified pages. All standard documentation furnished shall have all portions that apply clearly indicated. All portions that do not apply shall be lined out. D. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed displays, and instructions necessary for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the furnished equipment and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. E. If the Contractors ASP transmits any documentation or other technical information which he considers proprietary, such information shall be designated. Documentation or technical information which is designated as being proprietary will be used only for the design, construction, operation, or maintenance of the System and, to the extent permitted by law, will not be published or otherwise disclosed. F. The requirements for the final documentation are as follows: 1. As built documentation shall include all previous submittals, as described in this Specification, updated to reflect the as -built system as well as any corrections or modifications to the System resulting from the Factory and/or Field Demonstration Tests. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 406860-5 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 5 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT WORKSHOPS AND COORDINATION MEETINGS A. The ASP shall schedule and administer a minimum of one Workshops and Coordination Meetings for the purpose of discussing progress of the work under this Section. The ASP shall fully coordinate with the PCSI and be present for coordination meetings as defined in Section 40 6100. B. The ASP shall make arrangements for workshops; prepare an agenda of discussion items. Notify participants at least one (1) week before scheduled meetings. The meetings shall be held at a location chosen by the owner and shall include, as a minimum, attendance by the Owner, Engineer, General Contractor's project engineer, ASP, and PCSI. 1. The first workshop shall be held in advance of the ASP programming standards Shop Drawing submittal. The purpose of the workshop shall be for the ASP to: a. Summarize their understanding of the project b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives c. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates d. Provide a forum for the ASP and Owner to coordinate hardware and software related issues e. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer. f. The ASP shall bring a draft version of proposed standards shop drawings to the meeting to provide the basis for the Owner/Engineer's input into their development. g. All aspects of the programming effort shall be discussed including but not limited to: 1) PLC and HMI Variable naming conventions 2) PLC memory map conventions 3) Any and all customized or user defined function blocks (DFB) and subroutines. 4) Displays naming for each process area including all necessary pop ups. 5) Display color conventions and overall owner expectations 3.2 TESTS -GENERAL Refer to Section 40 80 00. 3.3 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) Refer to Section 40 80 00. A. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have spaces for data entry, space for sign off by the Contractors ASP and the PCSI, and the following information: 1. Project Name 2. Loop Number 3. Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number 4. Component Code Number Analog System CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 406860-6 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 6 of 8 5. Manufacturer (for Analog system element) 6. Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system) 7. Summary of Functional Requirements: a. Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges b. Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges c. Computing Elements: Function d. Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID) e. Switching Elements: Unit range, differential (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), Preset (AUTO/MANUAL) f. I/O Modules: Input or output Calibrations: a. Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b. Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points c. Controllers: Mode settings (PID) d. 1/0 Modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs for 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling 9. Space for comments 10. Space for signing off by the General Contractor 3.4 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) Refer to Section 40 80 00. 3.5 10-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) Refer to Section 40 80 00. 3.6 TRAINING A. General 1. The cost of Owner training programs shall be included in the Contract price. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related to the System being supplied. The training program shall represent a comprehensive program covering all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the system. 2. All instructors shall be intimately familiar with the operation and control of the Owner's facilities. B. Maintenance Training Refer to Section 40 80 00. 1. PLC/RTU Software a. The training and instruction, insofar as practicable, shall be directly related the System being supplied. The training shall include a field training program consisting of hands-on instruction utilizing the Owners System. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 406860-7 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 7 of 8 b. One 4-hour training session shall be provided for four (4) members of the Owner's personnel on software and hardware operation and maintenance at the Owner's facility. Software training shall provide classroom and hands-on instruction such that a student with experience in process instrumentation can configure the system with no guidance or with only minimal supervision when attempting complex problems. The training shall cover the following subjects as a minimum: 1) System overview covering the basic system design and purpose 2) System hardware covering the specific hardware elements and specific equipment arrangements provided are covered. 3) Equipment orientation in which the student becomes familiar with the operational procedures (e.g., tape load, clear, keyboard, start/stop, and disk load). 4) Specific application configuration instruction shall cover the overall design and implementation of the applications as provided under this Contract. The intent shall be to make the student fully knowledgeable in all aspects of the system provided, along with methods for making additions, modifications, and deletions to the process system. 5) Development of new control loops and strategies. 6) Complete system backup and reload procedures. c. These courses shall not be concurrent with those offered by the PCSI. The above listing is only a guide and is not intended to be complete. 3.7 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS Refer to Section 40 6196 and contract drawings. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 406860-8 APPLICATION SERVICES PROVIDER Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 407050-1 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 70 50 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install instrumentation mounting and support hardware, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Hardware shall include anchor systems, adhesive anchor systems, metal framing systems, and other instrumentation installation mounting and support systems as specified herein with additional requirements as shown on the Drawings or specified within related sections. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Owner/Engineer, in accordance with Division 1, the manufacturers' names and product designation or catalog numbers for each of the types of materials specified and where shown on the Drawings. B. The submittal information, for anchor systems, shall contain manufacturer's specifications and technical data including: 1. Acceptable base material conditions (i.e. cracked, un-cracked concrete) 2. Acceptable drilling methods 3. Acceptable bore hole conditions (dry, water saturated, water filled, under water) 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions including bore hole cleaning procedures and adhesive injection. 5. Cure and gel timetables 6. Temperature ranges (storage, installation and in-service). 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. All products and components shown on the Drawings and listed in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 407050-2 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 2 of 8 3. ASTM E 488-96 (2003); Standard Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements, ASTM International. 4. ASTM E 1512-93, Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond Performance of Adhesive -Bonded Anchors, ASTM International 5. AC308; Acceptance Criteria for Post -Installed Anchors in Concrete Elements, Latest revision. 6. SAE 316 Stainless Steel Grades B. All equipment components and completed assemblies specified in this Section of the Specifications, having a UL standard, shall bear the appropriate label of Underwriters Laboratories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of these materials shall have produced similar electrical materials and equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.6 JOBSITE DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prior to jobsite delivery, the Contractor shall have successfully completed all submittal requirements, and present to the Owner/Engineer upon delivery of the equipment an approved copy of all such submittals. Delivery of incomplete constructed equipment, onsite factory work, or failed factory tests will not be permitted. B. Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Adhesive Anchor Systems. 1. Deliver materials undamaged in Manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and ICC-ES Evaluation Report number. 2. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date, minimizing storage time at jobsite. 3. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with Manufacturer's requirements, including temperature restrictions. 4. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. 5. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 6. Storage restrictions (temperature range) and expiration date must be supplied with product D. Metal Framing Systems 1. Material shall be new and unused, with no signs of damage from handling. 1.7 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 1 year from date of final acceptance of the equipment. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 407050-3 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 3 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ANCHORING SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI Kwik Bolt 3 b. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Torque controlled expansion anchor consisting of anchor body, expansion element (wedges), washer and nut. Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes less than 3/8 inch. 2. All parts and materials shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel and conform to SAE 316 standards. 3. UL 203 Rated. WAW-1 :i9y►IIWllaol 11 to] 9WIM3163tlFlu�� A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. HILTI HIT-RTZ with HIT-HY 200 MAX. b. Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Anchor body with helical cone shaped thread on the embedded end and standard threads on the exposed end, with washer and nut, inserted into Injection adhesive. The Anchor shall be used for anchor sizes 3/8 inch and larger. 2. All parts and material shall be manufactured of 316 Stainless Steel and shall conform to SAE 316 standards. 2.3 U-CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Tyco Unistrut b. B-Line c. Super -Strut d. Approved equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 407050-4 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 4 of 8 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Metal framing system for use in the mounting or support of electrical systems, panels and enclosures, and including lighting fixture supports, trapeze hangers and conduit supports. 2. Components shall consist of telescoping channels, slotted back-to-back channels, end clamps all -threads and conduit clamps. 3. Minimum sizes shall be 13/16" through 3-1/4" 4. Components shall be assembled by means of flat plate fittings, 90-degree angle fittings, braces, clevis fittings, U-fittings, Z-fittings, Wing -fittings, Post Bases, channel nuts, washers, etc. 5. Field welding of components will not be permitted. 6. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all parts shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel and conform to SAE 316 standards. 7. Framing systems for chlorine and ammonia rooms shall be manufactured of structural fiberglass. 2.4 INSTRUMENT FLOOR STANDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. O'Brien Saddlepak b. Channel Track c. Techline Manufacturing d. Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description Floor mount pipe stand for use in the mounting or support of Instrumentation Transmitters. 2. Stand shall consist of a 10 by 10-inch base plate of 1/4 inch steel with a minimum 40-inch-long 2 inch steel tube center welded with a minimum of two 8 inch long gussets fully welded for maximum strength. The base plate shall have slotted mounting holes near all four corners. 3. The stand shall be fully zinc metallized or hot dip galvanize coated. 4. Field welding of components will not be permitted. A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 407050-5 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 5 of 8 a. International Metal Engineering Pte. Ltd b. O'BRIEN VIPAK c. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Pipe stand or structure mounted sunshield for use in the protection of instrumentation from direct sunlight. 2. Sunshield shall consist of a minimum 10-inch overhang with a clear view of the instrument display and working space for service of the instrumentation without removal. The sunshield shall be made of 316 Stainless Steel unless otherwise shown on the drawings. All mounting hardware shall be furnished from 316 Stainless steel materials. Alternate materials if shown shall be Aluminum or fiberglass reinforced plastic with UV inhibitors. 3. All aluminum or stainless -steel Sunshields shall have all edges ground smooth without burs or sharp edges. 2.6 INSTRUMENT HEATTRACED ENCLOSURE A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. O'BRIEN HEATPAK b. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Pipe stand or structure mounted heat traced enclosure for use in the protection of instrumentation from freezing. 2. Freeze protection shall consist of a nonmetallic insulated enclosure specifically designed for instrumentation transmitters and related appurtenances. 3. Enclosure will have easy opening luggage style latches made of stainless steel for easy access to the instrument. The internal portion of the enclosure will have an integral heater with thermostat and hat traced sensing tubing to the process connection. i�i��l� :i�►��f►�Y 111 1: �[e� ►� `I7 y 1�1�[e�� A. Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Tubing 1) Swagelok 2) Parker 3) Approved equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 407050-6 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 6 of 8 b. Fittings 1) Swagelok 2) Parker 3) Approved equal c. Valves 1) Whitney 2) Parker 3) Approved Equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. All instrument air header and branch connections shall be 316 stainless steel materials. 2. All instrument shut-off valves and associated fittings shall be supplied in accordance with the piping specifications and all instrument installation details. Fittings shall be 316 stainless steel. Valves shall be 316 stainless steel. 3. All instrument tubing shall be fully annealed ASTM A269 Seamless 316 grade free of O.D. scratches and having the following dimensional characteristics as required to fit the specific installation: a. 1/4-in to 1/2-in O.D. x 0.035 wall thickness b. 5/8-in to 1-in O.D. x 0.049 wall thickness c. 1-in O.D. x 0.065 wall thickness d. 1-1/4-in O.D. x 0.065 wall thickness e. 1-1/2-in O.D. x 0.083 wall thickness f. 2-in O.D. x 0.095 wall thickness 4. All process connections to instruments shall be annealed 1/2-in O.D. stainless steel tubing, Type 316. 5. All mounting hardware shall be provided of 316 Stainless steel. 6. All tubing shall be supported by stainless steel and installed as per manufacturer's installation instructions. W:1M11 1F.3 Q1_140MV Ili W A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. PANDUIT b. PHONIX CONTACT c. Gardner Bender d. Approved Equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. Cable Ties for securing and supporting of flexible raceway and conductors. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 407050-7 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 7 of 8 2. Self-locking mechanism. 3. Material shall be 304 Stainless Steel unless otherwise directed as shown on the drawings. C. Locations for Use 1. Cable Ties of stainless steel to be used in wet environments, where exposed to process, or when exposed to sunlight 2. Self-locking mechanism. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall install all equipment strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Contract Drawings. B. The location of all devices is shown, in general, on the Drawings and may be varied within reasonable limits so as to avoid any piping or other obstruction without extra cost, subject to the approval of the Owner. Coordinate the installation of the devices for piping and equipment clearance. C. No electrical equipment, Instrumentation or raceways shall be attached to or supported from, sheet metal walls. D. Install required safety labels. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values are specified in manufacturer's instructions. �C�c� Z�7.y11� I�f.�l.1/:� � 11��►[� [��7.�i(.yl� � �`! A. Prior to installation of the anchor systems, the hole shall be clean and dry in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the installation. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 407050-8 INSTRUMENT SUPPORT HARDWARE Page 8 of 8 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 SECTION 40 7100 FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 407100-1 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 1 of 6 A. Furnish, install and test all flow measurement, flow control devices and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings, specified in the Related Work Sections and Divisions, and as specified herein. B. Flow equipment, specified in other Divisions, shall be manufactured in accordance with this Section and submitted as a part of the equipment specified in other Divisions. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. A. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. The submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the meter or relay provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. B. Submittals for equipment specified herein, for other Sections or Divisions, shall be made as a part of equipment submittals furnished under other Sections or Divisions. C. Installation experience documentation shall be submitted for approval with the Section Equipment Submittal D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be constructed in accordance with Division 1 and shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. ISO 2975/VII liquids and BS 5857-2.4 for gases. Transit Time Meters CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 407100-2 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 2 of 6 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 1971. Fluid meters: Their theory and application. 3. ASME PTC 19.2 Pressure Measurement 4. ANSI 1388.1 Pressure Transducers Calibration 5. ISA S37.6 Strain Gage Transducers Potentiometric 6. Calibration AVS 6.2, 6.4, 6.5 Hazardous Areas 7. IEC 79-10 Intrinsically Safe Circuits 8. ANSI 913 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres B. All meters, relays and associated equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar instrumentation equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two (2) years from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Siemens 2. Endress & Hauser 3. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Provide sufficient lengths of Manufacturer's specialty cables for installation of power and signal conductors as provided with each instrument. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 407100-3 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 3 of 6 2. Provide a hand-held programmer, for each transmitter, where full setup is not available for the instrument directly. D. Type 1. Microprocessor based intelligent type. E. Function/Performance: 1. Output: 4-20 mA DC. Output shall be linear for pressure applications. 2. Accuracy: 0.5 percent of span (linear output). 3. Stability: Combined temperature effects shall be less than 0.2 percent of maximum span per 50 degrees F temperature change. Effect on accuracy, due to static pressure changes, shall be negligible. 4. RFI Protection: 0.1 percent error between 27 and 500 MHZ at 30 v/m field intensity. 5. Drift: 0.10 percent per six months for 4-20 mA output. 6. Temperature rating: Suitable for process liquid temperatures up to 70 degrees C and an ambient of 65 degrees C. 7 Pressure rating: 240 PSI if 150 lb. flanges are used; 700 PSI if 300 lb flanges are used. 8. Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without damage to any component. F. Physical: 1. Metering Tube a. Carbon steel with 304 Stainless interiors unless otherwise indicated. b. Electrical Classification: Rating shall be FM approved for the location shown on the Drawings c. Tube Flanges: Match piping AWWA rating of the pipe. Minimum AWWA 150# Flange. d. Tube Liner: Polyurethane or EDPM unless noted otherwise. e. Tube Electrodes: ANSI 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, bullet nosed or elliptical self-cleaning type unless otherwise noted. f. Tube Housing: Meters in below grade, vaults, basements, etc., shall be designed for accidental submergence in 10 feet of water for 24 hours. Meters above grade shall be of splash proof/drip proof design unless otherwise noted. g. Painting: All external surfaces shall be painted with a chemical and corrosion resistant epoxy finish. 2. Transmitter a. Transmitter Enclosure: NEMA 4X. b. Electrical Classification: Rating shall be FM approved for the location shown on the Drawings G. Power Requirements 1. As indicated within the Drawings. H. Options/ Accessories Factory calibration: Each meter shall be factory calibrated, with a copy of the Report delivered with the device and in the O&M manual. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 407100-4 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 4 of 6 2. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded with rings. All materials shall be suitable and not effected buy for the liquid being measured Provide 316 Stainless Steel ground rings unless otherwise recommended in writing from the meter manufacture, electrical bonding wires/straps, and gaskets, etc. are to be installed as directed be the engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with minimum 5 years documented experience 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. All process connections shall be 316 stainless steel tubing, 3/8" minimum, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be of the compression type, 316 stainless steel. C. All conduit entries into the instruments shall use hubs of watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. D. Install stainless steel instrument labels With instrument ID, secured with safety wire. E. All non -loop powered instrument transmitters shall have an approved disconnecting means for power mounted within reach of the transmitter. A. Where raceways enter terminal boxes, junction boxes, or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant, or approved equal. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect equipment installed for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values shall be specified in the manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all equipment for proper range and field conditions, as described in the manufacturer's instructions. B. Any field adjustments required for proper system operation, shall be included in the Final O&M. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 407100-5 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 5 of 6 k*AEI _1M 0=1 1L1001 A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. B. Test each interlock system for proper functioning. C. Test all control logic for proper operation. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 407100-6 FLOW MEASUREMENT Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 SECTION 40 72 00 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 407200-1 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 1 of 6 A. Furnish, install and test all level measurement, level control devices and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings, specified in the Related Work Sections and Divisions, and as specified herein. B. Level equipment, specified in other Divisions, shall be manufactured in accordance with this Section, and submitted as a part of the equipment specified in other Divisions. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. 11lA&II10 u 1 10 M A. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the meter or relay provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. B. Submittals for equipment specified herein, for other Sections or Divisions, shall be made as a part of equipment submittals furnished under other Sections or Divisions. C. Installation experience documentation shall be submitted for approval with the Section Equipment Submittal D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be constructed in accordance with Division 1 and shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 407200-2 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 2 of 6 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 7. Instrumentation Society of Automation (ISA) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. UL 508, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment 10. UL 508A, the Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels 11. UL 50, the Standard of Safety for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 12. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 13. Factory Mutual (FM) 14. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State, and local codes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar instrumentation equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two (2) years from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOAT TYPE LEVEL SWITCHES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Contegra FS-90 2. Flygt Model ENM-10. 3. Endress+Hauser FTS20 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 407200-3 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 3 of 6 1. Provide sufficient lengths of Manufacturer's specialty cables for installation of power and signal conductors as provided with each instrument. D. Type: 1. The switch assembly shall be weighted with anchor and suspended as shown within the installation detail as part of the drawings. E. Function/Performance: 1. Temperature Rating: 0-50 degrees C. 2. Contact Rating: Up to 150V AC/DC and 1 amps AC, 1 amps DC. 3. Contact Arrangement: Form C contact which is field selectable normally open or closed. F. Physical: 1. Contact: Sealed mercury free switch housed in a chemical -resistant polypropylene or Stainless -Steel casing. 2. Switch shall have a rating for the area in which it is installed. 3. Flexible Support Cable: Synthetic four wire cable, minimum 19 AWG wire. 4. Specific Gravity: Match to fluid being measured. G. Power Requirements 1. None H. Required Options/Accessories 1. Provide flexible support cable of sufficient length to ensure no splice or connection is required in the wet well. 2. Provide junction box rated for the area in which it is installed. 3. Provide stainless steel supports/mounting accessories as required. I. Installation 1. Provide All Hardware from the manufacture for the installation as described and shown on the plans. 2. Provide stainless steel wire ties for all cables within the wet well area or exposed to outdoor environments. 2.2 RADAR LEVEL TRANSMITTERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Endress+Hauser FMR20 2. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Principle: To pulse K Band signals form the transducer toward the liquid and receive the echo measuring the time between sending and receiving the pulse signal and proportioning that to the measured liquid depth. D. Type: CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 407200-4 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 4 of 6 1. Bluetooth setup 2. Class 1 Division 1 rated E. Function Performance 1. Function: To sense variable liquid level. 2. Input Power: From transmitter signal wire 4 — 20 mA 24 VDC. 3. Range Capability: 1 foot to 50 feet minimum 4. Beam Angle: 10 degrees or less 5. Shall have integral temperature compensation unit. 6. Accuracy. Current output 1 percent of selected full-scale range. 7. Repeatability. 0.25 percent full scale. F. Physical 1. Mounting: Pipe thread. 2. Antennae shall be shaped to optimize reading accuracy and desired location. G. Options/Accessories 1. Provide stainless steel hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with a minimum of 5 years documented experience 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine the installation area to ensure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. All process connections shall be 316 stainless steel tubing, 3/8" minimum, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be of the compression type, 316 stainless steel. C. All conduit entries into the instruments shall use hubs of watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. D. Install stainless steel instrument labels with instrument ID, secured with safety wire. E. All non -loop powered instrument transmitters shall have an approved disconnecting means for power mounted within reach of the transmitter. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 407200-5 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 5 of 6 A. Where raceways enter terminal boxes, junction boxes, or instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect equipment installed for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check the tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values shall be specified in the manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all equipment for proper range and field conditions, as described in the manufacturer's instructions. B. Any field adjustments required for proper system operation, shall be included in the Final O&M. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. B. Test each interlock system for proper functioning. C. Test all control logic for proper operation. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 407200-6 LEVEL MEASUREMENT DEVICES Page 6 of 6 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 407300-1 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 3A SECTION 40 73 00 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK Page 1 of 8 A. Furnish, install and test all pressure measurement, pressure control devices and appurtenances, as shown on the Drawings, specified in the Related Work Sections and Divisions, and as specified herein. B. Pressure equipment, specified in other Divisions, shall be manufactured in accordance with this Section, and submitted as a part of the equipment specified in other Divisions. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification Section as applicable. Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the meter or relay provides every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. B. Submittals for equipment specified herein, for other Sections or Divisions, shall be made as a part of equipment submittals furnished under other Sections or Divisions. C. Installation experience documentation shall be submitted for approval with the Section Equipment Submittal D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be constructed in accordance with Division 1 and shall include the following information: a. Manufacturer's contact address and telephone number for parts and service. b. Instruction books and/or leaflets c. Recommended renewal parts list d. Record Documents for the information required by the Submittals above. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. ANSI B40.1 Pressure Gauges CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 407300-2 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 2 of 8 2. ASME PTC 19.2 Pressure Measurement 3. ANSI B88.1 Pressure Transducers Calibration 4. ISA S37.6Strain Gage Transducers Potentiometric 5. ISA S37.3 5 Vacuum Gauges 6. Calibration AVS 6.2, 6.4, 6.5 Hazardous Areas 7. IEC 79-10 Intrinsically Safe Circuits S. EEC 79-3 9. 913 Electrical Instruments in Hazardous Atmospheres 10. ISA RP12.1, 4, 6, 10, 11 Weighing Scales 11. ASME PTC 19.5.1 B. All meters, relays and associated equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar instrumentation equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for two years from date of acceptance of the equipment containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Foxboro 2. Rosemount 3. Endress + Houser 4. Siemens 5. Approved equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 407300-3 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 3 of 8 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Provide surge protection for each instrument. D. Type 1. Microprocessor based intelligent type; diaphragm actuated. 2. The instrument shall measure gage pressure. E. Function/Performance 1. Accuracy: Plus, or minus 0.1 percent of calibrated span. 2. Over Range Protection: Provide positive over range protection to maximum process pressure. 3. RFI Protection: 0.1 percent error between 27 and 500 MHz at 20 v/m field intensity. 4. Output: 4-20 mA 5. Stability: Combined temperature effects shall be less than 0.2 percent of maximum span per 50 degrees F temperature change. F. Physical 1. Electrical Classification: Intrinsically safe or explosion proof for Class I and Class H, Division 1 locations. 2. Enclosure: Rated NEMA 4X. 3. Diaphragm Sensor Material: 316 Stainless Steel alloy or Hastelloy C. 4. Sensor Fill Fluid: Shall be suitable for process fluid being measured. When used for chemical metering service, the fill fluid shall be rated for the chemical being measured. G. Power Requirements 1. Loop powered two wire type H. Required Options/Accessories 1. If required to meet the range or suppression/elevation requirements, the Contractor shall supply a differential pressure transmitter. 2. Provide a shutoff valve and mounting bracket for each transmitter. 3. Provide an integral indicator scaled in engineering units. 2.2 MANIFOLDS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. D/A Manufacturing Model GP5TC 2. Parker H Series 3. Swagelok 4. Approved Equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 407300-4 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 4 of 8 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Provide fully machined surfaces. D. Type 1. Type as shown on Drawings or specified else ware. E. Functions/Performance 1. Five or three valve, as shown or specified else ware. F. Physical 1. Manifold shall be of 316 stainless steel. 2. Flanged or Trans -mount as shown on the Drawings. G. Power Requirements 1. None H. Required Options/Accessories 1. Provide one set of spare gaskets. 2.3 DIAPHRAGM SEALS - THREADED A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Red Valve Company, Inc. 2. Ashcroft. B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Rating to match pipe rating. D. Type 1. Thread attached. 2. Welded Metal Diaphragm. 3. Exposed Surfaces - 316 stainless steel. E. Function/Performance 1. Purpose: To protect instruments or gauges from the process medium. 2. A flexible diaphragm shall separate the process medium from the instrument element. Space on the instrument side of the diaphragm shall be completely filled with a suitable silicone or instrument oil. The process pressure is transmitted by the liquid filled system to the instrument element. 3. Filling Screw: Include on all units. 4. Pressure Limits: 1,000 psi. 5. Flushing Connection: Include on all units. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-4 407300-5 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 5 of 8 6. Tubing as required to connect with related instrument. 1/a ID minimum size flexible stainless. F. Physical 1. Top Housing: Carbon Steel, Cadmium plated. 2. Diaphragm: 316 ELC Stainless Steel. 3. Exposed Surfaces: 316 stainless steel. 4. Bolts, Nuts and Plugs: 18-8 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel. G. Power Requirements 1. None H. Required Options/Accessories 1. Provide one set of spare gaskets. 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable 1. Ashcroft Model 1279 2. Ametek/U.S. Gauge Division 3. Wika B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Ratings shall be equal to or exceed the piping. D. Type: 1. Bourdon tube actuated pressure gauge. E. Function/Performance: 1. Accuracy: Plus, or minus 1.0 percent of span or better. F. Physical: 1. Case: Phenolic shock resistant or 316 stainless steel for surface/stem mounting with a pressure relieving back. The case shall be vented for temperature/atmospheric compensation. Gauge shall be capable of being liquid filled in the field or at the factory. 2. Window: Clear acrylic or shatter proof glass. 3. Bourdon Tube: 316 stainless steel. 4. Connection: '/z-in NPT. 5. Gauge size: Minimum 4.0 inches viewable. 6. Pointer travel: Not less than 200 degrees nor more than 270-degree arc. 7. Range: As indicated in the instrument device schedule. G. Power Requirements 1. None H. Required Options/Accessories CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 407300-6 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 6 of 8 1. Shutoff valve: Each gauge shall have a process shutoff valve which can also be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. 2. Special scales: The Engineer reserves the right to require special scales and/or calibration if the manufacturer's standard is not suitable for the application. 3. Gauges listed as liquid filled in the Instrument Device Schedule shall be liquid filled at the Manufacturer's Factory. 2.5 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Static-O-Ring (SOR) 2. United Electric 3. Ashcroft B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. General 1. Ratings shall be equal to or exceed the piping. D. Type: 1. Diaphragm actuated. E. Function/Performance: 1. Repeatability: Greater than 1.0 percent of pressure. 2. Setpoint: Field adjustable and set between 30 and 70 percent of the adjustable range. 3. Dead Band: Adjustable 4. Reset: Unit shall be of the automatic reset type unless noted otherwise on the Instrument Device Schedules. 5. Over Range Protection: Over range protection to maximum process line pressure. 6. Switch Rating: 250V AC at 10 amps; and 30V DC at 5 amps. F. Physical: 1. Housing: NEMA 4X. 2. Switching Arrangement: Single pole double throw (SPDT) unless double pole double throw (DPDT) switches are shown on the instrument device schedule. 3. Wetted Parts: 316 Stainless Steel Alloy, Hastelloy C or Monel diaphragm, viton seals, stainless steel connection port as confirmed compatible with the process fluid by the manufacture. 4. Connection Size: 1/z-in NPT. G. Power Requirements 1. None H. Required Options/Accessories 1. Shutoff Valve: Provide process shutoff valve which can be used as an adjustable pressure snubber. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 407300-7 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 7 of 8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer shall be specialized in installing this type of equipment with minimum 5 years documented experience 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install the equipment. B. Verify that the equipment is ready to install. C. Verify field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Drawings. B. All process connections shall be 316 stainless steel tubing, 3/8" minimum, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Fittings shall be of the compression type, 316 stainless steel. C. All conduit entries into the instruments shall use hubs of watertight, threaded aluminum, insulated throat, stainless steel grounding screw, as manufactured by T&B H150GRA Series, or equal. D. Install stainless steel instrument labels with instrument ID, secured with safety wire. 3.4 RACEWAY SEALING A. Where raceways enter instrumentation equipment, all entrances shall be sealed with 3M 1000NS Watertight Sealant or approved equal. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed equipment for anchoring, alignment, grounding and physical damage. B. Check tightness of all accessible electrical connections. Minimum acceptable values shall be specified in the manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust all equipment for proper range and field conditions, as described in the manufacturer's instructions. B. Any field adjustments, required for proper system operation, shall be included in the Final O&M. 3.7 FIELD TESTING A. Perform all electrical field tests recommended by the manufacturer. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the equipment. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint free rags. Do not use compressed air. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 407300-8 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS Page 8 of 8 3.9 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up and restore damaged surfaces to factory finish, as approved by the manufacturer. If the damaged surface cannot be returned to factory specification, the surface shall be replaced. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 407800-1 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 1 of 12 SECTION 40 78 00 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specifications describes the requirements for panel mounted equipment to be furnished under other Sections of the Specifications as listed in the Related Work paragraph of this Section. B. All equipment described herein shall be submitted and famished as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. No references are made to any other section which may contain work related to any other section. The Contract Documents shall be taken as a whole with every section related to every other section as required to meet the requirements specified. The organization of the Contract Documents into specification divisions and sections is for organization of the documents themselves and does not relate to the division of suppliers or labor which the Contractor may choose to employ in the execution of the Contract. Where references are made to other Sections and other Divisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall provide such information or additional work as may be required in those references and include such information or work as may be specified. A. Submittals for equipment specified herein shall be made as a part of equipment furnished under other Sections. Individual submittals for equipment specified herein will not be accepted and will be returned un-reviewed. B. Submit catalog data for all items supplied from this specification section as applicable with the control panel submittal as referenced in the related work paragraph. The Submittal shall include catalog data, functions, ratings, inputs, outputs, displays, etc., sufficient to confirm that the devices provide every specified requirement. Any options or exceptions shall be clearly indicated. 1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. The equipment in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to the latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted): 1. NEMA/ISCI 109 Transient Over Voltage Withstand Test 2. IEEE Std. 472/ANSI C37.90.2 Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. 3. IEC 255.4 Surge Withstand Capability Tests 4. NEMA/ICS 1 General Standard for Industrial Control Systems. 5. NEMA/ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. 6. NEMA/ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems. 7. NEMA LS 1 Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 407800-2 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 12 8. UL 1449 Forth Edition — Surge Protective Devices B. All equipment shall comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) where applicable. C. Each specified device shall also conform to the standards and codes listed in the individual device paragraphs. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Owner/Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. B. Equipment submitted shall fit within the space or location shown on the Drawings. Equipment which does not fit within the space or location is not acceptable. C. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 2000 certified. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer shall warrant the specified equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one (1) year from date of acceptance of the assembly containing the items specified in this Section. Within such period of warranty, the Manufacturer shall promptly furnish all material and labor necessary to return the equipment to new operating condition. Any warranty work requiring shipping or transporting of the equipment shall be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS AND INDICATING LAMPS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Cutler Hammer 3. GE 4. Square D B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Construction 1. 30mm Diameter 2. Corrosion resistant 3. NEMA 4/4X/13 without booted covers 4. "Finger safe" contact blocks, l0A rating 5. Function indicating colors per NFPA 79 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 6. Engraved corrosion resistant nameplates 7. LED lamps CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 407800-3 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 3 of 12 8. Mode selector switches shall have 1 spare set auxiliary contacts. 9. Indicator lights to be Push -to -Test 10. Potentiometer ratings to match I/O devices connected A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. Entrelec 3. W idmuller 4. Allen Bradley B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN -rail -mounted one-piece molded plastic blocks with tubular -clamp -screw type, with end barriers, dual side terminal block numbers and terminal group identifiers. Terminal blocks shall be rated for 600 volts except for control and instrumentation circuits, or 4-20 mA analog signal conductors. 2. Provide 600 volt rated terminal blocks for any conductor carrying any voltage over 120 volts to ground. 3. Provide 600 volt rated strap screw terminal blocks for any power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers to prevent accidental contact with live circuits. 4. Power conductors carrying over 20 amps, at any voltage shall be terminated to strap -screw type terminal blocks with crimp type, pre -insulated, ring -tongue lugs. Lugs shall be of the appropriate size for the terminal block screws and for the number and size of the wires terminated. Do not terminate more than one conductor in any lug, and do not land more than two conductors under any strap - screw terminal point. 5. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with the protective cover removed. Each terminal block shall have 20 percent spare terminals, but not less than two spare terminals. 6. Do not land more than two conductors per terminal point. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating common or ground conductors. 7. Twisted shielded pair or triad cables shall have each individual conductor and shield drain wire landed on individual terminal blocks. Use the manufacturer's provided bridge connectors to interconnect terminal blocks terminating the shield drain wire conductors. 8. Control circuits, 120 volts and below, and 4-20 mA analog signal conductors shall be terminated with manufacturer's recommended ferrules. Ferrules shall be provided with plastic sleeves. 9. Provide an AC ground bar bonded to the panel enclosure, if metal, with 20 percent spare terminals. 10. Provided ground terminal blocks for each twisted -shielded pair drain wire. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 407800-4 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 4 of 12 �AJWAT/ 19 D1 I .ZIIIj"W A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Panduit 2. Taylor 3. Approved equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. All wiring shall be enclosed in PVC wire trough with slotted side openings and removable cover. Plan wire routing such that no low voltage twisted shielded pair cable conducting analog 4-20 mA signals or communications low voltage analog signals are routed in the same wire trough as conductors carrying discrete signals or power 2.4 DIN RAILS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. Entrelec 3. Weidmuller 4. Allen Bradley B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Standard 35 mm rails shall be made of steel zinc -plated and chromated. Rails shall be 7.5 mm tall minimum and meet standard EN 60715: 2001. 2.5 SIGNAL ISOLATORS, BOOSTERS, CONVERTERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. Acromag Inc. 3. Moore Industries B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. 1. Type: a. Externally powered solid-state electronic type. Loop powered devices are not acceptable. 2. Functional/Performance: a. Accuracy - 0.15 percent. b. Inputs - Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance as required. c. Outputs - Current or voltage as required. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 407800-5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 5 of 12 d. Isolation - There shall be complete isolation between input circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply. e. Adjustments - Zero and span adjustment shall be provided. f. Protection - Provide RFI protection. g. 24 Volt DC power input. 3. Physical: a. Mounting - Suitable for DIN Rail mounting in an enclosure or instrument rack. 4. Options/Accessories Required: a. Mounting rack or general-purpose enclosure as required. 2.6 PANEL DISPLAYS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Precision Digital 2. Red Lion 3. Moore Industries B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Displays shall be as shown on the Drawings or where otherwise specified. D. Design and fabrication: 1. 4-20 mA, ::L 10 V, TC & RTD Inputs 2. Rating: NEMA 4X, IP65 without the use of a separate cover. 3. Shallow Depth Case 3.6" Behind Panel 4. Power Supply: 85-265 VAC 5. Optional features to be supplied: two relays providing form A contacts, software settable at independent values. 6. Output: analog 4-20 mA 7. Display: minimum digit height of 2.5 inches; sunlight readable 2.7 RELAYS AND TIMERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Square D 2. IDEC 3. Potter -Broomfield. 4. Allen-Bradley B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Type: 1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw (form C) except PLC/RTU I/O buffer relays which shall be single pole, (form C), spade plug in type with a transparent dust cover. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 407800-6 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 6 of 12 2. Units shall be of the general-purpose plug-in type. D. Functional/Performance: 1. Coil voltage shall match supply voltage. 2. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the specified control function. 3. Mechanical life expectancy shall be more than 10,000,000 cycles. 4. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation. 6. Solid state time delays when specified and/or required for intended functionality to be provided with polarity protection (DC units) and transient protection. 7. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from .1 second to 4.5 hours. 8. Plug-in general-purpose relay. 9. Blade connector type. 11. Relay sockets are DIN rail mounted. 12. Internal neon or LED indicator is lit when coil is energized. 13. Clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. 14. Operating temperature: -20 to +150 Deg F. 15. UL listed or recognized. E. Ratings: 1. For 120VAC service provide contacts rated 10 amps at 120VAC, for 24VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 28VDC, for electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service. 2. For PLC/RTU input buffer relays, provided a minimum of 5-amp contact rating. For all PLC/RTU output buffer relays, provided minimum 8 amps inductive load rated contacts. 3. W ere PLC/RTU input/output buffer relays are a space constraint Crydom Series One DR optically isolated solid-state relays can be proposed. F. Physical 1. DIN Rail mounting base 2. Screw Terminals G. Options/Accessories Required: 1. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks rated 300 volts and 10 amps minimum. 2. Provide mounting rails/holders as required. 2.8 ANALOG SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTORS (SPDS) A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. AGM Electronics 2. Acromag Inc. 3. Moore Industries 4. Phoenix Contact CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 407800-7 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 7 of 12 5. Emerson EDCO B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Type: 1. DIN Rail mounting for control and termination panels. 2. For loop powered transmitters provided pipe nipple style mounting at the transmitter. D. Minimum Ratings: 1. Peak Surge Current 10 kA 2. Response Time <5 Nanoseconds 3. Voltage Clamp >26 Volts 2.9 POWER SUPPLIES A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 2. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Design and fabrication 1. Converts 120 VAC input to DC power at required voltage. 2. Sized as required by the load. Minimum 2.4 Amp output 3. AC input: 120 VAC +10 percent -13 percent; 47 to 63 HZ. 4. Provision for output failure alarm contact. 5. DIN rail mounting. 6. All Power Supplies shall be redundant pairs. 2.10 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Allen Bradley 2. General Electric 3. Cutler Hammer 4. Square D B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Control Power Transformers 1. Control power transformers shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. Transformer shall be sized for all the load, including space heaters, plus 25% spare capacity, and shall be not less than 100VA. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 407800-8 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 8 of 12 2. Transformer mechanical ratings shall equal the short circuit rating of the circuit breaker or MCP. 3. Control power transformers shall be 120 volts grounded secondary. Primary side of the transformer shall be fused in both legs. One leg of the transformer secondary shall be solidly grounded while the other leg shall be fused. 4. All control power transformers shall have vacuum cast primary and secondary coils using epoxy resin. 2.11 DC UPS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Phoenix Contact 7. Approved Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Design and fabrication 1. Rating: 24VDC, l0A minimum shall provide uninterrupted conditioned power fully loaded conditions for 30 minutes. 2. Description: On line dual track power conditioner and true (zero second transfer time) uninterruptible power supply providing isolation, line regulation and conditioning, using sealed maintenance free batteries and switch mode power supply for uninterrupted power. 3. Operating Temperature: located in indoor conditioned spaces 0 degrees to +40 degrees Centigrade. All other locations -20 to 55 degrees Centigrade 4. Relative Humidity: 5% — 90% without condensation. 5. Input Protection: Independent battery charger fuse and DC fuses. 6. Output Protection: Current limited. 12. Provide an external maintenance bypass switch with an auxiliary contact for each UPS supplied. The switch shall transfer power without interrupting the load utilizing make before brake contacts. The switch shall provide auxiliary contact to monitor switch position. a. Maintenance switch as manufactured by Control Switches International N series, Electroswitch, or approved equal. b. Contacts rated for 120 volts AC and 10 amperes minimum. 2.12 TEMPERATURE SWITCH DIN RAIL MOUNTED A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pentair 2. Hammond 3. Mean Well 4. Approved Equal CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 407800-9 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 9 of 12 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Design and fabrication 1. Contact Rating: 120VAC, 10 Amp normally closed for high temperature detection use, normally open for heating/condensate control use 2. Adjustable range minimum 32 — 100 degrees F 3. Terminals for 14 AWG conductors. 4. DIN rail mounting 2.13 PANEL INTRUSION SWITCH A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: a. Invent Hoffman ALFSWD b. Approved equal 2. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. B. Product Description 1. The contact rated a minimum of 1-amp 24VDC / 120 VAC. 2. Mounting hardware shall be stainless or galvanized steel for attachment to the inner lip of the panel door frame. 3. Contact opens when door is not fully closed. 2.14 NAMEPLATES A. Furnish nameplates for each device as indicated in Drawings. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated impact acrylic, matte finish, black lettering on a white background, not less than 1/1 6-in thick by 1/2-in by 1-1/2-in, Rowmark NoMark Plus or equal, Nameplates shall be attached to the backplate with double faced adhesive strips, TESA TUFF TAPE 4970, .009 X 1/2", no equal. Prior to installing the nameplates, the metal surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with 70% alcohol until all residues has been removed. Epoxy adhesive or foam tape is not acceptable. 2.15 PANEL INTERFACE CONNECTOR (PIC) A. Subject to compliance with the contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Automation Direct a. Model: Zip Port Series 2. Grace Engineered Products, Inc. a. Model: GracePort Series 3. Saginaw Control Engineering. a. Programming Ports CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-9 407800-10 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 10 of 12 B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. For all PLC control panels, provide a Panel Interface Connector (PIC) pass -through unit that will mount to the outside of the control panel to give the capability to interface with the PLC without the need to open the enclosure door. D. Design and fabrication: 1. Interface shall include the following: a. UL Recognized and RoHS compliant b. Housing rating shall match or be of higher NEMA rating than control panel c. Gasket: thermo-plastic (TPE) d. One GFCI power outlet with rating of 120 VAC e. One Ethernet RJ-45 type 10/100 port connected to control panel switch. f. Cover shall be attached with a continuous hinge and lockable. Provide locks for all interfaces keyed alike 2.16 OPERATION INTERFACE TERMINAL A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Modicon Magelis GTU Series] 2. No Equal B. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. C. Environmental 1. Operating Temperature 32 — 113 Degrees F 2. Relative Humidity 10% - 90% Non -condensing 3. Shock (Operating) 15G for 1 lms. 4. NEMA 4 D. Physical 1. Sizes 15 ", 12" 2. ColorTFT LCD Touch screen 3. Cooling fans as required 4. Embedded Operating System 5. Two serial and USB ports 6. Minimum 64mb of battery backed memory 7. Programmable keys as required. 8. Power Supply 120VAC E. Protocol Interfaces 1. Allen Bradley Ethernet/IP 2. Modbus TCP 3. Allen Bradley DF1 4. Modbus RTU F. Minimum Programming Capability CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-10 407800-11 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 11 of 12 1. Provide Manufacturer's software package for programming the OIT. 2. Alarm and event management. 3. Bar graphs. 4. Multicolored background and objects. 5. Multi -level password security. 6. Communicate with a minimum of 4 PLCs simultaneously PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment specified herein shall be installed, field adjusted, tested and cleaned as an integral part of equipment specified elsewhere in these Specifications. END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-11 407800-12 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICES Page 12 of 12 CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-12 408000-1 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 40 80 00 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all testing and commissioning equipment, materials, incidentals and labor, necessary to perform and coordinate the system check-out and startup, commissioning, field testing and overall training for the Instrumentation and Controls System. B. The Contractor's Process Control Systems Integrator (PCSI) shall supervise and/or perform all the requirements of this Section. As part of these services, the PCSI shall include, for those equipment items not manufactured by him, the services of an authorized manufacturer's representative to check the equipment installation and place that portion of the equipment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall be thoroughly knowledgeable about the installation, operation, and maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment. 1.2 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND START-UP A. The Contractor, PCSI, and Instrument Suppliers, as applicable, shall perform the following: 1. Check and confirm the proper installation of all instrumentation and control components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. 2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all existing instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in the startup of the various unit processes. B. Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to perform the test during System checkout and startup. C. Contractor and/or system supplier shall be responsible for initial operation of the instrumentation and control system and shall make any required changes, adjustments or replacements for operation, monitoring, and control of the various processes and equipment necessary to perform the functions intended. D. Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer certified calibration/recalibration (for existing Instruments) reports for field instruments and devices specified herein as soon as calibration is completed. 1. Receipt of any calibration/recalibration certificates shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument. 2. Each calibration/recalibration certificates shall be signed and dated by an authorized representative of Contractor. Three copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to Engineer. 3. A typical form shall be as attached. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-1 408000-2 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 2 of 8 E. Contractor shall furnish to Engineer two copies of an installation inspection report certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both Contractor and the system supplier. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The PCSI shall test all equipment as a system at the PSCI facility prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the PCSI shall be tested as a single fully integrated system. B. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following: 1. Un-witnessed Factory Test (UFT) 2. Witnessed Factory Test (WFT) 3. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT) 4. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT) 5. 10-Day Site Acceptance Tests (SAT) C. Each test shall be in the cause -and -effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied. D. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer -approved procedures, forms, and check lists. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for signing off by the appropriate party after its completion. E. Copies of all the signed test procedures, forms, and check lists will constitute the required test documentation. F. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provides suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. G. The General Contractor shall require the Integration Subcontractor to coordinate all testing with the Engineer, all affected Subcontractors, and the Owner. H. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures. I. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. J. No equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site until the Engineer has received all test results and approved the system as ready for shipment. K. The PCSI shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment and labor to perform the field tests. L. Correction of Deficiencies 1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-2 408000-3 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 3 of 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNWITNESSED FACTORY TEST (UFT) A. The entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure the system operates as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions. B. All panels and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals, specifications, and Contract Drawings. C. During the tests all digital system hardware and software shall have operated continuously or five days without failure to verify the system is capable of continuous operation. The un-Witnessed Factory Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to the start of the Witnessed Factory Test (WFT). 3.2 WITNESSED FACTORY TEST (WFT) A. Before scheduling the Witnessed Factory Test, the PCSI must determine through his own test and quality assurance program that the equipment is ready for shipment to the jobsite. B. All system tests specified for the Un-Witnessed Factory Test shall be repeated. C. The WFT will be a joint test by the PCSI, and the ASP conducted at the PCSI facility. D. After receiving Un-witnessed Test approval, the PCSI shall notify the Engineer and Owner in writing that the system is ready for the Witnessed Test. The Engineer and/or Owner shall schedule a test date within 30 days of receipt of the Ready to Test letter. At the time of notification, the PCSI shall submit any revisions to the detailed test procedure previously approved by the Engineer. E. This test shall verify the functionality, performance, and stability of the hardware and software. The system must operate continuously for 100 hours without failure before the test shall be judged successful. Successful completion of this test, as determined by the Engineer, shall be the basis for approval of the system to be shipped to the site. F. The various tests performed during the Witnessed Factory Test shall be designed to demonstrate that hardware and software fulfill all the requirements of the Specifications and Contract drawings. The test conditions shall resemble, as closely as possible, the actual installed conditions. Any additional hardware or software that may be required to successfully verify system operation shall be supplied at no cost to the Owner. G. The ASP shall be responsible for simulating the I/O signals for any equipment or device communicating with any new or existing PLC through peer -to -peer network by using a computer system with appropriate simulation software to implement the memory map in the protocol as specified elsewhere. Simulating the UO signals by forcing them from the PLC programming software will not be acceptable. H. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Demonstrate the operability of all equipment CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-3 408000-4 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 4 of 8 2. Demonstrate the operability of the control data communication network under anticipated full load conditions 3. 100 percent point check of 1/0, including wiring 4. Demonstrate the ability to monitor and change at least 20 pieces of digital and analog data in each PLC/RIO from the HMI software at all operator workstations 5. Demonstrate the ability to share data between operator workstations and servers 6. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print reports on all network printers 7. Demonstrate the ability for each workstation to read and write to and from designated files from other workstations on the LAN 8. Demonstrate the operability of all mass storage equipment 9. Demonstrate communication failure and system restart 10. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall call for server shutdown and on power restoration the servers shall restart. 11. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a server, workstation, and PLC. 12. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload using a backup; and completely restoring a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 13. Demonstrate the ability of each workstation to print alarm/events on the local printer. During the test for a period of time equal to at least 20 percent of the test duration, the Engineer's and/or Owner's representative shall have unrestricted access to the system. I. All analog control panels shall be included in these tests. J. All deficiencies identified during these tests shall be corrected and retested prior to completing the Witnessed Test as determined by the Owner/Engineer. K. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer at the test site both before and during the Witnessed Factory Test: 1. All Contract Drawings and Specifications, addenda, and change orders 2. Master copy of the test procedure 3. List of equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial number 4. Design -related hardware submittal applicable to the equipment being tested 5. Software license L. The daily schedule during these tests shall be as follows: 1. Morning meeting to review the day's test schedule 2. Scheduled tests and signoffs 3. Evening meetings to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule 4. Unstructured testing period by the witnesses M. All test data and procedures followed during testing shall be logged and certified copies of the logs shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 1044904 408000-5 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 5 of 8 3.3 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS (ORT) A. Prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is ready for operation. The ORT may be witnessed by the Owner/Engineer, fully or partially, at their discretion. B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop -by -loop and component -by -component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications. 1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Input / Output Tests shall be implemented using Engineer -approved forms and check lists. a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check off items with space for sign off by PCSI. 1) Project Name 2) Loop Number 3) Tag Number for each component 4) Check offs/sign offs for each component b. Tag/identification c. Installation d. Termination — wiring e. Termination — tubing f. Calibration/adjustment — Check offs/sign offs for the loop g. Panel interface terminations h. 1/0 interface terminations i. 1/0 signal operation j. Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, and adjusted. k. Total loop operation — Provide space for comments 1. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each VO module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign off by PCSI: 1) Project Name 2) Loop Number 3) Component Tag Number of VO Module Number 4) Component Code Number Analog System 5) Manufacturer (for Analog system element) 6) Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system) 7) Summary of Functional Requirements: a) Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges b) Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges c) Computing Elements: Function d) Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID) e) Switching Elements: Unit range, differential f) (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), Preset (AUTO/MANUAL) g) I/O Modules: Input or output 2. Calibrations: a. Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling b. Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points c. Controllers: Mode settings (PID) CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-5 408000-6 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 6 of 8 d. I/O Modules: Required an actual inputs or outputs for 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. 1) Provide space for comments 2) Space for sign off by the PCSI. 3. The General Contractor shall require the PCSI to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time. 4. These tests do not require witnessing by the Owner/Engineer; however, the Owner/Engineer reserves the right to request the Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically when on site and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test, all documentation shall be submitted as required herein. 3.4 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Prior to startup and the 10 Day Site Acceptance Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the Operational Readiness Tests. The FDT will be a joint test by the PCSI and the Equipment suppliers. B. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed Functional Demonstration Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph -by -paragraph, loop -by -loop, and site -by -site basis. C. Loop -specific and non -loop -specific tests shall be the same as specified under Functional Demonstration Tests except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated. D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided during testing and shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during the tests. In addition, one copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Engineer at the jobsite both before and during testing. E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the tests shall also be followed during the Functional Demonstration Test. F. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before this test shall be considered successful. G. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery 3.5 10-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the PCSI shall be responsible for the operation of the entire system for a period of 10 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant operation, without a single non -field repairable malfunction. B. During this test, plant operating and PCSI personnel shall be present as required. For this test, PCSI is expected to provide personnel who have an intimate knowledge of the system hardware and software. C. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-6 408000-7 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 7 of 8 D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrected by the PCSI. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. E. During this 10 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within 24 hours of occurrence by PCSI personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non -field -repairable malfunction. F. Upon completion of repairs by the PCSI, the test shall be repeated as specified herein. G. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSI shall perform repairs or replacement within 5 days. H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent (99.5%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as: Availability = (Total Testing - Time -Down Time) / Total Testing Time L Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or back-up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above. J. Upon successful completion of the 30-day site acceptance test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and the one-year warranty period shall commence. CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-7 408000-8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS TESTING Page 8 of 8 CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE Tag Number/Loop Number: Loop Description Instrument Location Manufacturer Model Number Adjustable Range Calibrated Range Remarks Installation Per Manufacturer's Requirements? Yes No Installation Per Contract Documents? Yes No If "No", explain Calibration Test: Input Units Output Units Accuracy 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Switch Test Switch Point Upscale Switch Point Downscale Setting Deadband Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 1 hereby certify that the above information is correct and accurate, to the best of my knowledge, and that the instrument indicated above has been supplied, installed, calibrated, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents, unless otherwise noted. Receipt of this Calibration Certification shall in no way imply acceptance of any work or instrument supplied as a part of this Contract. Contractor's Signature: Date: END OF SECTION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number: 104490-8 DIVISION 41 MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 413113 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 1 of 17 A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install an Carbon Adsorption Unit for odor control at a lift station. Test equipment in accordance with this Section. B. The Carbon Adsorption Unit supplier will furnish FRP carbon adsorber vessel, activated carbon media, fan and motor assembly, control panel, mist eliminator, and sound/ weather enclosure as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Daniel Company 2. ECS 3. EcoVerde 4. Approved equal B. Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing: The services of the Manufacturer's technical representative will be provided for pre -startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as specified herein and Section 0175 00 "Starting and Adjusting." 1.03 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. The Carbon Adsorption Unit Manufacturer/supplier shall be one recognized and established in the design, production, and manufacturing of Carbon Adsorption Units. The Carbon Adsorption Unit Manufacturer/supplier shall have at least 10 years' experience in design and fabrication of similar systems as demonstrated by a list of at least 5 successful installations of comparable size (2,500 cfin or greater) at lift stations in the United States, which have been in operation for at least 2 years, with at least a 99 percent hydrogen sulfide removal efficiency. Experience should be specific to process design and not component (FRP vessel) fabrication. References must include valid names and phone contact numbers that can be verified. 1. Provide 3 references for units in the United States, include OWNER name, current phone number, and summary design criteria (air cubic feet per minute, inlet and outlet odor concentrations). 2. Testing firm: Provide odor system testing firm qualifications. B. The Carbon Adsorption Unit Manufacturer will perform factory test on the equipment and provide an independent FRP quality assurance inspection report as follows: 1. Visual inspection to the requirements of ASTM D2563. 2. Barcol Hardness measurements in accordance with ASTM D2583 3. Acetone sensitivity test for all internal secondary bonds. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 1 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 2 of 17 4. Glass content by ignition loss on 3 cutouts in accordance with ASTM D2584 C. Factory test: Provide certified test report for the noise level of the fans in accordance with AMCA 300 and ANSI S1.6. D. Service of Manufacturer's Representative: 1. The Carbon Adsorption Unit Manufacturer must furnish the services of a competent factory technician, who must have had a minimum of 10 years of experience in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment which is being furnished under this Contract. This service is for the purpose of: a. Advise the CONTRACTOR in the proper unloading at the site, setting the skids at the site, duct installation, other installation work, connections to other parts of the Work, initial check out, device calibration, pre -start-up testing, control parameter settings, performance testing and correction of problems occurring during this period. b. Instructing operating personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and care of the equipment. c. For making operation tests of equipment and making recommendations for obtaining the most efficient use thereof. 2. The service representative must be at the Site at any time the Construction Contractor is assembling, setting, aligning, connecting or adjusting and testing the Carbon Adsorption Unit and centrifugal fan, and must direct such work and certify in writing to the Owner that it has been properly installed and operates satisfactorily during acceptance tests. 3. The minimum time required to be on -site for 8 hours/day, not including travel time, is as follows: A minimum of 5 days, 4 trips minimum to perform the services listed below: Manufacturer's assistance to the Contractor to include requirements per subsection 1.02.13: 1 day. b. Manufacturer's certificate of proper installation: 1 day. c. Manufacturer's Training Program: 1 days, up to 8 hours each day. Goal is to provide training to all required personnel on various operational shifts: 1 day. d. Field Testing: 2 days 4. Other Services: a. Certify alignment and proper functioning prior to operation. b. Provide written statement that the equipment has been installed properly and is ready for owner operation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and must include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) vessel seismic and structural calculations, including material property test data. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a registered structural engineer from the same state which the project is located in. b. The vessel fabrication details and materials of the components shall be included in shop drawings, and submitted for approval before fabrication. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 2 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 3 of 17 c. Carbon data sheets. d. Test results, by an independent laboratory, completed within the last 6 months, that indicate that the carbon that is intended to be supplied will meet all the specifications presented herein. e. Furnish within 60 days after Contract execution, a certificate from the carbon Manufacturer certifying that the proposed activated carbon will meet the carbon media specifications. f. Catalog information, descriptions, specifications, layouts, sketches and other information sufficient to clearly and readily demonstrate compliance with all parts of the Specifications and Drawings. g. Dimensional and weight information. h. A list of the five most recent installations where similar equipment by the Manufacturer is currently in service; include contact name, telephone number, mailing address, and the names of the engineer, owner, and installation contractor. Additionally a list of similar installations shall be provided that shows the supplier has experience in carbon adsorption systems in odor control applications demonstrating at least 5 years experience. i. A marked up version of this specification clearly identifying any exceptions or variations being proposed to the specifications. Exceptions or variations will be reviewed but may not be deemed acceptable. j. Manufacturers submitting proposals for equipment that would require changes in the design shall also include detailed information on structural, electrical, mechanical, and other miscellaneous modifications necessary to adapt their equipment to the arrangement shown. Engineer shall be compensated for review of these items. k. Submittal information for the fan: 1). Manufacturer's certified rating data. 2). Certified Shop Drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, and anchor bolt locations. 3). Descriptive literature, bulletins, and catalogs of the equipment. 4). The total weight of the equipment. 5). A complete bill of materials. 6). A list of the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts with Manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc., on list. 7). Complete data on motors, motor starters, nameplate data and controls. 8). Data on noise in accordance with AMCA #300. 9). Description of surface preparation and shop primer and shop finish coating as specified in this Section. 10),Inlet and outlet connection bolt hole patterns. 11). Vibration eliminator data. 12).Results of factory dynamic balance of fan and field check of dynamic balance of fan. Carbon Adsorption Unit 4131 13 - 3 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 4 of 17 13),Inlet vane damper. 14).Motor control schematic wiring diagrams. I. Submittal information for the carbon: 1). Carbon data sheets. 2). Test results, by an independent laboratory, completed within the last 6 months, that indicate that the carbon that is intended to be supplied will meet all the specifications presented herein. 3). Activated carbon Manufacturer's certificate. 4). Delivered carbon specification sheets. 2. Informational submittals a. Resin Manufacturer's certificate listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin shall be furnished with the vessel. b. Activated carbon Manufacturer's certificate. c. Delivered carbon specification sheets. d. Factory test certification. e. Fabricator's Certificate of compliance with fabrication requirements. f. Copy of fabricator's Quality Assurance Program. g. Quality Assurance Inspection. h. QA Inspection Report. i. Certification of Factory Testing. j. A copy of the fiberglass fabrication Quality Assurance procedures intended to be used. k. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. I. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. m. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. n. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current information. o. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 1. 3. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: a. a. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: 1). Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information. 2). Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 0178 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." b. Certificate of Manufacturer's warranty. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 4 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 5 of 17 1.05 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards (latest edition unless otherwise indicated) apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): AWWA Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems C210 ASTM Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass- Reinforced D2563 Plastic Laminate Parts. ASTM Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins. D2584 ASTM Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Activated Carbon D2854 ASTM Standard Test Method for Total Ash Content of Activated Carbon D2866 ASTM Standard Test Methods for Moisture in Activated Carbon D2867 ASTM Standard Specification for Filament -Wound, Fiberglass Reinforced D3299 Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. ASTM Standard Test Method for Carbon Tetrachloride Activity of Activated D3467 Carbon. ASTM Standard Test Method for Ball -Pan Hardness of Activated Carbon. D3802 ASTM Standard Specification for Contact Molded, Glass Fiber Reinforced D4097 Thermoset Resin Chemical Resistant Tanks. ASTM Standard Test Method for Determination of Iodine Number of D4607 Activated Carbon. ASTM Standard Test Method for Determination of Butane Activity of D5742 Activated Carbon. ASTM Filament -Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced D2996 Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe ASTM Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics D3299 ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading D2412 Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel -Plate Loading 2. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) PS 15-69 Custom molded reinforced polyester for chemical resistant process equipment a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) RTP-I. c. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). d. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). e. National Electrical Code (NEC). Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 5 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 6 of 17 f. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA). g. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). h. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). i. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.06 DESIGN CONDITIONS A. All components of the systems shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to which they will be subjected to during normal operation. Compounds with which the materials of construction must be compatible with include, but are not limited to: 1. Hydrogen sulfide 2. Sulfuric acid 3. Other compounds listed in 1.05.13. B. The System shall be suitable to treat a continuous supply of air coming from the odor sources and all equipment must be suited to the operating conditions to which it will be subjected and the various compounds/substances with which they will reasonably be expected to come into contact. The operating conditions, at a minimum, include the following: Parameter Units Requirement Capacity cfm 2,750 H2S Loading (average) my 20 H2S Loading (peak) my 40 Minimum Odor Removal Efficiency % 99.0 or 0.1 ppmv in the outlet, whichever is less strini4ent Inlet air temperature degrees F 40 — 120 Inlet air relative humidity % 30 — 99 Air Pressure atm 0.967 — 1.038 Reactor diameter maximum feet 8 Media bed depth minimumper bed feet 3 Empty Bed Residence Time minimum seconds 3.29 Bed Velocity (maximum) ft/s 55 Pressure drop across reactor (maximum at normal air flow) inches w.c. 6 C. Carbon Adsorption Unit Manufacturer must review lift station configuration and make comments prior to bid on any design modifications required to the wet well to accommodate the supplied Carbon Adsorption Unit dimensionally. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of the Work. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 6 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 7 of 17 B. Contractor shall be responsible for safe transportation, including all freight costs for delivery to the Site, procuring any necessary permits, handling, and open air storage of the vessel, fan, ductwork and other materials purchased as specified in this Section. C. Carbon Adsorption Unit vessel shall be shipped with internal grating and piping installed. The vessel shall be shipped without carbon. D. Manufacturer shall protect all flange faces and the more fragile appurtenances of the sub assemblies, with padding between pieces in order to prevent one piece from impacting with another, and by crating or other means for shipment. E. Duct sub assemblies and vessel shall be unloaded with care and stored in a location where they will be free from damage. Impact of a tool or other heavy object may result in a fracture of the inner lining and affect the service life of the carbon adsorber, duct or equipment. F. Large sub assemblies shall be supported during unloading to prevent excessive deflection and overstressing. G. Suction and discharge ports shall be protected against entry of foreign objects. H. Store equipment and materials so as to keep free from moisture, damage, and deterioration. I. Vessels shall be crated and installed on a shipping skid or saddles for ease of movement and protection during transportation. J. Openings shall be covered to protect flange surfaces and to prevent foreign materials from entering the vessels. K. Vessels and ductwork shall be protected, by padding or bracing, from banding or ropes used in shipment. No chains are to be used to secure any tanks in transportation. L. Vessels shall be clearly marked for any precautions in handling. M. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by Contractor upon delivery to the Site. Contractor shall notify Engineer if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. N. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all materials off ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment supplied meets these specifications and the performances detailed in Paragraph 1.06 of this Section and that it is new and unused, free from defects in materials and/or workmanship. B. Provide Manufacturer's warranty for 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT A. General 1. Provide odor control equipment specified which treat in a single pass the odorous foul air from the contaminated areas. The system shall be designed for continuous and automatic Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 7 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 8 of 17 operation and be capable of manual operation. The adsorber sump drain stream shall be discharged into the lift station wetwell. Access manways shall be provided to allow access to the internals of the vessel. The Odor Control Equipment shall be designed to withstand a temperature differential of 90°F and an ambient temperature of 115°F. 2. The products shall be the end products of one responsible system supplier in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and Manufacturer's services. B. Spare Parts 1. One (1) complete set of gaskets for all covers, pipe duct connections, access manways, and other required system gaskets 2.02 ADSORBER VESSEL CONSTRUCTION A. The FRP adsorber vessel shall be filament -wound, manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3299. The visual defects, per ASTM D2563, shall not exceed Level II on the vessel interior and Level III on the vessel exterior. The resin used shall be Hetron 992 Flame Retardent (FR), or approved equal suitable for continuous exposure to saturated water vapor, hydrogen sulfide gas, and their associated acidic products. A permanent wax containing resin coating, formulated according to the resin Manufacturer's most recent recommendations (or other Engineer -approved method) shall be used for surface protection and to prevent air inhibition of resin curing. Contact molded accessories shall be manufactured in accordance with NBS PS15. The completed vessel shall be translucent until it is gel coated. The final gel coat color shall be selected by the owner. A certificate from the resin Manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin shall be furnished with the vessel. An inner corrosion barrier shall be provided consisting of no less than three laminated layers. The inner corrosion layer shall be resin rich, not to exceed 20 percent plus or minus 5 percent glass by weight, and a minimum thickness of 10 to 15 mils. The inner corrosion layer shall be followed by at least two layers of chopped -strand mat or two passes of chopped roving to a total of 3 ounces per foot. Should the chopped roving technique be employed, the chopped fibers shall be 1/2 inch to 2 inches in length. The total corrosion barrier shall total 100 mils minimum and be 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent glass by weight. 2. The structural aspects of the vessel shall be sufficient to meet recommended requirements, including seismic requirements for all conditions during the design life. Manufacturer shall include with the shop drawings, detailed calculations illustrating the seismic characteristics of the proposed vessels. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a registered structural engineer. 3. In addition to the above requirements, the adsorber vessel shall have an average glass content of 55 percent plus or minus 5 percent by weight per ASTM D2584. 4. Provide non-skid surface for the top of the vessel. 5. Provide FRP handrails for the top of the vessel and an FRP access ladder. 6. Tie -down lugs and lifting lugs shall be integrally molded into the walls of the vessels. 7. The adsorber vessel shall be complete with integral carbon screen support structure, access manways, air inlet connection, air outlet, no -loss discharge stack, pressure differential assembly, a fill connection, a drain connection, sample port nozzles, 316 stainless grounding rod and all necessary accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 8 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 9 of 17 specified within. All exhaust air shall leave the vessel at the top. Provide sufficient access manway so that all internal parts can be easily removed from the vessel. All metal parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel with no metallic parts contacting the carbon except for grounding purposes. 8. Access manway covers shall be airtight at the pressure equal to or higher than the corresponding fan static pressure. The fabrication details and materials of the components shall be included in shop drawings, and submitted for approval before fabrication. 9. Vessel design and airflow configuration shall be furnished to accommodate activated carbon layers. a. Bed requirements: 1). The beds and vessel configuration is to be conductive to easy carbon replacement. 2). The beds shall be supported on a polypropylene screen and fiberglass grating. 3). Screen and grating must be removable through access manways. 4). The grating and its support ledge shall be capable of supporting the load imposed by the depth of activated carbon specified, plus a person load of 250 pounds located anywhere on the grating. 10. Each activated carbon bed shall be grounded with a 316 stainless steel rod to prevent static electricity from accumulating. 11. All cut -walls from tank wall nozzle cutouts shall be reinforced as required by service conditions. Press molded or compression molded flanged nozzles are not acceptable. 12. Ultra Violet Stabilizer: Add to the exterior surface resin coat of fabrications intended for outside service, in the type and amount recommended by the resin Manufacturer. 2.03 ACTIVATED CARBON A. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials shall conform to the latest issue of ASTM D6646. B. Pelletized activated carbon shall be high capacity Cabot Norit Darco H2S LP. The carbon is designed for removing hydrogen sulfide from the air streams and eliminating sewage odors. The carbon shall not contain chemical impregnants. C. The lignite carbon shall have the following product specifications: Parameter Unit Requirement 112S capacity (ASTM D6646) g/mL 0.2 min Moisture % as packed 5 max Apparent density g/cc 0.5 Mean particle diameter min 4 D. The carbon substrate shall be manufactured by Norit with no equal. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 9 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 10 of 17 2.04 INTERCONNECTION DUCTWORK. DAMPER, AND FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR A. Ductwork, flexible connectors, and dampers as indicated on Drawings. Ductwork assembly and design shall be compatible with the fan and vessel. All ductwork shall be FRP and meet the requirements in Section 40 05 36.13 "FRP Pipe and Accessories for Odor Control". B. Ductwork, flexible connectors, and dampers as indicated on Drawings shall be manufactured by the system supplier. Ductwork assembly and design shall be compatible with the fan and vessel. All ductwork shall be FRP. 2.05 MIST ELIMINATOR A. General 1. Unit shall be designed and selected for continuous operation with air containing corrosive and flammable vapors and gases generated from the treatment and conveyance of municipal wastewater. 2. Vapors and gases may be expected to include methane, hydrogen sulfide, chlorine gas, sulfur dioxide, gasoline vapors, ammonia, airborne grease, and water saturated air. B. Spare parts: One (1) filter of each type C. Approved Manufacturer Design shown on the drawings is based on the second named Manufacturer. Costs for structural, electrical, mechanical and all other design and construction changes required to accommodate a design different from those shown on the plans shall be included in bid. 2. Subject to meeting the requirements of the individual specification sections, the integrated systems shall be provided by the selected Manufacturer. 3. All systems shall be supplied by the same Manufacturer. D. Operating Requirements 1. Packing Maximum Pressure Drop: 1.0 in. w,c 2. Droplet Removal: 99% >_ 10 micron. E. Equipment Features 1. The grease filter/demister shall consist of two -stage filter pads housed inside an FRP enclosure. 2. The first pad shall be a woven 316L stainless steel pad for grease and particulate filtration. 3. The second pad shall be a woven polypropylene pad for mist removal. 4. The pads shall be removable for cleaning. 5. The housing shall have a flat FRP laminate door to allow removal and replacement of the filter pads. 6. The housing shall be transitioned and flanged for installation in the foul air ductwork. 7. Flanges shall be drilled and gaskets shall be provided for access door. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 10 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 11 of 17 8. An internally molded bottom collection sump of a depth of at least 2" with a gusseted 3/4" 0 FMPT drain connection to be provided. 9. A differential pressure transmitter with tubing and fittings shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across the unit. The gauge shall be located fixed to an integrally molded bracket mounted to the side of the mist eliminator body and shall be easily accessible and readable. F. Materials 1. Housing: Premium Grade Vinyl Ester Resin FRP with 100mil corrosion liner 2. Grease Pads: ASTM 316L stainless steel 3. Demister Pads: Polypropylene 4. Gaskets: EPDM G. Installation 1. Install grease filter/demister as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the Manufacturer. Contractor shall coordinate direction of pad access prior to approving equipment for fabrication. 2. Provide adequate support for the unit such that there is no strain on the ductwork to which it is connected. 3. Provide access for filter removal. 4. Route the drain pipe to a point of disposal. Contractor to supply p-trap in drain piping per the Manufacturer's recommendation. 5. Permanently mark the differential pressure gauge as recommended by the Manufacturer for filter maintenance. 2.06 CENTRIFUGAL FAN A. The SUPPLIER shall furnish and CONTRACTOR shall install all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and labor necessary to supply, install, test, and place into operation one (1) fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) centrifugal fans and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Provide one (1) fan, rated for the 2,750 CFM with connecting ductwork and appurtenances for isolation are required. C. Manufacturer's Services The system supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the selection of the centrifugal fans with the odor control system and the upstream and downstream foul air and discharge ductwork system. 2. Provide equipment Manufacturer's services at the jobsite for the minimum man -days listed below, travel time excluded: a. At least one trip of one (1) day to check and supervise equipment installation, supervise startup, and supervise testing and adjustments of the equipment. b. One trip of one (1) day to supervise initial startup and operation and to instruct the OWNER's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 11 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 12 of 17 D. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Fans shall be manufactured by Hartzell or NYB. No equal will be acceptable. E. FRP Centrifugal Fan Design 1. Fan housings shall be FRP, centrifugal type, Arrangement 9. 2. Fan wheels shall be FRP, backwardly inclined impeller, non -overloading. 3. Fan housings shall be of a curved scroll design with a minimum 3/4-inch FNPT drain outlet at the lowest point of the scroll. Fan inlet and outlet nozzles shall be flanged. 4. Contractor shall install floor drains nearby fans to collect any condensate within the fan or nearby ductwork. All drains shall have P-traps installed to the correct depth to block pressurized foul air from exiting to atmosphere. 5. Provide gasketed access door bolted to the wheel housing. 6. Provide fan in FRP construction: dual -layer construction shall not be allowed. Surfacing mat shall be resin rich, shall consist of Type C glass monofilament surfacing or Nexus organic fiber, and shall be a minimum of 20 mils thick. Glass content in the inner surface layer shall not exceed 23% by weight. The structural layer shall be composed of chopped -strand mat having a minimum glass content of 30% by weight. The overall glass content of the finished laminate shall be at least 30% by weight. 7. Determine glass content per ASTM D 2584. 8. Laminate thickness shall be at least 1/4 inch. 9. Resin shall be corrosion resistant as defined by ASTM C 581. Medium shall be air containing 0 to 232 ppmv of hydrogen sulfide and 0 to 464 ppmv ammonia gas and saturated with water vapor. Resin layers in contact with the airstream shall contain carbon to allow for control of static electricity. F. Quality Control 1. Premium grade Vinyl Ester Fiberglass construction shall comply with ASTM D 2563, Level H, except as modified herein. Wall hardness shall be at least 90% of the resin Manufacturer's recommended Barcol hardness, with a minimum Barcol hardness of 30, with the resin fully cured. Maximum strain in the laminate shall be 0.001 inch/inch. Maximum air bubble size in the laminate shall be 1/16 inch. Maximum frequency of air bubbles in the liner portion of the laminate shall be 10 per square inch of laminate. 2. Construction shall comply with NIBS Voluntary Product Standard 22 PS 15-69. 3. Fan shall be rated and tested per AMCA 210. G. Shafts 1. Fan shafts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Fan shall have self -aligning grease packed bearings with neoprene shaft seals. Provide OSHA approved weatherproof FRP cover for the drive. H. Bearings 1. Provide two antifriction bearing assemblies. Locate bearings outside the fan housing. One assembly shall be free to float to carry radial thrust only. The other assembly shall carry both radial and axial thrust. Bearings shall be either spherical or tapered -roller type. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 12 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 13 of 17 Bearings subject to radial thrust only shall be single row or double row. Bearings subject to both radial and axial thrust shall be double row. 2. Minimum bearing life per the AFBMA B-10 rating shall be 50,000 hours. Bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated. Provide constant level oilers for oil lubrication. Provide external steel ZERK fittings for grease lubrication. I. Vibration 1. The vibration in any plane measured on the bearing housings shall not exceed 1 mils peak to peak. J. Fan Drive 1. Provide V-belt drive with a rating at least 50% greater than the rated motor horsepower. Provide belt guard conforming to OSHA requirements. K. Motors 1. The motor shall conform to requirements set forth in the Division 26 and specification 26 05 50 — NEMA Frame Induction Motors 600V and Below and shall be installed on an adjustable base. Motors shall operate on 460 volts, 3 phases and 60 hertz. Motors shall be equipped with 120 Volt space heaters and winding thermostat. Motors shall have TEFC enclosures and shall be rated for belt drive. L. Design Criteria and Service Conditions 1. Fan performance and operating conditions shall be as shown below. Ratings shall conform with AMCA 210. 2. Maximum Rated Capacity: 2,750 cfm Differential Head in Water Column (inches w.c.): 10 3. Minimum Efficiency at Rated Capacity: 65% 4. Motor Horsepower (Maximum):10 HP 5. Maximum Noise Level 5-feet From Fan: 95 db Non -overloading from shutoff thru 120% of rated capacity M. Spare Parts 1. Provide the following spare parts for each fan: a. One (1) set of v belts b. One (1) set of bearings 2. Pack spare parts in a wooden box; label with the Manufacturer's name and local representative's name, address, and telephone number; and attach list of materials contained therein. N. Baseplate 1. Each fan and motor shall be mounted on a common rigid base constructed of hot dipped galvanizing steel or epoxy coated carbon steel. The Baseplate shall be grouted and anchor bolted to the foundation. Anchor bolts, washer, and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel. O. Installation Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 13 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 14 of 17 1. CONTRACTOR shall install fans according to Manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. General installation requirements shall be as specified in Division 01. P. Shipping and Handling 1. Shipping and handling requirements shall be as specified in section 1.06. 2.07 SOUND ATTENUATION, WEATHER ENCLOSURE, STACK AND OUTLET SILENCER A. A FRP fan enclosure shall be provided by the system supplier. Construction and performance shall be as follows: 1. Walls shall be vacuum -formed construction with two layers of FRP over a honey -comb core. 2. Resin, liner, color and exterior coating system shall be the same as specified for the adsorber vessel. 3. Enclosure shall have four ventilation louvers installed. 4. Enclosure shall be manufactured so that it can be easily removed for maintenance. 5. Enclosure shall be single -piece construction. No seams or joints are allowed. Bolt - together kit enclosures are not acceptable. 6. Enclosure shall have 2" of sound -adsorb lining on all internal surfaces. 7. Enclosure shall reduce fan noise contribution to 3 dB at a distance of 5 feet. 8. Enclosure system shall have been tested in an NVLAP certified laboratory within the prior 12 months. 2.08 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FIXTURES A. Pressure differential instruments shall be provided and include Magnehelic style pressure gauges allowing determination of the pressure loss in inches of water column across the carbon. The range shall be 0-10 inches of water. Scale shall have 1/10-inch water column divisions. Tubing shall be installed with drip -legs and shut-off valves for draining of condensate. Provide two 1/8-inch pipe thread to tube adapters, and 1/4-inch stainless steel ball valves. Magnehelic shall be Dwyer or equal. Pressure transducer will produce a 4-20mA output signal. Signal will be split via galvanic isolation signal splitter. Provide terminals for signal connection to lift station SCADA system. B. Sampling Ports: Carbon adsorption unit shall have three, 1.5-inch diameter sample ports per media bed (for a dual bed system total of sample ports shall be six) each separated by 9- inches on center and evenly spaced along the height of the carbon bed depth. The ports shall be suitable for extracting carbon samples, and one additional air sampling port above the carbon bed. Provide one grain thief that is capable of extracting a core sample of the in -place carbon through the sample ports. Ports shall be adequate to provide suitable extraction of air samples from the carbon bed and be nonbinding. Each port nozzle shall extend outside the vessel wall and be blocked off with a 1.5-inchball valve. Ball valve shall be schedule 80 PVC. C. Control Panel / Motor Starter — The system shall be furnished with a Local Control Panel. The panel shall be housed in a NEMA 4X, 316SSS free standing enclosure. The Local Control Panel shall control the exhaust fan and be mounted a minimum of 3feet away from the system. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 14 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 15 of 17 1. NEMA 4X SST enclosure with: a. 480V flange -operated main circuit breaker b. 35KA SCCR full panel rating c. Control transformer —120v d. Controls/Contacts/Alarms 1). HOA switch for fan 2). Main power disconnect 3). Red "On" pilot light' 4). Motor Starter for fan a). Size 0 and size 00 motors starters are not allowed. 5). Dry Contacts for: a). Fan Run b). Fan Fail c). Differential pressure switch high d). 3 spare dry contacts 2. Refer to Specification 26 29 86 — Mechanical Manufacturers' control panel (MEMS) for further details and requirements for the control panel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation must be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. Any modification to the structure as a result of requiring different size access door hatchways is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.02 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Functional testing shall be conducted after the installation of the carbon vessels and all appurtenances and the equipment has been operated for a sufficient period to make any corrections or adjustments. B. Each carbon vessel shall be subject to field functional tests under actual operating conditions to determine that operation is satisfactory and in compliance with the Specifications. C. The Contractor will provide, calibrate, and install all temporary gauges and meters, and install all temporary piping and wiring required for the functional tests. D. Functional tests shall include the following: 1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct and proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation. 2. Discharge and Inlet Static Pressure: Measured by system instrumentation or temporary measurement devices. Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 15 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 16 of 17 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTING A. General 1. To demonstrate that the Carbon System furnished is installed and performs in accordance with the Specifications, the Manufacturer shall conduct a performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol submitted at least 30 days prior to testing. 2. Performance test shall not commence until a Performance Testing Plan has been submitted and approved, and functional testing of the overall system (including fan) has been completed by the contractor. 3. The Manufacturer shall provide and maintain, if required, all temporary metering or analytical equipment necessary to measure the various performance parameters. 4. Before performance testing begins, the Engineer and the Manufacturer shall meet and agree upon the procedures and guarantee points to be used. These agreements shall be included in the written Performance Testing Plan submittal. 5. The Manufacturer shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of any performance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and make any parallel determinations during the performance test. Within 30 days after the conclusion of the test period, the Manufacturer shall submit a Performance Test Report, including all field test data, stating the conclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria. B. Conduct performance tests on all carbon vessels under actual or approved simulated operating conditions as described in this Section: 1. Test using actual H2S loading conditions. 2. Testing shall be performed using 112S hand-held monitoring devices located at the inlet and outlets of the carbon adsorber. C. Test Conditions 1. All testing, adjusting, and balancing of the fan shall have been completed and approved. 2. The test shall be conducted over a continuous 4-hour period with sampling and data measurements being evenly distributed over that time period. 3. The actual sample day shall be chosen for low wind speeds and no rain. The intent being that weather conditions must not be poor enough to compromise the validity of the testing. D. Sampling and Data Measurement: during the test period, as a minimum, the following data and measurements shall be taken at the frequency indicated: 1. Overall System Airflow Rate: Every hour. 2. System Pressure Drop in Inches of WC: Recorded hourly. Pressure differential measurements shall demonstrate that differential pressure (pressure drop) across each vessel does not exceed specified limits. a. Carbon Pressure Drop in Inches of WC: Recorded hourly. Pressure across the carbon bed must not exceed 5 inches w.c. 3. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations (ppbv/ppmv) at the inlet to the system: a. Every hour. 4. Hydrogen sulfide concentrations (ppbv/ppmv) at the outlet of the system: Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 16 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 4131 13 CARBON ADSORPTION UNIT Page 17 of 17 a. Every hour. E. Individual performance results will be calculated by: 1. Percent Removal = (Inlet - Outlet)/Inlet. 2. A photographic record of the sampling technique and bed sampling location will be completed for each type of sampling. 3. Sampling Log: A sampling log shall be maintained that will include: 4. Date, time, location, sampler, and results of each sample. 5. A description of each photograph taken 6. Weather conditions for the sampling day. 7. A description of any deviation from the sampling plan. F. Hydrogen Sulfide Sampling and Analysis 1. Hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be completed using a Jerome Model 631 X Analyzer or approved equal with a detection limit of 1ppbv. Continuous inlet and outlet Odalog monitors will be considered so long as the exhaust Odalog monitor is a low range sensor. 2. The analyzer shall be operated in compliance with the Manufacturer's instructions. 3. A copy of the instructions shall be submitted with the final report. 4. The results of the hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be recorded in the sampling log. G. Retesting: In the event the carbon system fails to meet the performance requirements, the Manufacturer shall immediately make the necessary modifications, adjustments, and/or facility expansions to meet these requirements. The steps taken by the Manufacturer shall include, as necessary, design and construction of additional carbon capacity, upgrades to the air distribution system, fan modifications, and replacement of the media, all at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Additional performance tests will be conducted by Manufacturer until the performance requirements are met, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If after two retests the performance requirements are still not met the Owner will have the option, at the Owner's sole discretion, to accept the system as is or obtain a replacement at the expense of the Manufacturer. 3. The maximum time between each retest will be 30 days. H. Demonstration of Performance: Promptly after the performance test is satisfactorily completed, the Owner will give written notice of acceptance the carbon system as complying with the specified performance requirements. END OF SECTION Carbon Adsorption Unit 41 31 13 - 17 Bonds Ranch Lift Station — A City Project Number: 104490 DIVISION 44 POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 1 of 16 SECTION 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A.Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install three (3) new submersible pumps for wastewater pumping service. Test equipment in accordance with this Section. B. The pump supplier will furnish pumps, discharge elbows, guiderails, brackets, anchor bolt layouts and bases, lifting systems, lifting chains, cables and grip eye systems, and power cables as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A.Measurement and Payment 1. Measurement a. Measurement for "Solids Handling Submersible Pumps" shall be per Each. 2. Payment a. The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per Each for the bid item, "Alternate Bid A: Pumps". 3. The price bid shall include: a. Furnishing and installing complete submersible pumping units as specified in the Drawings, including but not limited to: 1) Motor and Cable 2) Pump Inlet Extension and Appurtenances 3) Guide Rail 4) Lifting Apparatus b. All Testing and Analysis c. Manufacturer's Representative 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Flygt. 2. KSB. 3. Any product that is not listed above is considered a substitution and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0125 00. B. Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing: The services of the manufacturer's technical representative will be provided for pre -startup installation checks, startup assistance, training of Owner's operating personnel, troubleshooting and other services as specified herein and Section 0175 00 "Starting and Adjusting." FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 2 of 16 C. The pump supplier will provide all of the maintenance required for the first two year of operation including the following as a minimum: After 60 days operation, run each pump and record voltage and amperage, pull each pump, open the volute and examine the condition of the volute, impeller, and wear rings. Check condition of oil in seal chambers and condition of coating system on motor housing. Inspect the condition of the seal failure system by ohming the circuit. Check the cable and motor insulation condition by Polarization Index (megger reading ratio 10-minute/1- minute). Perform any necessary repair under terms of the warranty. Prepare a field service report. 2. After 12 months operation, repeat the 60-day maintenance requirements and change oil in the seal chambers. D.Testing: Each pump and motor will be performance tested at the factory. All pumps must be tested with motor cables to be supplied with the pumps. Three copies of Certified Test Reports, including actual test records, must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to shipment of the equipment. 1. Performance Test: a. Each pump will be tested for performance at the factory to determine the head vs. capacity, and power input to the submersible pump motor for the full speed at which the pumps are specified and shown on a certified performance test curve as continuous functions throughout the pump's performance range. The motor and cable on each pump must be tested for moisture content or insulation defects. After the test, the pump cable end must be fitted with a shrink -fit rubber boot to protect it from moisture or water. Tests of models, prototypes or similar units will not be acceptable. b. Performance tests must be run in accordance with the test code for Rotodynamic, Submersible pumps of the Standards of Hydraulic Institute, latest edition, with performance guarantees for Flow, Head, and Efficiency and the rated Duty Point 1 as provided in the schedule herein. c. Performance test Acceptance Grade: 1B. 1) Efficiency: rl = - [10 * (1— P/10) + 7]% a) Where: (1) q = Efficiency in negative percent tolerance. (2) P = Maximum pump input power in kilowatts over operation range. E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative: 1. The pump manufacturer must furnish the services of a competent factory technician, who must have had a minimum of 10 years of experience in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment which is being furnished under this Contract. This service is for the purpose of: a. Ensuring proper installation and adjustment of the equipment (proposed pump and motor setup). b. Instructing operating personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and care of the equipment. c. For making operation tests of equipment and making recommendations for obtaining the most efficient use thereof. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 3 of 16 2. The service representative must be at the Site at any time the Construction Contractor is assembling, setting, aligning, connecting or adjusting and testing the pump and motor assembly, and must direct such work and certify in writing to the Owner that it has been properly installed and operates satisfactorily during acceptance tests. 3. The minimum time required to be on -site for 8 hours/day, not including travel time, is as follows: A minimum of 2 days (2 trips minimum) to perform the services listed below: a. Verify correct pump and motor installation. b. Pump startup and testing. c. Troubleshooting. d. Personnel training. 4. If additional time is required, the factory representative must be available regardless of the number of trips and time required for each activity. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals must be in accordance with Section 0133 00 "Submittals" and must include: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop Drawings must include a complete description of the equipment offered including control and mounting system. Shop Drawings must include catalog cuts and pertinent engineering data required to fully evaluate the equipment. Characteristic curves must be submitted with the Shop Drawings showing the capacity, head, efficiency, and brake horsepower throughout the full operating range of the pump. Complete specifications on the control equipment including a list of optional features must be submitted with the Shop Drawings. Submittal data must be in such form and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the data. b. Equipment manufacturer must submit a list of 20 similar installations which have been in satisfactory operation for at least 2 years in the state where the Project is located with the Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings not including this required information will not be accepted. c. Equipment manufacturer must furnish evidence of having an authorized fully staffed and stocked service facility within 120-mile radius of the Project Site as well as having 24- hour parts availability. d. Pump Characteristic Curves (capacity, head, efficiency, recommended operating range indicated on curves, motor curves, varying speed curves from 50 to 100 percent, required NPSH and brake horsepower throughout the operating range of the pump from shut off to maximum specified operating capacity. Characteristic curves must have the capacity plotted as abscissa and the operating head, brake horsepower, efficiency and required NPSH plotted as ordinates). e. Pump Data Sheet: Fill out and submit with the Shop Drawing submittal the information requested on the Pump Submittal Data Sheet (Attachment A). £ Motor Shop Drawing: 1). Complete dimensional data including the following: a). Dimensional outline drawings. b). Maintenance clearances. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 4 of 16 c). Locations and sizes of lubrication connections, vents, drains, etc. 2) Data Sheet: Fill out and submit with the Shop Drawing submittal the information requested on the Motor Submittal Data Sheet (Attachment B). 3) Complete nameplate data. 4) Allowable time periods between starts or starts per hour. 5) Subtransient reactance and X/R. 6) Speed -torque curve at 100 percent and 80 percent of rated voltage. 7) Speed -current curve at 100 percent and 80 percent of rated voltage. 8) Acceleration time at 100 percent and 80 percent of rated voltage. 9) Thermal damage curve (I2t). 10) Locked rotor withstand time. 11) Rotor inertia. 12) Schematic and interconnection diagrams. 13) Bearing descriptions. 14) Motor weights. 15) Temperature curve for Thermal Switches and temperature at which winding thermostats activate. 16) Detailed conduit layout for motor. 17) Dimensions of terminal box. 18) Motor insulation voltage rating. 19) Results of tests. 20) Measured locked rotor current and torque and locked rotor power factor. 21) Motor no load data (i.e., amps, power factor, etc.). 22) Instruction manual. 23) Component Bill of Materials. 24) Manufacturer's cut sheets for all major equipment, winding thermostats, Bearings, terminal blocks, etc. Clearly identify on cut sheets the exact model number of equipment being provided. g. Shop Drawings must be supplied to ensure successful installation and operation of the control system and must consist of all the following: 1) Sufficient detail to evaluate compliance with these specifications. 2) A detailed component list including manufacturer and catalog number. 3) A custom wiring diagram for this specific application to facilitate and insure accurate field connections to the control panel by electrical installation personnel. 4) A description of operation for the control system. 5) An enclosure dimension print. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 5 of 16 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Manuals must be prepared by the equipment manufacturer per Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data (MOD)." 3. Submit Certified Test Reports for factory performance tests. 4. Resume: Submit the manufacturer service representative's resume prior to installation. The resume must show the minimum experience requirements as required herein. 5. Submit Equipment Installation Reports from the motor manufacturer and pump manufacturer. Data sheets supplying the following information for the pumping units must be submitted with the Shop Drawings. a. Pump: 1) Make and type of pump. 2) Speed, rpm. 3) Horsepower at rated head, HP. 4) Total weight (pump and motor), lb. 5) Rated capacity and head on pump curve. 6) VFD curves. 7) Manufacturer recommended and allowable operating range. b. Motor: 1) Make and type of motor. 2) Brake horsepower of motor, HP. 3) Locked rotor current at full nameplate voltage, amps. 4) Full load current at full nameplate, voltage. 5) Motor voltage phase, phase. 6) Motor service factor. 7) Insulation class and temperature rise at service factor load. 1.5 STANDARDS A.The applicable provisions of the following standards (latest edition unless otherwise indicated) apply as if written here in their entirety: 1 2. 3 American Water Works Association (AWWA): AWWA C210 I Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI B 16.1 I Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Fittings ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A479 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 6 of 16 ASTM A532 Standard Specification for Abrasion -Resistant Cast Irons ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A582 Standard Specification for Free -Machining Stainless Steel Bars 4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Steel Designations. 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards (ANSI/HI): a. All applicable sections for Centrifugal and Rotodynamic Pumps. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. National Electric Code (NEC). 8. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 10. International Standards Organization (ISO): ISO 9001:2015 1 Quality Management systems — Requirements 1.6 DESIGN CONDITIONS A.The pumps must be designed to handle raw unscreened wastewater on a continuous duty basis. Pumps must be guaranteed free from excessive cavitation and/or vibration throughout the system performance range. The pumps must meet the operating conditions as specified and must be designed to operate on a continuous duty basis. Design conditions for the pumps at each lift station must be as specified. B. The presence of abrasives, rags, large solids and stringy materials must not be considered as abnormal, unanticipated or abusive with regard to the equipment operation or warranty. C.Pump manufacturer must review pump station configuration and make comments prior to bid on any design modifications required to the wet well to accommodate the supplied pumps dimensionally and hydraulically. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Vendor is responsible for delivery of the pump, motor, and accessories, f.o.b. to the Project Site or to such storage site as may be designated by the Owner or Construction Contractor, in good condition and undamaged. B.Unloading and storage of the equipment must be the responsibility of the Construction Contractor who must inspect the equipment for apparent damage. Equipment which is found to be damaged must not be accepted until properly repaired or replaced by the Vendor. C. The pumps, motors, and accessories must be stored indoors. When this equipment is stored indoors, it must never be in direct sunlight and the indoor temperature must be maintained as directed by the manufacturer. Contractor is responsible for providing the indoor storage facility or enclosure. 1.8 WARRANTY A.A prorated warranty on parts and service must be provided on all installed equipment and components for a period of 7 years starting 6 months after acceptance of delivery or after written notice of startup acceptance by the Engineer, whichever occurs first. The prorated warranty must FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 7 of 16 cover all costs associated with replacing/repairing the defective parts including but not limited to diagnoses, parts, labor, and freight at the following percentages: 1. 0-24 Months: 100 percent. 2. 25-39 Months: 50 percent. 3. 40-59 Months: 25 percent. 4. 60-84 Months: 10 percent. B.A full parts and services warranty must be provided on all installed equipment and components for a period of 24 months following acceptance of delivery or 12 months after written notice of startup acceptance by the Engineer, whichever occurs first. The warranty must cover all costs associated with replacing/repairing the defective parts including but not limited to diagnoses, parts, labor, and freight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP A.Each pump, motor, and cable assembly must be furnished in one integral unit, factory assembled by the pump manufacturer. Pump must be listed as explosion proof (Class I, Division I) by Underwriter Laboratories (UL) or by Factory Mutual (FM). B. The pump design must be such that the pumping unit will be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on its mating discharge connection. The discharge connection must be permanently installed in the wet well. The pump must be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts or other fastenings to be disconnected. The guide mechanism must be a non -sparking design and UL or FM listed. Connection and disconnection of the pumping unit from the discharge piping must not require personnel to enter the wetwell. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow must be accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump. A sliding guide bracket must be an integral part of the pump unit. C.Parts, such as the stator casing, casing, sliding bracket, and base coupling must be constructed of ASTM A38 Class 35B cast iron. Surfaces in contact with the pumped liquid must be protected by a factory -applied epoxy coating per AWWA C210 or must be stainless steel. External bolts, nuts, and fastening hardware must be 316 series stainless steel. D.The pump and motor unit must be suitable for continuous operation at full nameplate load while the motor is completely submerged, partially submerged or totally non -submerged. 2.2 PUMP CONSTRUCTION A.Volute and Wear Rings: 1. Pump Volute: The pump volute must be constructed of ASTM A536 (65-45-12) ductile iron or ASTM A48 Class 35 cast iron. A wear ring must be provided in the volute which is constructed of ASTM-532 Alloy III Type A white cast iron with a minimum Brinell hardness of 200 and is compatible with the impeller material. 2. For the Flygt N and KRT D-Max impeller, wear rings are not required. The volute must have a replaceable suction cover insert ring and must be cast of ASTM A532 (Allow III A) 15 percent chrome cast iron and provide effective sealing between the multi -vane semi - open impeller and the volute housing. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 8 of 16 B.Impeller: The impeller must be constructed of ASTM-532 Alloy III Type A white cast iron and must be of the enclosed, non -clogging, dynamically balanced, capable of passing 3-inch diameter spherical solids. The impeller must have a slip fit onto the motor shaft and drive key and must be fastened using the manufacturer's standard technique. The impeller wear ring must be 304 stainless steel, with a minimum Brinell hardness of 350 and must be of a compatible material to the volute wear ring. 2. For the Flygt N and KRD D-Max impeller, the impeller must be of ASTM A532 (Alloy III A) 15 percent chrome cast iron, dynamically balanced, semi -open, multi -vane, back swept, screw -shaped, non -clog design. The leading edges of the impeller must be hardened to Re 60 and the volute clearance must be readily adjustable by the means of a single trim screw. The impeller must be locked to the shaft, held by an impeller bolt and must be coated with alkyd resin primer. C.Shaft: 1. The pump shaft must conform to one of the following: a. ASTM A479 Type 410 Stainless Steel. b. ASTM A582 Type 416 Stainless Steel. c. ASTM A276 Type 420 Stainless Steel d. ASTM A276 Type 431 Stainless Steel. 2. Carbon steel shafts or shafts with sleeves of any type are not acceptable. The shaft must be one piece construction without joints or stubs attached. All shafts must be dynamically balanced and must be amply sized to minimize shaft deflection. Shaft overhang must not exceed 2.5 times the shaft diameter. D.Mechanical Seals: Each pump must be equipped with a double mechanical seal of the cartridge type or a balanced tandem -type design, running in an oil reservoir. The upper and lower faces of the rotating portion of the seal must be made of tungsten carbide or a high -quality silicon carbide. The two faces must be held in contact by multiple springs or bellows to ensure uniform face following of the rotating faces against the stationary faces. The entire seal must be mounted within the oil chamber. The lower stationary seal face must be made of tungsten carbide or a high -quality silicon carbide. 2. The seals must require neither routine maintenance, nor adjustment, and must not be damaged when the pump is run dry. When required, seal oil inspection must be achieved without disassembly of the pump. The seal must not require the pumped liquid as a lubricant. 3. All metal parts must be 316 stainless steel. E. O-Rings and Fasteners: All mating surfaces of the pump and motor must be machined and fitted with Buna-N 0-rings where watertight sealing is required. Sealing must be accomplished by the proper fitting of the parts and not be compression or special torque requirements. All external screws and fasteners must be made of 316 stainless steel. F. Bearings: The impeller and motor shaft for each pump must be suspended on two permanently lubricated ball bearings that are designed by the manufacturer. The motor bearings must be sealed and permanently lubricated with high temperature grease. The minimum L10 bearing life FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 9 of 16 must be 50,000 hours at any usable portion of the pump curve. Provide bearing life calculation at the pump's rated points as indicated in the Schedules. 2.3 MOTOR AND CABLE A.The motor must be housed in either an air or oil filled chamber, watertight enclosure. The motor must conform to NEMA design Class B, and incorporate minimum Class H insulation material to withstand a continuous operating temperature of 180 deg C (356 deg F) and provide a Class B Temperature Rise. The pump and motor must be capable of handling liquids with a maximum temperature of 40 deg C (104 deg F). The motor must be capable of sustaining up to 10 evenly spaced starts per hour. The motor must be capable of operating in dry or partially submerged conditions for extended periods without damage. B. The motor cooling system, if required, must be a self-contained closed loop cooling system or open system using pumped media for cooling. The motor must be cooled via a high purity mineral oil or water/glycol cooling medium circulated through a jacket surrounding the air -filled motor cavity. The cooling medium must be circulated by an impeller mounted on the pump/motor shaft. The cooling jacket must surround the entire motor including the top and down the length of the motor. The cooling medium circulation impeller must cause the cooling fluid to move through the jacket from which it picks up heat from the motor. This heat is then directed into the internal heat exchanger that transfers the heat to the pumped liquid. The heat exchanger must be located below the sealing chamber. It must be provided with a labyrinth design channel system such that sufficient contact time is maintained in the heat exchanger to allow for continuous pump operation without overheating. Cooling system must enable the pump to work continuously at rated output regardless of whether the motor is above or below the surface of the liquid, including operation of VFD where pump may be run continuously at lower levels. C. The nameplate motor service factor must be at least 1.15. The motor shaft must match the pump shaft material. The motors must be 460-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hertz. Lead wires must be suitable for operation in oil. The motor must be provided with Klixon motor thermal switches embedded in the windings to protect the motor from burnout due to excessive heating. Inrush on starting must be no more than allowed by NEC Code Letter F for motors 100 HP and larger, and no more than allowed by NEC Code Letter G for motors less than 100 HP. Each motor must be suitable for use in a NEC Class 1, Division 1, Group D location and be UL or C.S.A. listed. D.Motor must be rated inverter duty for operation on a variable frequency drive and must comply with NEMA MG-1. Motor manufacturer must provide a letter certifying that the motor is compatible with the variable speed drive. E. The electrical cable entrance to the motor must be provided with positive strain relief to prevent leakage or pullout of the cable in the event that a force is accidentally placed on the cable during the raising or lowering of the pump. The design of cable entry must preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. Cable entry must consist of a single cylindrical elastomer or Buna-N grommet, flanked by stainless steel washers all having a close tolerance fit against the cable's outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by the body containing the strain relief function separate from the function of sealing the cable. One spare set of cable seal accessories must be provided. The entry cable system must be warranted as described in Paragraph 1.08, Warranty. F. Wire leads entering the junction box chamber and motor must be separated by a terminal board, which must isolate the interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Alternately, the junction box chamber must be sealed from the motor with a poured epoxy seal with bared conductor to prevent wicking. The assembly must provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the same entry seal. Sufficient cable must be supplied to extend from the FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 10 of 16 motors to the pump control without splicing. Each pump must be equipped with adequate cable to be routed from the termination junction box to the pump without any splices at a minimum. The power cable must be sized according to NEC and ICEA standards and also meet P122- MSHA approval and this classification must be embossed on the cable. The cable entry junction chamber must be isolated from the motor by a terminal board. G.The junction chamber, containing the terminal board, must be sealed from the motor by elastomer compression seals (O-ring). Connection between the cable conductors and stator leads must be made with threaded compressed type binding post permanently affixed to a terminal board each with an individual o-ring to prevent liquid passage. H.The motor, cable, and electrical controls must be sized, furnished, and installed so that the motor must never exceed the nameplate rating at any point on the pumping curve. I. Provide stainless steel cable strain relief on each cable at wet well roof slabs. J. All electrical cables must be bundled together into a single unit to ease operator handling of the cables. The bundled cables must be outfitted with three single loop support grips. One support must be used to restrain the cable at the surface while the pump is in the normal operating position. One support must be placed on the pump end of the bundled cables and one support (upside down) at the center of the span for the bundled cables. K.Pump Monitoring and Control System 1. The Pump Manufacturer shall supply an integrated pump monitoring and controls system containing the following sensors, components, and functions: a. Thermal switches in stator windings, one per motor phase b. Leakage detector in seal leakage chamber c. Provide a manufacturer's relay to process the signal from the thermal overloads and seal failure proves as required by pump manufacturer. Relay to be installed in the VFD by electrical contractor. 2.4 DISCHARGE ELBOW AND GUIDERAIL BASE A.A discharge elbow and guiderail base must be provided for each pump and must be permanently installed in the wetwell. The discharge elbow and base must be epoxy coated ASTM A48 Class 35B Cast Iron or approved equal. Stainless steel anchor bolts embedded in concrete in accordance with pump manufacturer's layout and recommendations must secure these connections. B. Series 316 Stainless steel anchor bolts embedded in concrete (pump station bottom slab) in accordance with pump manufacturer's layout and recommendations must secure these connections. Anchor bolts embedded only in the base's grout will not be accepted. MINK0111I1104:7\I A.The guiderail sizing and design are the responsibility of the pump supplier. Systems utilizing guide cable are not acceptable. B.Guiderails must be at minimum 2-inch diameter for pumps 2 through 40 HP and 3-inch diameter above 40 HP. C. The guiderails must be continuous Schedule 40 ANSI 316 stainless steel designed to resist corrosion in sewage applications. Any joints in the rails must be reinforced from within if pipe is FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 11 of 16 used; continuously full depth welded, ground smooth, and treated to resist corrosion. The rail system must be of adequate length to extend from the lower guide holders on the pump discharge connection to 6 inches below the top of the wet well. The system must be mounted with 316 stainless steel hardware. Guiderails must be non -sparking type. Intermediate and upper guiderail brackets must be provided by the pump supplier to achieve the arrangement shown on the Drawings. D.The guiderail support system must be designed and furnished by the pump manufacturer, to adequately support the guide rails. Intermediate guiderail support spacing must be as recommended by the pump manufacturer, at a minimum of 12 feet. The system must be mounted with 316 stainless steel hardware. 2.6 LIFTING CHAINS AND CABLE HOOKS A.The lifting chain sizing and positive recovery system design is the responsibility of the pump supplier. B.Each pump must be fitted with a 316 stainless steel chain or cable of adequate strength and length to permit raising and lowering the pump for inspection or removal. The chain or cable must be long enough to extend from the pump in its operating position to 4 inches above the top of the wet well. C.Lifting chains must be constructed of 316 stainless steel. D.Each pump must be fitted with shackles and a 316 stainless steel chain of adequate length and strength to permit raising and lowering of the pump from its operating position to 4-inches above the top of the wet well. The chain associated hardware must have a minimum working load limit of 1-1/2 times the total pump/motor/chain weight. E. Furnish and install three 316 stainless steel hooks at the top of the wet well to hold the chain, pump chain, and pump cables, when the pump is in service. 2.7 SLIDING COUPLING SYSTEM A.A sliding guide bracket must be an integral part of the pumping unit or securely attached thereto. The guide bracket must be designed such that no strain is placed on the pump or guide rails. The volute casing must have a machined discharge flange to automatically and firmly connect with the discharge connection, which when bolted to the floor of the sump and discharge line, will receive the pump discharge connecting flange without the need of adjustment, fasteners, clamps or similar devices. Discharge base elbow and base plate must be supplied by the Pump Manufacturer. B. The pump sliding coupling system must be designed so that the downward force of the machined mating flanges must shear away rags, hair, or other debris that would prevent a uniform watertight seal. No portion of the pump unit must bear directly on the floor of the wet well. The pump body and slide coupling mating faces must be bronze against cast iron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Installation must be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Any modification to the structure as a result of requiring different size access door hatchways is the responsibility of the Contractor. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 12 of 16 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Upon completion of installation of the equipment, an acceptance test to verify the satisfactory operation of each unit must be conducted. Contractor must provide the services of authorized representative to conduct all field tests. The test must be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer. The unit must be checked for excessive noise, vibration, alignment, general operation, ease of removal, etc. All automatic and manual controls must be tested to verify that they function in accordance with the requirements. Verify that drive equipment operates without being overloaded. The unit must perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by the Owner. 3.3 SCHEDULES PUMPING CONDITIONS Pumps 1, 2, Future Pumps and 3* 4, 5, and 6** Rated Capacity at Duty Point 1, (gpm) 2083.2 2083.2 fullspeed) Rated Head at Duty Point 1, (ft) 156 105 fullspeed) Maximum Operating Head, (ft) 155 125 fullspeed, within POR Minimum Operating Head, (ft) 115 90 fullspeed, within POR Net Positive Suction Head Available @ Normal 32.79 32.79 Lift Station Water Elevation, ft Net Positive Suction Head Available @ Minimum 28.39 28.39 Lift Station Water Elevation, ft Motor Voltage 480V 480V Maximum Motor Horsepower, (HP) 200 200 Maximum Motor Speed, (RPM) 1800 1800 Minimum Speed (% of max rated) 60% 60% *Pumps were sized based on a force main design by Westwood Professional Services. **Pump conditions for Future Pumps 4, 5, and 6 are provided for reference only. FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 0 o O O M N O O II�aUmv t- Md d -U0 0W 0 cn L 0 > on 1 1 11 C Q Q V++ L I LL 0 O U Q0 1 en .. O.Q�T -... t CUD 77 � C, 7 �7717 = - d rw_ N 00 I I U I - �_ a � 0 I Jo fl- a I I 11 I I 0 0 1 1 0 m d' Ln N 11 0 0 � 11 mV r V) f0 ama 11 11 N N LL I---- °� k =LL --- ----_-_- -s __-s- -_- o 0 I 1 r 0 I I I I I 1 � I i I o M N O Il M N O N M N O 04) pe8H :)iweuAa leiol 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 15 of 16 ATTACHMENT A SUBMITTAL DATA SHEET Submit the following data with Shop Drawings for each size of Pumping Unit: Submersible Pumps Location of Pumps (To be changed by Engineer) Item No. Description Pump Numbers (To be Filled by Engineer) 1 Make and Type Design 2 Rated Speed 3 Casing Material 4 Impeller Diameter and Material 5 Max. Impeller Diameter for Casing 6 Diameter of Suction Flange 7 Diameter of Discharge Flange 8 Shutoff Head 9 Diameter of Shaft at Impeller 10 Maximum Brake Horsepower 11 NPSH Required at Rated Head 12 NPSH Required at Minimum Head 13 Suction Specific Speed 14 Specific Speed Motor Data Item No. Description Pump Numbers (To be Filled by Engineer) 1 Rated Brake Horsepower 2 Rated Full Load Speed 3 Full Load Efficiency 4 3/4 Load Efficiency 5 Full Load Power Factor 6 3/4 Load Power Factor 7 Maximum Thrust Rating 8 Locked Rotor KVA 9 Frame Size 10 Enclosure Type FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 16 of 16 11 Locked Rotor Amperes (LRA) at rated voltage 12 NEMA Starting Code Letter Weight Item No. Description 1 Complete Pumping Unit Adjustable Frequency Drive Item No. Description 1 Manufacturer 2 Model 3 Dimensions (L x W x H) 4 Horsepower Rating 5 Amperage Rating 6 Voltage Rating END OF ATTACHMENT A FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 44 42 56.04 SOLIDS HANDLING SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS Page 14 of 16 END OF SECTION FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. Bonds Ranch Lift Station A TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT City Project Number: 104490-1 Revised November 25, 2025 APPENDIX GC-4.01 Availability of Lands GC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions GC-6.06.D Small Business Compliance GC-6.07 Wage Rates GC-6.09 Permits and Utilities GR-01 60 00 Product Requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 GC-4.01 Availability of Lands CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 PENDING EASEMENT ACQUISITION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 GC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 801 Cherry Street, Suite 2800 + Fort Worth, Texas 76102 + 817-735-7300 + FAX 817-735-7491 www.freese.com TO: Amanda Johnson, PE CC: Lauren Nobles, PE; File FROM: Russ Springer, PE, Matthew Davis, PE SUBJECT: Geotechnical Investigation DATE: 11/14/2025 PROJECT: FTW23662 — Bonds Ranch Lift Station QC: D. Wade Anderson, PE PROJECT DESCRIPTION OF T 11 5.• .6 ..d....................'... Of MATTHEW JOSEPH DAVIS ..- 156738 �� 1114 S/ONAL IiA 11 /14/2025 FREESE AND NICHOLS, INC. TEXAS REGISTERED ENGINEERING FIRM F-2144 This report summarizes the results for the geotechnical investigation for the lift station, gravity sewer line, and force main associated with the Bonds Ranch Lift Station in Fort Worth, Texas. This work was provided as part of FNI project number FTW23662, authorized by the contract with the City of Fort Worth. A summary of the geotechnicaI-related items of the project are summarized below in Table 1. Table 1— Project Summary Project Location: Lift Station: 11400 Morris Dido Newark Road, Fort Worth, Texas Pipeline: Along Morris Dido Newark Road between the intersections of Bonds Ranch Road and Tranquil Acres Road in Fort Worth, Texas (refer to Vicinity Map, Figure 1) Proposed Improvements: • Composite 12.0-MGD Lift Station and appurtenances o Wet well founded around elevation 722.5 • Generator pad • Pre -cast electrical building • Two flow meter vaults • Concrete access drive and driveway • 1600 LF of 16-inch force main • 5950 LF of 21-inch gravity main This investigation was conducted to aid in the design of the proposed lift station foundation and appurtenances, and was performed according to the following scope: • Drill exploratory borings at the project to obtain samples for field observation, testing, and classification; • Perform laboratory tests on selected samples to determine soil classification and other pertinent engineering properties of the subsurface; • Evaluate and utilize the collected data to develop foundation, subgrade treatment, and subgrade preparation recommendations for use during design; and Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 2 of 14 • Prepare a summary technical memorandum to document the investigation, findings, analysis, and recommendations. This technical memorandum has been prepared based on our current knowledge and understanding of the project. Significant changes in the design of the proposed improvements described in this document may require modification of these recommendations. This memorandum presents the results of the geotechnical investigation and analysis in a direct and abbreviated manner and is not intended to serve as a detailed geotechnical report. SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING The subsurface exploration consisted of drilling seven (7) exploratory soil borings. The borings were drilled with a truck -mounted drilling rig (CME 75) at locations selected by FNI. The borings were drilled dry using hollow stem augers. Sampling was conducted within the borings using a seamless, steel tube sampler (Shelby Tube) with occasional split -spoon samples collected during Standard Penetration Tests (SPT). An NX-size core barrel was used to extract samples of rock, and the Texas Cone Penetration (TCP) tests were also performed to evaluate the consistency/hardness of the limestone and marl encountered in situ. The boring schedule is summarized in Table 2. Table 2 - Boring Schedule Boring ID Date Drilled Approx. Depth Comments LS-2501 3/12/2025 40' LS-2502 3/11/2025 40' PL-2501 3/12/2025 20' PL-2502 3/12/2025 15' PL-2503 3/11/2025 15' Lift Station Lift Station Pipeline Pipeline Pipeline PL-2504 3/11/2025 15' Pipeline PL-2505 3/11/2025 35' Pipeline The boring locations are presented on Figure 2 — Boring Location Map. The borings were staked in the field using a handheld GPS. Boring location coordinates are included on the boring logs for reference. Boring elevations for LS-2501 and LS-2502 were interpolated from survey data collected for this project. Boring elevations for the pipeline borings (PL-2501 through PL-2505) were obtained using existing Lidar data that is available from the Texas Geographic Information Office (TXGIO) DataHub. The provided coordinates and elevations should be considered accurate only to the extent implied by the technique used in their determination. Laboratory testing was performed on samples selected from the borings to allow for material classification in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and to evaluate pertinent engineering properties of the subsurface materials. Test results are reported on the individual boring logs and test reports included with this memorandum. Testing included: Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 3 of 14 • Atterberg limits • Percent passing No. 200 sieve (P200) • Moisture content • Unit dry weight • Unconfined compressive strength • Particle size analysis (Gradation) Boring logs were prepared from the field logs and laboratory test results. These boring logs represent a generalized interpretation of the stratigraphy encountered within each boring. Stratigraphy lines shown on the logs correspond to the approximate boundary between strata. In situ, this transition can be, and is often, gradual. The borings logs are included with this memorandum along with a key to the symbols and terms used on the logs. GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Geology and Stratigraphy The Dallas Sheet of the Geological Atlas of Texas indicates the project site is located near the mapped contact between the Kiamichi and Goodland Limestone and Walnut Clay, undivided Formations. Both the Kiamichi and Goodland Limestone and Walnut Clay, undivided formations are composed primarily of Limestone and contain varying amounts of Marl, which weather to create expansive, residual clays. Our interpretation of the data indicates that the site is likely located in the Goodland Limestone and Walnut Clay, undivided formations based upon visual inspections, test results, and knowledge of the local geology. Table 3 — Geologic Summary Geologic Formation: Kiamichi Formation Generalized Description: The Kiamichi Formation consists of black to dark gray shale with subordinate light gray to light grayish brown sandstone and limestone interbeds. The shale is fissile, relatively soft, and contains organic matter. Limestone and sandstone occur as thin but relatively hard interbeds within the shale. The sandstone is fine grained and cross bedded. The limestone is bioclastic and nodular. Kiamichi Formation residual soils are typically fat clay with varying amounts of gravel and cobbles derived from the limestone and sandstone beds. Geologic Formation: Goodland Limestone and Walnut Clay, undivided formations Generalized Description: The Goodland Limestone formation consists of white to light gray limestone with subordinate interbedded dark gray shale and marl. The limestone has irregular or nodular bedding, is often fossiliferous, and is relatively hard. The shale and marl are difficult to distinguish but are fissile, relatively soft, and occur as either thin irregular intercalations around limestone nodules or beds ranging from less than an inch to several feet thick. Residual soils derived from the Goodland Limestone formation are typically yellowish -brown lean clays with varying amounts of sand and gravel to cobble -sized fragments of limestone. The Walnut Formation is composed of gray limestone and interbedded dark gray shale. The limestone is bioclastic, massive to thickly bedded, bioturbated, and is comparatively hard rock. The limestone often forms Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 4 of 14 hard ledges and caprocks at the surface. The shale interbeds are fissile and relatively soft. The formation contains an increasing amount of sand with depth, grading into dark gray, bioturbated argillaceous sandstone near the base of the formation. The site stratigraphy for the lift station appears consistent and is composed of high plasticity clays (CH) with varying amounts of gravel overlying Goodland and Walnut limestone. The clays are highly expansive materials (residual marl). The depth to limestone varied from 2 feet to 6 feet. A summary of the generalized stratigraphy for the lift station is provided in Table 4. The ranges listed contain the limits within the designated stratigraphy. Reference to the borings logs should be made for more details specific to the materials and subsurface transitions observed within each boring. Table 4 — Generalized Stratigraphy — Lift Station Stratum Depth Range' Description Groundwater Dark brown to brown to yellow -brown, very stiff FAT CLAY to FAT CLAY with GRAVEL to GRAVELLY FAT CLAY (CH) 1 0-6 None 63_<P200<_87,56<_LL<_67,33_<PI <_43 Light to dark gray, slightly weathered to unweathered 2 6'-40' LIMESTONE None 4.5<_UC:5307.3tsf 1. Depth range measured from existing ground surface The stratigraphy along the pipeline alignment varied at each boring location. In general, weathered rock or residual soil materials overly weathered to unweathered limestone at depths of 0 to 15-feet. Boring PL-2501 encountered weathered marl at the ground surface and extended for 5.5 feet until transitioning to slightly weathered to unweathered marl that continued until slightly weathered to unweathered limestone was encountered at a depth of 9 feet and was present until the boring completion at a depth of 20 feet. Boring PL-2502 encountered sandy lean clay to a depth of 2 feet before weathered limestone was encountered, the limestone transitioned to slightly weathered and unweathered limestone at a depth of about 13 feet and continued to the boring completion depth of 15 feet. Boring PL-2503 encountered fat clay with varying amounts of gravel to a depth of 6 feet before encountering alternating beds highly weathered to weathered marl and limestone that continued to a depth of 11.5 feet when the material transitioned to be primarily slightly weathered marl to the completion depth of 15 feet. Boring PL-2504 encountered gravelly lean clay to a depth of 4 feet before transitioning to highly weathered to slightly weathered limestone that continued to the termination depth of 15 feet. Boring PL-2505 encountered weathered limestone that continued until alternating beds of slightly weathered to unweathered limestone and marl were encountered, these alternating layers continued until silty sand was encountered at a depth of 26 feet and continued to the boring completion depth of 35 feet. Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 5 of 14 Groundwater Groundwater observations were made during the drilling operations and shortly after completion of drilling. Water was generally not encountered in the borings at the time of drilling except for boring PL-2503 where groundwater was encountered at a depth of 2 feet below the ground surface.. End of day drilling 1.8 feet below the ground surface. This pattern of groundwater accumulating at levels higher than the initial seepage is common in the Eagle Ford formation. The occurrence of groundwater can vary due to many factors, such as seasonal changes, site topography, surface runoff, the layering and permeability of subsurface strata, utilities, and other factors not evident at the time of this investigation. A detailed groundwater study would be required to accurately evaluate potential long-term groundwater levels and fluctuations. ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS Expansive Soil The site clays are highly expansive and will shrink and swell as fluctuations in moisture occur. Moisture fluctuations occur due to seasonal cycles but are also influenced by drainage conditions and site grades, landscaping, irrigation practices, vegetation, and groundwater. The total magnitude of shrink/swell movements is difficult to predict due to the large number of variables affecting this behavior. Due to the sensitive nature and criticality of continued operation of the proposed lift station, design tolerances for shrink/swell movements should be on the order of 1 inch or less. An estimate of the potential expansive soil movement was made using a variety of sources, including the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Method 124-E published by TxDOT, laboratory testing, engineering judgment, and experience. The estimated soil movement of existing conditions at the surface, or PVR, is summarized in Table 5. Table 5 — PVR Estimate Estimated PVR: 2 inches — Lift Station 2 inches or less — Pipeline Condition: Dry to Moist Condition Active Zone: Approx. 6 feet (depth to limestone) These values are not an exact determination of movement and are only an indication of the potential movements due to shrink and swell of soil from seasonal moisture fluctuations. Actual movements may be significantly larger than estimated due to inadequate side grading, poor drainage, ponding surface water, and/or leaks in utility lines. Significant changes to existing site grades can also alter actual PVR movements by changing the thickness of the expansive soil and/or altering the depth of the active moisture zone. Force Main and Gravity Main The proposed 16-inch force main and 21-inch gravity mains will be installed using a combination of open -cut excavation and trenchless construction methods. The typical depth to the top of pipe will be between 5 to 10 feet below the existing ground surface. At a depth of 5 to 10 feet below Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 6 of 14 existing grade, the force and gravity mains are generally anticipated to be founded within the slightly to highly weathered limestone and/or marl. If the force and gravity mains are founded in the slightly to highly weathered limestone and/or marl, the PVR would be anticipated to be 1 inch or less. Although not encountered in any of the borings, it is possible for zones of deeper highly plastic and expansive soils to be present along the alignment. For this reason, the pipe joints may need to be designed to accommodate differential vertical movement. Alternatively, removal of the highly plastic soils encountered at the bearing depth of the pipe and replacement with compacted granular materials or flowable fill can also be used to reduce this movement. For removal and replacement, backfill materials below the pipe zone may comprise either gravel, crushed stone, or flowable fill. For pipe depths less than 15 feet to the top of the pipe, cohesionless aggregate pipe embedment compacted as described in the Earthwork section is typically suitable for use. The pipe embedment should extend from bottom of pipe to the top of the pipe plus 12 inches. Deeper pipe depths typically use flowable fill materials to limit pipe deformation, which can increase with depth; however, flowable fill materials are also suitable for use at shallower depths, if required. The granular embedment should be placed and compacted as specified in the Earthwork section for the pipe material. The native clay soils from the excavated area are suitable for backfill above the pipe envelope in non -load bearing areas; however, some settlement of the clay backfill materials should be expected. Pipe trench backfill above the embedment and beneath pavement sections and load bearing areas should consist of Structural Fill material. Performance criteria for the flowable fill are provided in the Earthwork section, as well. Flexible connections are recommended at subsurface wall penetrations for pipeline structures (e.g. junction boxes, manholes, etc.), particularly where the bottom of the pipe and structure foundation bear at elevations differing more than a few feet. Differential movement between the pipe and structure will result in increased risk of shearing at the pipeline to structure interface, thus the design will need to account for this movement. Prior to placing any bedding, embedment, or backfill materials, existing loose fill, debris, and similar unsuitable materials should be removed from within the excavated area. If unsuitable materials are encountered at the pipeline bearing depth, then these materials should be replaced as discussed above. In general, if the depth of unsuitable materials is greater than about two feet or if the affected length becomes excessive, the geotechnical engineer should be notified to evaluate the field conditions and provide alternative recommendations. Standard excavation equipment should be sufficient for the residual clay materials, and some of the weathered limestone; however, rock teeth may be necessary where less weathered, harder limestone is encountered. Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 7 of 14 Shoring for all excavations will need to be tight and should be braced as excavation proceeds. Walers and bracing will be required to limit horizontal deflections. Frequent monitoring of the horizontal movements of the shoring system will be required. The shoring system will need to extend a minimum of 1-foot above grade to prevent surface water runoff from entering the excavation. The design of the shoring system should account for surcharge loads from heavy equipment operating immediately adjacent to the excavation as discussed in the Lift Station section below. A sloped excavation can also be used in lieu of or in addition to shoring and sheeting if the space allows. The design of the temporary excavation should be completed by an engineer licensed in the State of Texas, preferably a local engineer familiar with the soils in this area and will need to be provided as part of the contract documents. As required by Texas State law, the excavation design and maintenance are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Attention is drawn to OSHA Standards 29 CFR —1926 Subpart P for guidance in the design of such systems. Trenchless Installation The proposed force main alignment will include a crossing below a creek located between borings PL-2501 and the lift station borings, LS-2501 and LS-2502. The depth of the trenchless crossing is not specified at this time but based on the borings drilled nearby, the trenchless installation is expected to be performed in the weathered to unweathered limestone and/or marl. Although groundwater was not encountered in borings PL-2501, LS-2501, or LS-2502, groundwater may be encountered while installing the force main under the creek. Groundwater level should be expected to vary with the creek water level. Lift Station The Lift Station will include a wet well that will extend approximately 30 feet below the ground surface slab. The bottom slab of the well will serve as a mat foundation to support the wet well and the overlying slab. The top of the light gray to gray limestone and marl is at elevation 738.3 and 744.7 feet (based upon ground surface of elevation 748.3 feet in Boring LS-2501 and 752.7 feet in LS-2502). The mat foundation will therefore be supported within the limestone and/or marl where a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 5,000 pounds per square foot (psf) may be used for a mat foundation on a properly prepared subgrade. The excavation for the Lift Station will penetrate through the overburden soils and the weathered limestone stratum. The walls of the wet well will be rigid and will be designed for an at -rest earthen pressure. The limestone is a rigid material and depending upon the excavation distance from the wet well wall and the excavated face of the limestone and marl, the wall backfill will have some arching influence between these two surfaces. The closer the excavated face to the wall, the more influence the arching impact and the less the lateral pressure to the constructed wall. Also Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 8 of 14 providing significant lateral load to the subsurface wall is hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater; there is no arching for the water. We have assumed that the excavation into the limestone will extend 5 feet beyond the wall of the wet well, and soil backfill will be a sandy clay (CL), a clayey sand (SC), or sand (SP, SM), a liquid limit of 35 or less, a plasticity index between 8 and 15, and free of organics. An approximate angle of internal friction of 27 degrees and a wet unit weight of 128 pounds per cubic foot have been assumed. It is also assumed that the backfill will not be drained. The recommended backfill material is similar to Freese and Nichols Class 4 Earth Fill material. The lower portion of the backfill around the Lift Station will likely be flowable fill which can be used for as much of the backfill as practical. For design of the lateral loads, it is recommended that the earthen pressure from soil backfill as stated above be used which will provide a wall design suitable for other conditions should future site work, excavations and subsequent backfill occur that may not incorporate flowable fill or other higher strength materials. The equivalent fluid pressures (EFP) for the undrained condition and applying the above -stated soil criteria for backfill results in the following EFP for the Lift Station: Table 6. Lateral Earth Pressures (Structural Fill) The at -rest pressure coefficients were not factored for overconsolidation. As part of the structural design and stability analysis, a 250 psf surcharge load should also be considered to account for construction traffic. The predominant factor to reduce the lateral load on the pump station subsurface wall is to prevent external hydrostatic force, which means drained backfill which is not a practical option for the Lift Station site and depth of structure. The other factors to reduce the lateral earth pressure load would be to backfill with a sand that will provide a soil angle of internal friction of 30 degrees or more, and to reduce the horizontal distance between the vertical wall and the excavated rock surface. Flowable fill is commonly used as backfill around influent/effluent pipe and within the lower portions of the excavation where the horizontal distance between the concrete wall and the excavated rock face does not allow much room for compaction equipment. The lateral earth pressures presented should provide a relatively conservative design approach. If alternate materials or construction approaches are considered, the geotechnical engineer may provide adjusted lateral loading pressures.. Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 9 of 14 The structural design should also consider potential uplift pressures due to high groundwater or flood levels and a potentially empty wet well. The location and magnitude of surcharge loads, permanent or transient, should be determined, and the additional pressure generated by these loads, such as the weight of equipment and vehicular loads, including those applied at the time the structures are being built, must also be considered in the design. Electrical Building and Generator Pad The Electrical Building, and the ground supported concrete at -grade slab for the Generator equipment pad may be located in areas that have been at least partially excavated. Since the limestone is relatively shallow in the Lift Station area, each of these at -grade structures may be supported upon compacted fill that has been verified with density testing Depending upon the extent and configuration of the construction excavation for the wet well, the fill depth beneath the pads may be of variable thickness. It is important that compacted fill be placed in horizontal lifts and the lifts are benched into excavated slopes to prevent future settlement or gravity creep. The onsite soils can be used as compacted backfill, but the upper most 3 feet of native material should be removed and replaced with compacted non -expansive select fill that will provide uniform support across the ground supported concrete slab. Fill materials should be placed and compacted as described in the Earthwork section. Field density tests should be taken as each lift of fill material is placed. Each lift should be compacted, tested, and approved before another lift is added. The purpose of the field density tests is to provide some indication that uniform and adequate compaction is being obtained. The actual quality of the fill, as compacted, should be the responsibility of the contractor and satisfactory results from the tests should not be considered as a guarantee of the quality of the contractor's filling operations. Utilities Since the lift station will be rigid, buried piping connected to the lift station will also experience differential movement in response to expansive soil movement. These movements may damage connections and flexible connections are recommended to allow for differential movement between the lift station and piping. Differential movement will depend on the depth of the piping but could be up to 1 inch at a depth of 5 feet below grade. Compaction of pipe bedding material should not be water -jetted. Compacted backfill above the utilities should be on -site clays to limit the percolation of surface water. Utility trenches extending under structures should include fat clay or concrete cut-off collars at the perimeter/edge to prevent the transmission of water below the lift station along trench lines. Flatwork Side walks are planned adjacent to the lift station and drive way. Exterior concrete flatwork will form cracks due to normal shrinkage during curing and thermal effects, but also due to expansive Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 10 of 14 soil movement. Therefore, concrete should be steel reinforced to reduce the formation and size of cracks. Flatwork should also include frequent and regularly spaced expansion/control joints, and dowels should be used to limit vertical offsets between neighboring flatwork slabs. Joints should be cut as soon as the concrete has cured enough to allow for equipment access and cutting. Delays in joint cutting will increase the risk of the formation of uncontrolled cracks. The joint between the life station and the flatwork should be filled with flexible sealant that is maintained throughout the life of the structure to limit surface water intrusion against the foundation. These recommendations are intended to reduce the appearance of distress in exterior flatwork, but they are not intended to prevent the formation of cracks, or movement/vertical offsets between flatwork slabs. Concrete Pavement Proposed site improvements include new concrete parking areas. The pavement is anticipated to support relatively light loads from pickups and occasional moderate loads from maintenance and delivery vehicles. To reduce the effects of potential expansive soil movements, improve pavement support, allow some drainage, and provide a suitable working platform for construction, the pavement section should include a base layer, which will also allow for quality construction and a uniform pavement thickness. The base should extend at least 12 inches beyond the pavement limits to improve edge support. The base layer may consist of any of the following: (1) crushed stone flexible base, or (2) lime -treated on -site clay soils. Lime treatment is recommended only if site testing during construction confirms that soluble sulfate levels are within acceptable limits. Details regarding these two base layer options are presented below in Table 7. Table 7 — Pavement Base Options Crushed Stone Flexible Base: Crushed stone flexible base should conform to TxDOT Item 247 — Flexible Base Grade 1-2, Type A or D. The crushed stone layer should be a minimum of 6 inches thick (compacted) and include a geotextile separation layer (TxDOT DMS- 6200, Type 2) between base and supporting clay subgrade to limit soil subgrade intrusion into the base. Lime -treated On -site Clays: The lime -treated base should be a minimum of 8 inches thick, after compaction, and constructed by applying hydrated lime to the on -site soils a at rate of 36 pounds per square yard of treated area (6% by weight). Application and mixing should be performed in accordance with either TxDOT Standard Specification Item 260— Lime Treatment (Road -Mixed) or FNI Standard Specification 3132 13.19 — Lime Soil Stabilization. Prior to construction/placement of the pavement base, the raw clay subgrade should be proof rolled to detect areas of soft and/or pumping soils. Proof rolling should be based on TxDOT Standard Specification Item 216 — Proof Rolling. The entire pavement area should be proof rolled, with each succeeding pass offset by not greater than one tire width. Unsuitable soil should be undercut and reworked or otherwise improved in a manner that is acceptable to the engineer. A qualified construction representative should be present during proof rolling activities to assist with the identification of unsuitable soil. Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 11 of 14 Moisture changes within the subgrade and base must be minimized. The pavement and surrounding grades must have positive drainage that quickly removes surface water. Routine maintenance must be performed on pavement joints and cracks to prevent infiltration of surface water below the pavement. Even with these precautions, some distress may still occur, which will require periodic maintenance. To support the light to moderate loads of maintenance and delivery vehicles, a minimum 6-inch thick reinforced concrete pavement section is recommended. More frequent moderately -heavy to heavy loads may require a thicker pavement section. Adequate joints and spacing should be provided to control shrinkage -related cracking, and load transfer dowels should be provided across construction joints. While the pavement may be structurally adequate, it can still experience cracking and movement due to the expansive subgrade. Surface Drainage Proper drainage is critical to the performance and condition of the proposed structures and flatwork. Positive surface drainage must be provided that directs surface water away from the structures. If water can collect next to or below the structures or flatwork, then undesirable soil movements can occur, and these movements can exceed values used in design. It is recommended that a slope of at least 2 percent be provided to direct water away from the proposed structures. These slopes should be maintained throughout construction and the life of the structure. IBC Seismic Site Class Seismic designs in Texas are typically based upon the criteria established in the International Building Code (IBC). The seismic design is based on the Site Class, as defined in Sections 1613.3.2, in accordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7. Based on the results of the site -specific borings, the recommended Site Class is "C." Earthwork Table 8 provides material, moisture, and density requirements for the materials recommended for this site. Fill should be placed in loose, horizontal lifts not exceeding about 8 to 9 inches, with the intent of providing a compacted lift thickness of 6 inches. The lift thickness should be reduced as necessary to achieve the specified compaction. Table 8 — Material and Compaction Requirements Material Use Material Requirements Test Method Density Moisture General Fill: Max. Aggregate Size = 2 in. Standard Proctor On -site Clays No Organics 95%+ Opt. to +4% (ASTM D698) CL, SC, SP, SM LL: <_35, Pl: 8 to 15, <_70% Standard Proctor Structural Fill passing #200 Sieve (ASTM D698) 97%+ Opt. to +3% No organics Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 12 of 14 Pipeline Embedment Standard Granular Embedment 95 to Zi i Backfill (ASTM D4253) 100 % (1) Max Permeability: 1x10-6 cm/sec Standard Flowable Fill Max Shrinkage: 1/8 inch per ft. (ASTM D4832) 28-day UCSi3i: 100 psi (+/- 50 psi) Pavement Base: TxDOT Item 247, Tex-113-E 100%+ -2% to +2% Crushed Stone Grade 1-2, Type A or D Pavement Base: Application Rate: 6% Lime -treated On -site Soil for 8" (36 lbs./sq. yd) Tex-113-E 98%+ Opt. to +4% Notes: (1) Density requirement is a percentage of an established index density. (2) Compact cohesionless fill at a moisture content within a range that accommodates consistent placement and compaction to the minimum index density. (3) UCS = Unconfined compressive strength. The upper foot of backfill adjacent to structures (during final grading) should consist of compacted on -site clays when imported fill is used (such as in trenches) to reduce infiltration of water into the backfill zone. The native clays may also be used as general fill required for site grading. The following items should be included in the final design plans/drawings and/or appropriate sections of engineering specifications. • The project limits should be stripped of vegetation, roots, organic material, existing construction materials, and other undesirable debris. Obstructions that could hinder preparation of the site should also be removed, with special attention given to tree stumps and associated root systems. After stripping, the area should suitable for the support of construction equipment. • Unsuitable areas (such as those with wet, soft, yielding, and/or pumping subgrade) should be corrected before construction proceeds. • Exposed foundation areas should be observed by qualified personnel to confirm the bearing surface and material complies with the intended design. • Fill materials should be consistent with regard to type and moisture content. Clods should be processed and mixed, and water should be evenly applied, such that each lift has a uniform moisture and density. Compaction of each lift should be continuous over the entire lift area. • Heavy compaction equipment shall not be permitted within three feet of structures, and only hand -directed compaction equipment shall be used within this area. The maximum lift thickness with hand -directed compaction equipment shall be 4 inches measured in the loose condition. • Fill placed along slopes should be benched into the slope and placed in horizontal lifts to ensure proper bonding between lifts. • Each lift should be tested to confirm it has the specified moisture and compaction. One moisture/density verification test should be performed for every 2,500-square-feet of compacted area, with a minimum of two verification tests for every lift. • Lifts failing to meet moisture and density requirements should be reworked to meet the specifications. Subsequent lifts should not be placed until the exposed lift has the specified moisture and density. • The specified moisture content must be maintained until compaction of the overlying lift or construction of overlying flatwork. • The contractor must provide some means of controlling the moisture content, such as water hoses, water trucks, etc. (maintaining subgrade moisture is always critical, but will require the most effort during warm, windy and/or sunny conditions). Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 13 of 14 Density and moisture verification testing is recommended to provide some indication that adequate earthwork is being provided. However, the quality of the fill is the sole responsibility of the contractor, and satisfactory verification testing is not a guarantee of the quality of the contractor's earthwork operations. LIMITATIONS This memorandum was prepared specifically for use by the City of Fort Worth and Freese and Nichols, Inc. for this project and shall not be used for other projects or purposes. This work was performed in a manner consistent with the level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by other members of the engineering profession practicing in the same locality, under similar conditions, and at the date the services were provided. Freese and Nichols, Inc. makes no other representation, guarantee orwarranty, express or implied, regardingthe services, communication (oral or written), report, opinion, or instrument of service provided. The information and opinions contained in this memorandum are based on field observations, subsurface explorations, laboratory tests, and present knowledge of the proposed project. It is possible that soil, rock, or groundwater conditions could vary between or beyond the points explored. Paragraphs, statements, test results, boring logs, figures, etc., should not be taken out of context, nor utilized without a knowledge and awareness of their intent within the purpose of this memorandum. This memorandum, and any future addenda or reports regarding this site, may be made available to contractors and/or bidders. The data contained herein regarding subsurface conditions and laboratory test results are specific to the location and time noted. Contractors and/or bidders may not exclusively rely on interpretations, opinions, or conclusions contained in this memorandum. Verification of the subsurface conditions for purposes of determining difficulty of excavation, trafficability, etc. is the responsibility of the contractors and/or bidders. Because of the limited nature of anysubsurface study, conditions encountered during construction may differ from those presented in this memorandum. In such event, the contractor should promptly notify the City of Fort Worth so that Freese and Nichols, Inc. can confirm those conditions. -END OF MEMORANDUM- Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 Page 14 of 14 ATTACHMENTS 1. Exhibits a. Vicinity Map (1 page) b. Boring Location Map (7 page) 2. Boring Logs (9 pages) 3. Boring Log Legend and Nomenclature (2 pages) 4. Summary of Laboratory Results (7 pages) Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 EXHIBITS k' ! > 4 IV Yw L LL Ln .r. �. - �•..• OF O) j CD I w - wq ad , Dickson H uoisnoH�\ Ln J.. Jr a ta1d� 4p a � Morris � 4 � - •� `� . O Ln .�N + SeT t 1 ♦ '� - er � i et ♦ �1��, � �,I ZOLBL Xl'woM 11 Clew UOI;eo01 BU1.108 ooazauns c 188AS w840 L08 uoilulls i� g3ueb spuo9 Z99£ZMlj SION31NB MS33H � is o 0 r� v ZOLQL Xl8M VOd b dew uoi;eoo, BUiJoB Xi' 81lnS c Z -4< leeAs AJJ840 LOB aan�i� uoRMS W� LPUea SPUDS Z99£ZMld MS33vd asaaa� . , s ti. a. pld0 Rd - - NQWatK r �� 4 deW uoile3o1 Bu1J08 ZOL9L Xl'4V tarns g U YYYY {J �J nee Log Z lea�3S ,tue4o LOB aaneu uolle3S:41'1 LOuea spuOS Z99£ZMld SION�INB -M CDLL ° o ` rl 40 Asa DOW dew uoi;eoo� 6uiao8 ZUL9L X14LeMVes ° g 008Z e�mg Z leel3S we40 L08 aan�i� u01;e;g;M WMEN spu08 Z99£ZMlrl SION31m, 4� asaaa:lm h r. Qa ego a° o` 9 If dew uoi;eoo� 6uiao8 Zo19�X1 o0aMll-S ° L 008Z ePnB s laai1S wa4O l08 W aan�i� uoi;e;S IWI y)uea Spuos Mczml�l SIOHNN`Ll'i asaaa=l 41 41 41 1 BUIJ08 zoL9txl'4PeMVes dew UOIIB30 8 008Z elmg Z...4 leellS we40 L08 aan�i� UOIICIS:411 4auea 5PU08 Z99£ZMlel SIOHMM _..,��. asaaad� , CIBnl p?1 sway Ilnbue�l P21 sway pnbue�l 4 Q' � ..mil• �� � � Ikx, 4 d G x m` m ;_sus Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 BORING LOGS LOG OF BORING NO. LS-2501 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.914334 Drill Method: HSA & NX Core Date Drilling Started: 03/12/2025 Longitude:-97.466182 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/12/2025 Surface Elevation: 748.3 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J W > J x Z = Z w a F W Z W F F J X G > 55 `w H W H_ Z W 4' o = ar o° W W ' „ W } J 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O Z 0 W 3 N U) N C J o } K Q w am UQ a� z > w >• > O } y$ a) Ow O }> ~Z > O? Z Q _�2 O w O Q y W w o e Z j i w g cUiy a co ~0 Q a z ' a FAT CLAY, dark brown, very stiff, moist, rootlets U-1 34 27 87 64 24 40 u-2 50 745.3 FAT CLAY with GRAVEL to GRAVELLY FAT CLAY, dark brown and yellow -brown, very stiff, moist, with fine to coarse limestone gravel, some cobbles 5 U-3 33 20 63 67 24 43 50/4.25" (50/4.25") 742.3 WEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow brown, moderately hard, occasionally very thin to thin 50/2.5" inbedded calcareous clay, some iron oxidation _ (50/2.5") (Goodland) -pale yellow -brown and light gray 10 738.3 SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED - LIMESTONE, light gray and dark gray, soft to moderately hard rock, bioclastic in parts, thin to C-1 82 47 thickly bedded with clay marl interbeds, zones of 138 4.5 - oxidation (Goodland/Walnut) -some fracturing with iron oxide staining 15 -marly with zones of bioturbation that appear clastic C-2 89 24 20 -unweathered clay marl, dark gray, very soft to soft rock, blocky to fissile, shaly in parts, thickly bedded a from 20 to 25 feet C-3 w 100 100 25 -unweathered limestone, light gray, moderately hard, marly in parts, with biotrubation, bioclastic, sparry caliche from 25 to 30 feet C4 93 83 157 307.3 30 -equal parts clay marl and limestone, shaly in parts, with bioturbation, fossil fragments (bioclastic) in C-5 91 85 limestone, sparry calcite, trace pyrite GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-10 feet - hollow stem augers ; 10-40 feet - NxCore. Backfilled with soil cuttings at completion. Elevations were received from survey data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling I SFJ After Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 of 2 LOG OF BORING NO. LS-2501 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.914334 Drill Method: HSA & NX Core Date Drilling Started: 03/12/2025 Longitude:-97.466182 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/12/2025 Surface Elevation: 748.3 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J uJ > J Z = Z W a F W Z W F F X G > N `w W H_ o 3 a. IX o° w Z W ' W 4' „ wW~ } UJI J O 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O F- 0 W 3 N N N o J g J `-' } t K H a 0 Q LL a wl wm a OJ UQ aww f-z w > o tY w } ¢ > O } ¢o aN u, �z Ow ¢ O }> ~Z > 0Z zi¢ QO� O U ~ Q U � w w o v 0 z 0 J a w g U� cim a x o w 3 F a a —J co F F- C rn SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED LIMESTONE, light gray and dark gray, soft to moderately hard rock, bioclastic in parts, thin to C-6 93 62 thickly bedded with clay marl interbeds, zones of oxidation (Goodland/Walnut) 40 708.3 Total boring depth 40 ft. 45 50 55 60 65 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-10 feet - hollow stem augers ; 10-40 feet - NxCore. Backfilled with soil cuttings at completion. Elevations were received from survey data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling I SFJ After Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 2 Of 2 LOG OF BORING NO. LS-2502 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.914372 Drill Method: HSA & NX Core Date Drilling Started: 03/11/2025 Longitude:-97.466384 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/11/2025 Surface Elevation: 752.7 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J W > J x Z = Z W a F W ZW F F X G > 55 `w W H_ o = ar o° W Z W ' W 4' „ W } J 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O Z 0 W 3 N U) N C J o J } K H Q w am UQ a� z > w >• W O } y$ a) Ow O }> ~Z > O? Z Q _�2 O w O Q y W w o e Z j i w g cUiy a co ~0 Q a z ' a GRAVELLY FAT CLAY, brown, very stiff, moist, U-1 65 with limestone, fine to coarse gravel, cobbles 25 71 56 23 33 (Residual) 50/5" (50/5") 999 750.7 SPT-2 WEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown, moderately hard, occasional very thin calcareous clay layers (Goodland) 50/5.5" (50/5.5") 910 SPT-3 5 -pale yellow -brown and light gray 50/2.5 2003 (50/2.5") 50/3" (50/3") 1667 744.7 - SLIGHTLY WEATHERED LIMESTONE, light gray to gray, soft to moderately hard rock, bioclastic, thin to thinly bedded, with marl and clay layers, 10 some light orange -brown weathered zones, iron - oxidation (Goodland) C-1 100 78 -marl/clay zones, highly degradable and friable in parts 15 C-2 100 76 20 -thin to thick bedded, moderately hard, bioclastic with W thin to thick bedded soft clay marl, irregular beddings, C-3 100 92 appears clastic and nodular in parts 158 305.8 25 C-4 100 98 157 208.0 -mostly dark gray soft clay marl with light gray hard limestone from 28.5 to 29.3 feet 30 721.7 SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED LIMESTONE, gray, moderately hard C-5 83 50 -mostly clay marl with thin hard limestone beds below 25 feet GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-10 feet - hollow stem augers ; 10-40 feet - NxCore. Backfilled with soil cuttings at completion. Elevations were received from survey data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling I SFJ After Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 of 2 LOG OF BORING NO. LS-2502 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.914372 Drill Method: HSA & NX Core Date Drilling Started: 03/11/2025 Longitude:-97.466384 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/11/2025 Surface Elevation: 752.7 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J uJ > J Z = Z W a F W z> F F X G > N `w W H_ o 3 a. IX o° w Z W ' W 4' „ wW~ } UJI J O 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O F- 0 W 3 N N N o J g J `-' } t K H a 0 Q LL a wl wm a OJ UQ aww f-z w > o tY w } ¢ > O } ¢o aN u, �z Ow ¢ O }> �z > 0z zi¢ ¢Oz O U ~ Q U � W w o v 0 z 0 J a w g U� cim a x o w 3 F- a a —J co F F- C rn SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED LIMESTONE, gray, moderately hard C-6 80 63 40 712.7 Total boring depth 40 ft. 45 50 55 60 65 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-10 feet - hollow stem augers ; 10-40 feet - NxCore. Backfilled with soil cuttings at completion. Elevations were received from survey data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling I SFJ After Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 2 Of 2 LOG OF BORING NO. PL-2501 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Project Number: FTW23662 Phase Number: **** La Date Drilling Started: 03/12/2025 Lo Date Drilling Completed: 03/12/2025 Su SAMPLE Imo— o J > J oti IX W = W IV Q. c W J O Cal F 111 am UQ W a~Z j O w O ~z O W O lz h (A O? =OK W co F F_C SPT-1 4-5-15 (20) SPT-2 13-50/5.5" (50/5.5") SPT-3 22-50/5" 5 (50/5") 50/4" (50/4") 50/2" (50/2") TCP-6 50/0.50" 15 50/0.25" T50/1" CP-7 20 5 50/ " 25 30 titude: 32.911548 ngitude:-97.466604 rface Elevation: 767.8 feet MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Rig Type: CME 75 Drill Method: HSA Hammer Type: Automatic Logged By: A. Brewer e a X W > ui x F W F G 55 `w Z F ZZ Z f Z ig z W= J O z W 0 3 il tNo g U a y Q uJ N Ci Q N O W UF- J W O e 0 J Z W F F z 1 g Uy Q a 3 = = N WEATHERED MARL, yellow -brown to dark brow soft to moderately soft rock, blocky, jointed, trace gypsum and iron oxidation SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED MARL, dark gray and brown, moderately soft rock, blocky to fissile, shaly in parts, iron oxidation, likely jointed SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown to light gray, moderately hard -light gray, cuttings are chalky and marly -gray, cuttings are chalky and marly Total boring depth 20 ft. 762.3 758.8 747.8 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-20 feet - hollow stem augers. Backfilled with soil cuttings at completion. Elevation values estimated from MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling 2 End of Drilling Y Aker Drilling available Lidar data. DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None the stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 Of 1 LOG OF BORING NO. PL-2502 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Project Number: FTW23662 Phase Number: **** La Date Drilling Started: 03/12/2025 Lo Date Drilling Completed: 03/12/2025 Su SAMPLE J > J Imo- o 06 YJ z^ M= w?� Q. o w J O m F a. W am VQ UJ 0. > O III o r> ~z > Oz z a =0� o W o fY f rn m F 0 IY SPT-1 6-5-4 (9) SPT-2 15-50/4.5" (50/4.5") 50/4" (50/4") W, TCP4 I 50/2" 50/1" 10 TCP-5 1 550/1" TCP-6 50/0.50' 50/0.25 15 20 w 2 25 30 titude: 32.907213 ngitude:-97.466002 rface Elevation: 761.9 feet MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Rig Type: CME 75 Drill Method: HSA Hammer Type: Automatic Logged By: A. Brewer e a X w > ui F ui ~ G 55 N z F co z f z W z co= J 0 z W J H 0 3 tNil o g U lay O } a N (n O W Q W Ci a w U0 J w O e 0 z a g ci z � y 3 a z SANUY LLAN ULAY, Drown, very stltt, ary, very fine grained sand, silty, some fine to coarse limestone gravel WEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown, moderately hard, some iron oxidation -pale yellow -brown, cuttings are chalky and marly LIMESTONE, gray, moderately hard lllow-brown below 14 feet Total boring depth 15 ft. 759.9 747.9 746.9 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-15 feet -hollow stem augers. Backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. Elevation values estimated from MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling 2 End of Drilling Y After Drilling available Lidar data. DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 Of 1 LOG OF BORING NO. PL-2503 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Project Number: FTW23662 Phase Number: **** La Date Drilling Started: 03/11/2025 Lo Date Drilling Completed: 03/11/2025 Su SAMPLE J > J Imo- o 06 YJ z^ M= w?� Q. o w J O m F w am UQ UJ 0. j O W o r> ~z > Oz 0l'--z a 4 o W o a' f rn co F C U-1 60 6-6-3 SPT-2 (9) SPT-3 1-3�4 5— SPT-4 11-30-50/5.5" (50/5.5') SPT-5 50/5.04" (50/5.04") I—SPTJ 15-15-24 (39) 15 20 25 30 titude: 32.903562 ngitude:-97.464711 rface Elevation: 726.0 feet MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Rig Type: CME 75 Drill Method: HSA Hammer Type: Automatic Logged By: A. Brewer e a X w > ui x F w c tow a z F co z f z w z w= J 0 z w Fn J H 0 3 o g U lay O } a N F O W Q W Ci a w U� J w O e 0 z a g ci z � y 3 a z FAT CLAY, dark brown, stiff to very stiff, moist, with rootlets GRAVELLY LEAN CLAY to CLAYEY GRAVEL, pale yellow -brown, very stiff, wet, with fine to coarse limestone gravel and cobbles, iron oxidation (Residual) FAT CLAY, yellow -brown and light gray, very stiff, moist, mottled, some calcareous nodules and iron oxidation (Residual) HIGHLY WEATHERED to WEATERED CLAY MARL and LIMESTONE, yellow -brown, very soft to moderately hard, shaly in part, some iron oxidation alternating very thin to thick beds of limestone and clay marl SLIGHTLY WEATHERED CLAY MARL, dark gray, soft rock, blocky, shaly in parts, occasional jointing with iron oxidation Total boring depth 15 ft. 725.0 10 25 39 14 25 722.5 20 93 61 17 44 720.0 714.5 711.0 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-15 feet - hollow stem augers. Backfilled with soil cuttings and bentonite plug upon completion. Elevation MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling 2 End of Drilling Y After Drilling values estimated from available Lidar data. DATE 03/11/2025 03/11/2025 DEPTH (ft.bgs.) 2.00 1.80 NOTES After 15 minutes The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 Of 1 LOG OF BORING NO. PL-2504 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.900088 Drill Method: HSA Date Drilling Started: 03/11/2025 Longitude:-97.460036 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/11/2025 Surface Elevation: 701.5 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J W > J x Z = Z W a F ui ZW F F X G > 55 `w W H_ o = ar o° W Z W ' W 4' „ W } J 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O Z 0 W 3 N U) N C J o J } K H Q w am UQ a� z > w >• > v } y$ a) Ow O }> FZ > z Q O O IY Q to W w o e Z j -J w g a O? =z2 w Q a cUiy z a m ~0 D ' GRAVELLY LEAN CLAY, brown, very stiff, moist, u-1 25 with fine to coarse limestone gravel and asphalt (Fill) SPT-2 3-4-4 (6) 13-15-17 697.5 HIGHLY WEATHERED TO WEATHERED 5 SPT-3 (32) LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown, moderately soft 50/1.5" to moderately hard rock, marly, chalky (50/1.5") 50/11, (5011°) -hard 10 691.5 SLIGHTLY WEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown and gray, moderately soft to hard rock, alternating thin to thick beds for limestone and clay marl gray below 11 feet 50/4.5" PT-6 (50/4.5") 15 686.5 Total boring depth 15 ft. 20 W 25 30 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-15 feet -hollow stem augers. Backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. Elevation values estimated from available Lidar data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling I SFJ After Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratifcation lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 of 1 LOG OF BORING NO. PL-2505 Project Title: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM Project Location: Fort Worth, Texas Drilling Company: W.E.S.T. Drilling Project Number: FTW23662 Rig Type: CME 75 Phase Number: **** Latitude: 32.898086 Drill Method: HSA Date Drilling Started: 03/11/2025 Longitude:-97.456292 Hammer Type: Automatic Date Drilling Completed: 03/11/2025 Surface Elevation: 679.8 feet Logged By: A. Brewer SAMPLE J uJ > UJI J O Z = Z W a F W z> F F X G > 55 `w W H_ Z wa— o 3 a. IX o° w W ' O ww~ W } J Y 00 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION O ¢ Z 0 W 3 NN rn o g `-' } L KH a 0 Q LL a wI W n a J UQ a w rz w > o w ~ } > � O } ¢ o aN 0 F U Z Ow U� F ¢ O }> �z > 0z zi¢ ¢Oz O U Q rn W w o F_ v 0 z J a w g cim a _J m x o I- OF w C 3 E a a rn sl=r-1 s0/s.s" WEATHERED LIMESTONE, pale yellow -brown, (50/5.5) soft to moderately hard, chalky, marly, with interbedded calcareous clay, some iron oxidation (Good land/Walnut) AU-2 3-6-50/5" SPT-3 5 (50/5") AU-4 -orange-brown to pale brown from 6 to 8 feet, transitioning to more of a marl SPT-5 14-24-46 (70) -pale yellow -brown to orange -brown, mostly clay marl 10 with thin hard limestone beds 50/3" (50/3") 15 664.8 SLIGHTLY WEATHERED to UNWEATHERED LIMESTONE and CLAY MARL, light gray to dark gray, moderately soft to hard rock, interbedded, thin to thick beds (Goodland/Walnut) 50/2.s" s0/1" 20 50/1.5" 50/1" 25 -dark gray and brown below 25 feet 653.8 SILTY SAND, orange -brown to very light gray and pink, very dense, moist, very fine grained, iron oxidation (Paluxy) SPT-9 50/5.5" (50/5.5") 8 30 -yellow-brown to orange -brown SPT-10 50/5.5" (50/5.5") -pale yellow -brown with pink and red/orange iron oxidation GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS Remarks: 0-35 feet - hollow stem augers. Backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. Elevation values estimated from available Lidar data. MEASUREMENT 21 At Time of Drilling I TJ End of Drilling 171 Aker Drilling DATE DEPTH (ft.bgs.) NOTES None The stratification lines represent approximate strata boundaries. In situ, the transition may be gradual. These logs are subject to the limitations, conclusions, and recommendations in the associated report. Sheet 1 of 2 BORING LOG LEGEND AND NOMENCLATURE Abbreviations U — Undisturbed Sample (tube) SPT— Standard Penetration Test NT— Not Testable A — Auger Sample TCP — Texas Cone Penetration NP — Non Plastic CS — Continuous Sample CFA — Continuous Flight Auger ATD — At Time of Drilling C — Rock Core HSA — Hollow Stem Auger AD —After Drilling General Terms Term Description Blow Counts Results from either the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) or the Texas Cone Penetration (TCP) test. Recovery Length of sample or core recovered divided by the total length pushed, driven, or cored (expressed as a %) Rock Quality Designation (RQD) Cumulative length of unfractured pieces of core material more than 4 inches in length divided by the total length of material cored (expressed as a percentage) Consistency of Fine Grained Soil Apparent Density of Coarse Grained Soil Description Unconfined Pocket Penetrometer Description Standard Penetration Texas Cone Blow Compressive tsf tsf (Density) N—Valve Count Very Soft < 0.25 — Very Loose 0-4 0-8 Soft >_ 0.25 — < 0.5 < 1 Loose >4-10 9-20 Medium Stiff >_ 0.5 — < 1.0 1-2 Medium Dense >10-30 21-80 Stiff >_ 1.0 — < 2.0 2-3 Dense >30-50 81—>_ 5" Very Stiff >_ 2.0 — < 4.0 3-4.5 Very Dense > 50 0" - < 5" Hard >_ 4.0 4.5+ Soil Structure Description Criteria Thickness Stratified Alternating layers of varying material/color with layers >_ 1/4-inch thick Parting —paper thin Laminated Alternating layers of varying material/color with layers < 1/4-inch thick Seam-1/8-3" Fissured Breaks along definite planes with little resistance Layer-3" - 12" Fracture planes appear polished or glossy; shows movement Slickensided Stratum—> 12" direction Blocky Cohesive soil that can be broken into small, angular lumps Lensed Inclusion of small pockets of soil that is different from dominate type Homogenous Same color and appearance throughout Moisture Condition Textural Adjectives Description Criteria Textural Item Description Dry Absence of moisture, dusty, dry to Pit Pinhole sized openings thetouch Moist Damp but no visible water Vug Small openings up to 4 inches in size Wet Visible free water Cavity Opening larger than 4 inches Honeycomb Numerous and grouped pits and vugs Vesicle Small openings in volcanic rocks ROM Oil NICHO E Page 1 of 2 Copyright Freese and Nichols, Inc., Version 1.5 (April 7, 2023) BORING LOG LEGEND AND NOMENCLATURE Rock Hardness Descriptors Approx. Comp. Approx. Grade Field Test Strength, tsf TCP Range Very Soft < 10 - 100 >6" Can be peeled with pocket knife, crumbles under firm blows of geological hammer Soft 100 - 500 4" - 6" Can be peeled with pocket knife with difficulty, indented by firm blows of geological hammer Hard 500 - 1000 1" - 5" Cannot be peeled with pocket knife, can be fractured by single firm blow of hammer Very Hard 1000 - 2000 0" - 2" Specimen requires more than one blow of geological hammer to fracture it Extremely Hard > 2000 0" Specimen requires many blows of geological hammer to fracture it Degree of Rock Weathering Description Criteria Unweathered No evidence of chemical or mechanical alteration Slightly Weathered Slight discoloration of surface or discontinuities; < 10% volume altered Weathered Discoloring evident; 10 to 50% of volume altered Highly Weathered Entire mass discolored; alteration through majority of rock Decomposed Rock reduced to soil consistency with some rock -like texture Rock Bedding Structure Description Criteria Laminated < 3/8 inch Very Thinly Bedded 3/8-1 inch Thinly Bedded 1 inch-4 inches Moderately Bedded 4 inches-1 foot Thickly Bedded 1 foot-3 feet Very Thickly Bedded 3-10 feet Massive > 10 feet Soil Column Graphic Symbols* Graphic Represented Soil Types Graphic Represented Soil Types f. f. f. Fat Clay, Fat Clay with sand, Sandy Fat � ti.ti. Well -Graded Sand or Poorly -Graded Sand; little to no N ® C .r1r�r. > CH Clay SW-SP },},}, fines u ® Lean Clay, Lean Clay with sand, Sandy CL Lean Clay, Silty Clay GC Clayey Gravel, Gravel -Sand -Clay Mixtures Y N MH-ML ® Inorganic Silt and Organic Silt GM o ° Silty Gravel, Gravel -Sand -Silt Mixtures Sc Clayey Sand, Clay Sand Mixtures (D GW GP © Well -Graded Gravel or Poorly -Graded Gravel; little to no fines c Uo SM Silty Sands, Sand -Silt Mixtures Fill with Significant Debris or Deleterious Material Rock Column Graphic Symbols* Graphic Represented Rock Types Graphic Represented Rock Types RLimestone, Shaly/Marty Limestone, Limestone with Shale Marl, Marl with Limestone, Marl with Shale EdShale, Shale with Limestone Sandstone, Shaly Sandstone, Sandstone with Shale Mudstone Generic Bedrock Symbol i / * Combined graphics may be used for dual classifications. Not all graphics represented. Refer to lithology description for soil classification or rock type. r1FREESE Copyright Freese and Nichols, Inc., Version 1.4 (April 6, 2023) 111MICHOLS Page 2 of 2 Geotechnical Investigation Memorandum November 14, 2025 ��FREESE IMICH.OLS SUMMARY OF LABORATORY RESULTS SUMMARY OF LABORATORY RESULTS PAGE 1 OF 1 PROJECT NAME Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM PROJECT NUMBER FTW23662 PROJECT PHASE PROJECT LOCATION Fort Worth, TX TESTING PERFOMED BY: Borehole Depth, Water Unit Dry % Passing No. 200 Liquid Plastic Plasticity Unconfined Compressive Strain at ft Content, % Weight Sieve Limit Limit Index Strength, tsf Failure, % Ib/ft LS-2501 0.0 27.1 87 64 24 40 LS-2501 4.0 20.3 63 67 24 43 LS-2502 0.0 24.8 71 56 23 33 PL-2503 1 2.0 1 9.8 1 1 25 1 39 1 14 1 25 PL-2503 4.0 20.2 93 61 17 44 PL-2503 28.5 1 1 1 8 �MEVC)NO Uniaxial Compressive Strength Test Report Client: Freese & Nichols, Inc. Project: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM (PN: FTW23662) Sample I.D.: LS-2501 at 10-15 ft Project No.: LT2503024 Test Method: ASTM D7012, Method C Test Date: 3/26/2025 Type of Specimen: Intact Rock Core Deformation Rate: 0.3 %/min Initial Specimen Conditions Avg. Diameter (in) D° 2.04 Avg. Height (in) H° 4.65 As-Rcv'd Water Content (%) wo - - Total Unit Weight (pcfl Ytotal 137.5 Dry Unit Weight (pcfl ydl, - - Stresses at Failure Uniaxial Compressive Strength, 6u (psi) P2.9 Axial Strain at Failure (%) - Note: Test results for specimens not meeting the requirements of Practice D4543. The results may differ from results obtained from a test specimen that meets the requirements. Te-An Wang, EIT, 03/28/25 Quality Review/Date Specimen prepared & tested by: A.B. The results shown on this report are for the exclusive use of the client for whom they were obtained and apply only to the sample tested and / or inspected. They are not intended to be indicative of qualities of apparently identical products. The use of our name must recieve prior written approval. Reports must be reproduced in their entirety. Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the client for the specific project. �MEVC)NO Uniaxial Compressive Strength Test Report Client: Freese & Nichols, Inc. Project: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM (PN: FTW23662) Sample I.D.: LS-2501 at 25-30 ft Project No.: LT2503024 Test Method: ASTM D7012, Method C Test Date: 3/26/2025 Type of Specimen: Intact Rock Core Deformation Rate: 0.3 %/min Initial Specimen Conditions Avg. Diameter (in) D° 2.04 Avg. Height (in) H° 4.63 As-Rcv'd Water Content (%) w° - - Total Unit Weight (pcfl yt°tal 157.1 Dry Unit Weight (pcfl ydl, - - Stresses at Failure Uniaxial Compressive Strength, 6u (psi) 4268.0 Axial Strain at Failure (%) - - Note: Test results for specimens not meeting the requirements of Practice D4543. The results may differ from results obtained from a test specimen that meets the requirements. Te-An Wang, EIT, 03/28/25 Quality Review/Date Specimen prepared & tested by: A.B. The results shown on this report are for the exclusive use of the client for whom they were obtained and apply only to the sample tested and / or inspected. They are not intended to be indicative of qualities of apparently identical products. The use of our name must recieve prior written approval. Reports must be reproduced in their entirety. Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the client for the specific project. /'02�EYONO Uniaxial Compressive Strength Test Report Client: Freese & Nichols, Inc. Project: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM (PN: FTW23662) Sample I.D.: LS-2502 at 20-25 ft Project No.: LT2503024 Test Method: ASTM D7012, Method C Test Date: 4/2/2025 Type of Specimen: Intact Rock Core Deformation Rate: 0.3 %/min Initial Specimen Conditions Avg. Diameter (in) D,, 2.02 Avg. Height (in) H,, 4.60 As-Rcv'd Water Content (%) wo - - Total Unit Weight (pcf) ytotal 157.8 Dry Unit Weight (pc f) ydry - - Stresses at Failure Uniaxial Compressive Strength, a,, (psi) 4247.3 Axial Strain at Failure (%) - Note: Test results for specimens not meeting the requirements of Practice D4543. The results may differ from results obtained from a test specimen that meets the requirements. HuaMiao Cao, P.E., 04/03/25 Quality Review/Date Specimen prepared & tested by: A.B. The results shown on this report are for the exclusive use of the client for whom they were obtained and apply only to the sample tested and / or inspected. They are not intended to be indicative of qualities of apparently identical products. The use of our name must recieve prior written approval. Reports must be reproduced in their entirety. Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the client for the specific project. �MEYONO Uniaxial Compressive Strength Test Report Client: Freese & Nichols, Inc. Project: Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM (PN: FTW23662) Sample I.D.: LS-2502 at 29-30 ft Project No.: LT2503024 Test Method: ASTM D7012, Method C Test Date: 3/26/2025 Type of Specimen: Intact Rock Core Deformation Rate: 0.3 %/min Initial Specimen Conditions Avg. Diameter (in) D° 2.02 Avg. Height (in) H° 4.63 As-Rcv'd Water Content (%) w° - - Total Unit Weight (pcfl yt°tal 157.1 Dry Unit Weight (pcfl ydl, - - Stresses at Failure Uniaxial Compressive Strength, 6u (psi) 2888.6 Axial Strain at Failure (%) - - Note: Test results for specimens not meeting the requirements of Practice D4543. The results may differ from results obtained from a test specimen that meets the requirements. Te-An Wang, EIT, 03/28/25 Quality Review/Date Specimen prepared & tested by: A.B. The results shown on this report are for the exclusive use of the client for whom they were obtained and apply only to the sample tested and / or inspected. They are not intended to be indicative of qualities of apparently identical products. The use of our name must recieve prior written approval. Reports must be reproduced in their entirety. Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the client for the specific project. GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION PROJECT NAME Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM PROJECT NUMBER FTW23662 PROJECT PHASE PROJECT LOCATION Fort Worth, TX TESTING PERFOMED BY: U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 /23/8 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100140 200 100 95 i 90 a 85 o6 80 Z 75 0 70 65 z = 60 o W z m > 55 z CO LL a W 50 o Z o LL i- 45 z W 40 W � a a 35 z a 30 LL 25 x V 20 K N z 15 0 m Z 10 a N O 0 5 N J 0 0 Y 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 N o GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS 0 a 0 COBBLES SILT OR CLAY GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION PROJECT NAME Bonds Ranch Lift Station A, FM & GM PROJECT NUMBER FTW23662 PROJECT PHASE PROJECT LOCATION Fort Worth, TX TESTING PERFOMED BY: U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1 /23/8 3 4 6 8 IQ 1416 30 40 50 60 100140 200 100 95 90 a � 85 o6 80 Z 75 0 70 65 u z = 60 o W z m > 55 z m LL � a w 50 o Z o LL i- 45 z w 40 w a a 35 z a 30 LL 25 x V 20 K N z 15 0 m Z 10 a N O 0 5 N J 0 0 Y 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 N o GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS 0 a 0 COBBLES SILT OR CLAY GC-6.06 D — Small Business Utilization Form CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 CD 0 O o U Qn y x o H 0 x 0 H 0 � A � m W O O a w CD pWq A o A cc o 0 m p w M N U Z W w _ +>4cc + 0 � d COco m U A O A a n O Z m (� Z �i z 0 w w W Q i CO CZ Q p LL Z LL Q m V V � Z Z t- Z H W Q = 4 A a a i W W o W W 0 V O O O o o cc O cc0 m X= am0 a a FaU.°cam c - E U U U A 0 M, -1 U U d z as CA a ^a^ y a Y W o F � � •� o F rs U GarInU H z u Huo z H� H� us a oW, a � O O z z 0 0 0 0 W W �i bA is bA A O A O rA z d z CIO •.� CDz cw •• a �. a CA a W a y'1 � "�O o ,� � o � •� "�C o ,p � o z CQ d U a W U z CQ d U a W U I* 4 LO N 0 Q) CO Q) cr a c a a a a Q Q Q z z CIO o � o �cd o Cd cn ^r^s, U U C U F rn F Z Gos F� vi us ds a a � a a a 0 0 z z z 0 0 0 O O O w w w A oio a A wo � A wo a A o Ca o rA A o z •� a zz d' z °. a z d' z •� CD a C iUr f� C "�� EC + � C ice, L1 p '� �+ � i�r F� C •+ ' Cd z as dU a w U 4 w dU a w U 4 ca dU a w U a°n 0 U O � m � U � � O O � � U ct O ew O b � � O � r% C ^C � � O 0 0 0 F CCS RS Q$ Q Q Q w c w v bA CJ � Li it O O U U C3 ^� �' U V rA E..7 :i 14 M O Si O W)A.0 O c c L 7 Q C a� m c ca m E ca z Q m c O Q) ca z C O Q O U Q) a E w W N O El m 41 cc 13 LIE I* N GC-6.07 Wage Rates CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 2013 PREVAILING WAGE RATES (Heavy and Highway Construction Projects) CLASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION Wage Rate Asphalt Distributor Operator $ 15.32 Asphalt Paving Machine Operator $ 13.99 Asphalt Raker $ 12.69 Broom or Sweeper Operator $ 11.74 Concrete Finisher, Paving and Structures $ 14.12 Concrete Pavement Finishing Machine Operator $ 16.05 Concrete Saw Operator $ 14.48 Crane Operator, Hydraulic 80 tons or less $ 18.12 Crane Operator, Lattice Boom 80 Tons or Less $ 17.27 Crane Operator, Lattice Boom Over 80 Tons $ 20.52 Crawler Tractor Operator $ 14.07 Electrician $ 19.80 Excavator Operator, 50,000 pounds or less $ 17.19 Excavator Operator, Over 50,000 pounds $ 16.99 Flagger $ 10.06 Form Builder/Setter, Structures $ 13.84 Form Setter, Paving & Curb $ 13.16 Foundation Drill Operator, Crawler Mounted $ 17.99 Foundation Drill Operator, Truck Mounted $ 21.07 Front End Loader Operator, 3 CY or Less $ 13.69 Front End Loader Operator, Over 3 CY $ 14.72 Laborer, Common $ 10.72 Laborer, Utility $ 12.32 Loader/Backhoe Operator $ 15.18 Mechanic $ 17.68 Milling Machine Operator $ 14.32 Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grade $ 17.19 Motor Grader Operator, Rough $ 16.02 Off Road Hauler $ 12.25 Pavement Marking Machine Operator $ 13.63 Pipelayer $ 13.24 Reclaimer/Pulverizer Operator $ 11.01 Reinforcing Steel Worker $ 16.18 Roller Operator, Asphalt $ 13.08 Roller Operator, Other $ 11.51 Scraper Operator $ 12.96 Servicer $ 14.58 Small Slipform Machine Operator $ 15.96 Spreader Box Operator $ 14.73 Truck Driver Lowboy -Float $ 16.24 Truck Driver Transit -Mix $ 14.14 Truck Driver, Single Axle $ 12.31 Truck Driver, Single or Tandem Axle Dump Truck $ 12.62 Truck Driver, Tandem Axle Tractor with Semi Trailer $ 12.86 Welder $ 14.84 Work Zone Barricade Servicer $ 11.68 The Davis -Bacon Act prevailing wage rates shown for Heavy and Highway construction projects were determined by the United States Department of Labor and current as of September 2013. The titles and descriptions for the classifications listed are detailed in the AGC of Texas' Standard Job Classifications and Descriptions for Highway, Heavy, Utilities, and Industrial Construction in Texas. Page 1 of 1 GC-6.09 Permits and Utilities CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 From: Carriere, Jacob <jacob.carriere@energytransfer.com> Sent: Tuesday, May 20, 2025 8:14 AM To: lauren.nobles@freese.com Cc: Waterwall, Celeste; Balliew, Wesley N; Masters, Dawson; Amanda Johnson; Jacob Schababerle Subject: 2025-0507 Letter of No Objection Attachments: Exhibit A 2025-0507.pdf; GMap View 2025-0507.pdf; kml Bonds Ranch LS Site.kml; Energy Transfer Crossing Guidelines.pdf Follow Up Flag: Flag Status: Flag for follow up Flagged Some people who received this message don't often get email from jacob.carriere@energytransfer.com. Learn why this is important This is an email from an EXTERNAL source. DO NOT click links or open attachments without positive sender verification of purpose. Never enter USERNAME, PASSWORD or sensitive information on linked pages from this email. Please report all suspicious messages using the Report Message button in Outlook. Lauren, ENERGY TRANSFER FUEL, LP, an Energy Transfer entity (ET) received your revised plans on May 16, 2025, concerning the proposed force main construction. At the subject location, ET does own, operate and maintain a 16-inch, steel, high-pressure, natural gas pipeline (ET's Facilities). ET has determined that the proposed improvements will not at this time cause any adjustments to be made to ET's Facilities and is agreeable to the proposed project conditioned upon and subject to the acceptance of and adherence to the following conditions by CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT and or your contractor(s): Adherence to the Energy Transfer Crossing Guidelines, attached. ET's agreement to the subject project is based upon the attached "Exhibit A." Should anything change, or if your project does not begin (1) year from this date, you must submit to ET one (1) set of revised drawings for review and approval prior to commencing any of the work on or near any ET Facilities. By entering onto ENERGY TRANSFER FUEL, LP's easement, and constructing the encroachment, CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT agrees that in the event ENERGY TRANSFER FUEL, LP must remove or destroy all or a portion of the improvements/encroachment approved in this email, in order to excavate or in any manner work on its facilities, then CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT shall be responsible for all costs associated with returning the encroachment to its previous condition. ET Facilities shall be positively located before the Encroachments are constructed or installed near ET Facilities. ET requires that an absolute minimum clearance of 24-inches be maintained between the outside diameter of ET's pipeline and any of your facilities. Longitudinal occupancy of ET's right-of-way will not be permitted. Soil compaction activities over ET Facilities require eight -inch lifts of backfill material compacted to a minimum proctor density of 95%. Soil backfill shall be compacted to the satisfaction of ET onsite inspector so that settling does not occur. In the event you or your contractor (s) need to crossover or along ET's Facilities with heavy construction equipment, ET will require the contactor (s) to furnish and install temporary wood mats over the pipeline, in order to protect the pipeline from heavy equipment loads. ET shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of any construction or maintenance activity. You must contact the State approved notification center at 811, in addition to contacting ET's field representative Mr. Neil Balliew at 817-247-2236 or wesley.balliew@energytransfer.com, before commencing any Crossing at or near ET's Pipeline Facility. Unless you otherwise notify ET in writing, your receipt of this conditional e-mail of acceptance shall be deemed to be evidence of your acceptance of and adherence to the above terms and conditions. Thankyou, Jacob Carriere Specialist— Pipeline Relocations Encroachments — Right of Way Energy Transfer 1300 Main Street Houston, TX 77002 0:713-989-4611 9117 xlna Private and confidential as detailed here. If you cannot access hyperlink, please e-mail sender. •wof ENERGY TRANSFER GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR THIRD -PARTY CONSTRUCTION OR MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES Energy Transfer and its affiliates and related companies ("ET") are dedicated to the highest safety standards in the continued operation of their pipelines and facilities. Of utmost importance to ET is the continued safety of the public and its pipeline and facilities during construction and other activities on, across, over or under its right-of-way. ET is therefore pleased to provide these general guidelines ("Guidelines") for third -party construction, blasting, installation or modification of pipelines, underground utilities, roads, streets, driveways, ditches, drainage canals or any other type of temporary or permanent structure or obstruction or any other encroachment on, over, across or paralleling ET's right-of-way (hereinafter referred to as "Crossing" or "Crossings"). These Guidelines are intended to be consistent with State Code and are further based upon industry standards and practice. These Guidelines are merely guidelines and upon notification to ET of a proposed Crossing, as required by State Code, each proposed Crossing and its corresponding finalized plans and profile drawings will be evaluated by ET and the third -party requesting such Crossing, pending final approval. 1. Notification a. The party requesting such Crossing shall use its best efforts to provide ET with its finalized plans and profile drawings at least thirty days (30) days prior to any related construction or maintenance activity. The Pipeline Facility shall include, but is not limited to, rights -of- way, fee properties, easements, pipelines, meter and regulator buildings and valve sites ("ET Pipeline Facility" or "Facilities"). No equipment shall enter onto ET's Pipeline Facility unless an ET representative is on location. b. No excavation shall occur in the vicinity of ET's Pipeline Facilities until: 1) In accordance with the State approved Notification Centers, ET shall be notified at least 48 hours in advance of any construction or maintenance activity. You must contact the State approved Notification Center at 811. Before commencing any Crossing at or near ET's Pipeline Facility you must also contact ET's Field Representative(s) listed below; 2) An ET representative will be on site to monitor the excavation activities. 2. Drawings for Prollosed Construction or Maintenance Any proposed construction or maintenance activity in the vicinity of ET's Pipeline Facilities will require submittal of final plans and profile drawings for prior review and approval by ET. One (1) copy of these drawings must be submitted to ET's Encroachment Department via e-mail_ encroachmentskenergytransfer.com. All plans and drawings must show in detail, all of ET's Revised 12/08/2023 - 1 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER Pipeline Facilities, its corresponding right-of-way and any other landmarks that will assist ET in determining the location of the proposed Crossing and the effects of the proposed construction or maintenance activity on ET's Pipeline Facilities. 3. Encroachment Agreement In certain instances, due to the type of Crossing required and the probable impact upon ET's Facilities, an encroachment agreement may be necessary for proposed construction or maintenance within ET's Pipeline Facility. ET shall be responsible for preparing such encroachment agreement and shall bear the cost and expense in such preparation. Such encroachment agreement shall outline the responsibilities, conditions and liabilities of the parties and must be fully executed and in ET's possession prior to commencing any construction activity. 4. Insurance Coverage In certain instances, due to the type of Crossing required and the probable impact upon ET's Facilities, ET may require evidence of comprehensive general liability insurance coverage prior to any construction or maintenance activity in the vicinity of its Facilities. In the event ET requires evidence of comprehensive general liability insurance, ET and/or its affiliates and related companies, whichever the case may be, shall be named as additional insured. 5. Crossing Pipelines with Equipment To protect ET's pipelines or related Facilities from additional external loading, ET may perform a field survey and an engineering study to determine the effects of any proposed activity over its pipelines or related Facilities. Mats, timber, air -bridges, or other protective materials deemed necessary and appropriate by ET may be required and placed over ET's pipelines or related Facilities for the duration of any loading. When utilizing an air -bridge refer to Energy Transfer's approved design. Air -bridge design provided upon request. 6. Excavation. Cuts. or Fill near ET's Pipeline Facility a. An ET representative will be on location prior to and during construction activity within ET's Pipeline Facility. b. No heavy equipment of any type will be permitted to work directly over ET's pipelines or related Facilities. c. All excavation within eighteen inches (18") of any pipeline will be performed by hand. At the discretion of ET's onsite representative, excavators may be required to hand dig beginning at a distance greater than eighteen inches (18"). d. All excavations within ET's Pipeline Facility shall be backfilled with a minimum of eight inches (8") lifts of backfill material, where pipeline padding is reduced ensure backfill is clean and free from rock, trash, concrete, rubbish, or hazardous material. Soil backfill must be compacted to the satisfaction of the ET onsite inspector so that settling does not occur. e. No grade cuts will be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. ET's representative will be on location. An engineering study may be performed to ensure that the lateral stability of ET's pipelines or related Facilities are not affected. Revised 12/08/2023 - 2 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER f. No fill shall be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. No more than twenty-four inches (24") of earthen fill material (pipeline cover not to exceed seven feet (7'), free from any rocks, trash, concrete, rubbish, rebar, hazardous materials, etc., will be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. g. Earthen cover over ET's pipelines shall be thirty-six inches (36") or no less than what was originally there prior to any construction. In the event that ET determines that a lesser cover will not increase the risk to the public or increase the risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to ET's pipelines or related Facilities. h. No trash or debris shall be placed in any excavation or left in or on ET's Pipeline Facility. i. The creation of storm water outfalls or other water management controls which would make the pipeline right-of-way more susceptible to erosion are not allowed. 7. Aboveground A1111urtenances. Structures and Obstructions a. No aboveground appurtenances, structures, or obstructions of a temporary or permanent nature shall be located within ET's Pipeline Facility that, in any way, interfere with operating, maintaining, accessing, inspecting, repairing, modifying, replacing or relocating such Facilities. The appurtenances, structures and obstructions include, but are not limited to the following: buildings, structures, signage, utility poles, steel towers, guy wires, other structures supporting aerial lines, satellite dishes, manholes, catch basins, septic systems, utility pedestals, transformers, fire hydrant, large spoils of earthen materials, decks, pools, boats, RV's, trailers and storage of hazardous or non -hazardous materials. b. No foreign towers (Wind Turbine and Communication Towers) are permitted within 1500 feet (1500') of ET's Pipeline Facilities. Refer any requests to the Right -of -Way Representative/Encroachments Group. No solar array facilities are permitted within 50' of ET's Pipeline Facilities, or within 300' of ET's cathodic protection groundbeds. AC and DC power crossings per Proposed Pipe and Utility Lines below. See "Solar Facilities in Proximity to Pipelines" for required CP/AC testing and monitoring requirements. Fill out and return "Solar Facility Project Data Request". 8. Proposed Pine and Utility Lines a. General Guidelines: 1. For the safety of the public and to lessen the risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to ET's Pipeline Facility and in furtherance of the state code, ET's Pipeline Facility shall be positively located by ET before any Crossings are constructed or installed near ET's Pipeline Facility. 2. Plan and profile drawings are required for all foreign utility Crossings. 3. For open trench Crossings, ET requires a minimum clearance of twenty-four inches (24") be maintained between the bottom of ET's pipeline or related Facilities and any foreign line or facilities. Revised 12/08/2023 - 3 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER 4. For conventional and horizontal directionally drilled (HDD) bore Crossings, ET requires a minimum clearance of thirty-six inches (36") below ET's pipeline/facilities. 5. For horizontal directionally drilled (HDD) bore Crossings that are large diameter, twelve inches (12") or greater, a minimum of sixty inches (60") of clearance below ET's Pipeline Facilities and across the entire width of ET's right-of-way is required. 6. Excavate ET Facilities at the point of the proposed Crossing on the approach side to verify the auger head, boring and installation process will not damage ET's Pipeline Facilities. 7. All foreign lines shall cross ET's Pipeline Facility at ninety degrees (90°) or at an angle of not less than forty-five degrees (45°). Longitudinal occupancy of ET's Pipeline Facility will not be permitted. 8. Buried utility lines must be identified with permanent aboveground markers where lines enter and exit ET's right-of-way. Installation and maintenance of the markers shall be the responsibility of the foreign line owner. 9. No manholes, valves or other appurtenances will be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. 10. No vertical or horizontal bends allowed within ET's Pipeline Facility. 11. ET's Pipeline Facility is cathodically protected. All other cathodically protected facilities that enter, or cross ET's Pipeline Facility must have test leads installed. Any inquiries for cooperative testing should be directed to the attention of ET's Field Representative on location. Any utility Crossings that may be negatively affected by ET cathodic protection will need to be designed accordingly (i.e. coated, cased, etc.) 12. ET may require excavation of its Facilities to perform corrosion related tasks before and during foreign line Crossings as required. 13. All underground utilities (other than residential telephone, cable TV and 24-volt DC power lines) may require plastic identification tape installed no closer than eighteen inches (18") above the line. b. Water or Forced Sewer Lines 1. All water and sewer lines shall be either (1) ductile iron or steel casing (coated to protect it from ET's cathodic protection) or (2) steel encased in plastic schedule 80 PVC for a minimum of 5-feet on either side of any ET's pipelines or related Facilities or (3) standard PVC pipe. 2. Forced sewer lines shall have no piping connections located within 5-feet of any ET's pipelines or related Facilities or placed within ET's pipeline easement. Revised 12/08/2023 - 4 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER Communication, Power or Combustible Material Lines 1. When open trenching Crossing with underground fiber optic cables, telephone and television cables (other than residential telephone and cable TV) crossing under ET's Pipeline Facility shall be installed in rigid non-metallic conduit with bags of concrete -mix placed directly above and below the conduit across ET's right- of -way or similar company approved method. Place warning burial tape the width of ET's right-of-way at least 18 inches (18") directly above communication cables. Bags of concrete -mix and burial tape are not required when installing via HDD or conventional bore. 2. When open trench Crossing with underground electric cables except 24-volt DC power lines (including single residential service drops) crossing under ET's facilities shall be installed in nonmetallic conduit with bags of concrete -mix placed directly above and below the conduit across ET's right-of-way or similar company approved method. Place red warning burial tape the width of ET's right-of-way at least 18 inches directly above the cable. A minimum of sixty inches (60") is required if over 600 volts. 3. When underground electric cable over 10 kV is crossing ET Facilities it shall be a shielded cable installed within ridged non-metallic casing. Bags of concrete -mix or a similar ET approved method, must be placed directly above and below the casing across the width of ET's right- of -way. Place red warning burial tape the width of ET's right-of-way at least 18 inches directly above the cable. ET requires a minimum clearance of sixty inches (60") below ET's Pipeline Facilities. Bags of concrete -mix and burial tape are not required when installing via HDD or conventional bore. 4. Overhead and underground crossings exceeding 160 kV and any power lines that will be constructed parallel to and outside of ET's right-of-way within 300 feet of ET's Pipeline Facilities, are not allowed by ET. 5. All overhead power/communication lines must cross ET Facilities with a minimum vertical overhead clearance of twenty-five feet (25') to grade at full load and maximum temperature. 6. ET recommends that all underground residential telephone, cable TV and 24-volt DC power lines be encased in plastic conduit for the full width of the right -of- way. ci. Exclusive Easement Construction 1. When constructing a directional drill across ET's easement a minimum separation of ten (10) feet must be maintained between the outside diameter of the bottom of ET's pipeline and the top of any of your facilities within ET's exclusive easement area. 2. When constructing a conventional bore across ET's easement a minimum separation of three (3) feet must be maintained between the outside diameter of the bottom of ET's pipeline and the top of any of your facilities within ET's exclusive easement area. Revised 12/08/2023 - 5 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER 9. Proposed Roads. Streets. Driveways. Access Ways and Parking Lots a. Load stress will be calculated by ET to determine if any protection of the pipeline is required for roadways, streets, driveways, access ways, etc., planned to cross ET's Pipeline Facility. In the event it is determined by ET that the roadways, streets, driveways, access ways, etc., will increase a risk to the public or increase a risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to ET's Pipeline Facility, ET may require, at the sole cost and expense of the party requesting such Crossing, the installation of protective material or pipeline adjustment as may be deemed necessary by ET to protect the public or ET's Pipeline Facility. b. The preferred minimum earth cover over ET's Pipeline Facility is forty-eight inches (48") at all roadways, streets, driveways, access ways, etc., including adjacent ditch lines. In the event that ET determines that a lesser cover will not increase a risk to the public or increase a risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to the pipeline or related Facilities, ET may allow a lesser earth cover, in a minimum amount as determined solely within the discretion of ET. In the event the required amount of cover is not obtainable as reflected in finalized plan and profile drawings, ET may require the installation of protective material at no expense to ET. Cover shall be measured from the top of ET's pipeline to the surface of the road. c. Roads and streets crossing over ET's Pipeline Facility shall cross at an angle of not less than forty-five degrees (45°), or as near as possible thereto. Crossings should be over straight pipe and at locations free of any crossovers. Longitudinal occupancy of the right- of -way will not be permitted. d. No parking areas or the like will be allowed on, over or across ET's Pipeline Facilities. e. Permanent pipeline marker(s), provided by ET, will be installed at all road Crossings. 10. Dis on sal Systems No aerobic septic systems, septic tanks, liquid disposal systems, or hazardous waste disposal systems will be allowed on ET's Pipeline Facility or within twenty-five (25) feet of ET's Pipeline Facility. This will include, but is not limited to, affluent from sewage disposal systems, the discharge of any hydrocarbon substance, the discharge or disposal of any regulated waste, or any other discharge that may prove damaging or corrosive to ET's Pipeline Facility. 11. Impoundment of Water a. In order to provide for the adequate maintenance and operation of ET's Pipeline Facility, the impoundment of water on ET's Pipeline Facility will not be allowed. Revised 12/08/2023 - 6 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER b. Temporary soil erosion and sediment control devices and storm water detention basins/traps will not be permitted on ET's Pipeline Facility. 12. Blasting & Seismic Activity To the extent it impacts the lateral stability or otherwise endangers or interferes with the efficiency, safety, or convenient operation of ET's Pipeline Facility, no explosive detonations will be permitted within 300-feet of ET's Pipeline Facility without: (1) prior blast plan impact analysis and written approval from ET and (2) ET's representative on site during blasting. To determine if the detonation stresses will be detrimental to the safety of ET's Pipeline Facility, information required to complete ET's `Blasting Data Sheet" must be submitted to ET for evaluation and approval no less than 30 days prior to the proposed date of blasting activity. The contractor performing the blasting will be required to verify by signature the proposed blasting plan. b. No "Non -Explosive" seismic testing or construction equipment with steady state vibrator, intermittent vibrator, or thumper sources shall be conducted within 150 feet of ET's Pipeline Facility without prior written approval. 13. LandscaRing & Irrigation Systems Landscaping shall not be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. b. Irrigation heads and valves shall not be permitted within ET's Pipeline Facility. Irrigation systems shall not be directly installed longitudinally over ET's Pipeline Facility and shall not be buried deeper than 12-inches, regardless of location, from the surface of the ground within ET's Pipeline Facility. 14. Pipeline Markers The party request such Crossing will ensure that all temporary and permanent pipeline markers installed by ET are always protected and maintained during construction or Crossing related activity. Any permanent markers damaged or removed will be replaced by ET at the sole expense of the party requesting such Crossing. No work will be allowed to commence until, in the opinion of ET, sufficient pipeline markers are in place. Unauthorized damage or removal of pipeline markers is punishable by Federal law. 15. Right of Ingress and Egress a. The party requesting such Crossing shall have the right to install fences on, over and across the Facilities, provided, however, that ET shall have the unrestricted right of ingress and egress to its Facilities at all times. ET prohibits any fencing which obstructs access or line of sight for patrol/inspection or identification markers. b. ET, at its sole option and discretion, may require the party requesting such Crossing to install, at its sole cost and expense and for ET's benefit, a walk gate at least three (3) feet in width for residential lots or gate at least twelve (12) feet in width for rural areas at each Revised 12/08/2023 - 7 - •wof ENERGY TRANSFER fence Crossing. ET shall provide a lock for such gate(s). Said gate(s) shall be installed as to provide ET with ingress and egress access to its pipeline or related facilities and to minimize vehicular and equipment travel over ET's pipeline or Facilities. c. The parry requesting such Crossing shall be responsible for keeping the enclosed portion of ET's pipeline or related Facilities free of any debris or trash. d. ET's pipeline or related Facilities shall be positively located by ET before any fences are constructed or installed near ET's Pipeline Facilities. Post hole excavations for fencing placed near ET's Pipeline Facilities shall not be greater than a depth of eighteen inches (18") below the undisturbed grade level nor closer than five feet (5') horizontally from ET's pipeline or related Facilities. 16. Statement Regarding Existing Rights NOTHING CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CONVEY, WAIVE, OR SUBORDINATE ANY OF ET'S EXISTING RIGHTS WHATSOEVER. SHOULD A CONFLICT EXIST WITH THE LANGUAGE CONTAINED IN ANY ET ENCROACHMENT AGREEMENT, EASEMENT, OR PETITION IN CONDEMNATION AND THESE GUIDELINES, ET'S ENCROACHMENT AGREEMENT, EASEMENT, OR PETITION IN CONDEMNATION SHALL CONTROL AND BE DECISIVE OF THE ISSUE. 17. Statements Regarding Guidelines for Construction and Maintenance Certain construction and maintenance activities may be reviewed and approved by ET at one point in time, but not immediately installed or performed. Therefore, all construction and maintenance activities are subject to the Guidelines in affect at the time the work takes place. In addition, the guidelines described in this document represent those industry standards that ET believes meet the minimum acceptable standards regarding third -party construction and maintenance activities in the vicinity of ET's Pipeline Facility. Therefore, after review of the final plan and profile drawings, ET may, in the event that ET determines the construction and maintenance activities will increase a risk to the public or increase a risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to ET's Pipeline Facility, require fortifications in furtherance of state codes. The party requesting such Crossing agrees to alter, modify or halt any construction activity, which in the sole opinion of ET's, will increase the risk to the public or increase the risk of a break, leak, rupture or other damage to ET's Pipeline Facility. All written correspondences and your final design plans are to be addressed to: Energy Transfer Company encroachmentskenergvtransfer.com Attention: Encroachment Department [END] Revised 12/08/2023 - 8 - XXXXX-X V NOLLYIS 1..dI1 HHNVN SONC t— O LO O LO N O N Q L X W 3€tp� 0 avxZ dYm� i W w�li W p GN 8� oaiu o8€€ova 63 �a F C) 6' V]V]ado G=FQ UWB�Q°Gz 33 �a3�: �t �p wp oy adfo 8 4444 16 a&3aoF3 83 0� LL� V W W6 3 Q CO — D _ — I¢I U rM31 �m U aO° n w - T I I I � `i m��tlEu�9 tr3N31 sVH. I q� I� I o a ° �Q� ICI a 4 �o oOr 'p= o nN m�No I I ICI >t V� � ❑ o o;� 4. o W -- LL _ _ £z'ObL-d01 9nld-T �"I N1 tO m �I z-W d „ 9T doHd ON3 r - T8'95+E' 1S �Z u V _ (ddmi,, Ol Idl NNNn=A 13 z m \ 9NISSOHJ 5V9 91 %3 _ - LS'9z+E 15 NIW, z� z ii II I I o t I I I 1 I I III I LL I z � o w I I I I �SSSbL=d01�11 I I II „Bf 91.0 0 EL'pE+[ yiS Ind (9-1TV H313 W MOIj JI13N9tlW SE Ez+T V1S 9NIldnOJ 3lOM" 9T 11tl15N1 I o 00'90+1:V1S (OT-S/C ES-H( IIVM NO11V1S tin 1V \ z-W1 „91 aoaa NI930 I I.. I I I 1 i_ VL'V 'f 95 d011o \PU.�p t U�.UOdLL1�S.UPS _ el yr, — CCC f . 4 LO ti el a L 0 c r CF) p6i M `0 N w N \/ ao 4 dotNeW 0T - v OVIO Ntot, t� 'v% � �• w rn m �IOe� now AlulrYlt' ` PENDING PERNUT ACQUISITION CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 GR-01 60 00 Product Requirements CITY OF FORT WORTH Bonds Ranch Lift Station A STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS City Project Number 104490-1 Revised September 1, 2025 FORT WORTH. CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsiftcation Manufacturer Model No. National Spec Size Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Components 33-39-10 (Rev 2/3/16) 07/23/97 3305 13 Urethane Hydrophilic Waterstop, Asahi Kgy, K.K. Adeka Ultra -Seal P-201 ASTM D2240/D412/D792 04/26/00 3305 13 Offset Joint for 4' Diam. MH Hanson Concrete Products Do—irig No. 35-0048-001 04/26/00 3305 13 Profile Gasket for 4' Diam. MH. Press -Seal Gasket Cm ._ 21 -4G Gasket ASTM C-443/C-361 SS MH 1/26/99 3305 13 HDPE Manhole Adjustment Rings Udtech, Inc HOPE Adjustment Ring Traffic and Non -traffic area 5/13/05 33 05 13 Manhole External Wrap Canusa - CPS Wra idSeal Manhole Encapsulation System Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Fiberglass 33-39-13 (1/8/13) 1/26199 1 3339 13 Fiber lass Manhole Fluid Containment, Inc. Flowtite ASTM 3753 Non -traffic area 08/30/06 33 39 13 Fiber lass Manhole L.F. Manufacturin Non -traffic area Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Frames & Covers/Rectangular 33-05-13 (Rev 2/3/16) 33 05 13 1 Manhole Frames and Covers I Western Iron Works, Bass & Hays Foundry I i001 24"x40" WD Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Frames & Covers/Standard (Round) 33-05-13 (Rev 2/3/16) Manhole Frames and Covers Western Iron Works, Bass & Ha Founds 30024 24" Dia. Manhole Frames and Covers McKinle Iron Works Inc. A 24 AM 24" Dia. 08/24/18Manhole Frames and Covers Neenah Foun R-1272 ASTM A48 & AASHTO M306 24" Dia. 08/24/18Manhole J31.1 Frames and Covers Neenh Found NF 1274 ASTM A48& AASHTO M306 30" Dia. Manhole Frames and Covers Si a Co oration MH-t44N Manhole Frames and Covers Si a Cor ration MH-143N Manhole Frames and Covers Pont-A-Mousson GTS-STD 24" dia. 3305 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Neenah Casting 24" dia. 10/31/06 3305 13 Manhole Frames and Covers (Hinged) Powerseal Hinged Ductile Iron Manhole ASTM A536 24" Dia. 7/25103 3305 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Saint-Gobain Pi N lines (Pamrex/rexus) RE32-R8FS 30" Dia. 01/31/06 33 05 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover East Jordan Iron Works V 1432-2 and V 1493 Designs AASHTO M306-04 30" Dia. 11/02/10 3305 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover Sigma Corporation MID 651 FWN & MH16502 30" Dia 07/19/I I 3305 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover Star Pie Products MH32FTWSS-DC 30" Dia 08/10/11 3305 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover Accucast 220700 Heavy Duty with Gasket Rine 30" Dia 10/14/13 33 05 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover (Hinged & Lockable) East Jordan Iron Works 30" ERGO XL Assembly with Cam Lock/MPIC/T-Gasket ASSHTO Mt05 & ASTM A536 30" Dia 06/01/17 3405 13 30" Dia. MH Rin and Cover Lockable) Cl SIP Industries 2280 32" ASTM A 48 30" Dia. 12/05/23 3405 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover (Hinged & Lockable) Cl SIP Industries 4267WT - Hinged 32") ASTM A 48 30" Dia. 09/16/19 33 05 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover Composite Access Products, L.P. CAP-ONE-30-FTW, Composite, w/ Lock w/o ISn g 30" Dia. 10/07/21 3405 13 30" Dia. MH Ring and Cover Trumbull Manufacturing 32"(30") Frame and Cover 30" Dia. Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Frames & Covers/Water Tight & Pressure Tight 33-05-13 (Rev 2/3/161 33 05 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Pont-A-Mousson Parmi t 24" Dia, 3305 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Neenah Costing 24" Dia. 33 05 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Western Gen Works,Bass & Has Foundry 300-24P 24" Dia. 3305 13 Manhole Frames aad Covers McKinley It.. Works Inc. WPA24AM 24" Dia. 03/08/00 33 05 13 Manhole Frames and Covers Accucast RC-2100 ASTM A 48 24" Dia, 04/20/01 3305 13 Manhole Frames and Covers (SIP)Sc—pore Industries Private Ltd. 300-24-23.75 Ring,and Cover ASTM A 48 24" Dia. Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Precast Concrete (Rev 1/8/13) 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete Hydro Conduit CorpSPL Item #49 ASTM C 478 48" 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete Wall Concrete Pipe Co. Inc. ASTM C-443 48" 09/23/96 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete Concrete Product Inc. 48" I.D. Manhole w/ 32" Cone ASTM C 478 48" w/32" cone 12/05/23 3339 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete The Turner Company 72" I.D. Manhole w/ 32" Cone ASTM C 478 72" 05/08/l8 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete The Tumu Company 48", 60" I.D. Manhole w/ 32" Cone ASTM C 478 48", 60" 09/03/24 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast Concrete Oldcastle Precast Inc. marmote,Opening an at top, Transition Cones) ASTM C 478 49" to 94" I.D. 06/09/10 33 39 10 Manhole, Precast (Reinforced Pol er)Cmerete US Composite Pie Reinforced Polymer Concrete ASTM C-76 48" to 72" 09/06/19 33 3920 Manhole, Precast Concrete Forterra Pipe and Precast 60" & 72" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone ASTM C-76 60" & 72" 10/07/21 32 39 20 Manhole, Precast Concrete Forterra Pipe and Precast 48" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone ASTM C-77 48" 10/07/21 33 39 20 Manhole, Precast (Reinforced Polymer) Concrete Armorock 48" & 60" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone 48" & 60" 10/07/21 33 39 20 Manhole, Precast (Hybrid) Polymer & PVC Geneva Pipe and Precast (Pred! Systems) 48" & 60" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone 48" & 60" Non Traffic Areas 03/07/23 33 39 20 Manhole, Precast Concrete AmeriTex Pie and Products, LLC 48" & 60" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone ASTM C-478; ASTM C-923; ASTM C-443 03/07/23 333120 Manhole, Precast (Reinforced Pol ep Concrete P3 Pol ers, Rockfiardsc 48" & 60" I.D. Manhole w/32" Cone 04/28/07 Manhole, Precast(Reinforced Polymer) Concrete Amitech USA MortPol cre[e Pi e Sewer -(WAC) Wastewater Access Chamber 33 39 40 12/29/23 33 39 20 For use when Sod. MH cannot be 1 Wastewater Access Chamber Quickstream Solutions, Inc. Type 8 Maintenace Shaft (Poo it) installed due to de th Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Rehab Systems/Cementitious E1-14 Manhole Rehab Systems Quadex 04/23/01 E1-14 Mardmlc Rehab Systems Standard Cement Materials, Inc. Reliner MSP E1-14 Manhole Rehab Systems AP/M Per mb- 4/20/01 E1-14 Mnnhole Rehab System Strong corripany Strong Seal MS2A Rehab System 5/12/03 E1-14 Manhole Rehab S stem (Liner) Tri lex Lining System MH repair roduct to stop infiltration ASTM D5813 08/30/06 General Concrete Repair F1exKrete Technologies Vinyl Polyester Repair Product Misc. Use " From Original Standard Products List FORT 'WORTH ,, CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsification Manufacturer Model No. National Spec Size Water & Sewer - Manholes & Bases/Rehab Systems/NonCementitious 05/20/96 El-14 Manhole Rehab Systems Spmyrcq, Spray Wall Polymethare, Coating ASTM D639/D790 12/14/01 Coating for Corrosion protection(Exterior) ERTECH Series 20230 and 2100 (As hatic Emulsion) Structures Onl 01/31/06 Coatings for Corrosion Protection Chesterton Arc 791, SIHB, S1, S2 Acid Resistance Test Sewer Applications 8/28/2006 Coatings for Corrosion Protection Warren Environmental S-301 and M-301 Sewer Applications 03/I9/18 33 OS 1(, 33 39 1 Q, 333920 Coatin for Corrosion rotection(Exterior) Sherwin Williams RR&C Dampproofing Non-Fibered Spray Grade As hatic Emulsion) For Exterior Coating of Concrete Structures Onl Water & Sewer - Manhole Inserts - Field Operations Use Only (Rev 2/3/16) 33 05 13 Manhole Insert Knutson Enterprises Made to Order - Plastic ASTM D 1248 For 24" dia. 33 05 13 Manhole Insert South Western Packaging Made to Order - Plastic ASTM D 1248 For 24" dia. 33 05 13 Manhole Insert Noflow-Inflow Made to Order - Plastic ASTM D 1248 For 24" dia. 09/23/96 33 05 13 Manhole Insert Southwestern Packing & Seals, Inc. LifeSaver - Stainless Steel For 24" dia. 09/23/96 33 05 13 Manhole Insert Southwestern Packing & Seals, Inc. TetherLok -.Stainless Steel For 24" dia Water & Sewer - Pipe Casing Spacers 33-05-24 (07/01/13) 11/04/02 Steel Band Casing Spacers Advanced Products and Systems, Inc. Carbon Steel Spacers, Model SI 02/02/93 Stainless Steel Casing Spacer Advanced Products and Systems, Inc. Stainless Steel Spacer, Model SSI 04/22/87 Casing Spacers Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing Casing Spacers 09/I4/10 Stainless Steel Casing Spacer Pipeline Seal and Insulator Stainless Steel Casing Spacer Up to 48" 09/14/10 Coated Steel Casin Spacers Pipeline Seal and Insulator Coated Steel Casing Spacers Up to 48" 05/10/11 Stainless Steel Casing Spacer Po —seal 4810 Powerchoek Up to 48" 03/19/18 Casing Spacers BWM SS-12 Casing Spacer(Stainless Steel) 03/19/18 Casing Spacers BWM FB-12 Casing Spacer (Coated Carbon Steel) for Non pressure Pipe and Grouted Casing 03/29/22 33 05 13 Casing Spacers CCI Pipeline Systems CSC12, CSS12 09/03/24 33 05 l3 Casing Spacers Raci (Completely HDPE) Per Manufacturers Requirements (Sewer Applications Only) 8" - 12" (Sewer Only) Water & Sewer - Pipes/Ductile Iron 33-11-10(1/8/13) 33 11 10 Ductile Iron Pipe Griffin Pipe Products, Co. Super Bell-Tite Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe, AW WA C150, CI51 3" thm 24" 08/24/18 33 It 10 Ductile Ion Pipe American Ductile Iron Pipe Co. American Futile Pipe (Bell Spigot) AWWA C150, C 151 4" thou 30" 08/24/18 33 It 10 Ductile Iron Pipe American Ductile Iron Pipe Co. American Flex Ring (Restrained Joint) AWWA C150, C151 4" thou 30" " 33 11 10 Ductile Iron Pipe U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co. AWWA C150, C151 " 33 11 10 Ductile Iron Pipe McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co. AWWA C150, C151 Water & Sewer - Utility Line Marker (08124/2018) Sewer - Coatings/Epoxy 33-39-60 (01/OS/13) 02/25/02 E oxy Lining System Sauereisen, Inc ScwerGard 21ORS LA Count #210-1.33 12/14/01 Epoxy Lining System Ertech Technical Coatings ErWelt 2030 and 2100 Series 04/14/05 Interior Ductile Ion Pie Coating Indmon Protecto 401 ASTM B-1 l7 Ductile Ion Pie Only 01/31/06 Coatings for Corrosion Protection Chesterton Are 791, S1HB, Sl, S2 Acid Resistance Test Sewer Applications 8/28/2006 Coatings for Corrosion Protection Warren Envbonmental S-301 and M-301 Sewer Applications Sewer - Coatings/Polyurethane Sewer - Combination Air Valves 05/25/18 33-31.70 Air Release Valve A.M. USA, Inc. D025LTP02(Cm site Bud ) Sewer -Pipes/Concrete E1-04 Cone. Pipe, Reinforced Wall Concrete PipeCo. Inc. ASTM C 76 EI-04 Cone. Pipe, Reinforced Hydro Conduit Corporation Class M T&G, SPL Item #77 ASTM C 76 EI-04 Conc. Pi e, Reinforced Hannan Concrete Products ASTM C 76 E1-04 Conc. Pi , Reinforced Concrete Pipe & Products Co. Inc. ASTM C 76 Sewer - Pipe Enlargment System (Method)33-31-23 (01/18/13) PIM System PIM Corporation polyethylene PIM Corp., Piscata Way, N.J. Approved Previous) McConnell Systems McLat Construction Polyethylene Houston, Texas Approved Previous) TRS Systems I Treachless Replacement System Polyethylene Calgary, Canada Approved Previous) Sewer - Pipe/Fiberglass Reinforced/ 33-31-13(1/8/l3) 7/21/97 3331 13 Cent. Cast Fiberglass (FRP) Hobas Pie USA, Inc. Hobas Pi (Non -Pressure) ASTM D3262/D3754 03/22/10 33 31 13 Fiberglass Pie (FRP) Ameran Bondstrand RPMP Pie ASTM D3262/D3754 04/09/21 33 31 13 Glass -Fiber Reinforced Polymer Pipe (FRP) Thompson Pie Group Thompson Pipe (Flowtite) ASTM D3262/D3754 03/07/23 3331 13 Fiberglass Pipe (FRP) Future Pipe Industries Fiberwong FRP ASTM -262, ASTM D3681, ASTM D4161, AWWA M45 09/03/24 1 3331 13 Fiberglass Pipe (FRP) Superlit Boru Saaayi A.S. Supertit FRP ASTM D3262, ASTM D3517, ASTM 3754, AWWA C950. " From Original Standard Products List FORT WORTH. CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsification Manufacturer Model No. National Spec Size Sewer - Pipe/Polvmer Pipe 4/14/05 Pol er Modified Concrete Pi Amitech USA Me Pol Crete Pi ASTM C33, A276, F477 8" to 102", Class V 06/09/10 EI-9 Reinforced Pol ner Concrete Pie US Composite Pie Reinforced Polymer Concrete Pie ASTM C-76. Sewer - Pipes/HD PE 33-31-23(1/8/13) Bi h-densil of eth lene i e Phillips Driscopipe, Inc. Oticora Ductile Polyethylene Pie ASTM D 1248 8" Ffigh-densitv nolvethvIene nine PI-0 Inc. ASTM D 1248 8" High -density 1 eth lene Dive Polly Pipe, Inc. ASTM D 1248 8" High -density 1 eth lene pipe CSRHydro Conduit/Pipeline S tems McConnell Pipe Enlargement ASTMD 1248 Sewer - Pipes/PVC (Pressure Sewer) 33-11-12 (4/1/13) 12/02/11 1 33-11-12 DR-14 PVC Pressure Pipe Pipelife Jetstream PVC Pressure Pipe AW WA C900 4" thou 12" 10/22/14 33-I142 DR-14.PVC Pressure Pipe Royal Budding Products Royal Scal PVC Pressure Pipe AW WA C900 4" 0uv 12" Sewer - Pipes/PVC* 33-31-20 (7/1/13) 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Pie J-M Manufacturing Co, Inc. (JM Eagle) SDR-26 (PSI 15) ASTM D 3034 4" - 15" t2/23/97" 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Pie Diamond Plastics Corporation SDR-26 (PSI 15) ASTM D 3034 4" fl ru 15" 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Pipe Lamson V y lon Pipe SDR-26 (PSI 15) ASTM D 3034 4" thru 15" 12/05/23 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Pie Vin (tech PVC Pie SDR-26 (PSI 15) ASTM D3034 4" thrn 15" 12/05/23 33-31 20 PVC Sewer Pie Vin (tech PVC Pie Gravity Sewer PS 115 ASTM F 679 18" 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Pie J-M Manufacturing Co, Inc. (JM Eagle) PS 115 ASTM F 679 IS" - 28" 05/06/05 33-31-20 PVC Solid Wall Pipe Diamond Plastics Corporation PS 115 ASTM F-679 18" to 48" 04/27/06 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Fittings Banco SDR-26 (PS 115) Gasket Fittings ASTM D-3034,.D-1784, etc 4" - 15" ` 33-31-20 PVC Sewer Fittings Plastic Trends, Inc.(Westlake) Gasketed PVC Sewer Main Fittings ASTM D 3034 3/19/2018 33 3120 PVC Sewer Pie Pi life Jet Stream SDR 26 (PS 115) ASTM F679 18"- 24" 3/19/2018 333120 PVC Sewer Pipe Pi life .let Stream SDR 26 ASTM D3034 4"- 15" 3/29/2019 33 31 20 Gasketed Fittings (PVC) GPK Products, Inc. SDR 26 ASTM D3034 4"- I5" 10/21/2020 33 31 20 PVC Sewer Pie NAPCO(Westlake SDR 26 ASTM D3034 4" - 15" 10/22/2020 1 33 31 20 PVC Sewer Pie Sanderson Pipe Corp. SDR 26 ASTM D3034 4"- 15" 10/21/2020 1 33 31 20 IPVC Sewer Pipe I NAPCO(Wcad ke) SDR 26 PS 115 ASTM F-679 18"- 36" " From Original Standard Products List FORT WORTH. CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsification Manufacturer Model No. National Spec Size Water - Appurtenances 33-12-10 (07/OU131 09/03/24 33-12-10 Double Strap Saddle Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. 202B 1"-2" SVC, up to 16" Pip, 01/18/18 33-12-10 Double Strap Saddle Romac 202NS Nylon Coated AWWA C800 1"-2" SVC, up to 24" Pipe 08/28/02 Double Strap Saddle Smith Blau #317 Nylon Coated Double Strap Saddle 07/23/12 33-12-.10 Double Strap Service Saddle Mueller Company DR2S Double (SS) Strap DI Saddle AWWA C800 1 "-2" SVC, up to 24" Pipe 03/07/23 33-12-10 Double Strap Service Saddle Poweraeal 3450AS, Incl. Corp. Stop, Old Strap, Stainless NSF ANSI 372 1"-2" SVC, up to 24" Pipe 10/27/87 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves McDonald 6100M,610OMT & 610MT 3/4" and 1" 10/27/87 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves McDonald 4603B, 4604B, 6100M, 6100TM and 6101M ]Y" and 2" 525/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. FB600-7NL, FB1600-7-NL, FV23-777-W-NL, L22-77NL AWWA C800 2" 5/25/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves Ford Meter Box Co., Ine. FB600-6-NL, FB1600-6-NL, FV23-666-W- NL, L22-66NL AWWA C800 1-1/2" 5/25/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves Ford Meter Be. Co., Inc. FB6004-NL, FB16004-NL, BI1-444-WR- NL, B22444-WR-NL, L28- 4NL AWWA C800 I" 5/25/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves Mueller Co., Ltd. B-25000N, B-24277N-3, B-2020ON-3, H- 15000N, , H-1552N, H142276N AWWA C800, ANSF 61, ANSI/NSF 372 2" 5/25/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves Mueller Co., Ltd. B-25000N, B-2020ON-3, B-24277N-3,H- 15000N, H-14276N, H-15525N AWWA C800, ANSF 61, ANSUNSF 372 1-1/2" 525/2018 33-12-10 Curb Stops -Ball Meter Valves Mueller Co., Ltd. B-25000N, B-2020ON-3,11-15000N, H- 15530N AWWA C800, ANSF 61, ANSI/NSF 372 1" 01/26/00 Coated Tapping Saddle with Double SS Straps JCM Industries, Inc. #406 Double Band SS Saddle 1 "-2" Taps on up to 12" 0/5/21/12 33-12-25 Tapping Sleeve (Coated Steel) JCM Industries, Inc. 412 Tapping Sleeve ESS AWWA C-223 Up to 30" w/12" Out 03/29/22 33-12-25 Tappingg Sleeve Coated or Stainless Steel JCM Industries, Inc. 415 Tapping Sleeve AWWA C-223 Concrete Pipe Only 05/10/11 Tapping Sleeve (Stainless Steep Poweracal 3490AS (Flange) & 3490MJ V-8" and 16" 02/29/12 33-12-25 Tacoma Sleeve Coated Steel) Romac FTS 420 AWWA C-223 U p to 42" w/24" Out 02/29/12 33-12-25 Tapping Sleeve (Stainless Steel) Romac SST Stainless Steel AWWA C-223 Up to 24" w/12" Out 02/29/12 33-12-25 Tappingg Sleeve Stainless Steel Romac SST III Stainless Steel AWWA C-223 Up to 30" w/12" Out 05/10/11 Joint Repair Clam Powers.] 3232 Bell Joint Repair Clam. 4" to 30" Plastic Meter Box w/Composite Lid DFW Plastics Inc. DFW37C-12-IEPAF FTW Plastic Meter Box w/Com osite Lid DFW Plastics Inc. OFW39C-12-IEPAF FTW 08/30/06 Plastic Meter Box w/Composite Lid DFW Plastics Inc. DFW65C-14-IEPAF FTW Class "A" Concrete Meter Box Bass & Hays CMB37-B12 1 118 LID-9 Concrete Meter Bex Bass & Ha CMB-18-Dual 1416 LID-9 Concrete Meter Box Bass & Ha CMB65-B65 1527 LID-9 Water - Bolts, Nuts, and Gaskets 33-11-05 (01/08/13) None Water - Combination Air Release 33-31-70 (01/08/131 ° EI-11 Combination Air Release Valve CA Industries, Inc. Empire Air and Vacuum Valve, Model 935 ASTM A 126 Class B, ASTM A 1" & 2" EI-11 Combination Air Release Valve Multiplex Manufacturing Co. Crispin Air and Vacuum Valves, Model No. t/2" I" & 2" EI-11 Combination Air Release Valve Valve and Primer Corp. APCO #143C, #I45C and #147C 1", 2" & 3" Water - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants 33-12-40 (01/15/141 10/01/87 E4-12 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant American -Darling Valve Drawing Nos. 90-18608, 94-18560 AWWA C-502 03/31/88 E-1-12 Dry Bartel Fire Hydrant American Darling Valve Shop Drawing No. 94-18791 AWWA C-502 09/30/87 E-IA2 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant Clow Corporation Shop Drawing No. D-I9895 AWWA C-502 01/l2/93 &142 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant American AVK Company Model 2700 AWWA C-502 08/24/89 E-I-12 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant Clow Corporation Drawings D20435, D20436, B20506 AWWA C-502 E-1-12 Dry Bartel Fire Hydrant ITT Kdy Valve Shop Davmg No.D-80783FW AWWA C-502 09/24/87 E-1-12 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant M&H Valve Company Shop Drawing No. 13476 AWWA C-502 10/14/87 E-1-12 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant Mueller Company Shop Drawings No. 6461 A-423 Centurion AWWA C-502 01/15/88 El-12 D Bartel Fire Hydrant Mueller Company 'hap Drawing FH-12 A-423 Su er Centmion 200 AWWA C-502 10/09/87 E-1-12 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant U.S. Pip. & Foundry Shop Drawing No. 960250 AWWA C-502 09/16/87 E-IA2 Dry Bartel Fire Hydrant American Flow Control (AFC) Waterous Pacer WB67 AWWA C-502 08/12/16 33-12-40 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant EJ (East Jordan Iron Works) WaterMaster 5CD250 Water - Meters 02/05/93 E 101-5 Detector Check Meter Ames Company Model 1000 Detector Check Valve AWWA C550 4" - 10" 08/05/04 1 Magnetic Drive Vertical Turbine Hcay Magnetic Drive Vertical AWWA C701, Class 1 3/4" - 6" " From Original Standard Products List FORT WORTH. CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsification Manufacturer Model No. I National Spec I Size Water - Pipes/PVC (Pressure Water) 33-31-70 (01/08/13) 12/05/23 33-11-12. PVC Pressure Pie Vin (tech PVC Pie DR14 AWWA C900, AWWA C605, ASTM D1794 4"-16" 12/05/23 33-11-12 PVC Pressure Pie Vinyltech PVC Pipe DR18 AWWA C900, AWWA C605, ASTMD1784 IV-18" 09/03/24 33-11-12 PVC Pressure Pie Northern Pipe Products DR44 AWWA C900, AWWA C605, ASTM D1784 4"46" 09/03/24 33-11-12 PVC Pressure Pie Northern Pipe Products DR18 AWWA C900, AWWA C605, ASTM D1784 16"-18" 3/19/2018 33 1112 PVC Pressure Pie Pi life Jet Stream DR14 AWWA C900 4"-12" 3/19/2019 33 It 12 PVC Pressure Pie Pi elife Jet Stream DRl8 AWWA C900 16"-24" 5/25/2018 33 1112 PVC Pressure Pie Diamond Plastics Corporation DR 14 AWWA C900 4"-12" 5/25/2018 33 11 12 PVC Pressure Pie Diamond Plastics Corporation DR 18 AWWA C900 16"-24" 12/6/2018 33 It 12 PVC Pressure Pipe J-M Manufacturing Co, Inc d/b/a JM Eagle DR 14 AW WA C90046 III' ANSUNSF6l NSF FM 1612 4"-28" 12/6/2018 33 11 12 PVC Pressure Pipe J-M Manufacturing Co, Inc d/b/a JM Eagle DRIB AWWA C900-16 UL 1295 ANSI/NSF 61 FM 1612 16"-24" 9/6/2019 331112 PVC Pressure Pipe Underground Solutions. Inc. DR14FuabI.PVC .AWWA C900 4"-8" 9/6/2019 3311. 12 PVC Pressure Pipe NAPCO(WestI lc,) DR18 AWWA C900 16"-24" 9/6/2019 331112 PVC Pressure Pipe NAPCO(Westlake) DR14 .AWWA C900 4"-12" 9/6/2019 33 11 12 PVC Pressure Pipe Sanderson Pipe Corp. DR14 .AWWA C900 4"- IT' Water - Piues/Valves & Fittings/Ductile Iron Fittings 33-11-11 (01/08/131 07/23/92 E1-07 Ductile Iron Fittings Star Pipe Products, Inc. Mechanical Joint Fittings AWWA C153 & C110 EI-07 Ductile Iron Fittings Griffin Pipe Products, Co. Mechanical Joint Fittings AW WA C 110 E1-07 Ductile Iron Fittings McWane/T ler Pipe/ Union Utilities Division Mechanical Joint Fittings, SSB Class 350 AW WA C I53, C 110, C III 08/11/98 E1-07 Ductile Iron Fittings Sigma, Co. Mechanical Joint Fittings, SSB Class 351 AWWA C 153, C 110, C 112 02/26/14 E1-07 MJ Fittings Accucast Class 350 C-153 MJ Fittings AWWAC153 V-12" 05/14/98 EI-07 Ductile Iron Joint Restraints Ford Meter Box Co./Uni-Flan a Uni-Flange Series 1400 AWWA Cl I1/CI53 4" to 36" 05/14/99 EI-24 PVC Joint Restraints Ford Meter Box Co./Uni-Flan a Um -Flange Series 1500 Circle -Lock AW WA CI 11/CI53 4" to 24" 11/09/04 E1-07 Ductile Iron Joint Restraints One Bolt, Inc. One Bolt Restrained Joint Fitting AWWA CIII ICI 16/C153 4"to12" 02/29/12 33-11-11 Ductile Iron Pipe Mechanical Joint Restraint EBAA Iron, Inc. Megalug Series I100 (for DI Pipe) AWWA CI I LIC I16/C153 4" to 42" 02/29/12 33-1I-11 PVC Pipe Mechanical Joint Restraint EBAA It.., Inc. Meg -lug Series 2000 If. PVC Pipe) AWWA CI l L/C 116/C153 4" to 24" 08/05/04 E1-07 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands(PVC) Si ma, Co. Sigma One -Lek SLC4- SLCIO AW WA CII1/CI53 4" to 10" 03/06/19 33-11-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands(PVC) Si a. Co. Sigma Oar-Lok S1LCS4-SLCS12 AWWACIII/CI53 4" to 12" 08/05/04 EI-07 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands(PVC) Sigma, Co. Sigma One-Lok SLOE AW WA Cl 11/CI53 12" to 24" 08/10/98 EI-07 MJ Fittings(DIP) Si a, Co. Sigma On&Lok SLDE AWWAC153 4"-24" 10/12/IO E1-24 Interior Restrained Joint System S & B Techncial Products Bulldog System ( Diamond Lok 21 & JM ASTM F-1624 4" to IT' 04/07/69 Interior Restrained Joint System Hultee Hydcogerp-R ASTM D395, D412. D471, D573, D883, DI 149, D 1229, D1349, D1414, D1415, D1566, F913 4'-12" 08/16/06 EI-07 Mechanical Joint Fittings SIP Industries Scram or Mechanical Joint Fittings AWWA CI53 4" to 24" 11/07/t6 33-1I-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands Star Pi Products, Inc. PVC Stargrip Series 4000 ASTM A536 AWWA Cl 11 11/07/16 33-11-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands Star Pie Products, Inc. DIP Stargrip Series 3000 ASTM A536 AW WA CI I I 03/19/18 3341-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands SIP Industries(Scramore) EZ Grip Joint Restraint (EZD) Black For DIP ASTMA536AWWACI1l 3"-48" 03/19/19 33-11-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands SIP lodustries(Scrampore) EZ Grip Joint Restraint (EZD) Red for C900 DR 14 PVC Pipe ASTM A536 AWWA C11 I V-12" 03/19/IS 33-11-11 Mechanical Joint Retainer Glands Sff Imfi stri Scram pore) EZ Grip Joint Restraint (EZD) Red for C900 DR18 PVC Pipe ASTM A536 AWWA C 111 16"-24" " From Original Standard Products List FORT WORTH. CITY OF FORT WORTH WATER DEPARTMENT STANDARD PRODUCT LIST Updated: 6-18-25 Approval Spec No. Classsification Manufacturer Model No. National Spec Size Water - PiyesNalves & Fittings/Resilient Seated Gate Valve* 33-12-20 (05/13/151 Resilient Wedged Gate Valve w/no Gears American Flow Control Series 2500 Drawing # 94-20247 16" 12/13/02 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American Flow Control Series 2530 and Series 2536 AWWA C5I5 30" and 36" 08/31/99 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American Flow Control Series 2520 &2524.(SO 94-20255) AWWA C515 20" and 24" 05/18/99 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American Flow Control Series 2516 (SO 94-20247) AWWA C515 I6" 10/24/00 E1-26 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American Flow Control Series 2500 (Ductile Iron) AWWA C515 4" to 12" 08/05/04 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American Flow Control 42" and 48" AFC 2500 AWWA C515 42" and 48" 05/23/91 EI-26 Resilieat Wedge Gate Valve American AVK Curnpany American AVKResilient Beaded GV AWWA C509 4" to. 12" 01/24/02 E1-26 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve American AVK Company 20" and smaller E1-26 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Kennedy 4" - 12" E1-26 Resilient Seated Gate Valve M&H 4" - 12" EI-26 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Mueller Co. 4" - 12" 11/08/99 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Mueller Co. Series A2361 (SO 6647) AWWA C515 I6" 01/23/03 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Mueller Co. Series A2360 for I8"-24" (SD 6709) AWWA C515 24" and smaller 05/13/05 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Mueller Co. Mueller 30" & 36". C-515 AWWA C515 30" and 36" 01/31/06 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Mueller Co. Mueller 42" & 48", C-515 AWWA C515 42" and 48" 01/28/89 E1-26 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Clow Valve Co. AWWA C509 4" - 12" 10/04/94 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Clow Valve Co. 16" RS GV SD D-20995) AWWA C515 16" 11/08/99 E1-26 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Clow Valve Co. Clow RW Valve (SO D-21652) AWWA C515 24" and smallor 11/29/04 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Clow Valve Co. Clow 30" & 36" C-515 AWWA C515 30" and 36" (Note 3) 11/30/12 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve Clow Valve Co. Clow Valve Model 2638 AWWA C515 24" to 48" (Note 3) 05/08/91 EI-26 Resilient Seated Gate Valve Stockham Valves & Fittings AWWA C 509, ANSI 420-stem, 4" - 12" E I-26 Resilient Seated Gate Valve U.S. Pipe and FoundryCo. Metroseal 250, r m reentsSPL #74 3" to. 16" 10/26/16 33-12-ZO Resilient Seated Gate Valve EJ (East Jordan Iran Works.) EJ 14—Master Gate Valve & Boxes 08/24/18 Mateo Gate Valve Mateo-Norea 225 MR AWWA/ANSICtl5/An21.15 4" to 16" Water - PipesNalves & Fittings/Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve 33-12-21 (07/10/141 EI-30 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve HenryPratt Co. AWWA C-504 24" EI-30 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve Mueller Co. AWWA C-504 24"and smaller 1/11/99 E1-30 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve Deurik Valves Co. AWWA C-504 24" and lacer 06/12/03 EI-30 Vahnatic American Butterfly Valve Valmatic Valve and Manufacturing Corp. Valmatie American Butterfly Valve. AWWA C-504 Up to 84" diameter 04/06/07 EI-30 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve M&H Valve M&H Style 4500 & 1450 AWWA C-504 24" to 48" 03/19/18 33 12 21 Rubber Scaled Butterfly Valve G. A. Industries (Golden Anderson) AWWA C504 Buttertly Valve AWWA C-504 30"-54" 09/03/24 33 1221 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valve American AVK Counparty AWWA C504 Butterfly Valve Class 250B AWWA C-504 24" - 48" Water - Polyethylene Encasement 33-11-10 (01/08/13) 05/12/05 EI-13 Pot ethylene Encasment Flessol Packaging Fulton Enterprises AW WA C105 8 mil LLD 05/12/05 E1-13 Polyethylene Encasment Mountain States Plastics (MSP) and AEP Ind. Standard Hardware AWWA C105 8 mil LLD 05/12/05 EI-13 Polyethylenem Encasent AEP Industries Bollstrung by Cowtown Bolt & Gasket AWWA C105 8 mil LLD 09/06/19 33-11-11 Polyethylene Encasment Northtown Products Inc. PE Encasement for DIP AW WA C105 8 mil LLD Water - Sampling Station 03/07/23 33 1250 Water Sam En Station Ku ferle Foundry Company Eclipse, Number 88, 12-inch Depth of Buy As shown in spec. 33 12 50 09/021124 3342 50 W-eF 9—pli.8 Statiea �.re. MMAR9901- This product removed Water - Automatic Flusher 10/21/20 Automated Flushing System Mueller H droguard HG6-A-IN-2-BRN-LPRR(Portable) HG2-A-IN-2-PVC-0I8-LPLG(Pcrmanont) 04/09/21 Automated Flushing System Kupferle Foundry Company Eclipse#9800wc 04/09/21 Automated Flushing System Kupferle Foundry Company Eclipse #9700 (Portable) The Fort Worth Water Department's Standard Products List has been developed to minimize the submittal review ofproducts which meet the Fort Worth Water Department's Standard Specifications during utility construction projects. Wben Technical Specifications for specific products, are included as part of the Construction Contract Documents, the requirements of the Technical Specification will override the Fort Worth Water Department's Standard Specifications and the Fort Worth Water Department's Standard Products List and approval of the specific products will be based on the requirements of the Technical Specification whether or not the specific product meets the Fort Worth Water Department's Standard Specifications or is on the Fort Worth Water Yellow Highlight indicates recent changes " From Original Standard Products List